Konica 7145 Service Manual Safety
Minolta-7145-Service-Manual-790210 minolta-7145-service-manual-790210
7235 - Service Manual 7145-7222-7228-7235_SM Free User Guide for Konica Minolta Camera, Manual - page1
2015-08-19
: Konica Konica-7145-Service-Manual-788160 konica-7145-service-manual-788160 konica pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 448
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
SERVICE MANUAL
Models
7145/7222/7228/7235
APRIL 2004
CSM-7145/7222/7228/7235
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC.
7145/7222/7228/7235
SERVICE MANUAL
APRIL 2004
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of the possible hazards to an inexperienced
person servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of
damage to the equipment, Konica Minolta Business
Solutions U.S.A., Inc. strongly recommends that all
servicing be performed by Konica Minolta-trained service technicians only.
Changes may have been made to this equipment to
improve its performance after this service manual was
printed. Accordingly, Konica Minolta Business Solutions
U.S.A., Inc., makes no representations or warranties,
either expressed or implied, that the information contained in this service manual is complete or accurate. It
is understood that the user of this manual must assume
all risks or personal injury and/or damage to the equipment while servicing the equipment for which this service manual is intended.
Corporate Publications Department
© 2004, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A. , INC.
All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
I OUTLINE
CONTENTS
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
List of major differences between the 7145, 7235, 7228 and 7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
List of options corresponding to the 7145/7235/7228/7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE OF SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
A.
Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
B.
C.
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Copy paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
D.
E.
Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
F.
G.
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
4. DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
4.1
4.2
Drum drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Cleaning/Developer agitation drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
4.3
4.4
Fixing/Paper exit section/IT-101/RU-101 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Developing drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
4.5
Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
4.5.1
4.5.2
Drive from paper feed motor to loop clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Tray 1 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
4.5.3
4.5.4
Tray 2 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Bypass feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
4.5.5 Registration clutch drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
4.6 ADU drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
4.7
4.8
Scanner drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Toner supply drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
i
2
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
I
II UNIT EXPLANATION
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
CONTENTS
II
UNIT EXPLANATION
I OUTLINE
1. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1
1.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
1.2.1
Initial operation when power is turned on and shading correction reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.2.2
Original reading mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.2.3
Original read control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
1.2.4
APS control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
1.2.5
AE control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
1.2.6
Image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2. WRITE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.1 Image writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.2 Write control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
3. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.1
3.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
3.2.1 Image formation timing (when copying two sheets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
4. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
4.1
4.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
4.2.1
4.2.2
Developing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Control of toner density in the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
5. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
5.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
5.2.1 Toner supply control when the toner level in the toner supply section gets reduced . . . . . 2-18
5.2.2 Toner supply control when toner density in the developing unit gets reduced . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
6. PAPER FEED UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
6.1
6.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
6.2.1
6.2.2
Tray up drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Paper feed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
6.2.3
6.2.4
Remaining paper detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Paper size detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
7. FIXING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
7.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
7.2.1 Fixing temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
7.2.2 Cleaning web control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
8. ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
8.1
8.2
2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
8.2.1
8.2.2
Switching control of the paper exit/ADU conveyance path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
ADU conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
8.2.3
Paper reverse control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
ii
CONTENTS
9. INTERFACE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
10.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
11. OTHER CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
11.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
I OUTLINE
9.1
10. NETWORK SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
11.2 Components operated when the power switch is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
11.2.1 Components operated when the SW1 (Main power switch) is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
11.3.2 Fan operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
11.4 Operation unit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
11.4.1 Composition of operation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
11.5 Counter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
11.5.1 Counter composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
11.5.2 Counter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERNAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 Replacing the ozone filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Replacing the filter cover assembly and suction filter/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
2. DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
2.1
2.2
Removing and reinstalling the motor units (main, fixing, feed, developing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Replacing the registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2.3
2.4
Replacing the loop clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Removing the ribbon cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
2.5 Reinstalling the ribbon cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1
3.2
Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Adjusting the angle of the operation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3
3.4
Removing the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Removing the platen glass/slit glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.5
3.6
Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Replacing the exposure lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.7
3.8
Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Removing the optics wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.9 Installing the optics wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
4. WRITE UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
4.1 Removing and reinstalling the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
5. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
5.1
5.2
Removing and reinstalling the drum unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Removing and reinstalling the charging corona unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
5.3
5.4
Removing and reinstalling the charge control plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Replacing the charging wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
5.5
5.6
Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Removing and reinstalling the separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
iii
2
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
11.3.1 Composition of the cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
II UNIT EXPLANATION
11.2.2 Components operated when the SW2 (Sub power switch) is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
11.3 Fan control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
CONTENTS
5.7
Removing and reinstalling the transfer and separation corona unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
5.8
Replacing the transfer and separation wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
I OUTLINE
6. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
6.1
Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
6.2
6.3
Removing and reinstalling the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Replacing the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
II UNIT EXPLANATION
7. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
7.1
Removing and reinstalling the toner bottle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
7.2
Removing and reinstalling the toner supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
7.3
Removing and reinstalling the cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
8. PAPER FEED UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
8.1
Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
8.2
8.3
Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Replacing the paper feed rubber and the feed rubber (tray 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
8.4
Replacing the double feed prevention rubber (tray 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
8.5
8.6
Replacing the paper feed rubber and the feed rubber (tray 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Replacing the double feed prevention rubber (tray 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8.7 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
9. FIXING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
2
9.1
9.2
Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Replacing the fixing heater lamps/1, /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
9.3
9.4
Removing and reinstalling the fixing claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Replacing the fixing web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
9.5
Removing and reinstalling the fixing heat roller, fixing pressure roller,
heat insulating sleeve/A, /B, fixing idling gear/B, fixing bearing/U, /L,
fixing heater lamp/1, /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
9.6
9.7
Removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Removing and reinstalling the Fuse mounting plate assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
iv
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND
CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
CAUTION” is defined
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.
:Prohibition when using the copier.
:Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1]
MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical
aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For
this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
1
S-2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
[2]
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of
injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order
to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1.Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet
• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
kw
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
b.
If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-3
1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
WARNING: Ground Lead
• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING: Ground Lead
• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
2.Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place
• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling
• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10°C to 30°C
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette
smoke, or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
CAUTION: Ventilation
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from
the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
2
S-6
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.
(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.
Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
[3]
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in “Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures”.
[4]
CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
S-9
1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY CIRCUITS
[2]
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits
to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious acci-
overheating prevention circuit
dents.
[1]
Overall protection circuit
[2]
L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2) overheat-
L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2)
DCPS
TS
RL1
ing prevention circuit
them in order to prevent servicing errors that may
L3
TH1
impair their functions.
[1]
RL1
TH2
the service engineer with a renewed awareness of
L2
CB
These safety circuits are described below to provide
Control
section
Overall protection circuit
AC driver
section
FCB
CBR1
1.
The output voltage from TH1, TH2 (fixing tem-
DCPS
perature sensor/1, /2) is read by the CPU. If
this voltage is abnormal, L2 (fixing heater
CBR2
1.
Protection by software
lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) and RL1
(main relay) are turned OFF.
Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit
breaker/1, /2)
CAUTION:
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta-
under any circumstances.
neously when an excessive current flows due
to a short in the AC line.
CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not
be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2.
Protection by the hardware circuit
The output voltages from TH1, TH2 (fixing temperature sensor/1, /2) are compared with the
abnormality judgment reference value in the
comparator circuit. If the output voltage from
TH1 or TH2 exceeds the reference value, L2
(fixing heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2)
and RL1 (main relay) are turned OFF in hardware means.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the TH1, TH2 face
contacting the roller, and replace TH2 if
any abnormality is detected.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
under any circumstances.
3.
Protection by TS (thermostat)
When the fixing heat roller exceeds the specified value, TSs (thermostats) are turned OFF,
thus interrupting the power to L2 (fixing heater
lamp/1), and L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor
in place of TS1 and TS2.
2
S-12
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE
Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
[1]
Main body
1.
Right side
<7145>
CAUTION
The fixing unit is very hot.
To avoid getting burned
DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
This area generates
high voltage.
If touched, electrical
shock may occur.
DO NOT TOUCH!
(Inside of the main
body front door)
CAUTION
(Inside of the main
body right side door)
The roller shaft on the inside
of the cover is very hot.
To avoid getting burned DO
NOT TOUCH.
If the cover comes off, return
it to its original position.
7322sf001e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf002e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
2
S-14
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2.
Front side
<7145>
7322sf003e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-15
2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf004e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
2
S-16
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
3.
Rear/Left side (7235/7228/7222 only)
7322sf005e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-17
2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
4.
Scanner section
<7145>
7322sf006
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
2
S-18
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf007e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-19
2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
[2]
FS-113
CAUTION
This area is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
(Inside of the Finisher)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on the top
of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides
of the printed sheets when removing them, and
DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets
while the primary (main) tray goes up.
[3]
FS-113 Finisher
7322sf009
FS-114
FS-114 Finisher
7322sf010
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
2
S-20
List of major differences between the 7145, 7235, 7228 and 7222
List of major differences between the 7145, 7235, 7228 and 7222
Classification
Warmup time
First copy out time
(8.5x11)
Continuous copy
speed (8.5x11)
7145
7235
7228
Less than
Less than
Less than
3.8 sec.
4.3 sec.
45 sheets/min.
35 sheets/min.
Standard
Specifications
22 sheets/min.
Standard
Paper exit tray
Machine dimensions
(with DF and DB)
Optional
Standard
23.2in (W)
x
23.4in (D)
x
23.4in (W) x 25.8in (D) x 44.6in (H)
42.6in (H)
Maintenance
Once every
Toner
Exclusively
for 7145
Materials
Exclusively
for 7145
Flywheel
Once every 100,000 copies
120,000 copies
Developer
Drum
Drive section
28 sheets/min.
Optional
ADU
Scanner
section
Less than 4.9 sec.
320MB
memory
Write section
Reason
Less than 19 sec.
30 sec.
Maximum E-RDH
DF
7222
Exclusively
for 7145
Exclusively for 7235/7228/7222
Exclusively for
7235 (Common
to 7135)
Exclusively for 7228/7222
(Common to 7022/7120/7135)
Exclusively for 7235/7228/7222
f 103mm
f 132mm
Developing sleeve
drive
Developing
motor
Main motor
Vibration insulator
Not provided
Provided
Not provided
Scanner drive board
Provided
Not provided
Laser
2 beams
1 beam
Number of rotations
of polygon motor
Polygon cooling
27,165rpm
Not provided
Change of
specifications
38,976rpm
Provided
1
33,070rpm
Not provided
Change of
CPM
Change of
specifications
2
List of major differences between the 7145, 7235, 7228 and 7222
ADU/Paper
exit section
Fixing
section
Classification
Fixing unit
Decurler roller
7145
7235
Exclusively
Provided
Not provided
ADU drive board
Not provided
Provided
Developing motor
Provided
Not provided
Electrical parts
Control
Fixing cooling fan
7222
Provided
Provided
Internal cooling fan/2
Provided
Polygon cooling fan
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Provided
Not provided
ADU gate solenoid
Provided
ADU sensor
Provided
Timing sensor/U
Provided
Not provided
Timing sensor/L
Provided
Not provided
Overall control
Image control
Exclusively
for 7145
Reason
Exclusively for 7235/7228/7222
for 7145
ADU motor
2
7228
Exclusively
for 7235
2
Exclusively
for 7228
Exclusively
for 7222
Change of
specifications
List of options corresponding to the 7145/7235/7228/7222
List of options corresponding to the 7145/7235/7228/7222
Optional
RADF
Finisher
7145
7235
7228
DF-318
Standard
Not corresponding
DF-320
Not corresponding
Corresponding
Corresponding
Not corresponding
FS-112
FT-107
7222
FS-113
RU-101
FS-114
Corresponding
BK-114
PK-114
SK-114
Paper exit tray
ET-101
Inner tray
IT-101
Desk
DK-110
DB
DB-211
Corresponding
Corresponding*1
Corresponding
Not corresponding
Corresponding
DB-411
LCT
Corresponding
LT-203
ADU
AD-307
Post script
PS-344
Corresponding
Standard
Not corresponding
PS-346
Not corresponding
Corresponding
Printer
controller
IP-432
Corresponding
Not corresponding
IP-424
Not corresponding
Corresponding
FAX controll
board
FK-102 Type-A
Corresponding
Not corresponding
FK-103
Not corresponding
Corresponding
2 lines
FL-102
Corresponding
Not corresponding
expansion kit
FL-103
Not corresponding
Corresponding
Hard disk
HD-103 Type-A
Total counter
Corresponding
Standard
Corresponding
Key counter
*1
Corresponding
A paper exit tray is provided as standard equipment that is different from ET-101. When ET-101 is provided, it is integrated into the main body as seen from the point of design.
3
2
List of options corresponding to the 7145/7235/7228/7222
Blank Page
4
OUTLINE OF SYSTEM
OUTLINE
I OUTLINE
I
1. OUTLINE OF SYSTEM
[16]
[15] [14]
[19]
[10]
[13]
[12]
[1]
[18]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[17]
[2]
7322ma1001
1-1
2
I OUTLINE
OUTLINE OF SYSTEM
RADF (DF-318: 7145 provided as a standard equipment)
[1]
[2]
Main body
LCT (LT-203)
[10]
[3]
LCT DB (DB-411)
[11]
Paper exit tray (ET-101)*1
[4]
2-Tray DB (DB-211)
[12]
Finisher (FS-114)
[5]
Conveyance unit (RU-101)
[13]
Additional tray (BK-114)
[6]
Finisher (FS-113)
[14]
Punch kit (PK-114)
[7]
Inner tray (IT-101)
[15]
Crease unit (included in SK-114)
[8]
Finisher tray (FT-107: FS-112)
[16]
Saddle unit (SK-114)
[9]
Finisher (FS-112: 7145 only)
[17]
Desk (DK-110: 7235/7228/7222 only)
[18]
ADU (provided as a standard equipment)
[19]
Platen cover (CV-109: 7235/7228/7222 only)
*1
(DF-320: 7235/7228/7222)
As a standard equipment, the 7235/7228/7222 are provided with a paper exit tray that is different from
the one with which the ET-101 is equipped.
[7]
[6] [5]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[4]
[3]
7145ma1020
[1]
Postscript (PS-344: 7145)
[6]
Hard disk (HD-103 Type-A)
(PS-346: 7235/7228/7222)
Printer controller (IP-432: 7145)
[7]
[2]
Total counter
(7145 provided as standard equipment)
[3]
2 line expansion kit (shipments only to the
(IP-424: 7235/7228/7222)
(In the case of the 7235/7228/7222, shipments only to the United States are pro-
United States and
Oceania)
[8]
vided with the total counter.)
Key counter
(FL-102:FK-102 Type-A)
[9]
Expansion memory for the printer controller
(FL-103:FK-103)
2
(Not displayed here. For details, see the
Service Manual of the controller.)
[4]
Fax control board(FK-102 Type-A: 7145)
(FK-103: 7235/7228/7222)
[5]
E-RDH expansion memory (MU-404: 64MB/MU-405: 128MB)
1-2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
Semi-console type (7145)
Copying method:
Indirect electrostatic method
Original table:
Fixed
Original alignment:
Photosensitive material:
Left rear standard
OPC
I OUTLINE
A. Type
Desk-top type (7235/7228/7222)
Sensitizing method:
Laser writing
Paper feed trays:
Two trays (500 sheets x 2, 80g/m2 or 20lbs)
Multisheet bypass tray (50 sheets, 80g/m2)
DB-211 (500 sheets x 2, 80g/m2 or 20lbs) *1
DB-411 (1500 sheets, 80g/m2 or 20lbs) *1
LT-203 (2000 sheets, 80g/m2 or 20lbs) *1
*1
Optional
B. Functions
Original:
Sheet, book, solid object (Thickness: up to 1.2in. Weight: up to 15lbs)
Maximum original size:
Copy size (for metric area):
A3, or 11 x 17
Tray 1:
Tray 2:
B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, F4
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, F4
Bypass tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, 8.5 x 11R (7145 only),
8.5 x 11 (except the 7145), F4 (except the 7145)
ADU:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14, 5.5
x 8.5R, F4
Copy size (for inch area):
Tray 1:
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, F4, B4R (7145 only), A4, A4R,
Tray 2:
B5, A5R
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, F4, A3, A4, A4R, A5R
Bypass tray:
ADU:
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, A4
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, A3, B4 (7145 only), A4,
A4R, B5, A5R, F4
Magnification:
Fixed magnification (for metric area):
x 1.00, x 1.41, x 1.22, x 1.15, x 0.86, x 0.82, x 0.71
Fixed magnification (for inch area):
x 1.00, x 2.00, x 1.55, x 1.29, x 0.77, x 0.65, x 0.50
Special ratio:
Zoom magnification:
Three kinds
x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at 1% step)
Vertical magnification:
Horizontal magnification:
x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at 1% step)
x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at 1% step)
1-3
2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Warm-up time:
Less than 30 sec. (7145)
(at temperature of 68°F,
Less than 19 sec. (7235/7228/7222)
I OUTLINE
at rated voltage)
First copy out time:
Less than 3.8 sec. (7145)
Less than 4.3 sec. (7235)
Less than 4.9 sec. (7228/7222)
* platen mode, manual density, life size, tray 1, paper exit with face down,
A4 or 8.5 x 11
Continuous copy speed:
45 copies/min. (7145)
(A4 or 8.5 x 11,
35 copies/min. (7235)
in memory copy)
28 copies/min. (7228)
22 copies/min. (7222)
Continuous copy count:
No. of sheets loadable
on the paper exit tray:
Copy density selection:
Resolution:
Scan:
Write:
ERDH memory *1:
Interface section:
Network section:
Up to 999
Up to 100 (8.5x11)
AE, manual (9 steps), arbitrary density (2 modes)
600 dpi x 600 dpi
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Standard 64MB, Maximum 320MB
Serial port (USB TypeB), Serial port (RS-232C), RJ45 Ethernet connector,
Parallel port (IEEE1284 (Compatible, Nible, ECP))
Ethernet frame type:
IEEE 802.3/802.3/Ethernet II/
Connecting type:
Corresponding protocol:
Corresponding OS:
IEEE 802.3 SNAP
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX
TCP/IP (BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP,
SNMP, HTTP, SMTP, POP3, FTP, IPP),
IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (EtherTalk),
Novell NetWare (3.x, 4.x, 5.x), Microsoft
Windows 95/98/Me, Microsoft Windows
NT4.0/2000/XP, Mac OS8.x and later,
Mac OS10.2.5
Automatic discrimination
Multi-protocol:
Corresponding printing method: Peer-to-Peer (TCP/IP), LPD/LPR (TCP/
IP), PServer (IPX/SPX), RPrinter (IPX,
*1
General purpose utility:
SPX), AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
Web
browser
(Internet
Status indicator LED:
Netscape Navigator)
Green LED and orange LED, one for
Explorer,
each
Since the standard 64MB memory is packaged on the board, it is not possible to replace it with a new
one.
Only one slot is provided for expansion. It can be installed with MU-404 (64MB), MU-405 (128MB), or
256MB (commercially available).
For 256MB (commercially available), be sure to use those of make and model No. specified separately.
2
1-4
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Original:
Konica standard chart
Density:
Manual 5
Mode:
Character/photograph
Memory capacity:
Job:
64MB (provided only as standard)
Job in mode with page memory not used
C. Copy Paper
Plain paper:
60g/m2 or 17lbs to 105g/m2 or 28lbs, high-quality paper
Special paper *1
Label paper, OHP film, blueprint-master paper, 50g/m2 or 13lbs to 59g/m2
or 16lbs high-quality paper (thin), 106g/m2 or 28lbs to 130g/m2 or 35lbs
high-quality paper (thick1), 131g/m2 or 35lbs to 160g/m2 or 43lbs highquality paper (thick2 *2)
*1
With bypass feed method, paper should be fed one sheet at a time. Double sided copy not allowed.
*2
Only bypass feed.
D. Machine Data
Power source:
230VAC –14% to 10.6% 50Hz/60Hz
120VAC –14% to 6% 60Hz
Power consumption:
Weight:
Maximum 1500W or less (fully optional)
Approximately 183lbs (with DF provided)
Dimensions:
7145: 23.2in (W) x 23.4in (D) x 42.6in (H) (with DF + DB)
7235/7228/7222: 23.4in (W) x 25.8in (D) x 44.6in (H) (with DF + DB)
E. Maintenance
Maintenance:
Once every 120,000 copies (7145)
Once every 100,000 copies (7235/7228/7222)
F. Consumables
Developer:
Exclusively for 7145
Toner:
Exclusively for 7235/7228/7222
Exclusively for 7145
Exclusively for 7235 (Common to 7135)
Exclusively for 7228/7222 (Common to 7022/7120/7130)
Drum:
Exclusively for 7145 (φ 60)
Exclusively for 7235/7228/7222 (φ 60)
1-5
2
I OUTLINE
Number of originals to be stored:More than 140 sheets under the following conditions:
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
I OUTLINE
G. Operating Environment
Temperature:
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
Humidity:
10% RH to 80% RH
Note:
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1-6
CENTER CROSS SECTION
[18]
[19]
I OUTLINE
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION
[20]
[17]
[16]
[1]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[4]
[14]
[5]
[6]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[9]
7322ma1002
[1]
Fixing unit
[10]
DB
[2]
[3]
Drum unit
Separation corona unit
[11]
[12]
Developing unit
Tray 2
[4]
Transfer corona unit
[13]
Tray 1
[5]
[6]
ADU unit
Bypass tray
[7]
Paper feed path for making a double-sided
copy (DB unprovided)
[16]
[17]
Toner bottle
Scanner unit
[8]
Paper feed path for making a double-sided
copy (DB provided)
[18]
[19]
V-mirror unit
Exposure unit
[9]
DB paper feed path
[20]
CCD unit
[14] Charging corona unit
[15] Cleaning/toner recycling unit
1-7
2
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
I OUTLINE
4. DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
4.1
Drum Drive
[1]
[2]
[1]
4.2
M1 (Main motor)
[2]
Drum drive shaft
Cleaning/Developer Agitation Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
M1 (Main motor)
[2]
Cleaning/toner recycling unit drive
[3]
1-8
Developer agitation drive
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Fixing/Paper Exit Section/IT-101/RU-101 Drive
[5]
[4]
I OUTLINE
4.3
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
IT-101
M11 (Fixing motor)
[3]
Fixing unit drive
4.4
[4]
[5]
Paper exit drive
Drive coupling for IT-101 and RU-101
Developing Drive
In the case of the 7145
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Developing sleeve
[3]
M3 (Developing motor)
[2]
Developing unit
[4]
Drum drive shaft
1-9
2
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
I OUTLINE
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
7322ma1003
[1]
M1 (Main motor)
[3]
Developing unit
[2]
Developing sleeve
[4]
Drum drive shaft
4.5
4.5.1
Paper Feed Drive
Drive from paper feed motor to loop clutch
[1]
[2]
[1]
2
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[2]
1-10
M9 (Paper feed motor)
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Tray 1 drive
[4]
[5]
I OUTLINE
4.5.2
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid/U)
[4]
Driven when SD1
[2]
[3]
Conveyance roller
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[5]
(1st paper feed solenoid/U) is on.
Feed roller
4.5.3
Tray 2 drive
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[2]
[3]
Feed roller
SD2 (1st paper feed solenoid/L)
1-11
[4]
Driven when SD2
[5]
(1st paper feed solenoid/L) is on.
Conveyance roller
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Bypass feed drive
I OUTLINE
4.5.4
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[3]
SD3 (Bypass solenoid)
[2]
Conveyance roller
[4]
[5]
Driven when SD3 (Bypass solenoid) is on.
Paper feed roller
[2]
MC1 (Registration clutch)
4.5.5
Registration clutch drive
[2]
[1]
[1]
M9 (Paper feed motor)
1-12
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ADU Drive
[9]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
M1 (Main motor)
Timing belt
[5]
[6]
ADU roller
ADU conveyance roller/2
[3]
[4]
M9 (Paper feed motor)
M6 (ADU motor)
[7]
[8]
Decurler roller
ADU conveyance roller/1
[9]
M11 (Fixing motor)
1-13
I OUTLINE
4.6
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
I OUTLINE
4.7
Scanner Drive
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Optical wire/R
Optical wire/F
[3]
V-mirror unit
[4]
[5]
1-14
Exposure unit
M2 (Scanner motor)
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Toner Supply Drive
I OUTLINE
4.8
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Toner agitation plate
[4]
M4 (Toner supply motor 1)
[2]
[3]
Toner conveyance screw
SD9 (Toner solenoid)
[5]
M10 (Toner supply motor 2)
1-15
I OUTLINE
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Blank page
1-16
SCANNER SECTION
II
UNIT EXPLANATION
1. SCANNER SECTION
1.1
Composition
7235/7228/7222
[8]
[9] [10]
[11]
[12]
CB
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[7]
7145
SCDB
CB
SCB
[6]
[5]
[4]
Symbol
Name
[1]
INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter)
[3]
[2]
[1]
7322ma2001e
Function or method
L1 (Exposure lamp) turn on
[2]
[3]
PS17 (APS sensor)
ADB (A/D converter board)
Detection of original size in the direction of sub-scanning
Digital conversion of analog signal
[4]
[5]
CCD unit
Exposure unit
Photoelectric conversion of read image (600dpi)
Image reading
Light source slit exposure
Scan speed
• Forward: 230mm/sec. (in 1:1 magnification)
• Backward: 383mm/sec.
[6]
Optical wire
Transmission of driving force from M2 to the exposure unit and
the V-mirror unit (front and rear)
[7]
[8]
V-mirror unit
PS14 (Scanner HP sensor)
Reflection of reading light (2nd and 3rd mirrors)
Exposure unit HP detection
[9]
L1 (Exposure lamp)
Light source for reading image,
Xenon lamp
[10]
L1INVB (Power supply board
for exposure lamp)
Relay board for INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter) and L1 (Exposure lamp)
[11]
M2 (Scanner motor)
Driving of the optical wire used to move the exposure unit and
the V-mirror unit
[12]
PS15 (APS timing sensor)
Three-phase step motor
RADF open/close detection
2-1
2
SCANNER SECTION
1.2
1.2.1
Operation
Initial operation when power is turned on and shading correction reading
When the SW2 (Sub power switch) comes on, the exposure unit starts a home position search. At this
time, the exposure unit uses the white reference plate attached on the back side of the original pressing
board for shading correction. However, two places on the white reference plate are read for correction.
The search procedure differs depending on whether the PS14 (Scanner HP sensor) is on or off while the
II UNIT EXPLANATION
SW2 is on.
A. Home position search when the PS14 is turned on
[4] [3] [2]
[1]
7322ma2015
[1]
Exposure unit standby position
[3]
Shading correction position 1
[2]
PS14
[4]
Shading correction position 2
B. Home position search when PS14 is turned off
[4] [3] [2]
[1]
7322ma2016
[1]
Exposure unit standby position
[3]
Shading correction position 1
[2]
PS14
[4]
Shading correction position 2
1.2.2
Original reading mode
The following two modes are available for original reading; platen mode and DF mode. In platen mode, the
exposure unit moves as necessary to scan the original for reading. In DF mode, the RADF side moves the
original while the exposure unit stays fixed in a specified position (DF reading position).
2
2-2
SCANNER SECTION
A. Exposure unit movement in platen mode
In platen mode, the scan sequence depends on the copy density selection (either AE or manual).
(1) In manual density copy:
[5]
[4] [3] [2] [6]
[1]
[1]
Exposure unit standby position
[2]
[3]
PS14
Shading correction position 1
[4]
Shading correction position 2
[5]
Position at which the approach run of the
[6]
exposure unit is started
Position at which the reading of an image
II UNIT EXPLANATION
7322ma2017
is started
Note:
• When the tray 1 is selected manually, but not in APS, the shading operation is not executed.
(2) In AE copy:
[6]
[5] [4] [3] [7]
[1]
[2]
7322ma2018
[1]
Exposure unit standby position
[5]
Shading correction position 2
[2]
[3]
AE scanning range
PS14
[6]
Position at which the approach run of the
exposure unit is started
[4]
Shading correction position 1
[7]
Position at which the reading of an image
is started
B. Exposure unit movement in DF mode
[5]
[4] [3] [2]
[1]
7322ma2019
[1]
Exposure unit standby position
[4]
Shading correction position 2
[2]
[3]
PS14
Shading correction position 1
[5]
DF reading position
2-3
2
SCANNER SECTION
1.2.3
Original read control
The light from the exposure lamp reflects back from the original, passes through a lens, and hits the CCD
sensor. The CCD sensor generates an electric signal (analog signal) corresponding to the light intensity.
Then, according to the instruction from the SCB (System control board), the ADB (A/D conversion board)
converts this signal into a digital signal.
A. Original read timing
II UNIT EXPLANATION
(1) Platen mode, when the manual density is being set
[2]
M2 (Scanner motor)
[5]
F
R
PS14 (Scanner HP sensor)
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
START button (ON)
[4]
Position at which reading of the original starts
[2]
Exposure lamp (forward)
[5]
Exposure scanning (backward)
[3]
Position to which the exposure unit starts
(2) Platen mode, when the AE density is being set
[2]
M2 (Scanner motor)
[5]
[6]
[8]
F
R
PS14 (Scanner HP sensor)
[1] [3]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[1]
START button (ON)
[5]
AE scanning (backward)
[2]
[3]
AE scanning (forward)
Position to which the exposure unit starts
[6]
[7]
Exposure lamp (forward)
Position at which reading of the original
[4]
Position at which reading of the AE density
started
[8]
starts
Exposure scanning (backward)
2-4
SCANNER SECTION
B. Original read timing (DF mode) *1
[2]
M2 (Scanner motor)
[4]
F
R
PS14 (Scanner HP sensor)
R 250mm/s
(Original feed motor)
II UNIT EXPLANATION
M301
F 230mm/s
460mm/s
F 230mm/s
M302
(Original conveyance motor)
460mm/s
[3]
PS308 (Original registration sensor)
[5]
[1]
[6]
[1]
START button (ON)
[4]
Exposure conveyance
[2]
DF reading position
[5]
Position at which reading of the original starts.
[3]
Position to which the original has been
[6]
Starting point from the DF reading position
conveyed in the specified distance.
*1
to the home position (exposure unit).
In the DF mode, the operation when the manual density setting and the AE density setting is the same.
1.2.4
APS control
The APS control is carried out at close detection of the RADF, and controlled by the CB (Main body control
board), based on signals from the PS17 (APS sensor) and the CCD sensor. (For APS control by the
RADF, see DF service manual.)
A. APS operation
The PS17 (APS sensor) detects the original size in the sub scanning direction, while the CCD sensor
detects the original size in the main scanning direction.
B. Relationship between each of the sensors and the original size
Original size
CCD sensor
(Length of detection: mm)
PS17
(ON/OFF)
A3
297
ON
11 x 17
279.4
ON
B4
257
ON
2-5
2
SCANNER SECTION
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Original size
*1
CCD sensor
PS17
(Length of detection: mm)
(ON/OFF)
8.5 x 14 *1
215.9
ON
8.5 x 11R
215.9
Metric system: ON
Inch system: OFF
A4R
210
Metric system: ON
Inch system: OFF
A4
297
OFF
8.5 x 11
279.4
OFF
B5R
257
OFF
A5R
210
OFF
B5
182
OFF
A5
148
OFF
5.5 x 8.5
139.7
OFF
B6
128
OFF
Postcard
102
OFF
8.5 x 14 cannot be distinguished from 8.5 x 11R, and is detected as 8.5 x 11R.
C. APS detection timing
(1) Platen mode (when the RADF is closed)
[1]
[2]
PS17 (APS sensor)
PS15 (APS timing sensor)
PS303 (DF open/close sensor)
[1]
1st original size detection
[2]
2nd original size detection
[2]
START button (ON)
(2) Platen mode (when the RADF is open)
[1]
PS17 (APS sensor)
PS15 (APS timing sensor)
PS303 (DF open/close sensor)
[2]
[1]
Original size detection
2-6
SCANNER SECTION
1.2.5
AE control
During AE scan, the CCD sensor provided on the ADB (A/D conversion board) reads the density level of
the original. The CPU on the SCB (System control board) process the data and, based on the results,
selects the γ correction curve that will best reproduce the original.
A. AE sampling range
(1) While in platen copying
•
Based on the original size recognized in the APS or out-of-original erasure mode, the range excepting
10mm in front and in rear.
Sub-scanning direction
•
The range of 30mm from the leading edge of the original. However, the range excepting L/100mm in
left and right when the length of the original is L mm.
[3]
10 mm
[1]
[2]
10 mm
L mm
100
L mm
100
30 mm
L mm
[1]
Original
[2]
Leading edge of original
[3]
2-7
AE sampling range
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Main scanning direction
SCANNER SECTION
(2) While in DF copying
Main scanning direction
•
Based on the original size recognized in the APS, the range excepting 20mm in front and in rear.
Sub-scanning direction
•
The range between 1.5mm and 2.9mm from the leading edge of the original.
[3]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
20 mm
[1]
[2]
20 mm
1.5 mm
1.4 mm
2.9 mm
[1]
[2]
1.2.6
Original
Leading edge of original
[3]
AE sampling range
Image processing
A. AOC (Automatic offset control)
The analog offset voltage for the CCD sensor output is automatically adjusted by IC on the ADB (A/D
conversion board) so that this level becomes the lower limit for the A/D converter.
B. AGC (Automatic gain control)
The analog amplification for the CCD sensor output is automatically adjusted so that the CCD sensor
output level in the shading white correction becomes the upper limit for the A/D converter.
C. Shading correction
(1) Types of the shading correction
•
•
White correction
Black correction
(2) Execution timing
• At SW2 (Sub power switch) ON
•
At the start of scan job
D. Other image processing
(1) Brightness/density conversion
(2) Text/dot pattern judgement
(3) Filtering
(4) Magnification change processing
(5) Error diffusion processing
(6) Data compression/elongation processing
2-8
WRITE UNIT
2. WRITE UNIT
Composition
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8] [9] [10]
[11]
[1]
SCB
II UNIT EXPLANATION
2.1
CB
7235 only
FM7
[2]
[4]
Symbol
Name
[3]
7322ma2002
Function or method
[1]
[2]
Index lens
INDEX (Index sensor board)
Converging of laser beams reflected from the index mirror
Control of the laser write position in the main scanning direction
[3]
Polygon mirror
Laser beam scanning
Hexahedron, 27,165rpm (7145) /38,976rpm (7235) /
[4]
M5 (Polygon motor)
Polygon mirror drive
DC brushless motor, PLL control
[5]
LDB (LD drive board)
Laser emission drive
1-chip/2-beam system, 15mW 780mm (7145)
[6]
Collimator lens
[7]
[8]
Cylindrical lens 1
Index mirror
Correction of the laser path against error in the angle of the polygon mirror
[9]
[10]
fθ lens
Cylindrical lens 2
Unified laser scanning speed against the laser irradiation surface on the drum
Correction of the laser path against error in the angle of the polygon mirror
Dust-proof glass
Polygon cooling fan
Preventive measure for keeping the interior of the write unit clean
Cooling of the M5 (Polygon motor)
33,071rpm (7228/7222)
[11]
FM7*1
*1
1-chip/1-beam system, 5mW 780mm (Except the 7145)
Making diffused laser beam parallel
Reflection of laser beam upon the INDEX (Index senror board)
7235 only
2-9
2
WRITE UNIT
2.2
Operation
2.2.1
Image writing
The image data from the CCD sensor is converted into digital form by the ADB (A/D conversion board),
and its image processing is then carried out on the SCB (System control board). Based on the processed
image data, the image is written onto the drum by the laser beam output from the LDB (LD drive board).
II UNIT EXPLANATION
2.2.2
Write control
A. Dot diameter adjustment
The sensor on the toner control sensor board detects the patch image density on the drum, and the
LDB (LD drive board) controls the quantity of laser beam so that its output value becomes the specified value.
(1) Timing for execution
a. While in copying
•
b.
Executed once for every 20 copies added up. However, when 20 copies are added up in the middle of
the job, the execution is made at the time of completion of the job.
Anytime other than while in copying
•
•
While in the L inspection
When the drum counter is reset
•
When the sub power is turned on. However, this is subject to the settings 6 and 7 of the DIPSW16 in
the 25 mode.
B. APC (Automatic power control)
The LDB (LD drive board) monitors the laser output value for every one scan, and maintains the laser
beam quantity at the fixed level by driving the laser so that it becomes the output value set for the dot
diameter adjustment.
C. Write timing
The SCB (System control board) uses a laser detection signal from the INDEX (Index sensor board) to
determine the starting point for laser writing for every one scan in the drum shaft direction.
2
2-10
DRUM UNIT
3. DRUM UNIT
3.1
Composition
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[6]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
SD7
M1
CB
HV
[5]
Symbol
[4]
[3]
[2]
Name
[1]
TCSB
Function or method
[1]
TSL
Separation support
(Transfer synchronization lamp) LED
[2]
Transfer corona unit
Transfer of toner from the drum to paper
DC positive corona discharge *1
Wire discharge: Tungsten wire with oxide film (φ 0.06mm)
With manual wire cleaning mechanism provided
[3]
Paper entrance guide plate
Constant current DC output range: 0 to 350 µA
Conveyance guide for paper supplied
High voltage applied to prevent toner adhesion: -500VDC
(constant voltage)
[4]
Drum
Image formation base
OPC drum (φ 60mm)
[5]
Developing unit
Formation of a toner image on the drum
(See “4. Developing unit”.)
[6]
Charging corona unit
Application of electric charge on the drum surface
DC corona discharge (Scotron)
Wire discharge: Gold-plated skin-pass tungsten wire
(φ 0.06mm)
With manual wire cleaning mechanism provided
Constant current DC output range: -320 to -1000 µA
Grid bias: Charging control plate
Constant current DC output range: -450 to -1090V
2-11
2
DRUM UNIT
Symbol
Name
Function or method
[7]
PCL
(Pre-charging exposure lamp)
Erasure of potential on the drum surface
LED
[8]
Cleaning/recycle section
Cleaning and collection of toner on the drum
[9]
Separation claw
Support for the separation of paper from the drum
Separation corona unit
Pressure/release method by SD7 (Separation claw solenoid)
Separation of transferred paper from the drum
(See “5. Toner supply/cleaning/recycle section”.)
[10]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
AC/DC corona discharge *1
Wire discharge: Tungsten wire with oxide film (φ 0.06mm)
With manual wire cleaning mechanism provided
Constant current AC output range: 1.5 to 5.0kV
SD7
Separation claw solenoid
Constant current DC output range: 0 to -300µA
Separation claw pressure/release
M1
Main motor
24VDC drive
Driving of the drum, cleaning/recycling section
HV
High voltage power
DC brushless motor, PLL control
High voltage power supply to the charging corona, transfer
corona, separation corona, paper entrance guide plate and
developing bias
TCSB
Toner control sensor board
Method to increase voltage by inverter from 24VDC
Detection of the patch image density on the drum
Detection of temperature around the drum
*1
Control is made so that an output value becomes a little higher for a thick paper and a little lower for a
thin paper as compared with a plain paper.
Note for the transfer/separation corona
Caution:
• A copy should not be made when the ADU door is open with the interlock forcibly turned on. Otherwise, the contact (spring) of the ADU door develops high voltage and you may get an electric
shock.
2
2-12
DRUM UNIT
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
ADU door
[3]
Transfer/separation corona unit
[2]
Contact
[4]
HV (High voltage unit)
3.2
3.2.1
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[4]
Operation
Image formation timing (when copying two sheets)
A. In the case of the 7145
M1 (Main motor)
M3 (Developing motor)
PS1 (Registration sensor)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
PCL (Pre-charging exposure lamp)
HV (Charging corona)
HV (Developing bias)
HV (Transfer corona)
HV (Separation corona)
HV (Paper entrance guide plate)
TSL (Transfer synchronization lamp)
DS7 (Separation claw solenoid)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
START button (ON)
Varies depending on the type of paper.
[3]
[3]
7322ma2020
Driving of the separation claw to prevent
the trailing edge of paper from getting
stained.
2-13
2
DRUM UNIT
B. In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
M1 (Main motor)
PS1 (Registration sensor)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
PCL (Pre-charging exposure lamp)
II UNIT EXPLANATION
HV (Charging corona)
HV (Developing bias)
HV (Transfer corona)
HV (Separation corona)
HV (Paper entrance guide plate)
TSL (Transfer synchronization lamp)
DS7 (Separation claw solenoid)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
2
[2]
START button (ON)
Varies depending on the type of paper.
[3]
2-14
7322ma2012
Varies depending on the environment in
which it is installed.
DEVELOPING UNIT
4. DEVELOPING UNIT
4.1
Composition
7235/7228/7222
M1
[4]
[5]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
CB
7145
M1
M3
CB
HV
[3]
Symbol
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
7322ma2003e
Name
TDS (Toner density sensor)
Function or method
Detection of toner density in the developing unit
Developing sleeve
L detection method
Coveyance of developing materials by magnetic force to the
drum surface
Two-component developing method (developing materials:
Toner + Carrier)
Developing bias voltage applied
[3]
Developing regulation plate
Constant voltage DC output range: -350 to -830V
Regulation of the spiking amount of developing materials on
the developing sleeve
Regulation plate method
[4]
Agitator screw
[5]
Agitator wheel
Agitation of developer and conveyance of developing materials
to the agitator wheel
Agitator wheel method
Agitation of developer and conveyance of developing materials
to the developing sleeve
4-vane wheel method
M1
M3*1
*1
Main motor
Developing motor
Driving of the agitating turbine, the agitating screw and the
developing sleeve (except the 7145)
DC brushless motor, PLL control
Driving of the developing sleeve
7145 only
2-15
2
DEVELOPING UNIT
4.2
4.2.1
Operation
Developing control
For details of each operation timing of developing, see “3. Drum section”.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
4.2.2
Control of toner density in the developing unit
The TDS (Toner density sensor) uses the L detection method (detection of permeability in developing
materials) to detect the toner density of developing materials. The value thus obtained is compared with
the standard value of the toner density for the L detection adjustment that is recorded in the PCU contained in the CB (Main body control board) to see if toner should be supplied or not. (For details of toner
supply, see “5. Toner supply/cleaning/recycling section”.)
2-16
TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
5. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
5.1
Composition
[4]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
M10
[2]
CB
SD9
M4
Symbol
[1]
Name
Toner collection sheet
[3]
Function or method
Collection of toner separated by the cleaning blade from the drum
surface
Rotating collection method
[2]
Cleaning blade
Drun cleaning
Drum contact/separation method
[3]
Toner conveyance screw
Agitation of toner and conveyance of toner to the developing unit
Screw method
[4]
TLD (Toner level sensor)
Detection of the toner level in the toner supply unit (Detected
when the residual quantity of toner gets to about 30g.)
[5]
[6]
Toner bottle
Piezo element method
Toner supply (bottle capacity: 676g)
Toner supply paddle
Toner bottle rotation method
Conveyance of toner from the toner bottle to the toner supply unit
Fixed method (Since the toner bottle rotates, this serves as the
toner introduction section.)
[7]
Toner agitation plate
Agitation of toner supplied from the toner bottle and the cleaning/
recycle section, and conveyance of the toner to the toner conveyance screw
Screw method
[8]
Collected toner conveyance
screw
Conveyance of toner from the cleaning section to the toner supply
unit
Screw method
2-17
II UNIT EXPLANATION
M1
TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
Symbol
Name
Function or method
[9]
PS5 (Toner bottle sensor)
Detection of the setting of the toner bottle
M1
Main motor
Driving of the toner collection sheet and the collected toner con-
Photosensor
veyance screw
II UNIT EXPLANATION
DC brushless motor, PLL control
M4
Toner supply motor 1
Driving of the toner conveyance screw and the toner agitator plate
Stepping motor
M10
Toner supply motor 2
Toner bottle
Stepping motor
SD9
Toner solenoid
Transmission of driving force from the M4 (Toner supply motor) to
the toner conveyance screw
24VDC drive
5.2
5.2.1
Operation
Toner supply control when the toner level in the toner supply section gets reduced
A. Toner supply operation:
When toner in the toner supply unit is running short, the TLD (Toner level sensor) turns on. This
causes the M10 (Toner supply motor 2) to turn on to rotate the toner bottle and replenish toner to the
toner supply unit. When toner has been supplied, the TLD turns off to monitor the toner level.
B. Operation when toner is not supplied:
When the TLD (Toner level sensor) has been kept turned on for the specified period of time, it is considered that no toner remains in the toner bottle and a message is displayed on the operation LCD.
C. Toner level detection timing:
The TLD (Toner level sensor) detects at all times the toner level during copy operation.
2-18
TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
5.2.2
Toner supply control when toner density in the developing unit gets reduced
A. When power is on:
The TDS (Toner density sensor) detects the toner density in the developing unit the specified period of
time after the SW2 (Sub power switch) is turned on. When the value thus detected at this time is
below the initial density recorded in the CPU contained in the CB (Main body control board), the M4
B. While in copy operation:
While in copy operation, the TDS (Toner density sensor) monitors the toner density. Using the output
voltage of the TDS to turn on the SD9 (Toner solenoid), the M4 (Toner supply motor 1) determines the
time required for toner supply.
TDS output voltage
Time required for toner supply
2.01V or less
2.02 to 2.08V
0 sec.
0.10 sec.
2.09 to 2.16V
2.17 to 2.23V
0.20 sec.
0.30 sec.
2.24 to 2.31V
2.32 to 2.39V
0.40 sec.
0.50 sec.
2.40V or more
0.70 sec.
2-19
II UNIT EXPLANATION
(Toner supply motor 1) and the SD9 (Toner solenoid) are turned on to start to replenish toner up to the
specified level of density.
PAPER FEED UNIT
6. PAPER FEED UNIT
6.1
Composition
[18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25]
[26] [27]
SD1
MC2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[17]
M9
[1]
SD3
[2]
[16]
CB
[15]
[14]
[13]
SD2
PFDB/U
PFDB/L
[12] [11] [10]
Symbol
[9]
[8] [7] [6] [5]
Name
[4] [3]
Function or method
[1]
VRI (Bypass tray paper size
Detection of paper size in the direction of the width of the by-
[2]
sensor VR)
PS20
pass tray
Detection of paper size in the direction of the length of the by-
[3]
(Bypass tray paper size sensor)
PS13
pass tray
Detection of the presence of bypass feed paper
(Bypass tray no paper sensor)
Double feed prevention roller
Double feed prevention of paper, Torque limiter
Conveyance roller
PS22 (Timing sensor/L)
Paper conveyance
Detection of tray 2 paper conveyance condition
[7]
[8]
Double feed prevention roller
M8 (Tray motor/L)
Double feed prevention of paper, Torque limiter
Tray 2 paper liftup plate drive, DC motor
[9]
[10]
Feed roller
PS12 (Tray set sensor/L)
1st paper feed power transmission
Tray 2 detection and remaining paper detection
[11]
[12]
PS10 (Upper limit sensor/L)
PS11 (No paper sensor/L)
Tray 2 paper upper limit detection
Detection of the presence of tray 2 paper
[13]
[14]
Paper feed roller
M7 (Tray motor/U)
Tray 2 paper feed
Tray 1 paper liftup plate drive, DC motor
[4]
[5]
[6]*1
*1
2
7145/7235/7228 only
2-20
PAPER FEED UNIT
Name
Function or method
[15]
PS9 (Tray set sensor/U)
[16]
PS8 (No paper sensor/U)
Detection of the presence of tray 1 paper
[17]
[18]
PS7 (Upper limit sensor/U)
Paper feed roller
Tray 1 paper upper limit detection
Tray 1 paper feed
[19]
Double feed prevention roller
Double feed prevention of paper, Torque limiter
Feed roller
PS21 (Timing sensor/U)
1st paper feed power transmission
Detection of tray 1 paper conveyance condition
[22]
Conveyance roller
Paper conveyance
[23]
PS1 (Registration sensor)
Detection of the paper passage for the Registration roller rota-
[20]
[21]*1
Tray 1 detection and remaining paper detection
tion ON/OFF
[24]
Registration roller
Paper conveyance
[25]
[26]
Conveyance roller
Feed roller
Paper conveyance
Bypass tray paper feed
[27]
M9
Paper feed roller
Paper feed motor
Paper feed
Paper feed system drive, DC brushless PLL control
MC2
SD1
Loop clutch
1st paper feed solenoid/U
1st paper feed power transmission
Tray 1 paper feed power transmission
SD2
SD3
1st paper feed solenoid/L
Bypass solenoid
Tray 2 paper feed power transmission
Bypass tray paper feed power transmission
Paper feed detection board/U
Paper feed detection board/L
Tray 1 paper size detection
Tray 2 paper size detection
PFDB/U
PFDB/L
CB
Main body control board
*1
7145/7235/7228 only
6.2
6.2.1
Overall control
Operation
Tray up drive control
Since the operation is the same for both the tray 1 and the tray 2, the explanation is given of the tray 1.
When the paper feed tray is set, the PS9 (Tray set sensor/U) detects the tray with the M7 (Tray motor/U)
turned on. This causes the paper up/down plate in the tray to go up. When the PS7 (Upper limit sensor/U)
detects the paper upper limit, the M7 is turned off. When the sheets of paper get reduced as they are being
fed through, the PS7 detects no remaining paper. At this time, the M7 is kept turned on until it detects the
paper upper limit again, and paper is raised up to the specified level at all times.
When the tray is removed, its coupling with the drive section is disconnected to let the paper up/down plate
go down by its own weight.
When papar is supplied by the bypass feed method and the SD3 (Bypass solenoid) turns on after the M9
(Paper feed motor) turns on, the bypass plate goes up to raise paper.
2-21
2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Symbol
PAPER FEED UNIT
6.2.2
Paper feed control
The following shows the timing of paper feed by the tray 1. The timing of paper feed is basically the same
for both the tray 2 and the bypass tray, and the actual paper feed in each case starts when the SD2 (1st
paper feed solenoid/L) or the SD3 (Bypass solenoid) turns on respectively.
[1]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
M9 (Paper feed motor)
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid/U)
PS21 (Timing sensor/U)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
PS1 (Registration sensor)
[1]
6.2.3
START button (ON)
Remaining paper detection control
Since the operation is the same for both the tray 1 and the tray 2, the explanation is given of the tray 1
only.
The remaining paper quantity is detected by the PS9 (Tray set sensor/U). As the remaining paper is getting reduced, the actuator provided on the rear side of the tray starts to ratate gradually as shown in the
drawing. The PS9 turns on and off each time it passes through a slit. The remaining paper quantity is
detected by counting the number of ON/OFF's after the installation of the tray.
0 count: Full 1 count: Medium 2 counts: Low
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Rotating direction when the paper up/down
[3]
Slit 1
[2]
plate is going up.
PS9 (Tray set sensor/U)
[4]
[5]
Slit 2
Actuator
2-22
PAPER FEED UNIT
6.2.4
Paper size detection
The paper size in the tray is detected by the CB (Main body control board), using signals sent from the
PFDB/U (Paper feed detection board/U) and the PFDB/L (Paper feed detection board/L).
The paper size in the tray is set by the SW1 of the PFDB/U and the PFDB/L, and the CB detects a switch
signal according to the position of the SW1. The table below shows the relationship between the switch
signal and the paper size.
Paper size
Switch signal
Tray 1
Tray 2
8.5 x 14
11 x 17
B5
B5
B4
B4
A5R
A5R
A4
A4
A4R
A4R
F4
A3
5.5 x 8.5R
F4
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
8.5 x 11R
SIZE A
SIZE B
SIZE C
SIZE D
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
For inch area
Paper size
Switch signal
Tray 1
Tray 2
8.5 x 14
11 x 17
B5R
A5R
B4
A4
A5R
A4R
A4
A3
A4R
F4
F4
5.5 x 8.5R
5.5 x 8.5R
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
8.5 x 11R
8.5 x 14
SIZE A
SIZE B
SIZE C
SIZE D
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
2-23
II UNIT EXPLANATION
For metric area
FIXING UNIT
7. FIXING UNIT
7.1
Composition
[13]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[12]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
DCPS
[4]
FCB
CB
M11
SD4
[5]
[8]
Symbol
Name
[1]
Fixing pressure roller
[2]
Fixing heat roller
[7]
[6]
Function or method
Fixing of toner by pressure
Silicon rubber + PFA tube
Toner fixing by means of heat
Aluminum + PFA coating
Temperature setting:
Idling: 376 to 369°F
While in copy operation - Other than when feeding paper by the
by-pass tray in the single sided copy mode: 381°F
While in copy operation - When feeding paper by the bypass tray
in the single sided copy mode (by selecting the type of paper)
• Thick paper mode 1: 381 + 50°F
• Thick paper mode 2: 381 + 50°F
• Thin paper: 381 - 50°F (Except the 7145)
• Other than the above: 381°F
Copying - 381 - 41°F, when a double sided copy is being made.
Low power mode: 185°F (can be changed in the 25 mode)
2
2-24
FIXING UNIT
Symbol
[3]
Name
Function or method
TH2 (Fixing temperature
Detection of temperature at the edge (front side) of the fixing heating
sensor/2)
roller
Contact type
TH1 (Fixing temperature
Detection of temperature at the center of the fixing heating roller
sensor/1)
Contact type
[5]
Cleaning web
Cleaning of the fixing heat roller
[6]
Fixing cleaning roller
Tension pressure on the cleaning web
Spring pressure
[7]
TS (Thermostat)
Protection of the fixing heat roller against high temperature abnormality (about 428°F)
[4]
[8]
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
Contact type
Heating of the fixing heat roller (Sub)
[9]
L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1)
AC drive
Heating of the fixing heat roller (Main)
[10]
Fixing guide
AC drive
Paper conveyance guide, pressure/release of the fixing pressure
[11]
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
roller
Detection of paper at the fixing unit exit
[12]
Neutralizing brush
Photosensor + actuator
Neutralizing of paper that is exited
Fixing claw
Neutralizing by means of a brush
Separation of paper from the fixing heat roller
Fixing motor
Spring pressure type (6 pcs.)
Driving of the fixing heat roller and the ADU conveyance roller/1
Cleaning web solenoid
DC brushless motor, PLL control
Driving of the cleaning web
Fixing control board
24V drive
Prevention of noise leak in the drive power for L3 (Fixing heater lamp
[13]
M11
SD4
FCB
/2)
220V system only
2-25
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Web wind-up method
FIXING UNIT
7.2
7.2.1
Operation
Fixing temperature control
The CB (Main body control board) uses the TH1 (Fixing temperature sensor/1) and the TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor/2) to detect the temperature of the fixing heating roller, and turns on and off the L2 (Fixing
heater lamp/1) and the L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2) separately through the DCPS (DC power source) to
maintain both the TH1 and the TH2 at the specified temperature.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
A. Warm-up
The CB (Main body control board) turns on the fixing heater lamp circuit within the DCPS (DC power
source) immediately after the SW2 turns on, and keeps the L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1) and L3 the (Fixing heater lamp/2) turned on until the fixing heat roller reaches the specified temperature.
Once warm-up has completed, the CB switches the L2 and the L3 on and off so that the fixing heat
roller can be maintained to the set temperature for idling.
•
•
7.2.2
Warm-up time: 30 seconds or less (at the room temperature of 68°F) (7145)
Warm-up time: 19 seconds or less (at the room temperature of 68°F) (7235/7228/7222)
Cleaning web control
For each output of paper, the cleaning web is let off to be wound up.
The SD4 (Cleaning web solenoid) turns on based on the output of the PS2, causing the cleaning web to be
driven to start a wind-up operation.
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
SD4 (Cleaning web solenoid)
[1]
[1]
2
[2]
START button (ON)
[2]
2-26
100 msec
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
8. ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
8.1
Composition
[9]
[10]
M11
[1]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[2]
SD5
[3]
[4]
CB
M9
[5]
7145
M6
[6]
7235/7228/7222
CB
ADUDB
M6
[7]
[8]
7322ma2004e
Symbol
Name
[1]
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
Detection of paper at the fixing unit exit
Photosensor + actuator
[2]
ADU unit (ADU door)
Paper conveyance while in double sided copy
Jam removal while in double sided copy
[3]
ADU conveyance roller/1
Paper conveyance through the ADU entrance
Motor drive
[4]
Decurler roller (7145)
Conveyance roller (7235/
Paper conveyance through the ADU intermediate section and the correction of paper curling (7145)
7228/7222)
Paper conveyance through the ADU intermediate section (7235/7228/
7222)
[5]
[6]
Function or method
ADU conveyance roller/2
Motor drive
Paper conveyance through the ADU intermediate section
Switching sheet
Motor drive
Switching of conveyance path at the paper reverse section
Switching by means of the elasticity of the PET sheet
2-27
2
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
Symbol
Name
Function or method
Paper conveyance through the ADU exit and switching of the conveyance direction
[7]
ADU roller
[8]
PS4 (ADU sensor)
Detection of paper at the ADU exit
[9]
Paper exit roller
Paper exit
Motor drive
Photosensor + actuator
Motor drive
[10]
Switching guide
Switching of the paper exit path at the fixing unit exit
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Solenoid drive
ADUDB ADU drive board
Driving of the M6 (ADU motor)
*1
M6
M9
ADU motor
Driving of the ADU motor
Paper feed motor
Stepping motor
Driving of the decurler roller (7145 only) and the ADU conveyance
rollers/2
DC brushless motor, PLL control
SD5
ADU gate solenoid
Pressure and release of the switching guide
24VDC drive
M11
Fixing motor
Driving of the paper exit roller
DC brushless motor, PLL control
*1
2
Except the 7145
2-28
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
8.2
8.2.1
Operation
Switching control of the paper exit/ADU conveyance path
A. Straight paper exit path
The straight paper exit path is applicable when a single side is copied as well as after the back side
copy of paper is completed in the double sided copy mode.
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Switching guide (SD5 OFF)
[5]
Fixing pressure roller
[2]
[3]
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
ADU conveyance driven roller/1
[6]
[7]
Fixing heat roller
Paper exit driven roller
[4]
ADU conveyance roller/1
[8]
Paper exit drive roller
2-29
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[8]
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
B. ADU conveyance path
The ADU conveyance path is applicable after the front side copy is completed in the double sided
copy mode.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
[5]
Fixing heat roller
[2]
[3]
ADU conveyance driven roller/1
ADU conveyance roller/1
[6]
[7]
Switching guide (SD5 ON)
Paper exit driven roller
[4]
Fixing pressure roller
[8]
Paper exit drive roller
C. Straight paper exit operation (single sided 3 copies)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
SD5 (ADU gate solenoid)
M1 (Main motor)
M11 (Fixing motor)
[1]
[1]
1st paper exit
2-30
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
D. ADU conveyance operation (double sided 3 copies)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
SD5 (ADU gate solenoid)
M1 (Main motor)
[1]
[1]
8.2.2
[2]
1st paper exit for the front side
[2]
7322ma2005
1st paper exit for the back side
ADU conveyance control
When a sheet of paper, the front of which has been printed in the double sided mode is conveyed to the
ADU unit, it is further conveyed to the ADU roller by the decurler roller (7145) or conveyance roller (except
the 7145) and the ADU conveyance rollers/2 which are in turn driven by the M9 (Paper feed motor).
2-31
2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
M11 (Fixing motor)
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
8.2.3
Paper reverse control
A. Paper reverse path
(1) When conveying paper
When a sheet of paper is conveyed from the ADU conveyance roller/2, it is further conveyed to the
ADU roller by pushing the switching sheet open.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
2
[4]
[1]
[2]
ADU conveyance driven roller/2
ADU driven roller
[6]
[7]
ADU roller
Switching sheet
[3]
[4]
Conveyance path when DB is provided
DB
[8]
[9]
PS4 (ADU sensor)
ADU conveyance roller/2
[5]
Conveyance path when DB is not provided
2-32
7322ma2006
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
(2) When paper reverse
Paper that has been conveyed is sent back by means of the reverse rotation of the ADU roller. At this
time, the switching sheet uses its own elastic power to block the conveyance path to the ADU conveyance roller/2, and the paper is conveyed to the loop roller of the tray 2. As a result, the paper is turned
inside out to be copied on the back side after passing through the same route as that for the paper
sent from the tray 2.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
7322ma2007
[1]
[2]
Loop roller
PS4 (ADU sensor)
[5]
[6]
DB
ADU roller
[3]
[4]
Switching sheet
ADU driven roller
[7]
ADU conveyance roller/2
B. Paper reverse operation (7145)
PS4 (ADU sensor)
M6 (ADU motor)
F 600mm/s
230mm/s
R 230mm/s
M9 (Paper feed motor)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Start of 1st paper conveyance
Start of revere operation of 1st paper
[4]
[5]
Start of reverse operation of 2nd paper
Start of 3rd paper conveyance
[3]
Start of 2nd paper conveyance
[6]
Start of reverse operation of 3rd paper
2-33
2
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
C. Paper reverse operation (7235/7228/7222)
PS4 (ADU sensor)
M6 (ADU motor)
F 600mm/s
*1
R *1
II UNIT EXPLANATION
M9 (Paper feed motor)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
7322ma2013
*1
2
165mm/s (7235)
140mm/s (7228/7222)
[1]
Start of 1st paper conveyance
[4]
Start of reverse operation of 2nd paper
[2]
[3]
Start of revere operation of 1st paper
Start of 2nd paper conveyance
[5]
[6]
Start of 3rd paper conveyance
Start of reverse operation of 3rd paper
2-34
INTERFACE SECTION
9. INTERFACE SECTION
9.1
Composition
In the case of the 7145
[1]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[2]
[3]
[4]
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
7322ma2008
Symbol
Name
Function or method
[1]
Serial port (USB TypeB)
For ISW of copier/FAX, For serial output of the printer
Ver. 1.1
[2]
Serial port (RS-232C)
For KRDS communication
D-SUB 9-pin connector
[3]
[4]
RJ45 Ethernet port
Parallel port
Port for network
For ISW of copier/FAX/printer
(IEEE1284 (Compatible,
Nible, ECP))
For parallel output of the printer
36-pin parallel interface
2-35
2
NETWORK SECTION
10. NETWORK SECTION
10.1 Composition
Item
II UNIT EXPLANATION
TCP/IP service
Function name
Function
Purpose
Arp
{
Obtain IP address
Remarks
BootP
{
Obtain IP address
DHCP
{
Obtain IP address
DNS
{
Settle IP address
FTP Client
{
Scan to FTP
FTP Server
{
Scan to Box
IPP
LPD/LPR
{
{
Print
Print
Support Ver. 1.0
Default port number = 9100
Raw Socket
{
Print
SMTP
{
Scan to Email
POP
POP before SMTP
{
{
For POP before SMTP
Authorization of SMTP
HTTP 1.1
{
server access
WebUtility
SNMP v1
(SNMP over TCP)
{
MIB access
SNMP v1
{
MIB access
(SNMP over IPX)
Netware service
Telnet
SLP
X
X
Bindery
NDS (including simul-
{
{
Print
Print
taneous support of
Bindery)
• PServer mode
• RPrinter/NPrinter mode
{
NDPS (Gateway)
{
PCONSOLE /NWADMIN, interchangeable
{
Frame Type (802.3, 802.3, 802.3 SNAP,
{
{
Print
MAC frame corresponding
Ethernet II)
AppleTalk service
EtherTalk PAP
{
Print
MS Network service
SMB over NetBEUI
X
Print
2-36
Corresponding in general
purpose Gateway
OTHER CONTROLS
11. OTHER CONTROLS
11.1 Parts Energized When the Main Power Switch is OFF
SW1
CBR1
NF
DCPS
CBR2
AC(N)
The follwing components are powered regardless of whether the SW1 (Main power switch) is on or off,
provided that the power cord remains plugged in.
A. CBR 1 and CBR 2 (Circuit breakers/1 and /2)
The circuit breakers serve to protect internal components against damage from short circuit. If current
exceeds the specified value, the circuit breaker(s) will go off, cutting the power to the system.
B. NF (Noise filter)
This filter reduces noises that enter through the power line.
C. DCPS (DC power source)
This supplies power to each unit, and also controls the ON/OFF state of the fixing heater lamp.
2-37
II UNIT EXPLANATION
AC(H)
OTHER CONTROLS
11.2 Components Operated When the Power Switch is ON
11.2.1 Components operated when the SW1 (Main power switch) is on
In the case of the 7145
+12VDC
+12VDC
-12VDC
-12VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
SW1
+12VDC
II UNIT EXPLANATION
-12VDC
+5VDC
+12VDC
-12VDC
SCB
+24VDC
DCPS
+5VDC
PTC
(OPTION)
OB
SGND
+5VDC
SUB_SW
SW2
PSW2B
FK-102/FL-102
(OPTION)
IP-432
(OPTION)
7322ma2009
Setting the SW1 (Main power switch) to the ON position supplies AC power to the DCPS (DC power
source) which in turn supplies +12DVC, -12VDC, and +5DVC to the SCB (System control board). The
DCPS also supplies +5DVC to the OB (Operation board) through the SCB.
When the PTC (Internal heater) is provided as an option for service parts, according to the setting of the
25 mode DIP SW16-2, +24VDC is supplied to the PTC (Heater) from the DCPS (DC power source).
If options such as a printer controller (IP-432) and/or fax control board (FK-102 Type A/FL-102) are
installed, +12VDC, -12VDC and +5VDC are also supplied to these options through the SCB (System control board).
In the automatic start-up mode, the same operation is made consecutively as when the SW2 (Sub power
switch) is turned on according to the discretion of the SCB (System control board).
2
2-38
OTHER CONTROLS
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
+12VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
OB
SW1
+12VDC
+5VDC
+12VDC
+5VDC
SCB
+24VDC
DCPS
SGND
+5VDC
SUB_SW
SW2
PSW2B
FK-103/FL-103
(OPTION)
IP-424
(OPTION)
PTC
(OPTION)
7322ma2021
Setting the SW1 (Main power switch) to the ON position supplies AC power to the DCPS (DC power
source) which in turn supplies +12DVC and +5DVC to the SCB (System control board). The DCPS also
supplies +5DVC to the OB (Operation board) through the SCB.
When the PTC (Internal heater) is provided as an option for service parts, according to the setting of the
25 mode DIP SW16-2, +24VDC is supplied to the PTC (Heater) from the DCPS (DC power source).
If options such as a printer controller (IP-424) and/or fax control board (FK-103/FL-103) are installed,
+12VDC and +5VDC are also supplied to these options through the SCB (System control board). However, when the LAN cables are not connected with none of these options provided, a part of the section
within the SCB (System control board) is not supplied with +5 VDC.
In the automatic start-up mode, the same operation is made consecutively as when the SW2 (Sub power
switch) is turned on according to the discretion of the SCB (System control board).
11.2.2
Components operated when the SW2 (Sub power switch) is on
The SW2 (Sub power switch) is located on the PSW2B (Power SW2 board). Upon the SW2 on, an ON signal is sent from the SW2 to the SCB (System control board) through the OB (Operation board). As a result,
the SCB sends a control signal to the DCPS (DC power source), thus causing the DCPS to supply
+12VDC, -12VDC (7145 only) and +5VDC to all of the boards and options, including the CB (Main body
control board).
The SCB (System control board) then sends to the DCPS (DC power source) a control signal that causes
the DCPS to generate +24VDC. This 24VDC power is supplied to all of the drive boards and options.
2-39
2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
+12VDC
OTHER CONTROLS
11.3 Fan Control
11.3.1
Composition of the cooling fan
II UNIT EXPLANATION
DCPS
FM1
CB
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
Symbol
Name
FM1
DC power supply cooling fan
Function or method
Cooling of the DCPS (DC power source)
FM2*1
FM3
Preventing the ends of the fixing roller from getting overheated
Prevention of internal dew condensation, removal of internal
Fixing cooling fan
Internal dehumidifying fan/1
ozone, and prevention against internal temperature getting too
high
2
FM4
FM5
Internal cooling fan/1
Developing suction fan
Cooling of the drum unit, the write unit and their surroundings
Prevention against scattering of toner around the developing unit
FM6
Internal dehumidifying fan/2
Prevention of internal dew condensation, removal of internal
ozone, and prevention against internal temperature getting too
FM7*2
Internal cooling fan/2
high
Cooling of the interior of the developing unit
FM7*3
Polygon cooling fan
Cooling of the M5 (Polygon motor)
*1
*2
7145/7235 only
7145 only
*3
7235 only
2-40
OTHER CONTROLS
11.3.2
Fan operation
A. Operation of fans other than FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1)
[1]
M1 (Main motor)
M3 (Developing motor)*2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
FM1 (DC power source fan)
FM2 (Fixing cooling fan)*1
FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan/1)
FM5 (Developing suction fan)
FM6 (Internal dehumidifying fan/2)
FM7 (Internal cooling fan/2)*3
FM7 (Polygon cooling fan)*4
7322ma2014
[1]
*1
START button (ON)
Operation for a small sized paper (such as B5R, A5R, B6R, postcard, 5.5 x 8.5R, 16KR). For paper
sizes other than these small ones, the fan turns on when the TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor/2)
detects a temperature above 417°F, and turns off when it gets below 408°F
*2
7145 only
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222, the operation of the fan, that is based on whether the M3 (Developing motor) turns ON or OFF while in the 7145, is based on whether the M1 (Main motor) turns ON or
OFF.
*3
*4
7145 only
7235 only
B. Operation of FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1)
(1) ON/OFF timing
The FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1) is turned on when the machine-inside temperature sensor provided
on the TCSB (Toner control sensor board) detects a temperature of 109°F, and turned off when the
temperature gets below 105°F.
(2) Abnormality detection
The internal temperature sensor installed on the TCSB (Toner control sensor board) detects a temperature of 136°F, error code F22-1 is displayed on the operation unit and the machine is stopped.
2-41
2
OTHER CONTROLS
11.4 Operation Unit Control
11.4.1
Composition of operation unit
SW2
SGND
SUB_SW
II UNIT EXPLANATION
PSW2B
LCD
LCDB
INV2
PAKB
SCB
OB
SP
(OPTION)
Symbol
Name
SW2
Sub power switch
Function or method
Power switch for the operating section
PSW2B Power SW2 board
Does not function when the SW1 (Main power switch) is off.
LED packaging to display the on/off status of the SW1 (Main
LCD
power switch)
Use to display various information
LCDB
INV2
Display board
Display inverter
Backlight for the LCD
Inverter used to drive the LCD (Display board)
PAKB
Panel key board
Touch switch board used to directly select items displayed on the
LCD
SP
Speaker
When an optional fax control board is installed, a monitor sound
on the line while a call is being made.
OB
Operation board
Used to control the PSW2B (Power SW2 board), the LCD (Display board), the INV2 (Display inverter) and the PAKB (Panel key
LCD
board), and also used to control the LED inside the OB and the
ten-key
2
2-42
OTHER CONTROLS
11.5 Counter Control
11.5.1
Counter composition
SCB
OB
7235/7228/7222
II UNIT EXPLANATION
7145
TC
(OPTION)
TC
CB
KC
(OPTION)
PS2
7322ma2011e
Symbol
Name
OB
Operation board
TC
Total counter
KC
Function or method
Displays the number of copies by means of the LED.
(7145 provided as a standard equipment)
Displays the total number of copies.
This is a mechanical counter driven by an electric signal.
(7235/7228/7222 optional)
Key counter (optional)
A counter used to make copying unavailable after the
specified number of copies is counted
This is a mechanical counter driven by an electric signal.
PS2
Fixing exit sensor
Detects paper at the fixing exit. This information
becomes a control signal source for each counter.
Photosensor + actuator
11.5.2
Counter operation
This machine uses the following two software counters to count the number of copies. However, the content of the number display counter on the OB (Operation board) may differ depending on the operating
condition of the machine.
A. Paper feed counter
This counter increments when the 1st paper feed for the next copy comes ON.
B. Paper exit counter
This counter increments when the PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) goes ON → OFF.
C. Number display counter on the OB (Operation board)
Normal operation
Jam
Indicator shows a count from the paper feed counter. Indicator shows a count from the paper exit counter.
2-43
2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
OTHER CONTROLS
Blank page
2-44
EXTERNAL SECTION
III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
• Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before disassembly or assembly.
1. EXTERNAL SECTION
1.1
Replacing the Ozone Filter
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Ozone filter: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
• Ozone filter: Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/
7222)
1. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the scanner exterior/R [2].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
B. Procedure
[1]
Note:
• If an unusual noise is emitted when you open or
close the bypass tray, clean the ADU door rib [3]
with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
[3]
2. Remove the ozone filter [1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the ozone filter, take care not to
break it.
[1]
3-1
2
EXTERNAL SECTION
1.2
Replacing the Filter Cover
Assembly & Suction Filter/A
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Suction filter/A: Every 120,000 copies (7145)
• Suction filter/A: Every 100,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
• Filter cover assembly: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
• Filter cover assembly: Every 100,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1], then remove the filter
cover assembly [2].
2. Remove the suction filter /A [3].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the suction filter/A, be sure to
install it so that the white filter face is turned to the
inside of the main body.
[3]
[2]
Note:
[1]
• When an elevator tray unit is fitted, perform the
following to access the filter section.
• While pressing [1], lift up [2], and pull out the elevator tray unit and the horizontal conveyance unit.
Do not remove the finisher.
To remove the finisher, see [III. DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY] of the finisher section.
[2]
2
3-2
7145ma3130
DRIVE SECTION
2. DRIVE SECTION
2.1
Removing and Reinstalling
the Motor Units (Main, Fixing, Feed, Developing)
Caution:
• Be sure to remove the drum unit from the
main body before removing or reinstalling
the main motor unit. If the drum unit is in
place at this time, the drum will rotate when
you install or remove the drum rotating plate,
resulting in possible damage to the cleaning
blade.
2
the main body.
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cord
[6]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
A. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit and drum unit from
cover/B [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the cord
cover/A [4].
4. Remove the 9 screws [5], and remove the rear
[5]
cover [6].
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
7322ma3001
5. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the rear
cover/R [2], the rear cover/L [3].
[5]
6. Remove the 3 screws [4], and remove the wirebundle guide plate [5].
[4] [3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
3-3
2
DRIVE SECTION
7. Remove the 15 screws [1], and remove the
[4]
board cover/D [2] (7145 only).
8. Remove the 13 screws [3], and remove the
board cover/A [4].
[1]
[1]
[3]
9. Remove the various wiring connectors from the
SCB (System control board) [1].
[2]
2
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• Be very careful when handling the ribbon cable
connector from the SCB (System control board).
[1]
See “2.4 Removing the ribbon cable” and “2.5
Installing the ribbon cable”.
[2] [3]
10. Remove the 12 screws [2] (7145) or the 11
[2]
screws [3] (7235/7228/7222), and remove the
system control board unit [4].
[2] [3]
[2] [3]
11. Disconnect the connectors from each motor unit
[1].
12. Remove the 4 screws [2], then remove each
motor unit [3], [4] (7145 only), [5].
13. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[4]
[2] [1]
2
[3]
[2]
7322ma3002
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1]
2
3-4
[5]
7322ma3003
DRIVE SECTION
2.2
Replacing the Registration
Clutch
Caution:
• Be sure to remove the drum unit from the
main body before carry out the following procedure. If the drum unit is in place at this
time, the drum will rotate when you install or
remove the drum rotating plate, resulting in
possible damage to the cleaning blade.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the system control board unit.
[2]
• For removal procedure, see “2.1 Removing and
reinstalling the motor units (main, fixing, feed,
developing)”.
2. Remove the set screw [1], and remove the drum
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
rotating plate [2].
[1]
3. Remove the clutch connector [1].
[3]
4. Remove the E-ring [2]. Pull the registration
clutch [3] toward you and rotate it to remove.
[1]
[2]
3-5
DRIVE SECTION
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[3]
steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
• When installing the registration clutch [1], be sure
to set the groove of the clutch detent in the stopper [3].
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.3
Replacing the Loop Clutch
A. Procedure
1. Remove the system control board unit.
• For removal procedure, see “2.1 Removing and
reinstalling the motor units (main, fixing, feed,
developing)”.
2. Remove the wire bundle from the clamp on the
conveyance drive panel [1].
3. Remove the 2 E-rings [2], 3 screws [3] and 2
[1]
[3]
bearing [4] , and remove the conveyance drive
panel [1]. (Do not remove the rotation prevention screws on the clutch.)
[4]
[2]
4. Remove the E-ring [1], then remove the gear [2]
and the connector [3], remove the gear [4] at the
front, and then remove the clutch [5].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
3-6
[2]
DRIVE SECTION
2.4
Removing the Ribbon Cable
A. Procedure
1. Move the lock lever [1] forward to release the
lock, then pull out the ribbon cable [2].
[1]
3-7
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
DRIVE SECTION
2.5
Reinstalling the Ribbon Cable
A. Procedure
1. Move the lock lever [1] forward, then insert the
ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector while
[2]
ensuring that the conductive face of the ribbon
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
cable [3] is positioned on the opposite side of
the lock lever.
[1]
2. Push back the lock lever [1] to lock the ribbon
cable [2].
[2]
[1]
3-8
[3]
SCANNER SECTION
3. SCANNER SECTION
3.1
Screws That Must Not be
Removed
In the case of the 7145
Note:
• The paint-locked screws [1] must not be
[1]
removed. Be sure that you do not remove these
screws.
[1]
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
[1]
[1]
[1]
3-9
7322ma3004
2
SCANNER SECTION
3.2
Adjusting the Angle of the
Operation Unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the 2 screws [1].
2. Remove the operating section stopper [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws [3] for each position. And
then install the angle adjustment member [4] in
the specified position.
The angle adjustment member corresponds to 7
[1]
[3]
degrees for the right position and to 15 degrees
for the left position. However, this is not used for
[4]
the setting of 33 degrees.
4. Change the installation direction of the operat-
[5]
ing section stopper [2] and set it at the position
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
for 7 or 15 degrees. However, this is not used
for the setting of 33 degrees.
Note:
• The angle of the operation unit can be adjusted at
the following 3 stages: However, the setting at 33
degrees is available only when combined with the
paper exit tray.
5. Install the operating section stopper [2].
6. Fasten the operation unit [5] with the 2 screws
[1].
[1]
[4]
[2]
3-10
[3]
SCANNER SECTION
3.3
Removing the Operating Unit
A. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door [1].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the screw [2] and remove the right side
cover /F [3].
3. Remove the 2 angle adjusting screws [1], and
[2]
remove the operating section stopper [3] while
lifting up the operating section [2].
[1]
3-11
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
SCANNER SECTION
4. Loosen the 2 screws [1] and remove the front
[2]
cover [2] and the front door [3].
[1]
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Remove the connector [1].
[1]
3-12
SCANNER SECTION
6. Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the oper-
[2]
ating section [2] by pulling it out to this side.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
3-13
SCANNER SECTION
3.4
Removing the Platen Glass/
Slit Glass
When removing the platen glass, execute only the
steps 1, 3, 7, 8 and 9 in the following procedure. For
the slit glass, execute all of the steps 1 to 9.
A. Procedure
1. Open the RADF.
[1]
2. Remove the operation unit.
[2]
3. Remove the 4 screws [1] and remove the scan-
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
ner exterior/R [2].
[1]
4. Remove the 4 screws [1] and remove the scanner exterior/L [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
3-14
SCANNER SECTION
5. Remove the 7 screws [1] and remove the scan-
[1]
ner exterior/F [2].
[1]
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[1]
3-15
SCANNER SECTION
6. Remove the 2 screws [1] of the slit glass
[1]
pressure plate and remove the slit glass [2].
[5]
7. Loosen the screw [3] and slide the glass pressure
plate [4] to the paper feed side.
8. Lift up once the platen glass [5]. And then slide it
to the paper feed side to remove it.
Note:
• Be careful not to stain the white reference plate
attached to the back of the scale plate [6] provided on the paper feed side of the platen glass
[5].
• When the white reference plate gets smudged,
wipe it thoroughly with a clean cloth.
[2]
[6]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the platen glass [5], be sure to
fasten it securely while pressing the glass pressure
plate [4] to the platen glass [5].
• The slit glass is distinguished between the front
and the rear. Be sure to set the slit glass [2] so
that a black dot on its side comes in the rear right
side when you see the 7145 from the front side.
When attaching the slit glass holding plate with
the 2 screws [1], tighten these screws while
pressing the slit glass [2] onto the original glass
[5] side.
3-16
[3]
[4]
SCANNER SECTION
3.5
Removing and Reinstalling
the CCD Unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the platen glass.
2. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the photo
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
sensor fastener [2].
3. Remove the 8 screws [3], and remove the lens
[6]
light blocking cover [4].
4. Remove the 3 screws [5], and remove the ribbon cable cover [6].
[4]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5]
[3]
5. Remove the ribbon cable [2] from the ADB (A/D
[3]
conversion board) [1].
Note:
• Be careful to avoid damage to the ribbon cable
[4]
[3]
[1]
when removing it. When reinstalling it, be sure
that it is securely in place.
6. Remove the 4 screws [3], and remove the CCD
unit [4].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[2]
7145ma3052
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing the CCD unit. (See “I Adjustment” section.)
3-17
1
SCANNER SECTION
3.6
Replacing Exposure Lamp
Caution:
• Do not touch the exposure lamp's lamp area
with bare hands.
A. Procedure
[2]
1. Remove the RADF.
[1]
• For removing procedure, see the DF service
manual.
2. Remove the platen glass.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the read
cover/R [2].
[1]
4. Shift the exposure unit [1] to the center of the
main body frame.
[2]
[3]
5. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the auxiliary reflecting mirror [3].
[1]
6. Remove the 1 connector [1] and 2 screws [2].
Tilt and remove the exposure lamp [3].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
3-18
[3]
[2]
[1]
SCANNER SECTION
3.7
Removing and Reinstalling
the Exposure Unit
A. Removal procedure
1. Remove the RADF.
[5]
2. Remove the platen glass.
3. Remove the scanner cover/R.
[2]
[1]
4. Shift the exposure unit [1] to the center of the
[6]
main body frame.
[4]
5. The exposure unit [1] is fixed in place by set
screws fastened to the exposure unit mount fittings/F [3], /R [4] (1 screw in each fitting).
Remove the 2 screws [2].
6. Tilt and slide the exposure unit [1] to remove it
from the frame.
[3]
B. Installation procedure
1. Fit the exposure unit into the main body.
2. Insert the front exposure unit mount fitting/F [2],
/R [3] into the corresponding slits in the expo-
[4]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
7. Disconnect the exposure lamp [5] connector [6].
[1]
sure unit.
3. Shift the V mirror unit [4] to the exit side.
Through the front, insert the two optics unit positioning jig [5] so that they are at the installation
location for the exposure unit. Pass the jig [5]
through the V mirror unit [4] to fasten it in place.
Position the exposure unit [1] by pushing it
against the frame on the right side of the unit.
Note:
• Be sure to the use optics unit positioning jig when
reinstalling the exposure unit.
4. Fasten the exposure unit mount fittings/F, /R
into place (1 screw in each fitting).
5. Remove the optics unit positioning jig.
6. Finish installation by reversing the sequence of
the removal procedure.
3-19
[5]
[3]
[2]
SCANNER SECTION
3.8
Removing the Optics Wire
A. Procedure
1. Remove the RADF.
[2]
2. Remove the platen glass.
3. Remove the scanner cover/R.
4. Shift the V mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side.
[1]
[4]
Through the front, insert the optics unit position-
[5]
ing jig so that it is at the V mirror attachment
location. Pass the jig through the V mirror unit
[1] to fasten the it in place.
5. Remove the exposure unit [2].
6. Detach the nuts [5] and washers [6] from the
ends of the optical wires/F [3], /R [4], and
remove the wires/F [3], /R [4].
7. Remove the screws [7] holding the two drive
pulley [8] bearings in place (two screws on each
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[8]
[5]
[9]
pulley), and remove the bearings [9].
8. Remove the optical wires/F [3], /R [4] from the
drive pulleys.
3-20
[7]
[3]
[6]
[6]
SCANNER SECTION
3.9
Installing the Optics Wire
A. Procedure
1. Loosen the set screw of the drive pulley [1] on
one side so that the drive pulley can rotate
[8]
2. Fit the metal ball [3] (midway along each optical
wire [2]) into the mount opening on the drive pulley [1]. Starting from this position, wind 6 times
[4] around the outside and 5 times [5] around
the inside.
[6]
[2]
[3]
[8]
• Use the “F” exposure unit mount fitting (the fitting
[6]
[3]
• The end with the metal ball [7] at the tip winds
around the inside of the pulley shaft [8].
• Wind so that the two ends of the wire come off
[1] [4] [5]
the top of the pulley.
3. After winding the wires [1], fasten them in place
[7]
[8]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
with the “F” printed on it) at the front, and use the
“R” fitting at the rear.
[5] [4] [1]
[7]
freely against the pulley shaft.
(with tape [6], etc.) so that they cannot come off.
[2]
[3]
Note:
• When winding wire around pulleys, be sure that
the winds are close. Be careful to avoid overlap.
• When changing the wire, be sure to use the
optics unit positioning jig.
4. On the metal ball [1] side, pass the optical wire
[1]
[2] so that it passes under the V mirror unit [3],
through the paper exit side pulley [4], and
through the inside pulley [5] on the V mirror unit.
Hook the end of the wire onto the notch [6] on
[8]
[4]
[3] [2]
[6]
the frame.
5. On the right side, pass the wire so that it passes
[2]
[5]
through the right side pulley [7], passes over the
pulley [8] on the outside of the V mirror unit, and
passes under the V mirror unit. Fasten the end
to the right side frame with the nut [9] and
[7]
[4]
[5]
washer [10].
[8]
3-21
[10]
[9]
SCANNER SECTION
6. Position the V-mirror unit by using the optics unit
positioning jig.
7. After temporary fastening, use a spring balancer
to apply 1.3 ~ 1.7kg of tension to the front and
rear optical wires in the arrow direction, then
fully tighten the nuts [1].
[1]
8. Fasten the set screw of the drive pulley which
has been loosened.
9. Using the optics unit positioning jig to install the
exposure unit.
10. Remove the optics unit positioning jig.
11. Slide the exposure unit two or three times to
make sure that it works correctly.
12. Finish installation by reversing the sequence of
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
the removal procedure.
3-22
[1]
WRITE UNIT
4. WRITE UNIT
4.1
Removing and Reinstalling
the Write Unit
Warning:
• Never supply power while the write unit is
out of its proper installed position.
• Do not open the cover of the write unit while
power is being supplied. Shining of the laser
beam on the eye may cause blindness.
Note:
• When removing the write unit, take care to avoid
touching with the write mirror and the dust proof
glass. (Touching these
scratches and smudges.)
areas
may
leave
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
• When installing the write unit, confirm that the
PET sheet at the end is seated correctly in the
duct.
• After turning the main power switch OFF, wait at
least two minutes before removing the write unit.
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door and remove the developing
unit and the drum unit.
[6]
2. Remove the exit tray.
3. Remove the front door.
[1]
4. Remove the main body cover/FR [1], the main
body cover/FL [2], the side cover/R [3], the filter cover assembly [4], the main body cover/U
[5] and the main body assist cover [6].
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
3-23
WRITE UNIT
5. Remove the write cleaning knob [2] from the
dust proof glass cleaning rod [1] and then puch
the rod [1] to inside of main body.
[1]
6. Remove the 11 screws [1], and remove the write
cover [2].
[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
7. Remove the two write unit mount pieces [2]
(each is held in place by screw [1]).
[2]
[1]
3-24
[2]
WRITE UNIT
8. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] .
In the case of the 7145
9. Remove the air duct [2].
screws), and remove the write unit [4] by pulling
[4]
[3]
10. Remove the 3 screws [3] (SEMS II: long
[1]
it to the paper exit side.
Note:
• When removing the write unit, take care to avoid
touching with the write mirror and the dust proof
glass.
[2]
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
[1]
[1]
3-25
[2]
[4]
7322ma3005
2
WRITE UNIT
11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• Reinstall the write unit while inserting the front
edge of the cooling air guide sheet [1] into the
specified position.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
3-26
DRUM UNIT
5. DRUM UNIT
5.1
Removing and Reinstalling
the Drum Unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Drum unit: Every 720,000 copies (7145)
• Drum unit: Every 600,000 copies (7235/7228/
7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit.
[2]
2. Open the ADU door [1], and open the conveyance unit [2].
[1]
3. Loosen the screw [3], and gently pull the drum
unit [4] out toward you until it stops. Then tilt it
slightly and remove it.
• When removing the drum unit, be sure to hold it
at both ends to prevent a possible deformation of
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
[3]
the drum unit.
• After removing the drum unit, close the drum
[4]
cover and store the unit in a dark place.
• During removal and reinstallation work, never
rotate the drum in the wrong direction (in the
direction opposite to the direction it moves during
[5]
normal copying). Rotating the drum in the reverse
direction may cause scratches to the cleaning
blade.
• When removing the drum unit, do not place your
hand on the separation claw unit [5].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
3-27
2
DRUM UNIT
5.2
Removing and Reinstalling
the Charging Corona Unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
2. Set the unit so the drum is to the top.
[5]
2
3. Remove the cleaning rod's [1] shaft stopper fitting [2], and pull out the cleaning rod [1].
[7]
[4]
4. Disconnect the connector [3] from the drum unit.
5. Remove the 2 screws [4] (7235/7228/7222
[6]
only).
6. Remove the back side (rear side) of the charging corona unit [5] in the arrow-marked direction
[6] and remove it by sliding in the arrow-marked
direction [7].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
7322ma3006
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• Be careful not to bend excessively the charging
corona pressure spring.
5.3
Removing and Reinstalling
the Charge Control Plate
A. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
2. Remove the charging corona unit. Move the
[2]
charging cleaning block to its home position (at
the rear side).
3. Remove the 2 charge control springs [1], and
remove the charge control plate [2].
4. To clean: tap lightly with a cloth soaked in drum
cleaner, then use a blower brush to remove
remaining debris.
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling, be sure to set the charge control plate so that the spring held end is toward the
front of the charging corona unit.
2
3-28
[1]
DRUM UNIT
5.4
Replacing the Charging Wire
A. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
[2]
2. Remove the charging corona unit. Move the
[4]
charging cleaning block to its home position (at
[1]
the rear side).
3. Remove the charge control plate.
4. Remove the 2 charging covers (charging cover/F
[1], and charging cover/R [2]).
[3]
5. In the case of the 7145
Remove the 2 springs [3], and remove the 2
charging wires [4].
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
Remove the 2 springs [3], and remove the 1
charging wire [4].
6. To install the replacement wire: first fasten the
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
rear end of the wire to the unit, then pass the
wire through the charging cleaning block and fix
it in place with the spring. Then complete the
installation by reversing the steps above.
7. Finish installation by reversing the sequence of
the removal procedure.
5.5
Removing and Reinstalling
the Drum
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Drum: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
• Drum: Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/7222)
B. Removing procedure
1. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
2. Remove the charging corona unit from the drum
unit.
[1]
[2]
[3]
3. Remove the screw [1] and the fixing material [2],
and pull out the drum shaft [3].
When the drum shaft is hard to pull out, knock
lightly at the rear end of the drum shaft.
3-29
2
DRUM UNIT
4. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the drum
bearing [2].
5. Remove the 2 semicircular seal blocks [3] (one
[3]
on each end of the drum).
6. To remove the drum, lift it up and out from the
front side.
[1]
Note:
• Take care to avoid scratching the drum's light
sensitive areas and the cleaning blade. Do not
touch these areas with bare hands.
• When removing or installing, never allow the
drum to bump against the plate-metal part of the
cleaning blade.
• If you are going to place the drum in storage, be
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
sure to place a cover on the drum (to cut off light
to it) and store it in a dark place.
• When removing the drum unit, do not place your
hand on the separation claw unit.
3-30
[2]
DRUM UNIT
C. Installing procedure
Note:
• Be sure that the toner collection sheet makes
contact with the entire span of the drum, with no
gaps.
1. Coat the entire surface of the drum with setting
powder.
[5]
2. Fit the long convex end [2] of the drum [1] into
the rear side of the unit, then set the drum down
(one at each end of the drum).
[3]
3. Reattach the drum bearing [4]. Fasten it into
place with the 2 set screws [5].
[4]
4. Insert the drum shaft and fasten the hold-down
[2]
member [4] with a screw. Be sure to attach the
hold-down member securely as shown in the
[1]
drawing right.
NG
[4]
OK
[4]
[4]
3-31
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
into the unit. Reattach the two seal blocks [3]
[3]
DRUM UNIT
5. Using the jig [1] included on the drum unit cover,
rotate the drum clockwise and confirm that there
are no gaps in the setting powder coat, and that
the toner collection sheet and cleaning blade
are smooth, etc.
6. Finish installation by reversing the sequence of
the removal procedure.
Note:
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
• Before installing the drum and cleaning blade
(regardless of whether new or used), be sure to
coat these with setting powder. Apply the powder
around the entire drum, and on both sides of the
blade.
• If you have coated setting powder onto the drum:
Before installing the drum unit back into the main
body, use an alcohol-soaked cloth to remove
stray powder from the sensor surface on the
toner control sensor board. This is necessary to
ensure that accurate toner density readings are
obtained.
• Be sure that the drum is oriented correctly before
installing it. The drum should be positioned so
that the convex end of the longer section comes
at the back.
• After installing a new drum, be sure to reset the
drum-related counters in the 36 mode.
2
3-32
[1]
DRUM UNIT
5.6
Removing and Reinstalling
the Separation Claw
A. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
2. Remove the drum from the drum unit.
[2]
[3]
3. Disconnect the relay connector [1].
[1]
4. Remove the separation rock spring [2].
5. Remove the 2 positioning screws [3], the 2 col-
[4]
lars [4] and the 2 spacer [5], and then remove
[5]
the separation claw unit [6].
Note:
• While removing or installing the claw, be careful
[6]
to avoid damage to the drum.
6. Pull out the separation fulcrum shaft [2] while
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
pressing down the claw [1] and remove the 2
separation claws [3].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the claw, be sure that it is correctly oriented and positioned.
[2]
• Do not touch the cleaning blade or the drum's
light sensitive areas with bare hands.
[1]
3-33
DRUM UNIT
5.7
Removing and Reinstalling
the Transfer and Separation
Corona Unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Transfer corona unit: Every 480,000 copies
(7145)
• Transfer corona unit: Every 400,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door.
[2]
2. Pull the conveyance unit [1] toward you to open.
3. Push the rear catch of the transfer/separation
corona unit [2], then remove the unit.
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
• When installing the Transfer/Separation corona
unit, be sure that the cleaning material is in home
position at the rear side.
[1]
5.8
Replacing the Transfer and
Separation Wires
Note:
• Do not remove the screw that must not be
removed [2] of the paper entrance guide plate [1].
[1]
[2]
2
3-34
DRUM UNIT
A. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer and separation corona unit
from the main body.
[2]
2. Use a tweezers to remove the hook [1] from the
transfer and separation corona unit. Then
remove the plunging prevention plate [2].
[1]
3. Remove the spark arrestor plates/F [1], /R [2].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[1]
4. Move the cleaning block to home position, and
remove the top covers [1] from the cleaning
[1]
[4]
block.
5. Remove the spring [2] from each wire, and
remove the wires [3].
[2]
Note:
• When removing the wire, be careful that the wire
holding rubber that is in touch with the V-shaped
rack [4] does not get lost.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the wire, be sure that the cleaning
block is in home position at the right side. Stretch
the wire so that it fits into the V holders [4].
3-35
[3]
[4]
DEVELOPING UNIT
6. DEVELOPING UNIT
6.1
Screws That Must Not be
Removed
Note:
• The 4 screws [1] right must not be removed or
adjusted in the field. Please do not interfere with
[1]
these screws.
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
6.2
Removing and Reinstalling
the Developing Unit
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Developing unit: Every 720,000 copies (7145)
• Developing unit: Every 600,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screw [2].
3. Pull the developing unit [3] outward to remove.
4. To reinstall: fit the rails on the bottom of the
[1]
developing unit onto the grooves on the main
body, and slide the unit into place.
[2]
[3]
2
3-36
DEVELOPING UNIT
6.3
Replacing the Developer
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Developer: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
• Developer: Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/
7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
2. Release the hooks [1]. Lift the developing unit
[2]
cover [2], and remove it.
3. Tilt the developing unit so that the agitator
screws [1] are toward the bottom, and rotate the
[1]
agitator input gear [2] counterclockwise as necessary to discharge all developer from within the
developing unit and from the developing sleeve
[3].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2]
[3]
4. Wipe away any toner remaining on the developing regulator plate [4].
[4]
5. Pour new developer evenly over the agitator
screws [1].
[1]
Note:
• When carrying out replacement, take care to prevent dirt and debris from entering the system.
6. Rotate the agitator input gear [2] 1 counterclockwise so that the developer moves into the inside
of the developing unit.
[2]
Note:
• After installing new developer, do not turn the
developer-input gear or agitator input gear in the
clockwise (reverse) direction.
3-37
2
DEVELOPING UNIT
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary to load all of
the developer.
[2]
8. Rotate the developing input gear counterclockwise and check the bristle height along the
entire surface of the developing sleeve.
9. Reinstall the developing cover while hooking the
cover onto the projection [1]. Be careful to keep
the cover clear of the scatter prevention sheet
[2].
Note:
• After replacing developer, carry out L detection
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
adjustment before making copies.
3-38
[1]
TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
7. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
7.1
Removing and Reinstalling
the Toner Bottle
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1], and then open the toner
supply cover [2].
2. Pull the toner bottle [3] slightly out, and turn it
[1]
clockwise so that the upper part of the cartridge
aligns with the cutout.
3. Withdraw the toner bottle [3].
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
7.2
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
Removing and Reinstalling
the Toner Supply Unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit and developing unit.
2. Remove the toner bottle.
[3]
3. Remove the rear cover.
4. Remove the system control board unit.
• For removal procedure, see “2.1 Removing and
reinstalling the motor units (main, fixing, feed,
developing)”.
5. Remove the drum rotating plate.
6. Remove the 4 connectors [1].
7. Remove the 4 screws [2], and remove the toner
supply unit [3] by pulling it toward you.
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
3-39
[2]
[1]
TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
7.3
Removing and Reinstalling
the Cleaning Blade
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Cleaning blade (Cleaning blade assembly):
Every 240,000 copies (7145)
• Cleaning blade (Cleaning blade assembly):
Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
2. Remove the drum from the drum unit.
3. Remove the 2 screws [1] , and remove the fitting
[2] (suppressor piece) holding the cleaning
blade in place.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[1]
4. Remove the cleaning blade [1].
Note:
• Be careful of the cleaning blade edge. Do not
touch the edge with bare hands, and take care to
avoid scratching it.
[1]
2
3-40
TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
Note:
• When installing the cleaning blade [1], install so
that the unit's transparent sheet [2] is oriented as
shown in the diagram.
• Before installing the drum and cleaning blade
(regardless of whether new or used), be sure to
coat these with setting powder. Apply the powder
around the entire drum, and on both sides of the
blade.
• If you have coated setting powder onto the drum:
Before installing the drum unit rear into the main
body, use an drum cleaner cloth to remove stray
ensure that accurate toner density readings are
obtained.
3-41
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
powder from the sensor surface on the TCSB
(Toner control sensor board). This is necessary to
PAPER FEED UNIT
8. PAPER FEED UNIT
8.1
Replacing the Paper Feed
Roller and the Feed Roller
(Bypass)
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed roller: Every 360,000 copies (Once
for every 100,000 copies for actual durable
count) (7145)
• Paper feed roller: Every 300,000 copies (Once
for every 100,000 copies for actual durable
count) (7235/7228/7222)
• Feed roller: Every 360,000 copies (Once for
every 100,000 copies for actual durable count)
(7145)
• Feed roller: Every 300,000 copies (Once for
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
every 100,000 copies for actual durable count)
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray.
2. Remove the 3 screws [1] and remove the plate
[2]
[2].
[1]
3. Remove the 2 screws [1], then
bypass sensor.
remove the
[2]
2
3-42
[1]
PAPER FEED UNIT
4. Remove the stop ring [1] and the bearing [2].
[4]
5. Remove the 2 screws [3]. Then slide the bypass
[5]
feed roller unit [4] to the left side and remove it
from the bypass drive shaft [5].
[1]
[3]
[2]
6. Remove the paper feed roller [1].
7. Remove the 2 stop rings [2] .
[2]
8. Pull out the bypass conveyance shaft [3], and
remove the feed roller [4].
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[4]
[1]
Note:
• When reinstalling rollers, pay attention to their ori-
[3]
entation.
[2]
3-43
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
steps in reverse.
PAPER FEED UNIT
8.2
Replacing the Double Feed
Prevention Roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 360,000
copies (Once for every 100,000 copies for actual
durable count) (7145)
• Double feed prevention roller: Every 300,000
copies (Once for every 100,000 copies for actual
durable count) (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Carry out the steps 1 through to 5 in “8.1
Replacing the paper feed roller and feed roller
[2]
(bypass)”.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the bypass double feed prevention roller unit [2].
3. Remove the 2 springs [1], the two stop rings [2]
and the E ring [3].
4. Pull out the shaft [4] to the side where there is
no E ring provided, and remove the bypass
[1]
2
[4]
[6]
[5]
reverse roller [5] and the roller [6].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[1]
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When reinstalling double feed prevention roller
[5], pay attention to their orientation.
[1]
[3]
[2]
7145ma3006
2
3-44
PAPER FEED UNIT
8.3
Replacing the Paper Feed
Rubber and the Feed Rubber
(Tray 1)
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed rubber: Every 480,000 copies (Once
for every 200,000 copies for actual durable
count) (7145)
• Paper feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Once
for every 200,000 copies for actual durable
count) (7235/7228/7222)
• Feed rubber: Every 480,000 copies (Once for
every 200,000 copies for actual durable count)
(7145)
• Feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Once for
B. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door, and then open the conveyance unit.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
every 200,000 copies for actual durable count)
(7235/7228/7222)
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the developing unit, the drum unit and
the fixing unit.
3. Slide the upper tray 1 [1] out. Remove the 2
screws [2] holding the tray in place, and take the
tray 1 [1] off.
4. Remove the paper feed roller cover [3] in the
[2]
direction of arrow [2] while pushing it in the
direction of arrow [1].
[1]
[3]
3-45
2
PAPER FEED UNIT
5. Remove the 2 stop rings [1] and the bearing [2].
[3]
6. Remove the feed shaft [5] from the rocking shaft
[5]
[4] while raising the shaft on the left side of the
paper feed roller unit [3], and remove the paper
feed roller unit [3].
[4]
[1]
7. Remove the collar [1] and pull out the feed shaft
[2].
[2]
[8]
[1]
[7]
8. Remove the feed rubber [4] from the feed roller
[6]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3].
9. Remove the stop ring [5] and pull out the paper
[2]
feed shaft [6].
10. Remove the paper feed rubber [8] from the
paper feed roller [7].
11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[1]
[9] [5]
steps in reverse.
[4]
Note:
• Be sure to install the feed rubber [4] so that the
paint mark [9] is turned in the direction as shown
in the illustration.
• Install the paper feed roller unit so that the hook
of the paper feed roller unit comes above the
paper feed roller unit release arm.
3-46
[3]
[11]
[10]
PAPER FEED UNIT
8.4
Replacing the Double Feed
Prevention Rubber (Tray 1)
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention rubber: Every 480,000
copies (Once for every 200,000 copies for actual
durable count) (7145)
• Double feed prevention rubber: Every 400,000
copies (Once for every 200,000 copies for actual
durable count) (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
[1]
holding the tray in place, and take the tray 1 [1]
[2]
off.
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the plate [2].
4. Remove the screw [3].
5. With the claws [4] on both ends sandwiched
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
1. Open the ADU door.
2. Slide the tray 1 [1] out. Remove the 2 screws [2]
[5]
[4]
[1]
from the inside of the main body, remove the
double feed prevention roller unit [5].
[2]
[3]
6. Pull out the lever click shaft [1] while pushing
the lever section [2] of the lever click shaft [1].
7. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]
[4]
[5]
[3]
from the double feed prevention roller [3].
[2]
[1]
3-47
2
PAPER FEED UNIT
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[1]
steps in reverse.
Note:
[3]
• Be sure to install the double feed prevention rubber so that the paint mark [5] above is turned in
the direction as shown in the illustration.
• When installing the double feed prevention roller
unit [1] to the main body, be sure to align the
[2]
upper section of the claw [2] with the center (the
longest scale) of the marking [3] stamped on the
main body frame for leveling.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8.5
Replacing the Paper Feed
Rubber and the Feed Rubber
(Tray 2)
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed rubber: Every 480,000 copies (Once
for every 200,000 copies for actual durable
count) (7145)
• Paper feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Once
for every 200,000 copies for actual durable
count) (7235/7228/7222)
• Feed rubber: Every 480,000 copies (Once for
every 200,000 copies for actual durable count)
(7145)
• Feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Once for
every 200,000 copies for actual durable count)
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door.
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the plate [2].
[1]
[2]
2
3-48
PAPER FEED UNIT
3. Remove the 2 stop rings [1] and the bearing [2]
[4]
on this side, and remove the paper feed roller
[3]
unit [4] by sliding the bearing [3] on the rear side
to the rear.
[1]
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the collar [1] and pull out the feed shaft
[2].
5. Remove the feed rubber [4] from the feed roller
[8]
[7]
[2]
feed shaft [6].
7. Remove the paper feed rubber [8] from the
paper feed roller [7].
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[1]
[9] [5]
steps in reverse.
[4]
Note:
• Be sure to install the feed rubber [4] so that the
paint mark [9] is turned in the direction as shown
in the illustration.
• Install the paper feed roller unit so that the hook
of the paper feed roller unit comes above the
paper feed roller unit release arm.
3-49
[3]
[11]
[10]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[6]
[3].
6. Remove the stop ring [5] and pull out the paper
PAPER FEED UNIT
8.6
Replacing the Double Feed
Prevention Rubber (Tray 2)
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Double feed prevention rubber: Every 480,000
copies (Once for every 200,000 copies for actual
durable count) (7145)
• Double feed prevention rubber: Every 400,000
copies (Once for every 200,000 copies for actual
durable count) (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door.
2. Slide the tray 2 [1] out. Remove the 2 screws [2]
[1]
holding the tray in place, and take the tray 2 [1]
off.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
3. Open the guide plate [1], and remove the set
[3]
screw [2].
4. With the claws [3] on both ends sandwiched
from the inside of the main body, remove the
double feed prevention roller unit [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
5. While pressing on the lever [2] on the lever click
shaft [1], pull out the lever click shaft [1].
[4]
[5]
[4]
6. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]
from the roller [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
2
3-50
PAPER FEED UNIT
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[1]
steps in reverse.
Note:
[3]
• Be sure to install the double feed prevention rubber so that the paint mark [5] above is turned in
the direction as shown in the illustration.
• When installing the double feed prevention roller
unit [1] to the main body, be sure to align the
[2]
upper section of the claw [2] with the center (the
longest scale) of the marking [3] stamped on the
main body frame for leveling.
Cleaning the Paper
Removing Brush
Dust
1. Open the ADU door, and then open the conveyance unit.
[3]
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8.7
2. Remove the developing unit and the drum unit.
3. Release the catch of the claw [3] while lifting up
slightly the lower section on this side [2] of the
paper dust removing brush [1], and remove the
paper dust removing brush [1] in the arrowmarked direction.
[2]
Note:
• Do not bend the metal plate of the paper dust
removing brush [1].
4. Clean the PET sheet [1] and the plastic part [2]
using a cleaning pad and a blower brush.
[1]
[2]
A. Installation procedure
1. Insert the paper dust removing brush [1] from
the rear side [2], and confirm that the hole [3] in
the brush [1] is engaged with the claw [4].
2. Finish installation by reversing the sequence of
the removal procedure.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
3-51
FIXING UNIT
9. FIXING UNIT
9.1
Removing and Reinstalling
the Fixing Unit
Caution:
• The fixing unit remains extremely hot immediately after power is switched OFF. To avoid
injury from burns, do not begin work until the
fixing unit has cooled down sufficiently.
• When installing the fixing unit, be sure to
firmly tighten the unit's 2 set screws.
A. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door [1] and the conveyance unit
[2], and loosen the 2 screws [4] holding the fixing unit [3] in place.
[4]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Pull the fixing unit out toward you and remove it.
[2]
Note:
• Do not touch the areas shown in the diagram right
when attaching or removing the fixing unit.
• Observe care, as force applied to the fixing claw
and paper exit guide may result in the rollers
being scratched.
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
2
3-52
[3]
[1]
FIXING UNIT
9.2
Replacing the Fixing Heater
Lamp/1 and Lamp/2
Caution:
• Do not touch the lamp area with bare hands.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing heater lamp/1: Every 480,000 copies
(7145 only)
• Fixing heater lamp/2: Every 480,000 copies
(7145 only)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit from the main body.
2. Remove the screws [1], and remove the 2 cov-
[2]
[1]
ers/F [2], /R [3].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[3]
3. Detach the faston terminal [1] at the rear of each
lamp.
Note:
• The marking “B” is stamped on the hole of the
lamp support piece for the L3 (Fixing heater lamp
/3) [2].
[1]
[2]
3-53
2
FIXING UNIT
4. Detach the faston terminal [1] at the front of
[1]
each lamp.
5. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the lamp
support piece/F [3].
[3]
6. Keeping all cord faston terminal wiring straight,
pull each fixing heater lamp/1 [4], /2 [5] toward
[2]
you to remove.
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing, be sure that manufacturer's mark
is mounted on the front side.
• Do not allow the heater lamps to make contact
[5]
with the inside of the roller.
• Install so that the main lamp is at the top, and the
sub lamp is at the bottom.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Heater cords are color-coded as follows.
Color Positions
Lamp
Main
Sub
JAPAN
U.S.A.
[4]
EUROPE
OTHERS
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
White White Red Red Blue Blue
White Black Red Black Blue Black
• When installing the faston terminal on the drive
gear side, be sure that the installation position is
correct.
3-54
FIXING UNIT
9.3
Removing and Reinstalling
the Fixing Claw
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing claw: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
• Fixing claw: Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/
7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit from the main body.
[4]
2. Remove the 2 covers/F, /R.
3. Open the fixing guide [1].
4. Remove the 2 set screws [2], and remove the
fixing paper exit board/U [3].
[3]
5. Remove the 3 screws [4] from the fixing paper
[5]
exit board/U, and remove the fixing claw unit [5].
[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2]
6. Unhook the spring [1] of the fixing claw unit, and
remove the fixing claw [2].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[2]
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the fixing claw, be sure that it is
oriented correctly.
• Be sure that the claw is securely attached to the
claw spring.
• When installing the fixing paper exit board/U to
the fixing unit, be careful not to damage the fixing
roller with the fixing claw.
[1]
3-55
2
FIXING UNIT
9.4
Replacing the Fixing Web
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing web (Fixing cleaner assembly) : Every
240,000 copies (7145)
• Fixing web (Fixing cleaner assembly) : Every
200,000 copies (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit from the main body.
2. Remove the front cover and the rear cover of
[1]
the fixing unit.
3. Remove the fixing paper exit board/U.
4. Remove the 6 screws [1] and remove the fixing
[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
web [2].
[1]
2
3-56
FIXING UNIT
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3]
Note:
• When replacing the fixing web, be sure to rotate
the web drive gear [5] to wind up the edge in blue
line [1] of the fixing web until it comes between 0
and 10mm from the nip section [4] of the fixing
[4]
heating roller [2] and the fixing cleaning roller [3].
On this occasion, be sure to check the web winding shaft [6] if it is also rotating.
[1]
[6]
3-57
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5]
FIXING UNIT
• When installing the fixing claw unit, be careful
that the edge of the fixing claw pressing spring [1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
does not run on the web case.
OK
[1]
NG
3-58
FIXING UNIT
9.5
Removing/Reinstalling
the
Fixing Heat Roller, Fixing
Pressure Roller, Heat Insulating Sleeve/A, /B, Fixing
Idling gear /B, Fixing Bearing
/U, /L, Heater Lamp/1, /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing heat roller: Every 120,000 copies (7145)
• Fixing heat roller: Every 200,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
• Fixing pressure roller: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
• Fixing pressure roller: Every 200,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
• Heat insulating sleeve/A: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
• Heat insulating sleeve/A: Every 200,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
• Heat insulating sleeve/B: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
• Heat insulating sleeve/B: Every 200,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
• Fixing idling gear/B: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
• Fixing idling gear/B: Every 200,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
• Fixing bearing /U: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
• Fixing bearing/U: Every 200,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
• Fixing bearing/L: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
• Fixing bearing/L: Every 200,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
• Fixing heater lamp/1: Every 480,000 copies
(7145 only)
• Fixing heater lamp/2: Every 480,000 copies
(7145 only)
3-59
2
FIXING UNIT
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit from the main body.
[2]
2. Remove the fixing claw unit.
3. Remove the fixing web.
4. Remove the two fixing heater lamps.
[3]
[1]
5. Remove the 2 screws [2] and 2 collars [3] for the
connector [1] that was connected to the faston
terminal. Remove the connector [1].
6. Remove the 2 screws [4], and remove the lamp
support piece/R [5].
[5]
[4]
7. Open the fixing guide [1] to release the pres-
[1]
sure.
8. Remove the C-ring [3] at the rear of the heat
roller [2], and then remove the gear [4] and heat
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
insulating sleeve/A [5], /B [6].
[5]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[6]
9. Remove another C-ring [1], then remove the
[2]
heat insulating sleeve A [2] (the sleeve toward
the front).
10. Remove the 2 fixing bearings/U [4] (one at the
front, one at the rear) from the fixing unit.
11. Remove the fixing heat roller [3].
[1]
[3]
Note:
• When the installation, be sure that heat insulating
sleeves A and B are oriented and positioned correctly.
When replacing the heating insulating sleve/A [5],
apply solvest 240 [7] to the inside and outside
surfaces of the heat insulation sleeve/A [5] and
then install it.
3-60
[4]
FIXING UNIT
12. After removing the fixing pressure roller [1],
remove the E-ring at both sides and then
[3]
remove the 2 fixing bearings/U [2].
[2]
13. In the case of the 7145
Remove the E-ring, and then remove the fixing
idling gear/B [4] and gear [3].
Note:
[1]
• When replacing the fixing idling gear/B [4], clean
[4]
the gear shaft with a drum cleaner.
[2]
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
Remove a screw [1] and then remove the shaft
fixing plate caulking [2].
[2]
2
7145ma3106
[3]
Remove the fixing idling gear/B [3] from the
Note:
• When replacing the fixing idling gear/B [3] with a
[4]
new one, clean the shaft section of the shaft fixing
plate caulking [2] with drum cleaner.
14. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
shaft section of shaft fixing plate caulking [2].
[1]
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
3-61
7322ma3007
2
FIXING UNIT
Note:
• When returning the fixing web in use, be sure to
rotate the web drive gear [2] until the original web
winding shaft [1] starts to turn.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2]
• When returning the wiring harness, be sure to
hook the wiring harness securely on the wiring
harness holder section [1] so that it does not
interfere with the web operation lever [2].
[1]
3-62
[2]
FIXING UNIT
• When installing the fixing claw unit, be careful
does not run on the web case.
OK
[1]
NG
3-63
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
that the edge of the fixing claw pressing spring [1]
FIXING UNIT
9.6
Removing and Reinstalling
the Fixing Temperature Sensors
Caution:
• After installing the fixing temperature sensors:
Make sure that the wire bundles are not in
contact with the fixing heat roller.
• Make sure that the sensors them-selves (the
sensor areas) are in contact with the fixing
heat roller.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fixing sensor assembly: Every 480,000 copies
(7145)
• Fixing sensor assembly: Every 400,000 copies
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit from the main body.
[4]
2. Remove the fixing claw unit.
3. Remove the fixing web.
[5]
[6]
[4]
4. Remove the connector [1].
5. Remove the 3 screws [2], and remove the fixing
web mounting piece [3].
6. Remove the 2 screws [4], and remove the fixing
sensor assembly [5].
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
• The fixing sensor assembly [7] is made up of the
TH1 (fixing temperature sensor/1) and the TH2
[1]
(fixing temperature sensor/2). Since the TH1 and
the TH2 have been adjusted at the time of their
assembling, avoid surely loosening the screws.
• Make sure that the sensors are in contact with the
heat roller.
2
3-64
[7]
[2]
[3]
FIXING UNIT
• When returning the fixing web in use, be sure to
rotate the web drive gear until the original web
winding shaft [1] starts to turn.
[1]
• When installing the fixing claw unit, be careful
that the edge of the fixing claw pressing spring [1]
OK
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
does not run on the web case.
[1]
NG
3-65
FIXING UNIT
9.7
Removing and Reinstalling
the Fuse Mounting Plate
Assembly
Caution:
• This is an important safety part. (P/N:SP000110) Be sure to observe the following cautions and steps when removing or reinstalling.
Caution:
• After installing the thermostat:
Make sure that the wire bundle is not in contact with the fixing heat roller.
• Make sure that the thermostat itself is in con-
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
tact with the fixing heat roller.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fuse mounting plate assembly: Every 480,000
copies (7145)
• Fuse mounting plate assembly: Every 400,000
copies (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit from the main body.
2. Remove the fixing claw unit.
[2]
[1]
3. Remove the fixing web.
4. Remove the heat roller.
5. Remove the fixing web mounting piece.
6. Detach the thermostat [1] 2 Faston terminals [2].
7. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the Fuse
[3]
mounting plate assembly [4].
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
[4]
steps in reverse.
Note:
• When installing the fuse mounting plate assembly, with the base plate sandwiched between the
unit’s sheet materials, fasten it with the screw
while attaching it to the bottom side.
• When connecting the Faston terminals of the
thermostat [1], be careful not to deform the plate
spring section. Be careful not to mix up the front
with the back of the Faston terminal.
2
3-66
FIXING UNIT
• When returning the fixing web in use, be sure to
rotate the web drive gear until the original web
winding shaft [1] starts to turn after the assembling.
[1]
• When installing the fixing claw unit, be careful
that the edge of the fixing claw pressing spring [1]
OK
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
does not run on the web case.
[1]
NG
3-67
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING UNIT
Blank page
3-68
SERVICE MANUAL
Models
7145/7222/7228/7235
Service Section
APRIL 2004
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC.
7145/7222/7228/7235
SERVICE MANUAL
APRIL 2004
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of the possible hazards to an inexperienced
person servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of
damage to the equipment, Konica Minolta Business
Solutions U.S.A., Inc. strongly recommends that all
servicing be performed by Konica Minolta-trained service technicians only.
Changes may have been made to this equipment to
improve its performance after this service manual was
printed. Accordingly, Konica Minolta Business Solutions
U.S.A., Inc., makes no representations or warranties,
either expressed or implied, that the information contained in this service manual is complete or accurate. It
is understood that the user of this manual must assume
all risks or personal injury and/or damage to the equipment while servicing the equipment for which this service manual is intended.
Corporate Publications Department
© 2004, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A. , INC.
All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
I
II ISW
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
4. CE PASSWORD SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
6. CHECKING BY THE COUNTER KEY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
6.1 Checking method of the counter key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
III SERVICE
1.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
7.3.1
7.3.2
PM count reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Entering PM count start date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
7.3.3
7.3.4
Setting of PM cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Counter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Copy count for each part to be replaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
7.5.1
7.5.2
Copy count by parts to be replaced (fixed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Copy count by parts to be replaced (Named; arbitrarily) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
7.6
7.7
Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Setting phone number of the service center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
7.8
Setting the serial number/the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
7.8.1 Setting the serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
7.9
7.8.2 Setting the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Displaying the ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
7.10 KRDS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
7.11 ISW setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
7.12 Root counter display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
7.13 Setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
7.14 Tray size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
i
3
IV DIAGRAMS
7. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
7.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
CONTENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
8. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
8.1
Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
8.2
Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
8.3
L detection adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
8.4
8.5
Toner density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Dot diameter adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
8.6
LD1 offset adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
8.7
LD2 offset adjustment (7145 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
II ISW
8.8
8.9
Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
8.8.1
Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
8.8.2
Restart timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
8.8.3
Paper feed loop amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
8.8.4
8.8.5
Leading edge original erasure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
8.8.6
Image read point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
8.8.7 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
8.9.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
8.10 Test pattern output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
III SERVICE
8.11 Test pattern density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
8.12 Image quality adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
8.12.1 RADF scanning density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
8.12.2 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
8.13 List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
8.14 Counter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
8.15 Adjustment of RADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
8.15.1 Vertical magnification adjustment in RADF system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
IV DIAGRAMS
8.15.2 Adjustment of restart timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
8.15.3 Paper feed loop adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
8.15.4 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
8.15.5 RADF scanning density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.15.6 RADF image read point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.16 FNS adjustment (FS-112 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.17 FNS adjustment (FS-114 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
8.17.1 Fold & Stitch position adjustment (SK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
8.17.2 Fold position adjustment (SK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
8.17.3 Punch position adjustment (PK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
8.17.4 Punch loop adjustment (PK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
9. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
9.1
9.2
47 mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
RADF original size detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
9.3
9.4
Bypass size detection adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
Action for mounting when reinstalling the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
9.5
9.6
Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
10. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
10.1 RADF height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
3
ii
CONTENTS
10.3 RADF original skew adjustment (front side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
10.4 RADF original skew adjustment (back side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
10.5 DB-411 paper-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
10.6 DB-411 tray tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95
10.7 LT tray tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
10.8 FS-113 Output Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98
I ADJUSTMENT
10.2 RADF distortion adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90
10.9 Lengthwise position adjustment of punch hole of FS-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
10.10Adjustment of FS-113 Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
10.11FS-113 Timing Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
10.13Adjustment of FS-113 Elevator Tray Overload Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
10.14Staple Position Adjustment of FS-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
10.15Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter Drive Gear of FS-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
II ISW
10.12FS-113 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
10.16Punch Hole Deviance Adjustment of FS-114 (PK-114). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110
10.17Fold Angle Adjustment of SK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
10.18Staple Angle Adjustment of SK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
ISW
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. USB ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
III SERVICE
II
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1.1 7145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.2
7235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
7228/7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
1.2.1 7145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
1.2.2
1.2.3
7235/7228/7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
DF-318/320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
1.2.4
1.2.5
DB-211/411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
LT-203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
1.2.6
1.2.7
FS-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
FS-113/RU-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
1.2.8
1.2.9
FS-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
PK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
1.2.10 SK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
1.2.11 BK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
1.3
Periodic check items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
1.3.1 7145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
1.3.2
1.3.3
7235/7228/7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
DF-318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
1.3.4
DF-320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
iii
3
IV DIAGRAMS
1.1
CONTENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
1.3.5
1.4
1.5
DB-211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
1.3.6
DB-411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
1.3.7
LT-203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
1.3.8
FS-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2. 1 PM PARTS KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3. SERVICE MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
IV DIAGRAMS
III SERVICE
II ISW
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1
1.2
Main body parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
DF-318/320 parts layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
1.3
DB-211 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
1.4
1.5
DB-411 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
LT-203 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
1.6
1.7
FS-112 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
RU-101 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
1.8 IT-101 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
2.1
2.2
Main body connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
DF-318/320 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
2.3
2.4
DB-211 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
DB-411 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
2.5
2.6
LT-203 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
FS-112 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
IV DIAGRAMS
2.7 RU-101 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
3. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.1 Error code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.2
4.3
About abnormal units isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
L detection error code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.4 Network section status indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
5. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
5.1
5.2
7145 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
7235/7228/7222 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
5.3
5.4
7145 ADU timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
7235/7228/7222 ADU timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
5.5
5.6
DF-318/DF-320 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
DB-211/DB-411 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
5.7
5.8
LT-203 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
FS-112 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
5.9 FS-113 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
5.10 FS-114 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
5.11 SK-114 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
6. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
3
iv
CONTENTS
DF-318/320 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
6.2
DB-211/411 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
6.3
LT-203 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
6.4
FS-112 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
6.5
6.6
RU-101 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
FS-113 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
6.7
SK-114 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
I ADJUSTMENT
6.1
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-2
7.3
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-3
7.4
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-4
7.5
7.6
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-6
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-7
7.7
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-8
7.8
7.9
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-9
FS-114 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-11
IV DIAGRAMS
III SERVICE
7.1
7.2
II ISW
7. APPENDIX
v
3
IV DIAGRAMS
III SERVICE
II ISW
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
Blank page
vi
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND
CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
CAUTION” is defined
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.
:Prohibition when using the copier.
:Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1]
MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical
aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For
this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
1
S-2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
[2]
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of
injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order
to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1.Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet
• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
kw
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
b.
If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-3
1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
WARNING: Ground Lead
• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING: Ground Lead
• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
2.Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place
• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling
• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10°C to 30°C
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette
smoke, or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
CAUTION: Ventilation
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from
the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
3
S-6
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.
(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.
Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
[3]
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in “Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures”.
[4]
CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
S-9
1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY CIRCUITS
[2]
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in seri-
overheating prevention circuit
ous accidents.
[1]
Overall protection circuit
[2]
L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2) overheat-
L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2)
DCPS
TS
RL1
ing prevention circuit
them in order to prevent servicing errors that may
L3
TH1
impair their functions.
[1]
RL1
TH2
the service engineer with a renewed awareness of
L2
CB
These safety circuits are described below to provide
Control
section
Overall protection circuit
AC driver
section
FCB
CBR1
1.
The output voltage from TH1, TH2 (fixing tem-
DCPS
perature sensor/1, /2) is read by the CPU. If
this voltage is abnormal, L2 (fixing heater
CBR2
1.
Protection by software
lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) and RL1
(main relay) are turned OFF.
Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit
breaker/1, /2)
CAUTION:
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta-
under any circumstances.
neously when an excessive current flows due
to a short in the AC line.
CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not
be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2.
Protection by the hardware circuit
The output voltages from TH1, TH2 (fixing temperature sensor/1, /2) are compared with the
abnormality judgment reference value in the
comparator circuit. If the output voltage from
TH1 or TH2 exceeds the reference value, L2
(fixing heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2)
and RL1 (main relay) are turned OFF in hardware means.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the TH1, TH2 face
contacting the roller, and replace TH2 if
any abnormality is detected.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
under any circumstances.
3.
Protection by TS (thermostat)
When the fixing heat roller exceeds the specified value, TSs (thermostats) are turned OFF,
thus interrupting the power to L2 (fixing heater
lamp/1), and L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor
in place of TS1 and TS2.
3
S-12
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE
Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
[1]
Main body
1.
Right side
<7145>
CAUTION
The fixing unit is very hot.
To avoid getting burned
DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
This area generates
high voltage.
If touched, electrical
shock may occur.
DO NOT TOUCH!
(Inside of the main
body front door)
CAUTION
(Inside of the main
body right side door)
The roller shaft on the inside
of the cover is very hot.
To avoid getting burned DO
NOT TOUCH.
If the cover comes off, return
it to its original position.
7322sf001e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
3
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf002e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
3
S-14
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2.
Front side
<7145>
7322sf003e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-15
3
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf004e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
3
S-16
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
3.
Rear/Left side (7235/7228/7222 only)
7322sf005e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-17
3
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
4.
Scanner section
<7145>
7322sf006
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
3
S-18
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf007e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-19
3
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
[2]
FS-113
CAUTION
This area is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
(Inside of the Finisher)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on the top
of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides
of the printed sheets when removing them, and
DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets
while the primary (main) tray goes up.
[3]
FS-113 Finisher
7322sf009
FS-114
FS-114 Finisher
7322sf010
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
3
S-20
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
ADJUSTMENT
B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site service
Be sure to pay due attention to the following
1. HOW TO USE THE
ADJUSTMENT SECTION
1.1
when repairing the machine.
1. Only one side of the AC power line is disconnected when the main power of this machine is
turned off. Always unplug the machine before
Composition
This section details adjusting items and procedures.
beginning work. If absolutely necessary to work
with the power on, exercise care to avoid being
caught in the scanning rear of the exposure unit.
A. Checking before starting work
Use this section for making adjustments and as
2. Special care should be taken when handling the
a checklist before implementing corrective
measures in the field.
fixing unit since it operates at extremely high
temperatures.
3. The developing unit is surrounded by a strong
1. Does the power supply meet the requirements?
2. Is the power supply properly grounded?
3. Is the machine sharing its power source with
another high current consumption machine that
draws large currents intermittently? (e.g. an elevator, air conditioner, or other source of electrical consumption)
4. Is the installation environment suitable?
• The machine must be installed in a wellventilated place free from high temperature, high
humidity and direct sunlight.
• The machine must be installed on a level
floor.
magnetic field. Keep watches and metering
equipment away from it.
4. Avoid scarring the drum with tools or similar
objects.
5. Do not touch IC pins with your bare hands.
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN
REPLACING PARTS
Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not
only required when a defective copy image occurs,
but also after replacing or reinstalling certain parts.
5. Does the cause of a defective image lie in the
original itself?
[How to use the tables]
The following items are used in the tables through-
6. Is the density adjusting control at the proper
position?
out this section.
1. Mode
7. Are the platen glass and the slit glass clean?
8. Is the correct paper being used for the copy?
Indicates the adjustment mode.
“25”
: 25 mode
9. Are the copying materials and parts replaced
“36”
: 36 mode
when they reach the end of their usable life?
(developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.)
“47”
: 47 mode
2. Symbols used in the tables
,
................. :
Indicates there is a pri-
10. Is there toner in the toner bottle?
ority
sequence
for
adjustments (including
{ (Empty circle)
:
checks) and settings.
Indicates adjustments
(including checks) and
settings that can be carried out independently.
1-1
I ADJUSTMENT
I
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
PM cycle set
25
1-30
{
{
*1
{ *2
3
Process adjustment
L detection adjustment
36
1-46
4
Process adjustment
Toner density adjustment
36
1-46
{
5
Process adjustment
Dot diameter adjustment
36
1-47
{
6
Process adjustment
LD1 offset adjustment
36
1-47
{
7
Process adjustment
LD2 offset adjustment (7145)
36
1-48
{
8
Image adjustment
Magnification
adjustment
Vertical magnification of printer
36
1-49
{
{
{
9
Image adjustment
Magnification
Vertical magnifi-
adjustment
cation of scanner (platen)
36
1-51
{
{
{
Magnification
adjustment
Vertical magnification of scan-
36
1-52
{
{
36
1-51
{
{
36
1-52
{
{
36
1-53
{
{
36
1-54
36
1-55
10 Image adjustment
{
ner (RADF)
11 Image adjustment
12 Image adjustment
13 Image adjustment
Magnification
Horizontal mag-
adjustment
nification of
scanner
Timing adjust-
Main body
ment
related
Timing adjust-
RADF
ment
14 Image adjustment
Timing adjustment
Paper feed loop
amount adjust-
{
ment
15 Image adjustment
3
Timing adjust-
Leading edge
ment
original erasure
adjustment
1-2
{
{
{
{
E-RDH
2
{
RADF slit glass
1-30
RADF
25
Fixing unit-related parts
PM counter resetting
Developer
Page
1
Drum
Mode
items
Paper feeding-related rubber rollers
Adjustment
Parameter memory board
Adjustment classification
Write unit
I ADJUSTMENT
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
19 Image adjustment
20 Image adjustment
adjustment
Centering
Main body related
adjustment
Centering
adjustment
Centering
DBLT centering
adjustment
adjustment
Centering
RADF centering
adjustment
adjustment
RADF
RADF scanner
adjustment
density
adjustment
21 Drum count resetting
Drum count resetting
22 Fixing unit related
counter resetting
Fixing unit related
counter resetting
36
1-56
{
{
36
1-56
{
{
36
1-58
{
{
{
36
1-65
{
{ {
25/36 1-40 {
25/36 1-68
E-RDH memory check
{
23
E-RDH memory
check
*1
After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first carried out L
detection adjustment.
*2
When PRMB (Parameter memory board) is replaced, remember to replaced the developer before conducting the L deection adjustment.
47
1-88
{
Note:
• When replacing a board due to the SCB (System control board) being damaged, the PRMB (Parameter
memory board) that was installed on the damaged SCB should be used as a rule on the new SCB.
The use of a new PRMB should be limited only when it is considered that the PRMB is also damaged.
On this occasion, adjustment data have not been input into the new PRMB and it is necessary to implement all of the adjustment items. In order to make the new PRMB effective, the 47 mode - 92 (output)
should be carried out before implementation of the adjustment items.
• When the adjustment items have been implemented, the 47 mode - 96 (output) should be also executed.
The adjustment data are backed up by implementing the 47-96 mode.
For the original PRMB installed on the damaged SCB, the 47-92 mode is protected against inadvertent
execution. For details of the cancellation of protection, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
1-3
3
I ADJUSTMENT
{
RADF slit glass
{
RADF
1-58
Developer
36
Drum
Parameter memory board
18 Image adjustment
Image read point
Write unit
17 Image adjustment
Timing
adjustment
Page
16 Image adjustment
Mode
items
E-RDH
Adjustment
Fixing unit-related parts
Adjustment classification
Paper feeding-related rubber rollers
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
I ADJUSTMENT
CE PASSWORD SETTING
4. CE PASSWORD SETTING
5. MODE CHANGE MENU
Important:
• In order to prevent the malicious CE to access
5.1
Setting Method
data and to change settings of the machine,
The following modes can be selected on the mode
ensure to change the CE password.
change menu screen without turning OFF/ON the
power supply:
On key operator mode, if the enhanced security is
“1 Basic screen”
enabled, CE password must be input to verify the
CE to access the following service modes.
“2 36 mode”
“3 25 mode”
“4 Key operation mode”
“36 mode”
“5 47 mode”
“25 mode”
“47 mode”
“6 Exit”
A. Procedure
Register a CE password by the following procedure.
1. Turn on SW1 (main power switch) and SW2
(sub power switch).
A. Procedure
1. While the SW1 (main power switch) is ON, turn
2. Keep pressing the
OFF SW2 (sub power switch)
2. Turn the SW2 ON while pressing 2 and 5 of the
3. Input 9272 as the password and press the
[START] key. (The password is fixed and cannot
copy quantity setting buttons
CE password input request screen appears.
be changed.)
4. Press the key of the mode to be selected on the
3. Enter default password “92729272”.
On the LCD, basic screen for 25 mode
appears.
4. Press [5. Password setting] key.
screen.
If enhanced security is enabled, enter CE password to access to “25 mode”, “36 mode” and
“47 mode”. Enter Key operator password to
Password setup screen appears.
5. Press [4. CE Password setting] key.
access [Key operator mode].
5. To return to the “Mode Change Menu screen”,
CE password input screen appears.
6. Enter new 8-digit CE password then press [Set]
key.
7. OFF/ON sub-switch to complete password input
procedure and to exit from 25 mode.
Note:
• Only alphanumerical keys can be used for the
password. Continuous single alphanumeric cannot be used for the password.
• In order to change the registered password, in the
above step 3, enter current password and continue following steps.
• Do not use name, your birthday or employee
code number as the password since other people
can easily guess them.
• CE should not inform other people of the password.
2
∗ button until the message
“Enter password for mode selection” appears.
1-4
keep pressing the
∗ button until the “Mode
Change Menu screen” appears.
6. When the adjustment ends, press [6. Exit] key
and the basic screen will appear.
6. CHECKING BY THE
COUNTER KEY FUNCTION
The counter key function enables to display of the
following parameters by using the counter button:
“1 Total count”
“2 Total count start date”
“3 PM count/PM count limit”
“4 PM count start date”
“5 Fax send paper count”
“6 Fax receive paper count”
“7 Printer count”
“8 Scanner count”
“9 Drum count”
“10 Developing count”
“11 Fixing unit count”
6.1
Checking Method of
Counter Key Function
the
A. Procedure
1. Turn on SW1 (main power switch) and SW2
(sub power switch).
2. Press the counter button.
3. The “Counter confirmation screen” appears, and
the total count value appears. The counter that
appears differs depending upon the installed
option.
4. If you press the ! button on the “Counter confirmation screen”, service-related counters that
indicate the PM count, and so on, appear.
5. To output the count value list, press the [PRINT]
key.
6. Press the [OK] key or the stop button to return to
the basic screen.
1-5
I ADJUSTMENT
CHECKING BY THE COUNTER KEY FUNCTION
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7. 25 MODE
Adjustment item menu
Remarks
1. Software DIPSW
See the “List of soft-
setting
2. PM COUNT/CYCLE
ware DIPSW”.
1. PM COUNT reset
2. PM CYCLE set
3. Counter clear
1. Drum related
counter
3. Collecting data
3. Counter clear
2. Fixing related
counter
1. Count data
collection
Data Collection 1
Copy count of each
paper size
RADF paper passage count
1. Count data
Data Collection 2
collection
JAM occurrence
count by each point
1. Count data
collection
Copy count of each mode
Data Collection 3
1. Count data
collection
Data Collection 4
SC count : F code
2. Periodic data collection starts
4. Parts counter
1. Count of parts (Fixed)
2. Count of parts (Named)
5. Password setting
1. Key operator password setting
8 digits
2. User account (EKC) master key code setting
8 digits
3. Weekly timer master key code setting
4 digits
4. CE password setting
8 digits
6. Service TEL No.
setting
Telephone & Fax. No.
of service center setting.
1-6
25 MODE
7. Serial number
setting
1. Main body
Remarks
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment item menu
Sets up the serial
number display and
2. Optional tray
the destination.
3. LCT
4. Finisher
5. Fax
6. Printer
7. FL-102/FL-103
8. FS-114 punch unit
9. FS-114 saddle unit
10.RADF (7235/7228/7222)
8. Indication of ROM
Display each version
version
of ROM.
9. KRDS setting
See the KRDS manual provided separately.
10. ISW
Rewrites the contents of the flash
ROM of each board.
11. Indication of Root
counter
Displays the root counter (total counter).
12. Setting date
Sets the starting date
of the total counter.
13. Tray size setting
Set the paper size of
LT-203.
.
1-7
3
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.1
Setting Method
7.2
A special operating mode called “25 Mode” has
been provided with this machine. This mode
enables rewriting of the non-volatile storage and
Setting Software DIPSW
A. Setting method
This setting specifies the software DIPSW on
the software SW setting screen.
specify other various settings.
Note:
• The bit of the DIP switch is written in the non-vol-
A. Procedure
1. Turn OFF the SW2 (sub power switch) when the
SW1 (main power switch) remains ON.
2. Turn the SW2 ON while pressing 2 and 5 of the
atile memory every time it is changed.
B. Meaning of the values displayed on the
screen
copy quantity setting buttons.
If enhanced security is enabled, CE password
input request screen appears. Input the CE
password.
25 mode menu screen appears. At this moment,
the machine turns to 25 mode and the normal
copy operation is disabled.
3. Press the desired item key on the LCD screen.
Each setting screen will appear.
4. Enter data in each selected screen.
[1]
5. Press the [RETURN] key to check the data that
has been entered.
6. Turn the SW2 off to cancel the 25 mode.
7. New data will be effective after restarting.
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
DIPSW number
Bit number (0 to 7)
[3]
[4]
Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF
8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.
C. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [Software SW] key.
3. “Software setting screen”
Select DIP switch number.
Use the arrow key on the left.
4. Select bit number of the DIP switch.
Use the arrow key at the center.
5. Select ON (=1) or OFF (=0) of the DIP switch.
Use [ON] or [OFF] key.
[ON] : Set bit.
[OFF] : Clear bit.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “25
mode menu screen”.
• For each switch function, see “List of software
DIPSW”.
2
1-8
25 MODE
Note:
• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW1
0
Functions
0
Operation when key counter
Ignore
is removed
1
1
Instantaneous
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
0
1
1
stop Jam
A3 (11 x 17) counting
Count as 1
Count as 2
0
0
0
method
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
Selection of maximum num-
*1
*1
0
0
0
4
ber of copies that can be stapled by FS-112/113
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
FS-112/114 limit on number
None
*
0
0
0
Decide with
Stop after paper
0
0
0
DIPSW 3-2
exited
of stapled sets
DIPSW2
0
Toner replenish stop timing 1
1
—
—
—
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
1
1
1
3
—
—
—
1
1
1
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
1-shot message display at auto-
Yes
No
1
1
1
—
—
1
1
1
No
Yes
0
0
0
No
Yes
0
0
0
Unlatched
Latched
0
0
0
When copying
Interval between
0
0
0
ends
copy set
matic staple mode clearing
6
7
—
Prohibition of non-image
area erases, repeat (auto)
and original position correction
DIPSW3
0
Use F4 size for Latin America destination
*
1
SC latch (F34/F35/F36)
2
Toner replenish stop timing 2
FS-112: Message is displayed after stopping temporarily at 25 copies.
FS-114: Message is displayed after stopping temporarily at 20 copies.
1-9
3
I ADJUSTMENT
List of software DIP SW
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW3
3
Functions
0
Return to EKC screen after
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
No
Yes
0
0
0
copying reservation
DIPSW4
4
—
—
—
1
1
1
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
*2
*2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
2
3
Toner level detection
(“Supply toner” indication)
*3
Condition for stopping copy-
*3
ing after toner supply display
4
Non-display of advance/
delete buttons for job list
Yes
No
0
0
0
5
Job stop when there is no
No
Yes
1
1
1
Can reserve
Cannot reverse
0
0
0
copying
copying
toner left.
6
Copy reservation allowed (corresponding to coin vendor)
DIPSW5
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
0
1
0
1
—
—
—
0
0
1
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
Toner consumption reduction
*5
*5
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
DIPSW6
SW
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
0
0
0
K sizes
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
K size selection SW for Tai-
Metric sizes
wan destination
2
K size selection SW for Taiwan
available
Metric sizes
destination (By pass feed)
3
3
K sizes
available
—
—
1-10
—
25 MODE
DIPSW6
4
5
6
7
DIPSW7
Functions
0
*6
Timing for the polygon motor to
1
*6
stop/start to rotate at low speed
*7
Setting for the polygon motor
*7
to stop/rotate at low speed
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Selection of automatic erasure outside original
*8
*8
1
1
1
1
Automatic restart after feed-
*9
*9
0
0
0
*10
*10
1
0
0
*11
*11
0
0
0
*11
*11
0
0
0
Not required
Required
0
0
0
No
Yes
0
0
0
ing paper (Other than Inch)
2
Automatic conversion of
paper size detected by APS
(8.5 x 11/A4)
3
Nonstandard-size notification for platen APS A4
(Japan, Metric)/8.5x11 (Inch)
4
Nonstandard-size notification for platen APS B6
(Japan)/A5 (Metric)/5.5 x 8.5
(Inch)
5
Password that requires 25/
36/47 mode (9272)
6
Selection of A series size
(Metric only)
DIPSW8
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
1
0
0
1
Changing of key operator
fixed magnification setting
Permit
Prohibit
1
0
0
2
Disabling copying when PM
count reached
Permit
Prohibit
0
0
0
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
*12
*12
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
5
Priority tray when APS is
released
6
7
For checking the collected
data 2 to 4 in the 25 mode
Display
restricted
1-11
Display not
restricted
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW9
Functions
0
1
Japan
Inch
Metric
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
*13
Selection of copy quantity
*13
limit
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
*14
*14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
3
0
0
0
6
Switching of message
7
DIPSW10
Default values
0
4
*15
Setting for summer time
Selection of magnification
*15
Display auto
1.00
0
0
0
mode when APS function is
cancelled
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
Icon display in the LCD message display section (toner
No
Yes
1
0
0
shortage, PM)
DIPSW11
7
Displaying of JAM code
No
Yes
0
0
0
0
Release of the applied func-
No
Yes
0
0
0
tion when the RADF is open
1
—
—
—
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
1-12
25 MODE
DIPSW12
Functions
0
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
0
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
—
—
—
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
Setting of PM count at which
*16
*16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Recognize
0
0
0
Switched
0
0
0
4
copying is inhibited
5
6
KRDS connection recogni-
Not recognize
tion
7
F/E code screen switchover
No
(except for F34, F35 and F36)
DIPSW13
0
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
—
—
—
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
ON
OFF
0
0
0
3
Selection of filter for jagged
edges on slanting lines
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
*17
*17
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
6
7
DIPSW14
(all in F code)
0
1
Judging level of the out-oforiginal auto erasure mode
*18
Operation when stapling is not
possible (Other than B6R, post
*18
card nonstandard)*
2
—
—
—
0
1
0
3
—
—
—
0
1
0
4
*19
*19
0
0
0
5
Operation when one position
stapling is not available*
0
0
0
6
Operation when two position
*20
0
0
0
7
stapling is not available*
0
0
0
* Common to FS-112/113
1-13
*20
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW15
Functions
0
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
0
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
—
—
—
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
Not stop
Stop
0
0
0
Stopping due to overloading when
Decided on
Stop
1
1
1
the FNS, IT is not connected (when
exiting 400 sheets)
DIPSW15-6
*21
0
1
1
*a
0
0
1
1
1
6
Stopping due to overloading
when the FNS is not connected
(when exiting 100 sheets)
7
DIPSW16
0
1
Fixing temperature at low
power mode
2
Operation of internal heater
*21
Always ON
Heater off while
in off mode
3
Copying before execution of
Permit
Prohibit
1
1
1
the L detection
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
*22
*22
1
1
1
*b
*b
*b
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
6
Control of dot diameter
adjustment
7
DIPSW17
0
HOST printing cannot be performed
when a key counter is installed
Printing takes
place
Printer abort
processing
0
0
0
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
Shift inhibited
Shift possible
0
0
0
—
—
0
0
0
6
3
*23
3
5
*a
*b
*23
F4 size setting
Shift from bypass feed in
ATS mode is inhibited
—
Default value of the 7145 is “0”. Default value of the 7235/7228/7222 is “1”.
Default value of the 7145 is “0”. Default value of the 7235/7228/7222 is “1”.
1-14
25 MODE
DIPSW17
7
Functions
0
Separation claw operation
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Normal
OFF
0
0
0
Normal
Not allowed to
0
0
0
0
0
0
OFF mode (for machines
destined for China)
DIPSW18
0
Tray 1 (main body upper
stage), separation of defec-
use
tive part
1
Tray 2 (main body lower
Normal
stage), separation of defec-
Not allowed to
use
tive part
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
4
Tray 3 (DB upper stage),
separation of defective part
Normal
Not allowed to
use
0
0
0
5
Tray 4 (DB lower stage),
separation of defective part
Normal
Not allowed to
use
0
0
0
6
Tray 5 (LT), separation of
Normal
Not allowed to
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
defective part
7
use
DB is isolated
Normal
Not allowed to
use
DIPSW19
0
Separation of defective part
Normal
of printer controller
Not allowed to
use
1
Separation of defective part
of FAX board
Normal
Not allowed to
use
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
Separation of defective part
Normal
Not allowed to
0
0
0
of HDD
use
4
Separation of defective part
of ADU
Normal
Not allowed to
use
0
0
0
5
Separation of defective part
of scanner
Normal
Not allowed to
use
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
Separation of defective part
of RADF
Normal
Not allowed to
use
0
0
0
1-15
3
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW20
0
Functions
0
Separation of defective part
Normal
of Network
1
Separation of defective part
Normal
Separation of defective part
Normal
Inch
Metric
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
0
0
Not allowed to
0
0
0
0
0
0
Not allowed to
Not allowed to
Not allowed to
use
3
—
—
4
Separation of defective part
Normal
of FNS
use (Offset not
allowed to use)*
Separation of defective part
Normal
of the saddle
DIPSW21
Japan
use
of USB
5
Default values
use
of IEEE1284
2
1
Not allowed to
use
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
8.5 x 11
A4
0
0
0
8.5 x 11R
A4R
0
0
0
8.5 x 14
F4
0
0
0
0
Platen size recognition
selector switch 1 for Latin
America (Inch only)
1
Platen size recognition
selector switch 2 for Latin
America (Inch only)
2
Platen size recognition
selector switch 3 for Latin
America (Inch only)
3
Notice of nonstandard small
platen size (Inch only)
Notice of
noticed size
Notice as nonstandard size
0
0
0
4
Job suspension/end at pulling out key counter
*24
*24
0
0
0
5
Notice of small size of platen
Notice size
Notice size as
0
1
0
mode (8.5x11/A4 or smaller)
detected by
APS
A4 (Japan, Metric) or 8.5x11
(Inch)
6
Switching of the count-up
*25
*25
0
0
0
No
Yes
0
0
0
function
7
When using an EKC, the
password screen appears at
the end of each job
* The saddle is also detached.
3
1-16
25 MODE
DIPSW22
Functions
0
1
0
—
Nonstandard size becomes
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
—
—
1
1
1
*26
*26
0
0
0
effective at automatic platen
start
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
4
Indication of total count start
day on counter key mode
No
Yes
0
0
0
screen
DIPSW23
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
—
—
—
1
1
1
0
Automatic changeover to
Tray 1 when FNS tray is full*
No
Yes
1
1
1
1
Automatic changeover to
Tray 2 when FNS tray is full*
No
Yes
1
1
1
2
Automatic changeover to
No
Yes
1
1
1
No
Yes
1
1
1
No
Yes
0
0
0
No
Yes
1
1
1
—
—
0
0
0
No
Yes
0
0
0
Tray 3 when FNS tray is full*
3
Automatic changeover to
Tray 4 when FNS tray is full*
4
100 sheets are exited when
FNS is not stapled, and tray
is detected full*
5
100 sheets are exited when
FNS is stapled, and tray is
detected full*
6
7
—
Machine stops when fixing
web count reaches to the
limit
* FS-112 only (7145)
1-17
3
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW24
Functions
0
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
0
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
—
—
—
1
1
1
2
Automatic change of printer
*27
*27
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
paper size
4
—
—
—
0
1
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
1
6
Punching of mixed size print
0
0
0
job
7
Release punch Not release punch
automatically
and continue
*29
*29
0
0
0
Job stop changeover without
print process stop
DIPSW25
0
Automatic changeover to
tray 1 when the IT tray is full
No
Yes
0
0
0
1
Automatic changeover to
tray 2 when the IT tray is full
No
Yes
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
Normal on/off
All off
0
0
0
—
—
0
0
0
No
Yes
0
0
0
No
Yes
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
Switching of TSL control
4
5
—
For postcard-to-postcard
copying, rotation takes place
even when APS/AMS is not
used
6
180 degree rotation takes
place even when there are
no staples
7
FAX transmission 8K/16K for
machines destined for Taiwan
DIPSW26
Image is trans- Image is transmitted in
mitted with both
reduced form
edges erased
0
—
—
—
0
0
0
1
—
—
—
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
1
1
1
3
Image position reference
use for bypass feed copying
Center
Rear side of
transfer paper
0
0
0
Permit
Prohibit
0
0
0
—
—
0
0
0
on non-standard size paper
4
Printer EKC mismatch print
operation
5
3
—
1-18
25 MODE
DIPSW26
6
Functions
0
The timer for canceling a job that
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Disabled
Enabled
0
0
0
was interrupted due to removal
of the key counter is valid
DIPSW27
7
Scanner function
Yes
No
0
0
0
0
Automatic copying reserva-
*30
*30
0
0
0
Not provided
Provided
0
0
0
Permit
Prohibit
0
0
0
tion function
1
Paper exit function with face
up in the double sided copy
mode (corresponding to letter head paper)
2
Permission SW for copying
double sided special paper
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
4
Image rotation control when
using scanner
Only those
smaller than A4/
Those larger
than A4/letter
0
0
0
letter rotate
also rotate
*31
*31
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
6
7
DIPSW28
0
1
4
5
DIPSW29
Density setting when the
printer toner save function is
selected
1
aration output of user paper
(tray)
4
*37
*38
ment in platen memory copy
Selection of the transfer/sep-
3
*38
Image leading edge adjust-
0
2
*37
Leading edge position
adjustment at image rotation
*32
*33
TSL control of user paper
*32
*33
(tray)
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
1
1
1
1-19
3
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW29
7
Functions
Operation of the rear separa-
0
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Not provided
Provided
0
0
0
*34
*34
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
tion claw while in single-side
printing
DIPSW30
0
1
2
3
4
DIPSW31
Selection of the transfer/separation output of user paper
(by-pass)
*35
TSL control of user paper
(by-pass)
*35
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
*36
*36
1
1
1
0
Automatic power on by
RADF operation during the
power save mode
1
Use of E-mail
Permit
Prohibit
0
0
0
2
Use of scan to FTP
Permit
Prohibit
0
0
0
3
Use of BOX
Permit
Prohibit
0
0
0
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
No function
Function
1
1
1
provided
provided
6
DIPSW32
SMB function setting
7
8.5 x 14 is detected for F4
size
F4
8.5 x 14
0
0
0
0
Mode intended for automatic deletion of document
Except files
received by PC-Fax
Delete all
0
0
0
1
Konica Minolta Scan Distrib-
No function
Function
0
0
0
provided
provided
No function
Function
1
1
1
provided
provided
—
—
0
0
0
MMR
MH
0
0
0
utor setting
2
3
4
LDAP function setting
—
TiFF encoding system used when
Scan To E-mail is employed
5
—
—
—
1
1
1
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
file name
user name
0
0
0
7
3
Job list name switch
1-20
25 MODE
DIPSW33
0
Functions
0
*39
Number of punch hole
1
*39
1
2
Notice of the paper feed tray
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
0
0
0
0
0
0
Invalid
Valid
0
0
0
Invalid
Valid
0
0
0
“*” Displayed
Displayed
0
0
0
when a coin bender is being
used with APS prohibited
3
Change-over of the display
of FAX transmitting address
4
Change-over of the display
of BOX related list password
DIPSW34
normally
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
KRDS/RDmode change (7145)
KRDS
RDmode
0
0
0
Valid
Invalid
0
0
0
Not set
Set
0 *a
0 *a
0*a
*40
*40
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
7
Mixplex function setting
0
System OFF setting when the
system is shut off or SW2 (subpower) is turned off
1
4
FS-114 paper exit tray position
Printing starts when paper is
Permit
Prohibit
0
0
0
provided in the FS-114 saddle
5
Correspondence to OpenPrint
Not corresponding
Corresponding
0
0
0
6
USB Print
Not corresponding
Corresponding
1
1
1
7
Overlay void setting
Not set
Set
0
0
0
(7235/7228/7222 only)
DIPSW35
*a
0
Paper exit to entire A5R finisher tray
Prohibit
Permit
0
0
0
1
—
—
—
0
0
0
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222, default value is “1”.
1-21
3
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW40
3
0
Functions
0
Use of SNMP
1
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Permit
Prohibit
0
0
0
1
—
—
—
1
1
1
2
—
—
—
0
0
0
3
—
—
—
0
0
0
4
—
—
—
0
0
0
5
—
—
—
0
0
0
6
—
—
—
0
0
0
7
—
—
—
0
0
0
1-22
25 MODE
*5
FS-112 stapling upper limit
Mode
1-4
1-3
50 sheets
0
0
45 sheets
0
1
40 sheets
1
0
35 sheets
1
1
SW for decreased toner consumption
Decreasing the developing bias, charging grid
potential by 50V (20 step) in this setting allows
the consumption of toner to be reduced.
Increasing the potential by 50V (20 step)
allows the image density to increase a little.
Mode
*2
Toner level detection (toner supply display)
After the TLD (Toner level sensor) detects the
no toner condition for more than a specified
period of time, this sets a timing for displaying
the message “Please supply toner”.
Mode
4-1
0
Toner consumption
0
1
1
0
1
1
increased (image density increased)
Toner consumption
No adjustment
4-0
0
0
100 effective copies
0
1
200 effective copies
1
0
500 effective copies
1
1
*6
After displaying a message set in DIPSW4-0/1, the count up to which the copy is prohibited
is set.
4-3
4-2
100 effective copies
0
0
400 effective copies
0
1
700 effective copies
1
0
1000 effective copies
1
1
Timing for the polygon motor to stop/start a
low speed rotation
When the setting of the polygon motor is
Condition for stopping copying after toner supply display
Mode
5-5
0
decreased (image density decreased )
0 effective copies
*3
5-6
No adjustment
made for stopping or a low speed rotation, the
motor is shifted into a low speed rotation or
stopping after the elapse of time specified by
this DIPSW. The elapsed time starts either at
one of the following:
• When the warm-up is completed.
• When the final operation of the operation keys
(except the start key)/RADF/tray while in idling.
• When the output of a copy or print job is completed.
Mode
1-23
6-5
6-4
15 seconds
0
0
30 seconds
0
1
60 seconds
1
0
120 seconds
1
1
1
I ADJUSTMENT
*1
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
*7
Setting of the polygon motor for stopping or
*10 Automatic conversion of the APS detected
low speed rotation
paper size (8.5 x 11/A4)
In order to reduce the sound of rotation of the
The paper size detected by the APS is auto-
polygon motor while in idling, it is possible to
matically converted according to the standard
switch the rotation of the polygon motor either
to a low speed rotation or stopping. The timing
shown below before being copied.
for the switching is set based on *6 Timing for
the polygon motor to stop/start a low speed
rotation. When the polygon motor is stopped
or rotating at low speed, the time required for
Mode
7-2
No automatic conversion
0
A4 → 8.5 x 11 (Inch)
1
8.5 x 11 → A4 (Japan, Metric)
the first copy being made is increased.
*11 Switching of non-standard size notice of
Mode
6-7
6-6
No preliminary rotation
(high speed)
0
0
platen APSA4 (Japan/Metric), 8.5 x 11 (inch)
When the original size is detected as a non-
Preliminary rotation
(low speed)
0
1
standard size, the switching is made to decide
a copying method: a copy is made forcibly into
Stopping
1
0
the following size or it is made in the size
selected as a non-standard size.
*8
When both the DIPSW 7-3 and 7-4 are 1, the
DIPSW7-4 has preference over 7-3.
Out-of-original auto erasure
When the AMS has been released due to the
original size being not the same as that of the
transfer paper size, this setting is used in the
platen copy to decide whether the out-of-original area is erased or not. This is the same
function as the memory switch function in the
key operator mode. (Switching is not available
in the RADF copy mode.)
Mode
7-0
Out-of-original auto erasure
0
Out-of-original erasure only while in
APS/AMS
1
*9
7-3
Copied in the size selected
0
Copied forcibly as A4 (Japan, Metric)
/8.5 x 11 (Inch)
1
Mode
7-4
Copied in the size selected
0
Copied forcibly as B6 (Japan)
/A5 (Metric)/5.5 x 8.5 (Inch)
1
*12 Priority tray when APS is released
Automatic re-starting after paper supply
(excluding inch system)
Mode
7-1
Re-starting by turning on the START
0
button
Re-starting by setting the tray (auto-
Mode
1
matic)
1-24
This setting sets the tray selection used when
APS is set OFF from key-operator mode.
Mode
8-6
8-5
8-4
No priority
0
0
0
Main-body upper tray
0
0
1
Main-body lower tray
0
1
0
DB upper tray
0
1
1
DB lower tray
1
0
0
25 MODE
Mode
*17 Judging level in the out-of-original auto era9-3
9-2
9-1
9-0
No limit
0
0
0
0
1 sheet
0
0
0
1
3 sheets
0
0
1
0
5 sheets
0
0
1
1
9 sheets
0
1
0
0
10 sheets
0
1
0
1
20 sheets
0
1
1
0
30 sheets
0
1
1
sure mode
This setting is for the application function of
the out-of-original auto erasure mode. When
the out-of-original auto erasure is set to “automatic” in the key operator mode, a threshold
value is set for detection of the original area.
Mode
13-7
13-6
Thick original
0
0
1
Normal original
0
1
1
0
1
1
50 sheets
1
0
0
0
Corresponding to
99 sheets
1
0
0
1
hybrid lights
—
*14 Switching of message
Mode
*18 Operation if stapling is not possible
9-7
9-6
0
0
The positioning of staples is made against the
image of an original. Since stapling is
Please insert copy card
0
1
Please insert coin
1
0
restricted only to the front or rear of the leading edge (the main body side of the paper
Please insert key
counter
exited) of the transfer paper, or to both of
these two positions, stapling may be some-
*15 Summer time setting
Mode
10-3 10-2 10-1 10-0
0 minute
0
0
0
0
30 minutes
0
0
1
1
60 minutes
0
1
1
0
90 minutes
1
0
0
1
120 minutes
1
1
0
0
150 minutes
1
1
1
1
ing operation is prohibited when PM is
attained
If the setting of the copy prohibition when
DIPSW8-2 reaches PM is “1”, the copying
operation is stopped after the following PM
count is reached.
12-5
12-4
12-3
1000 copies
0
0
0
2000 copies
0
0
1
3000 copies
0
1
0
4000 copies
0
1
1
5000 copies
1
0
0
This SW is used to set the operation when
stapling is not allowed.
Mode
*16 Setting of the number of copies until the copy-
Mode
times unavailable (when stapling is not
allowed) depending on the position specified.
1-25
14-1
14-0
Auto cancel
0
0
Auto switching to 1position stapling
0
1
Inhibit
1
0
Forced 2-position stapling mode operation
1
1
*19 Operation when one position stapling is not
available
Mode
14-5
14-4
Auto cancel
0
0
Auto cancel
0
1
Inhibit
1
0
Forced 1-position stapling mode operation
1
1
I ADJUSTMENT
*13 Copy quantity limit
25 MODE
*20 Operation when two position stapling is not
*23 F4 size setting
I ADJUSTMENT
available
Mode
Mode
17-2
17-1
17-0
14-7
14-6
8.5 x 13
0
0
0
Auto cancel
0
0
8.25 x 13
0
0
1
Auto cancel
0
1
8.125 x 13
0
1
0
Inhibit
1
0
8 x 13
0
1
1
Forced 2-position sta-
1
1
8.5 x 13.5
1
0
0
pling mode operation
*24 Job interruption/termination operation when
*21 Fixing temperature at low power mode
the key counter is being drawn out
Set the fixing temperature while in the low
power mode.
In the case of the 7145
Mode
outputting a print job.
The details of the operation can be changed
by the combination of this setting and the
16-1
16-0
155°C
0
0
120°C
0
1
Mode
21-4
85°C
1
0
DIPSW1-0:0 Terminate by stopping
0
1
paper feed
DIPSW1-0:1 Clear jamming imme-
85°C
1
DIPSW1:0 setting.
diately
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
16-1
16-0
DIPSW1-0:0 Interrupt by stopping
paper feed
70°C
0
0
DIPSW1-0:1 Clear jamming imme-
120°C
0
1
diately
120°C
1
0
70°C
1
1
Mode
Mode
In this setting, the SW is used to change the
timing for the dot diameter adjustment.
Mode
The power is off for
16-7
0
1
1
0
1
1
• In the printer/FAX mode, only the
total counter counts up
(7145)
At all times (Every time
SW2 is turned on)
Non
(7235/7228/7222)
1-26
21-6
0
counter and the key counter
counter and the key counter count
up
0
0
Normal operation
Counting up for both the total
• While in copying, both the total
16-6
more than 8 hours with
humidity over 60%
The power is off for
more than 8 hours
1
*25 Switching of the count-up function
*22 Dot diameter adjustment control
3
This is to set the operation of the copier when
1
25 MODE
*30 Automatic copy reservation function
in the platen auto start mode
When this setting is “1”, the copy reservation
The setting of the automatic selection of auto-
screen automatically appears after the end of
start is available for the memory switch setting
the original read operation. Also, the job set-
in the key operator mode. When this setting is
in the following condition, a setting can be
tings are the same as the settings for the previous job.
made to decide if the paper is automatically
fed from the bypass tray.
• The setting of the automatic selection of autostart is on with the original size (platen) detected
Mode
27-0
Do not use
0
Use
1
as non-standard.
Mode
*31 Density setting when the toner save function
22-1
Auto start does not take place
0
Auto start takes place when the
1
is selected in the printer driver screen
When “Toner saving mode” is on in the printer
driver, the print density is set in the range
bypass tray is selected
shown below.
This setting is effective only for the PCL and
*27 Printer paper size automatic conversion
PS versions.
The paper size specified by the print job is
automatically changed and output according
to the following standard.
Mode
Mode
27-7
27-6
27-5
Standard
0
0
0
-4 (Lighter)
0
0
1
24-2
24-3
-3
0
1
0
No conversion
0
0
-2
0
1
1
Inch → Metric
0
1
-1
1
0
0
Metric → Inch
1
0
+1
1
0
1
Non (not allowed to
1
1
+2
1
1
0
+3 (Darker)
1
1
1
select)
*32 Selection of the transfer/separation output of
the user paper (tray)
This SW is used to set the transfer/separation
output which is applicable when the specified
paper is selected in the “Paper type setting” in
the key operator mode.
Mode
Plain paper (Japan)
*29 Switching of the job stop with no process stop
The SW is used to decide if a process stop is
made at the breaks between continuous two
or more jobs reserved.
Mode
29-2
29-1
29-0
0
0
0
Plain paper (Inch)
0
0
1
Plain paper (Metric)
0
1
0
Thick paper
0
1
1
Thin paper
1
0
0
Recycled paper
1
0
1
24-7
No process stop
0
Process stop
1
1-27
1
I ADJUSTMENT
*26 Automatic feed of non-standard size originals
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
*33 TSL control of user paper (tray)
*35 TSL control of user paper (bypass feed)
This SW is used to set the TSL control which
When selecting the bypass tray on the copy
is applicable when the specified paper is
basic screen, this SW is used to set the TSL
selected in the “Paper type setting” in the key
control which is applicable when selecting the
operator mode.
When this SW is used to select the “Switched
user paper for “Special paper setting” or the
specified paper for “Paper type setting” in the
according to the environment”, the switching
key operator mode.
is made between “Normal control” and “All off”
When this SW is used to select the “Switched
according to the environment.
according to the environment”, the switching
• “Switched according to the environment” performs the TSL control according to the humidity
detected by the main body HUM1 (Humidity sensor).
Mode
is made between “Normal control” and “All off”
according to the environment.
• “Switched according to the environment” performs the TSL controle according to the humidity
detected by the main body HUM1 (Humidity sen-
29-4
29-3
Normal control
0
0
All off
0
1
Mode
30-4
30-3
0
Normal control
0
0
All off
0
1
Switched according to
the environment
1
0
Switched according to
the environment
1
sor).
*34 Selection of the transfer/separation output of
user paper (bypass feed)
When selecting the bypass tray on the copy
basic screen, this SW is used to set the trans-
*36 Automatic power on by the RADF operation
fer/separation output which is applicable when
selecting the user specified paper for “Special
In this setting, when the following operation is
made during the power save mode, the power
paper setting” or the specified paper for
“Paper type setting” in the key operator mode.
is automatically turned on.
• When the original is set in RADF (when the
Mode
3
30-2
30-1
30-0
Plain paper (Japan)
0
0
0
Plain paper (Inch)
0
0
1
Plain paper (Metric)
0
1
0
Thick paper
0
1
1
Thin paper
1
0
0
Recycled paper
1
0
1
during the power save mode
PS301 (No original sensor) is turned off).
• When the platen/RADF is opened (when PS15
(APS timing sensor) is turned off).
• When the platen/RADF is closed (when PS15
(APS timing sensor) is turned on).
Mode
1-28
31-0
Disabled
0
Enabled
1
25 MODE
*37
While rotating image during copying 1-2
I ADJUSTMENT
mode, leading edge of the 2nd side shifts 3 to
4mm. This dipswitch is to adjust that shift.
Mode
28-3 28-2 28-1 28-0
+0mm
0
0
0
0
+0.5mm
0
0
0
1
-0.5mm
1
0
0
1
+3.5mm
0
1
1
1
-3.5mm
1
1
1
1
*38
In platen copy mode, the paper exit direction
is opposite between normal copy and memory
copy. Then the image position is not the
same.
This amount of gaps is adjusted by this
dipswitch.
Mode
+0mm
28-7 28-6 28-5 28-4
0
0
0
0
+0.5mm
-0.5mm
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
+3.5mm
-3.5mm
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*39
When using FS-113 (FS-114), number of
punch holes can be set independently from
engine specifications.
Mode
33-1
33-0
Default
2-hole only
0
0
0
1
2-hole or 3-hole is selectable
4-hole only
1
1
0
1
*40
FS-114 paper exit tray position
34-3
34-2
34-1
Undefined
Mode
0
0
0
Tray 1
0
0
1
Tray 2
0
1
0
Tray 3
0
1
1
Folding/Stitch-and-fold
1
0
0
tray
1-29
3
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.3
PM Count Setting
Note:
• When pressing the [RETURN] key without press-
This function resets the PM count and sets the PM
ing the [SET] key, the PM count start date is not
cycle. Care should be taken to reset the PM count
changed. It is necessary to reset the count again
properly. The PM count/cycle menu includes the fol-
for inputting the count.
lowing:
[1. PM count resetting]
[2. PM cycle setting]
7.3.3 Setting of PM cycle
[3. Counter clear]
Set PM Cycle as follows:
7.3.1 PM count reset
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
Select whether to reset the count in the PM count
reset screen.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. PM COUNT] key.
3. “PM Count/Cycle Menu screen”
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
Press the [2. PM CYCLE Set] key.
4. “PM Cycle set screen”
Enter PM cycle from the numeric keys. Enter
upper 3-digit (hundred thousand, ten thousand,
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. PM COUNT] key.
3. “PM Count/Cycle Menu screen”
Press the [1. PM count reset] key.
thousand) only.
5. Press the [SET] key to enter a PM cycle that has
4. “PM Count Reset screen”
Press the [YES] key.
been entered.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the PM
count/cycle menu screen.
The PM count is reset.
Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key.
The PM count is not reset and returns to the PM
count/cycle menu screen.
7.3.4 Counter clear
Reference:
• The operation here is the same as [8. Counter
7.3.2 Entering PM count start date
clear] of the “36 mode menu screen”.
When resetting the PM count, it is necessary to
input the start date, and the screen below will
appear automatically.
The counter must be cleared whenever the drum or
fixing parts/unit is replaced.
A. Procedure
Select the [2. PM Count] and press the [3. Counter
clear] key from the “25 mode menu screen” to dis-
1. “PM Count Starting Date Input screen”
Enter a PM count start date from the numeric
play the counter clear screen.
Following menu options are available from this
keys.
2. Press the [SET] key to enter the data that has
screen.
• Drum related counter (Drum counter, Drum drive
been entered.
3. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the PM
counter).
• Fixing related counter (Fixing web counter).
count/cycle menu screen.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. PM Count] key.
3
1-30
25 MODE
3. “PM count/cycle setting screen”
Press the key corresponding to the item to be
cleared.
5. Message in the message display area will con-
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [Data collection] key.
firm if you really want to clear the item. Press
the [YES] key. When the item is cleared, the
3. “Data collection menu screen”
“Counter clear screen” will be restored.
4. “Data collection screen”
6. When clearing another counter, repeat above
steps 3 and 4.
Press the [Count data] key.
Change the data number with the arrow key.
Pressing [NEXT] key enables display of next
7. Press the [RETURN] key twice to return to the
“25 mode menu screen”.
7.4
I ADJUSTMENT
B. Checking method of the collected data
Press the [3. Counter clear] key.
4. “Counter clear screen”
data collection screen.
5. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the data
collection menu screen.
Data Collection
• The data is displayed at the line 2 in the message display area as “Data number (No.): Count
value (00000000)”.
This function enables viewing of the various data
• Press and hold the arrow key to display the next
items continuously.
recorded in the machine. Also, it is possible for the
collected data to be checked by KRDS and man-
Note:
agement listing. The data collection menu includes
the following:
• In order to check the collected data 2 to 4, be
sure to make preparations given in “Collected
data list” in advance.
• Count data collection
• Area data collection start (Date count data)
A. Data that can be checked
No.
1
Classification
Copy count of each
Pre-peration
—
paper size
RADF paper pas2
sage count
Count of JAM occur-
Enter the 25 mode
3
rence by each point
Copy count of each
↓
Select
4
mode
Count of SC occur-
[1. Software SW]
↓
rence
Set the address to
8-7:1 (Note)
Note:
• When the DIPSW8-7 is set to 0, the checking of
the collected data is limited only to No. 1.
1-31
3
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
C. Data collection details
(1) Data collection 1
a.
Copy count by each size
Classification
Size No.
Paper size for destination
KRDS (B1,
Japan
Metric
Inch
B6, B7, B8)
A3
A3
11 x 17
01
Copy count of
0
each paper size
1
B4
B4
8.5 x 14
02
2
A4/A4R
A4/A4R
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R
03
3
B5/B5R
B5/B5R
5.5 x 8.5
04
4
A5
A5
—
05
5
B6
F4
—
06
6
7
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R
—
—
—
A4/A4R
07
08
8
Metric
Special
Metric
Special
Inch
Special
09
9
Postcard
—
b.
Scanner and counting of the number of FAX scans
Classification
Count of the No. of
scan image planes
c.
—
0A
Maximum count number : 99,999,999
Size No.
Feed mode
10
Other than 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, A3 and B4
11
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, A3 and B4
KRDS (BA)
01
00
Maximum count number : 99,999,999
Count RADF original feed quantities
Classification
RADF paper
Size No.
15
Feed mode
ADF mode original feed counter
passage count
16
17
RADF mode original feed counter
ADF mixed original mode original feed counter
18
RADF mixed original mode original feed counter
08
Maximum count number : 99,999,999
1-32
KRDS (F0)
00
01
07
25 MODE
(2) Data collection 2
No.
a.
44
72-18 FS-113
2C
KRDS (J0)
45
72-19 FS-112
2D
72-21 FS-112/113
2E
No.
Jam
Point
Jam
Point
KRDS (J0)
00
10-0
By-pass
00
46
01
11-0
Upper tray
01
47
72-23 FS-112
2F
72-81 FS-112/113
30
49
72-82 FS-113
31
02
03
12-0
13-0
Lower tray
DB upper tray
02
03
48
04
05
14-0
16-1
DB lower tray
Paper feed jam
04
05
50
72-83
32
06
15-0
LT tray
06
51
52
72-25 FS-114
72-43
33
34
07
16-2
LT tray
07
08
—
08
53
54
72-84
72-85
35
36
09
30-0
Conveyance jam
09
55
—
37
10
11
31-0
—
Conveyance jam
—
0A
0B
—
:
12
13
—
32-0
79
80
—
—
—
—
4F
50
Fixing unit conveyance jam
14
15
—
—
—
—
—
—
0C
0E
0F
75-10 IT-101
75-11
10
11
18
19
—
97-1
12
13
20
21
97-2
92-0
14
15
22
23
75-12 IT-101
75-13
16
17
24
25
61-1
61-2
DF-318/320
18
19
26
27
—
62-1
—
DF-318/320
1A
1B
28
29
62-2
62-3
1C
1D
30
31
62-4
62-5
1E
1F
32
33
—
63-1
34
35
63-2
63-3
22
23
36
37
63-4
—
—
24
25
38
39
—
—
—
—
26
27
40
41
—
—
—
—
28
29
42
43
—
ADU conveyance jam
—
DF-318/320
72-16 FS-112/113
72-17
Maximum count number : 999,999
0D
16
17
I ADJUSTMENT
Jam occurrence count by factor
(3) Data collection 3
a. Copy count of each mode
No.
20
21
2A
2B
1-33
Contents
KRDS (F1)
00
Platen single side → single side
00
01
02
—
RADF double side → single side
01
02
03
RADF double side → double side
03
04
05
RADF single side → single side
RADF single side → double side
04
05
06
07
Finisher (Staple mode)
Finisher (Sort mode)
06
07
08
09
Finisher (Group mode)
Finisher (Number of stapling)
08
09
10
11
Life-size
Fixed ratio E3(1.41/2.00)
0A
0B
12
13
Fixed ratio E2(1.22/1.55)
Fixed ratio E1(1.15/1.29)
0C
0D
14
15
Fixed ratio R1(0.86/0.77)
Fixed ratio R2(0.82/0.65)
0E
0F
16
17
Fixed ratio R3(0.71/0.50)
User set magnification
10
11
18
19
Zoom
Maximum zoom
12
13
20
21
Minimum zoom
AMS mode
14
15
22
23
APS mode
AE mode
16
17
24
Interrupt mode
18
3
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
No.
KRDS (F1)
No.
By-pass feed mode
19
59
26
Book copy mode
1A
27
Frame erase mode
1B
28
Fold erase mode
29
Image shift mode
30
Reduction image shift mode
Contents
KRDS (F1)
Repeat mode
3B
60
Reverse image mode
3C
61
Non-image area erase mode
3D
1C
62
Increase contrast mode
3E
1D
63
Auto layout mode
3F
1E
64
—
40
31
—
1F
65
Number of copies in rotation
41
32
33
—
Number of paper feed quantities
20
21
66
Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 1
Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 2
42
43
34
at intersheet mode
—
Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 3
Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 4
44
45
67
68
22
69
35
Number of feed in the OHP mode
(blank paper interleave)
23
70
71
36
Number of paper feed quantities
at mixed original mode
24
72
37
Access number of the JOB memory call
mode (Number of pressing the ∗ button)
25
38
Number of times the auto low
power mode is used
26
39
Number of starting copy with
copy quantity is set to 1
27
77
Copy quantity in the non-standard size mode
4D
40
Number of starting copy with copy
quantity is set between 2 and 5
28
78
Stamping/overlay mode copying count
79
Flip side 2 mode copying count
4E
4F
41
Number of starting copy with copy
quantity is set between 6 and 10
29
80
Number of copies in the punch mode
42
Number of starting copy with copy
quantity is set to 11 or above
2A
82
Number of copies in the thick
paper 1 copy mode
52
43
Number of starting copy in intersheet mode
2B
83
Number of copies in the thick
paper 2 copy mode
53
—
2C
2D
84
Number of copies in the plain
paper mode
54
44
45
3
Contents
25
Photo mode
—
—
46
47
73
Finisher, Number of stapling (front)
Finisher, Number of stapling (rear)
48
49
74
75
Booklet mode copying count
OHP mode (without doubled
4A
4B
76
sheet) copying count
Z-fold mode copying count
4C
81
—
50
51
46
Passage count in the ADF thick
paper mode
2E
85
Number of copies in the thin
paper mode
55
47
48
Verti./Horiz. zoom mode
Memory copy mode
2F
30
86
Number of copies in the recycled
paper mode
56
49
50
Proof copy mode
Text/Photo mode
31
32
87
Number of copies in the user
specified paper mode
57
51
52
Text mode
User set density mode
33
34
53
Number of feed in the OHP mode
(copy interleave)
35
54
55
—
—
36
37
56
57
Cover insertion mode
Chapter mode
38
39
58
2 in 1, 4 in 1, 8 in 1 mode
3A
Maximum count number : 99,999,999
1-34
(4) Data collection 4
a.
No.
Count number of SC occurrence
No.
Error code
Classification
Error code
Classification
KRDS
E1 00
(decimal number)
Main code Sub code
KRDS
(decimal number)
043
E56-1
Image control
Main code Sub code
044
E56-2
communication error
001
10-1
Communication error E0 00
045
E56-3
02
002
10-2
01
046
E56-4
03
003
—
02
047
E56-5
03
048
E56-6
Operation control
05
section system error
06
—
Paper feed tray error
01
04
004
18-1
005
006
18-2
18-3
04
05
049
E56-7
050
E56-8
007
18-4
06
051
E56-9
08
052
053
E56-10
—
09
E0 2A
054
055
60-1
60-9
056
057
60-11
67-3
058
059
70-1
70-9
060
061
70-11
77-2
31
32
062
063
77-3
77-5
33
E0 34
064
065
77-6
77-11
35
36
066
067
77-16
80-1
37
38
068
069
80-2
80-3
070
071
80-4
80-5
072
073
81-1
81-2
074
075
81-3
E88-1
Image processing
076
E89-1
System control board
0B
077
078
E89-2
E89-3
communication error
0C
0D
079
080
E89-4
E89-5
0E
0F
081
082
E89-6
E87-1
10
Print controller error
083
084
52-5
86-2
Fan lock error
Fax board error
085
86-3
008
26-1
L detection error
07
009
010
28-1
28-2
High voltage power
error
08
09
011
012
28-3
34-1
High fixing temperature
0B
013
014
34-2
35-1
abnormality
Low fixing tempera-
0C
0D
015
016
35-2
35-3
017
018
35-4
35-5
10
11
019
020
35-6
35-7
Low fixing tempera- E0 12
ture abnormality
13
021
022
35-8
35-9
14
15
023
024
35-10
36-1
16
17
025
026
36-2
36-3
027
028
—
40-1
029
030
40-9
41-1
031
032
46-1
46-8
0A
ture abnormality
Fixing sensor error
0E
0F
18
19
Scanning system
error
Image processing
system error
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
033
034
46-10
46-11
20
21
035
036
—
49-4
—
Image processing
22
23
037
038
49-6
51-4
system error
Motor speed error
24
25
039
040
51-5
51-6
041
042
52-1
52-2
26
27
Fan lock error
28
29
1-35
07
—
RADF error
2B
2C
2D
2E
Finisher error
Finisher error
Parameter memory
board abnormality
2F
30
39
3A
3B
3C
Flash ROM error
3D
3E
3F
E1 0A
system error
11
E0 40
41
42
3
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
25 MODE
No.
Error code
Classification
KRDS
No.
I ADJUSTMENT
(decimal number)
Main code Sub code
086
E86-04
Error code
Classification
KRDS
E0 5E
(decimal number)
Main code Sub code
Fax board error
E1 12
122
85-1
Network system
abnormality
087
E86-06
Fax error (System
E0 43
123
85-2
088
E86-88
control board side) E1 13
124
85-3
5F
089
E86-89
14
125
E85-11
E1 1B
60
090
—
—
15
126
E85-12
1C
091
E86-91
Fax error (System
16
127
E85-13
1D
092
—
—
093
E86-20
Fax error (Fax board side)
094
22-1
Machine internal
temperature
095
096
23-1
26-2
Drum periphery
L detection
097
098
26-3
28-4
—
099
43-1
Scanning system error
100
52-3
Fan lock error
101
36-4
Broken fixing sensor
102
52-6
Fan lock error
103
104
87-2
87-3
105
106
—
52-4
—
Fan lock error
107
108
86-7
86-8
109
110
control board side)
128
E85-14
1E
17
129
E85-15
1F
18
130
E85-16
20
E0 44
131
132
E85-17
E85-18
21
22
45
46
133
134
E85-20
E85-21
23
24
47
48
135
136
E85-22
E85-23
25
26
49
4A
137
138
52-9
81-4
Fan lock error
Flash ROM error
4B
4C
139
82-1
Document manager error
140
82-2
Print controller error
4D
Print controller error E0 4E
141
142
E82-10
E89-80
4F
50
143
144
E89-81
82-3
CPU hang up-2
29
I-FAX system error E0 65
Fax board error
51
52
145
146
E82-50
E82-51
E1 2A
2B
18-5
26-4
Paper feed tray error
53
High voltage power error
54
147
148
E82-52
77-13
2C
E0 66
111
112
51-2
52-7
Motor speed error
Fan lock error
55
56
149
150
77-14
77-22
67
68
113
114
52-8
E56-12
57
151
152
77-23
77-24
69
6A
115
116
E56-13
77-1
1A
E0 58
153
154
77-25
77-26
6B
6C
117
118
77-4
77-12
59
5A
155
156
77-27
77-28
6D
6E
119
120
77-17
77-54
5B
5C
157
158
77-29
E85-24
Network system
6F
E1 2D
121
77-55
5D
159
160
E85-25
52-10
abnormality
Fan lock error
2E
E0 70
161
E85-30
Network system
abnormality
E1 2F
System control board E1 19
communication error
Finisher error
CPU hang up-1
Finisher error
E0 61
62
63
64
E1 27
28
Maximum count number : 9,999
3
1-36
D. Starting periodic date collection
Reset the periodic data from the setting peri-
7.5
Copy Count for Each Part to
be Replaced
odic collection start date. Make a date that this
operation is performed as a new periodic col-
Perform the copy count display, count clear, limit
lection start date.
The periodic data can be checked with the
value setting and arbitrarily parts to be replaced set-
KRDS/RDmode (7145) and management list.
arbitrarily).
ting to the data of the parts to be replaced (fixed/
Each count value can be check with the manage-
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
ment list of 36 Mode and the KRDS/RDmode
2. “25 mode menu screen”
counter menu:
• Copy Count for each fixed replacement part
(7145). The following are included in the part
Press the [3. Collecting data] key.
3. “Data collection menu screen”
Press the [2. Starting periodic data collection]
• Copy Count for each arbitrarily replacement part
7.5.1 Copy count by parts to be replaced (fixed)
key.
4. “Starting periodic data collection screen”
Press the [YES] key to start the periodic data
Set the parts name of the fixed parts to be replaced
collection.
Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then data col-
(fixed), parts No. and copy count display, and count
reset.
lection start date is not reset and returns to the
data colleciton menu screen.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [4. Parts counter] key.
3. “Parts counter menu screen”
Press the [1. Count of parts (Fixed)] key.
4. “Copy count screen by parts to be replaced
(fixed)”
Press the arrow keys to select the data.
5. Press the [Count reset] key.
6. “Count reset screen by parts to be replaced
(fixed)”
Press the [YES] key to clear the copy count.
Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the copy
count is not reset and returns to the copy count
screen by parts to be replaced.
1-37
3
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
25 MODE
B. List of parts to be replaced (fixed)
I ADJUSTMENT
No.
01
Unit
Fixing heat roller
16
00
24
Fixing pressure roller
17
ing charging
25
Fixing cleaner assembly
18
corona unit)
26
Heat insulating sleeve/A
19
27
Heat insulating sleeve/B
1A
assembly
28
Fixing idler gear/B
Drum unit
02
29
Transfer/separation
corona unit
03
30
Fixing claw
1D
31
32
Fixing roller holder/U
Fixing roller holder/L
1E
1F
33
34
Fixing sensor
Fuse mounting plate
20
21
35
assembly
Fixing heater lamp/1
22
Fixing heater lamp/2
Paper feed roller
23
24
Feed roller
Double feed preven-
2C
25
tion roller
Paper exit roller/A
26
Paper feed rubber
Feed rubber
29
2A
Double feed prevention rubber
2B
DC (includ-
Drum
Cleaning blade
Transfer/
separation
01
05
Developing unit
Developer
04
06
07
Main body
Developing unit
Ozone filter
05
06
41
42
Suction filter/A
Filter cover assembly
Main body
paper feed
(Tray 1) Paper feed
rubber
07
unit
(Tray 1) Feed ubber
(Tray 1) Double feed
08
09
36
37
LT-203
12
rubber
(Tray 2) Feed ubber
0B
45
DB-211/411
15
16
17
DB-211
18
19
20
21
22
By-pass
feed unit
(Tray 3) Paper feed
rubber
0D
(Tray 3) Feed ubber
(Tray 3) Double feed
0E
0F
prevention rubber
(Tray 4) Paper feed
10
rubber
(Tray 4) Feed ubber
11
(Tray 4) Double feed
prevention rubber
12
Double feed prevention roller
13
Paper feed roller
Feed roller
14
15
DF-318/320
FS-112
43
44
0C
—
40
0A
(Tray 2) Double feed
prevention rubber
Fixing unit
38
39
11
13
3
27
28
prevention rubber
(Tray 2) Paper feed
14
KRDS
(Z1)
KRDS
corona
09
10
Parts name
23
03
08
Unit
(Z1)
02
04
Parts name
No.
1-38
2
1C
25 MODE
Copy count by parts to be replaced
(Named; arbitrarily)
B. List of parts to be replaced (arbitrarily)
No.
Set the limit value for the parts to be replaced, parts
No., parts name setting, copy count display and
count reset.
A. Copy count display and count reset by parts
to be replaced
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [4. Parts counter ] key.
3. “Parts counter menu screen”
Press the [2. Count of parts (Named)] key.
4. “Copy count screen by parts to be replaced
(named)”
Press the arrow key to select the data to be set
or changed.
Count timing
KRDS
(G0)
00
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
00
01
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
01
02
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
02
03
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
03
04
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
04
05
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
05
06
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
06
07
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
07
08
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
08
09
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
09
10
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
0A
0B
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
0C
0D
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
0E
0F
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
5. The following items can be set below:
• “COUNT RESET” : To clear the copy count.
16
• “LIMIT SET” : To enter the limit value (6-digit).
• “P/N SET” : To enter the parts number (9-digit).
17
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
18
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
19
When paper is fed from LT-203
12
13
20
21
When paper is fed from by-pass tray
When paper is fed from tray 1
14
15
22
23
When paper is fed from tray 2
When paper is fed from tray 3
16
17
24
25
When paper is fed from tray 4
When paper is fed from ADU
18
19
26
27
When paper is exited from main body
1A
When RADF is read (1 count each for front and back)
1B
28
When RADF is read (1 count each for front and back)
When RADF is read (1 count each for front and back)
1C
1D
• “Parts name” : To enter the parts name.
6. Press the [RETURN] key, then return to the
“Copy screen by parts to be replaced”.
29
1-39
I ADJUSTMENT
7.5.2
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
C. Count resetting method
Note:
• When pressing the [RETURN] key without press-
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete without
changing a new limit value and returns to the
Press the [4. Parts counter ] key.
3. “Parts counter menu screen”
copy count screen by parts to be replaced
(Named).
Press the [2. Count of parts (Named)] key.
4. “Copy count screen by parts to be replaced
Reference:
• The right side of the limit value will be marked “∗”
if the copy count exceeds its limit value.
(named)”
Press the arrow keys to select the data.
5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key.
6. “Count reset screen by parts to be replaced
(named)”
Press the [YES] key to clear the copy count that
E. Parts No. setting
Enter the new parts No. (9-digit) from the
numeric keys and alphabet keys on the screen.
has been selected.
Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the copy
count is not reset and returns to the “Copy count
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
screen by parts to be replaced (named)”.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [4. Parts counter ] key.
D. Count limit setting method
Enter the new limit value from the numeric keys
on the screen.
3. “Parts counter menu screen”
Press the [2. Count of parts (Named)] key.
4. “Copy count screen by parts to be replaced
(named)”
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
Press the arrow key to select the data to be set
or changed.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [4. Parts counter ] key.
5. Press the [P/N SET] key.
6. “Part No. setting screen by parts to be replaced
3. “Parts counter menu screen”
Press the [2. Count of parts (Named)] key.
(named)”
Enter new parts No. using the numeric and
4. “Copy count screen by parts to be replaced
(named)”
alphabet keys.
7. Press the [SET] key to enter the limit value that
Press the arrow key to select the data to be set
or changed.
has been entered.
8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the copy
5. Press the [LIMIT SET] key.
6. “Copy count limit setting screen by parts to be
replaced (named)”
Enter new value using the numeric keys.
count screen by parts to be replaced (named).
Note:
• When pressing the [RETURN] key without press-
7. Press the [SET] key to enter the limit value that
has been entered.
ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete without
changing a new parts No. and returns to the copy
8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the copy
count screen by parts to be replaced (named).
count screen by parts to be replaced (Named).
1-40
25 MODE
Parts name setting
Enter the new parts name from the keys on the
screen.
There are three screen in the input screen and
are changed with the arrow key:
• Alphabet (a capital letter), numeric number
• Alphabet (a small letter), numeric number
• Symbol, numeric number
The key arrangement can be changed by pressing the [Keyboard] key in the alphanumeric
(uppercase letter/lowercase letter), symbol and
data input screen.
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [4. Parts counter ] key.
3. “Parts counter menu screen”
Press the [2. Count of parts (Named)] key.
4. “Copy count screen by parts to be replaced
(named)”
Press the arrow key to select the data to be set
or changed.
5. Press the [P/N SET] key.
6. “Parts name setting screen by parts to be
replaced (named)”
Enter new parts name using the keys on the
screen.
7. Press the [OK] key to enter the parts name that
has been entered and return to the copy count
screen by parts to be replaced (Named).
Note:
• When pressing the [CANCEL] key without pressing the [OK] key, the setting is completed without
setting a parts name and returns to the copy
count screen by parts to be replaced (Named).
7.6
Password Setting
The following passwords are set.
• Key operator password (8-digits): Password to
enter key operator mode when security
enhancement is enabled.
• User account (EKC) master key code (8 digits):
An EKC master key code that is required when
entering various EKC setting modes.
• Weekly timer password (4 digits): A weekly timer
password that is required when entering various
weekly timer setting modes.
• CE password (8-digits): Password for CE to
access service modes when security enhancement is enabled.
A.
1.
2.
3.
•
•
•
•
4.
Procedure
Enter the 25 Mode.
Press the [5. Password setting] key.
“Password setting menu screen”
Press the key of an item that you want to set.
[Key Operator Password (8 digits)]
[User account (EKC) master key code (8 digits)]
[Weekly timer Password (4 digits)]
[CE Password (8 digits)]
Input a new password through the numeric keys
and press the [SET] key to update the password.
When the following keys are set for the password, each mode can be used without a password.
• “0000” : Weekly timer Password
• “00000000”: User account (EKC) master key
code
5. Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 to set passwords for other items.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the password setting menu screen.
Note:
• When pressing the [RETURN] key without pressing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. However the new password will not be entered and
the password setting menu screen will return.
• Do not use name, your birthday or employee
code number as the password since other people
can easily guess them.
1-41
3
I ADJUSTMENT
F.
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
• The administrator should not inform other people
of the password.
7.7
Setting Phone Number of the
Service Center
7.8
Setting the Serial Number/
the Destination
7.8.1 Setting the serial number
This function is used to display, set and change the
This function displays the telephone and fax num-
serial number of the main body and optional units.
bers (Max. 21 digits) of the service center which is
The serial numbers can be read from KRDS/
indicated on the screen if a service call is required.
RDmode (7145).
This function is not related to KRDS/RDmode
(7145) functions. It is designed only for indicating
the data on the screen.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [7. Serial number] key.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
3. “Serial number setting menu screen”
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [6. Service TEL No.] key.
From among the keys, press the key of an item
you want to change.
3. “Service center number setting screen”
Press either of the [TEL] or [FAX] key which you
4. “Serial number setting screen”
Enter the 9-digit serial number from the alpha-
want to set.
4. Input the telephone number or fax number
bet and numeric keys on the screen and then
press the [SET] key to enter the number that
through the numeric keys and press the [SET]
key to update the telephone number or fax num-
has been entered.
ber.
5. When setting both the telephone number and
Reference:
• Characters input are entered at the least signifi-
the fax number, repeat the procedures 3 and 4
above.
cant digit and displayed while shifting from right to
left.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “25
mode menu screen”.
5. Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 to set the serial
Note:
numbers of other items.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Serial
• When pressing the [RETURN] key without pressing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. However the new phone number will not be entered
and the “25 mode menu screen” will return.
number setting menu screen”.
Note:
• When pressing the [RETURN] key without pressing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. However the new serial number will not be entered
and the “Serial number setting menu screen” will
return.
3
1-42
25 MODE
7.9
Displaying the ROM Version
To change the destination setting, press the [Desti-
Display ROM version mounted to the machine.
nation] key on the serial number setup menu. The
procedure is as follows.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [ROM version] key.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
3. “ROM version display screen”
Press the [7. Serial No.] key.
• System control
• Image control
• Panel control
3. “Serial number setting screen”
Press the [Destination] key.
• Optical control
• Various options
4. “Destination setting screen”
Use the arrow key to select the destination.
If any option is not installed, its relevant position
5. Press the [OK] key to register the setting.
remains blank.
4. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “25
Note:
• If you press [CANCEL] key, the copier will retain
the previous destination setting and return you to
mode menu screen”.
7.10 KRDS Setting
the “Serial number setting screen”.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “25
mode menu screen”.
See the “Manual for KRDS”.
7.11 ISW Setting
Destination codes
Code
Destination
JP Japan
Code
IE
Destination
Ireland
CA
US
Canada
U.S.A
FI
SE
Finland
Sweden
KR
SG
Korea
Singapore
NO
AT
Norway
Austria
MY
CN
Malaysia
China
BE
NL
Belgium
Netherlands
SA
TW
Saudi Arabia
Taiwan
CH
FR
Switzerland
France
ZA
PL
South Africa
Poland
GB
DE
Great Britain
German
PT
ES
Portugal
Spain
EU
NZ
Europe
New Zealand
IT
DK
Italy
Denmark
AU
Australia
See the chapter “ISW”.
7.12 Root Counter Display
The root counter (total counter can be checked in
25 mode on the root counter display.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [11. Root counter] key.
3. “Root counter display screen”
Values of the root counter (total counter) are displayed.
4. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “25
mode screen”.
1-43
I ADJUSTMENT
7.8.2 Setting the destination
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
7.13 Setting Date
7.14 Tray Size Setting
Set the total count start day.
This setting is made when changing the paper size
of the option tray (LT-203). The paper size that can
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
be selected is only A4 and 8.5 x 11.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
Press the [12.Setting date] key.
3. “Setting date screen”
Using the numeric keys, enter the year, month
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [13. Tray size setting] key.
and day in that sequence.
4. Press the [OK] key to return to the “25 mode
3. “Tray size setting screen”
screen”.
Press the arrow key to change the paper size of
the LT-203.
4. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “25
mode menu screen”.
Note:
• Ends when the [CANCEL] key is pressed without
amending the entered date, and returns to the “25
mode menu screen”.
1-44
8. 36 MODE
• Charging grid voltage adjustment
• Developing bias adjustment
8.1
• L detection adjustment
• Automatic toner supply
Setting Method
A special operating mode called “36 Mode” has
• Toner density adjustment
been provided with this machine. This mode
• Dot diameter adjustment
enables adjustment of the various parts.
• LD1 offset adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
• LD2 offset adjustment (7145 only)
A. Procedure
1. Turn the SW2 (sub power switch) OFF when the
• LD1 bias adjustment
• LD2 bias adjustment (7145 only)
3. Press the arrow key until the item you want to
SW1 (main power switch) remains ON.
2. Turn the SW2 ON while pressing 3 and 6 of the
adjust appears. The adjustment screen of the
copy quantity setting buttons.
If security enhancement is enabled, the CE
4. Press the [Preceding screen] of each process
password input request screen appears. In put
adjustment screen to return to “Process adjust-
CE password.
36 mode menu screen appears. At this moment,
ment menu screen”.
selected item is displayed.
the machine turns to 36 mode and normal copy
operation is disabled.
(1) Process adjustment—Charging voltage value
adjustment
3. Press the desired item key on the LCD screen.
Each setting screen will appear.
• Charging voltage value adjustment is inhibited in
the field.
4. Enter data in each setting screen.
5. Press the [RETURN] key to check the data that
(2) Process adjustment—Transfer current adjustment
has been entered.
6. Turn the SW2 OFF to cancel the 36 mode.
• Transfer current adjustment is inhibited in the
field.
7. New data will be effective after restarting.
(3) Process adjustment—Separation (AC) voltage
adjustment
Note:
• If FNS is not installed, the [FNS adj.] key is netted
• Separation (AC) voltage adjustment is inhibited
in the field.
(4) Process adjustment—Separation (DC) voltage
value adjustment
and neither key can be selected.
8.2
Process Adjustment
• Separation (DC) voltage value adjustment is
inhibited in the field.
Adjust the L detection, various high voltages, developer toner density, dot diameter, and the laser off-
(5) Process adjustment—Charging grid voltage
adjustment
set.
• Charging grid voltage adjustment is inhibited in
the field.
A. Procedure
1. Select [1. Process adjustment] in the 36 mode
(6) Process adjustment—Developing bias adjustment
menu screen and display the “Process adjustment menu screen”.
• Developing bias adjustment is inhibited in the
field.
2. The following items are shown on the “Process
adjustment menu screen”.
(7) Process adjustment—L detection adjustment
• See “L detection adjustment”.
• Charging voltage value adjustment
• Transfer current adjustment
(8) Process adjustment—Automatic toner supply
• Normally carried out automatically, and the process adjustment - automatic toner supply is not
made in the field.
• Separation (AC) voltage adjustment
• Separation (DC) voltage value adjustment
1-45
3
36 MODE
(9) Process adjustment—Toner density adjustment
8.4
Toner Density Adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
• See “Toner density adjustment”.
(10) Process adjustment—Dot diameter adjustment
The developer toner density can be increased or
• See “Dot diameter adjustment”.
decreased by making this adjustment.
(11) Process adjustment—LD1 offset adjustment
• See “LD1 offset adjustment”.
Major cases in which this adjustment is used:
• When the image fogging has occurred due to the
(12) Process adjustment—LD2 offset adjustment
increased density in the developer toner density.
(In this case, reduce the toner density.)
(7145 only)
• See “LD2 offset adjustment”.
Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set in
(13) Process adjustment—LD1 bias adjustment
advance.
• The LD1 bias adjustment is not made in the field.
(14) Process adjustment—LD2 bias adjustment
A. Procedure
(7145 only)
• The LD2 bias adjustment is not made in the field.
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
8.3
L Detection Adjustment
3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the “Toner
density adjustment” is displayed in the message
This adjustment be made immediately after replacement of the developer (before any copies are made
with the new developer). Developing counter is
automatically reset.
column.
4. “Toner density adjustment screen”
Select the set value [-2] to [+2], and press the
[START] key.
• Set value: -2 (toner density decreased) to +2
(toner density increased)
Note:
• After replacing the developer, do not make copies
until you have performed L detection adjustment.
• When [Current set value] → [New set value] =
the same, return the toner density to the normal
level.
• When [Current set value] → [New set value] = +
A. Procedure
(plus), increase the transient level of the toner
density.
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
• When [Current set value] → [New set value] = (minus), decrease the transient level of the toner
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. “Process adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until the “L detection adjustment value”. appears in the message display area.
density.
According to the value set, the toner density is
4. “L detection adjustment screen”
Press the [START] key, then confirm that [OK] is
automatically adjusted. When the adjustment is
terminated in about 250 seconds.
displayed at “Result” and the L detection data value.
5. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “36
mode menu screen”.
5. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “36
mode menu screen”.
Note:
Note:
• If an OK indication does not appear after the
• When an error code is displayed while in the
toner density adjustment, conduct the toner den-
developer has been agitated, it means that an L
detection adjustment error has occurred. In this
sity adjustment again after checking the expected
defective parts on the error code list.
case, an error code will appear in the “Result” display area. For the meaning of error codes, refer to
F26-3: TDS (Toner density sensor output abnormality)
the “L detection error code list” of “List of error
codes”.
3
1-46
8.5
Dot Diameter Adjustment
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
The MPC value can be corrected to change the
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
image density (dot diameter) by entering a setting.
(Common to copier/printer/fax)
3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the “LD1
Major cases in which this adjustment is used:
offset adjustment” is displayed in the message
• When you want to change the image density.
• When changing the write unit or TCSB (toner
column.
4. “LD1 offset adjustment screen”
control sensor board), or when cleaning the
dust-proof glass.
Press the [COPY] key.
5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set in
advance.
START button to print the test pattern.
6. Check the test pattern.
A. Procedure
Specification: Check to see if the LD1 laser output patterns are uniform as shown in the draw-
1. Enter the 36 mode.
ing below and the starting points of the low
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
density section are matched between the reference lines.
3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the “Dot
diameter adjustment” is displayed in the mes-
*
Since a single beam is employed for 7235/
7228/7222, the pattern shown as LD2 in the
illustration below is also output by LD1.
sage column.
4. “Dot diameter adjustment screen”
Select the set value [-3] to [+3], and press the
[START] key.
According to the value set, the dot diameter is
automatically adjusted.
[1]
• Set value: -3 (toward the lighter) to +3 (toward
the darker)
5. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “36
mode menu screen”.
Note:
• When the adjustment is made toward the darker,
the dot diameter becomes thick and the toner
consumption is increased.
8.6
LD1 Offset Adjustment
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
The write position of the LD1 laser is adjusted.
This adjustment must be made when replacing the
write unit, drum and/or the developer.
Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set in
[1]
Reference line
advance. The developing unit must be filled with
developer. The L detection adjustment, toner den-
7. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
sity adjustment and the dot diameter adjustment
must be completed.
8. “LD1 offset adjustment screen”
Input the offset value through the numeric keys
and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -128 ~ +127
1-47
3
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
9. Repeat the procedures 4 to 7 until the specified
I ADJUSTMENT
value is attained.
10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “36
mode menu screen”.
[1]
8.7
LD2 Offset Adjustment
(7145 only)
The write position of the LD2 laser is adjusted.
This adjustment must be made when replacing the
write unit, drum and the developer.
Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set in
advance. The developing unit must be filled with
developer. The L detection adjustment, toner density adjustment, dot diameter adjustment and the
LD1 offset adjustment must be completed.
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
[1]
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
3. Press the [Next item] key repeatedly until the
“LD2 offset adjustment” is displayed in the mes-
7. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
sage column.
4. “LD2 offset adjustment screen”
8. “LD2 offset adjustment screen”
Enter the offset value through the numeric keys
Press the [COPY] key.
5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -128 ~ +127
START button to print the test pattern.
6. Check the test patterns.
9. Repeat the procedures 4 to 7 until the specified
value is attained.
Specification: Check to see if the LD2 laser output patterns are uniform as shown in the drawing below and the starting points of the low
density section are matched between the reference lines.
3
Reference line
1-48
10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “36
mode menu screen”.
36 MODE
Timing Adjustment
• Vertical magnification adjustment : Platen
• Horizontal magnification adjustment : Platen
This function adjusts each timing. When timing
adjustment is performed, use A3 or 11 x 17 size
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single
side, 50%)
paper.
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single
A. Procedure
1. Select [2. Timing adj.] in the “36 mode menu
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single
side, 200%)
side, 100%)
The “Timing adjustment menu screen” will
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single
side, 400%)
appear.
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (dou-
screen”.
• The following items are included in the timing
ble side, 50%)
adjustment.
“1 Vertical/horizontal magnification adjustment”
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (double side, 100%)
“2 Restart timing adjustment”
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (dou-
“3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment”
“4 Leading edge original erasure amount adjust-
ble side, 200%)
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (dou-
ment”
“5 Centering adjustment”
ble side, 400%)
4. Enter data from the numeric keys on the screen,
then press the [SET] key to enter the data that
have been entered.
“6 Image read point adjustment”
“7 Restoring standard data”
2. Press the item key to be adjusted. The selected
setting screen will appear.
5. Press the [COPY] key to return to the basic
screen, then make a test copy.
3. Press the [RETURN] key in each of the timing
adjustment screens to return to the “Timing
6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button to
adjustment menu screen”.
return to the Vertical/Horizontal magnification
adjustment screen.
7. Press the [RETURN] key in the “Vertical and
8.8.1 Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjustment
The vertical and horizontal magnifications of the
horizontal magnification adjustment screen” to
return to the “Timing adjustment menu screen”.
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment
printer system and the copy system are adjusted.
With the amount of the paper feed loop
adjusted properly between the registration
A. Procedure
1. Select [2. Timing adj.] in the “36 mode menu
roller and the fixing roller, the transfer slippage
in the position about 20mm from the trailing
screen”.
The “Timing adjustment menu screen” will
appear.
2. Select the [1. Drum clock adj.] on the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
The “Drum clock adjustment (vertical/horizontal
edge of the transfer paper is prevented.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
magnification adjustment)” will appear.
3. This adjustment has the following items. These
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.
can be selected by pressing the arrow key:
• Vertical magnification adjustment : Printer
4. “Timing adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until “Vertical magnification-
• Vertical magnification adjustment : Printer 2
printer” appears in the message display area.
1-49
I ADJUSTMENT
8.8
36 MODE
5. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
I ADJUSTMENT
adjustment screen”
Press the [COPY] key.
(2) Printer 2 vertical magnification adjustment
Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer
system.
6. “Basic screen”
Set the copy size to A3 or 11 x 17, and the copy
quantity to 5, then press the START button and
output an test pattern (No. 9).
7. Output five sheets of paper, and check for transfer jitter.
Note:
• Ensure that the printer's vertical magnification is
adjusted before going ahead with this adjustment
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.
4. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
Approx.20mm
adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until “Vertical magnificationCheck the transfer jitter at a point approx. 20mm
from the trailing edge of the paper.
printer 2” appears in the message display area.
5. Press the [COPY] key.
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
6. “Basic screen”
Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
9. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
adjustment screen”
START button to print the test pattern.
7. Use a ruler to measure the vertical magnifica-
Enter a value through the numeric keys (the
change of a value should be made in two steps)
and press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -50 (reduction) ~ +50 (enlarge-
tion.
• Standard value: 0.5% max (life size)
Within ± 1mm with respect to 205.7mm
ment)
1 step = 0.1%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the transfer jitter in all
five output sheets disappears.
205.7 1
11. Once you have confirmed that there is no transfer jitter, press the arrow key, then select “Printer
2” to adjust the vertical magnification of “Printer
2”.
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
9. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -50 (reduction) ~ +50 (enlargement)
1 step = 0.1%
10. Repeat the procedures 5 to 9 until the specified
value is attained.
3
1-50
36 MODE
adjustment menu screen”.
adjustment menu screen”.
(3) Platen vertical magnification adjustment
a.
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
(4) Platen horizontal magnification adjustment
Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner
Adjust the horizontal magnification of the copy
system.
system.
Procedure
Note:
• The result of the platen horizontal magnification
1. Enter the 36 mode.
will be reflected all the images read by scanner
2. “36 mode menu screen”
(RADF, platen).
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.
4. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
adjustment screen”
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the arrow key until “Vertical magnificationplaten” appears in the message display area.
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.
4. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
Set the new test chart on the original glass and
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the
adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until “Horizontal magnifica-
START button.
7. Use a ruler to measure the vertical magnifica-
tion-platen” appears in the message display
area.
tion.
• Standard value: ± 0.5% max (life size)
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
Within ± 1mm with respect to 200mm
Set the new test chart on the original glass and
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the
START button.
7. Use a ruler to measure the horizontal magnification.
• Standard value: ± 0.5% max (life size)
Within ± 1mm with respect to 200mm
200
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
200
9. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
8. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button to
• Setting range: -20 (reduction) ~ +20 (enlargement)
return to the “Vertical/horizontal magnification
(drum clock) adjustment screen”.
1 step = 0.05%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnifica-
9. “Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
adjustment screen”
tion becomes the standard value.
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
1-51
I ADJUSTMENT
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
• Setting range: -10 (reduction) ~ +10 (enlarge-
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
ment)
1 step = 0.1%
9. “Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the horizontal magnifi-
adjustment screen”
cation becomes the standard value.
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
adjustment menu screen”.
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -20 (reduction) ~ +20 (enlargement)
(5) RADF vertical magnification adjustment
Adjust the vertical magnification while in RADF
copying.
1 step = 0.1%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification becomes the standard value.
11. To adjust another adjustment item, press the
arrow key to select the desired adjustment.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
12. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
8.8.2 Restart timing adjustment
Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.
4. “Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)
To adjust the restart timing.
adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key to select the magnification
A. Procedure
you want to adjust.
The screen changes in the following order: Sin-
1. Select the [2. Timing adj.] in the “36 mode menu
screen”, then the “Timing adjustment menu
gle sided 50% → 100% → 200% → 400% →
Double sided 50% → 100% → 200% → 400%.
screen” will appear.
2. Select the [2. Restart timing] on the “Timing
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
adjustment menu screen”. then the “Restart timing adjustment screen” will appear.
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the
START button.
3. Using the arrow key will allow you to select the
following items.
7. Use a ruler to measure the vertical magnification.
• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (All)
• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (Main body
• Standard value: ± 0.5% max (life size)
Within ± 1.0mm with respect to 190mm
upper tray)
• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (Main body
lower tray)
• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (DB1)
• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (DB2)
• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (LCT)
• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (Bypass)
• Restart timing adjustment : Engine (ADU)
• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (single side)
• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,
front)
• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,
[1]
190
[1]
back)
4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on
Vertical magnification
the screen, then press the [SET] key to validate
your entry.
1-52
36 MODE
(2) RADF restart timing adjustment
[COPY] key, then make a test copy from the
basic screen.
6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button to
Reference:
• The operation described here is the same as the
return to the “Horizontal/Vertical magnification
adjustment in “36 mode menu screen” - [9. RADF
adjustment screen”.
adj.].
7. Press the [RETURN] key in the “Restart timing
adjustment screen” to return to the “Timing
a.
adjustment menu screen”.
1. Enter the 36 mode.
Procedure
2. “36 mode menu screen”
(1) Engine restart timing adjustment
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [2. Restart timing] key.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
4. “Restart timing adjustment screen”
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the arrow key until the desired RADF
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
adjustment item appears in the message display
area.
Press the [2. Restart timing] key.
4. “Restart timing adjustment screen”
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
Press the arrow key until the desired adjustment
item appears in the message display area.
Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the
START button.
• Adjustment the “RADF double side (second
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
Select a maximum paper size for the tray you
want to adjust and press START to output the
side)”, then make a test copy in double side →
single side mode and check the restart timing of
test pattern.
7. Check the restart timing.
2nd output paper.
7. Check the restart timing.
• Standard value: ± 2.0mm max.
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
• Standard value: ± 3.0mm max. (life size)
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
while holding down the ∗ button.
9. “Restart timing adjustment screen”
9. “Restart timing adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -127 (slow) ~ +127 (fast)
1 step = 0.1mm
• Setting range: -50 (slow) ~ +50 (fast)
1 step = 0.1mm
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing
becomes the standard value.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing
becomes the standard value.
11. To adjust another adjustment item, press the
arrow key to select the desired adjustment.
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the timing
adjustment menu screen.
12. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
1-53
1
I ADJUSTMENT
5. Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the
36 MODE
6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button to
8.8.3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
return to the “Paper feed loop quantity adjustIf a paper is skewed, adjust the amount of the loop
for each tray.
ment screen”.
7. Press the [RETURN] key in the “Paper feed loop
quantity adjustment screen” to return to the
“Timing adjustment menu screen”.
A. Procedure
1. Select the [2. Timing adj.] in the “36 mode menu
screen”, then the “Timing adjustment menu
(1) Paper feed loop adjustment for engine
screen” will appear.
2. Select the [3. Paper loop adj.] on the “36 mode
Procedure
menu screen”, then the “Paper feed loop
1. Enter the 36 mode.
amount adjustment screen” will appear.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
3. Using the arrow key will allow you to select the
following items.
• Paper feed loop adjustment : All
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [3. Paper loop adj.] key.
• Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body upper
tray
4. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until the desired adjustment
• Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body lower
tray (small size) B5 only
item appears in the message display area.
5. Press the [COPY] key.
• Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body lower
tray (large size) Other than B5
6. “Basic screen”
Select a tray and a paper size properly and
• Paper feed loop adjustment : DB upper tray
(small size) Other than A3, B4, 11 x 17 and 8.5 x
press START to output the test pattern.
7. Check the skewing condition.
14.
• Paper feed loop adjustment : DB upper tray
8. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appropriate, press the # button while pressing the ∗
(large size) A3, B4, 11 x 17 and 8.5 x 14
• Paper feed loop adjustment : DB lower tray
button.
9. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”
(small size) Other than A3 and 11 x 17
• Paper feed loop adjustment : DB lower tray
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
(large size) A3 and 11 x 17
• Paper feed loop adjustment : LCT
• Setting range: -100 ~ +15
1 step = 0.23mm
• Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (normal
paper)
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the paper feed loop
amount becomes appropriate.
• Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (thick
paper)
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
• Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (post card)
• Paper feed loop adjustment : ADU (excepting
8.5 x 5.5)
• Paper feed loop adjustment : ADU (8.5 x 5.5)
• Paper feed loop adjustment : RADF (single side)
4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on
the screen, then press the [SET] key to validate
your entry.
5. Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the
[COPY] key, then make a test copy from the
basic screen.
3
a.
1-54
(2) Paper feed loop adjustment for RADF
8.8.4 Leading edge original erasure adjustment
Reference:
• The operation described here is the same as the
Adjust the leading edge original erasure (leading
adjustment in “36 mode menu screen” - [9. RADF
adj.].
a.
edge blank cut) amount.
Note:
• If you reduce the erasure width, a black line may
appear on the leading edge of the paper when
Procedure
you make an enlarged copy.
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [3. Paper loop adj.] key.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
4. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until “RADF” appears in the
message display area.
5. Press the [COPY] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [4. Lead edge timing] key.
4. “Leading edge original erasure adjustment
6. “Basic screen”
Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
screen”
Press the [COPY] key.
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the
START button.
5. “Basic screen”
Place the test chart on the platen glass. Select a
7. Check the condition of skewing in the output
copy.
maximum paper size for the tray you want to
adjust and press START.
8. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appropriate, press the # button while pressing the ∗
6. Measure the leading edge original erasure.
• Standard value: Within 3.0mm
button.
9. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”
7. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -10 (small) ~ +10 (large)
1 step = 0.5mm
8. “Leading edge original erasure adjustment
screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the skewing condition
is correct.
• Setting range: -20 (small) ~ +20 (large)
1 step = 0.1mm
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the leading edge original erasure amount becomes the standard
value.
10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
1-55
1
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
8.8.5 Centering adjustment
6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button to
In the centering adjustment, the centering of the
7. Press the [Preceding screen] key in the “Center-
image is adjusted in the direction at a right angle to
ing adjustment screen” to return to the “Timing
the feed direction.
adjustment menu screen”.
return to the centering adjustment screen.
A. Procedure
1. Select the [2. Timing adj.] in the “36 mode menu
screen”, then the “Timing adjustment menu
screen” will appear.
2. Select the [5. Centring adj.] on the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”, then the centering
adjustment screen will appear.
3. Using the arrow key will allow you to select the
following items.
(1) Each tray centering adjustment
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [5. Centring adj.] key.
4. “Centering adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until the desired tray
appears in the message display area.
(1) Each of tray adjustments
• Centering adjustment : All
• Centering adjustment : Main body upper tray
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
(common, small size, large size)
• Centering adjustment : Main body lower tray
Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
START button to print the test pattern.
(common, small size, large size)
• Centering adjustment : DB upper tray
7. Fold the output at the center in the paper feed
direction, and check that the left and right lines
(common, small size, large size)
• Centering adjustment : DB lower tray
overlap completely.
• Standard value: Within ± 2mm
(common, small size, large size)
• Centering adjustment : LCT
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
• Centering adjustment : ADU
(common, small size, large size)
9. “Centering adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
• Centering adjustment : Bypass
(common, small size, large size)
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -53 (inward direction of the center
line) ~ +53 (rear direction of the center line)
1 step = 0.09mm
(2) Platen adjustment
• Centering adjustment : Platen
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is
within standard value.
(3) RADF adjustment
• Centering adjustment : RADF
Note:
(single side, double side front, double side back)
• If it can not be adjusted within the specified
range, see “Other Adjustments”.
4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on
the screen, then press the [SET] key to validate
11. To adjust another adjustment item, press the
your entry.
5. Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the
arrow key to select the desired adjustment.
12. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
[COPY] key, then make a test copy from the
basic screen.
1-56
adjustment menu screen”.
(2) ADU centering adjustment
11. To adjust another adjustment item, press the
Note:
• Be sure to perform the centering adjustment for
12. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
arrow key to select the desired adjustment.
adjustment menu screen”.
each tray before starting this adjustment.
(3) Platen centering adjustment
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
Note:
2. “36 mode menu screen”
• Be sure to perform the centering adjustment for
each tray before starting this adjustment.
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [5. Centring adj.] key.
a.
4. “Centering adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until “ADU” appears in the
message display area.
Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [5. Centring adj.] key.
Select copy mode to single side → double side
mode, then press the START button to print the
test pattern.
7. Fold the output at the center in the paper feed
direction, and check that the left and right lines
overlap completely.
• Standard value: Back : Within ± 3mm
Front and back : Within ± 3mm
4. “Centering adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until “Platen” appears in the
message display area.
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
Set the new test chart on the original glass and
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
START button.
7. Check the miscentering by comparing the original with the copy.
• Standard value: Within ± 2mm
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
[1]
[2]
[1]
Lengthwise direction
[2]
Miscentering amount between first side
and second side
while holding down the ∗ button.
9. “Centering adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -74 (inward direction of the center
line) ~ +74 (rear direction of the center line)
1 step = 0.04mm
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
9. “Centering adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
within standard value.
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -53 (inward direction of the center
line) ~ +53 (rear direction of the center line)
1 step = 0.09mm
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is
within standard value.
1-57
1
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
(4) RADF centering adjustment
8.8.6 Image read point adjustment
Note:
• Be sure to perform the centering adjustment for
Adjust the image read point (leading edge timing).
each tray before starting this adjustment.
For the image read position adjustment, the following two types are available:
• Platen adjustment
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
• RADF adjustment
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Note:
• Be sure to perform the restart timing adjustment
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
(engine) before starting this adjustment.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
• The RADF read position adjustment is inhibited in
Press the [5. Centring adj.] key.
4. “Centering adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until “RADF” appears in the
the field.
• If you shift this value by a large amount, the
RADF read density may change.
message display area.
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
A. Procedure
Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
START button.
• Adjust the “RADF (double side (second side))”,
then make a test copy in double side → single
side mode and check the loop amount of 2nd
outputted paper.
7. Check the miscentering by comparing the origi-
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [6. Read point adj.] key.
4. “Image read point adjustment screen”
Select the “Platen adjustment”, and press the
[COPY] key.
5. “Basic screen”
Set the new test chart on the original glass and
nal with the copy.
• Standard value: Within ± 3mm
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
START button.
9. “Centering adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
6. Make a comparison between original image and
test copy image. Then check the image read
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -74 (inward direction of the center
point.
• Standard value: 10 ± 1.0mm
7. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
line) ~ +74 (rear direction of the center line)
1 step = 0.04mm
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is
within standard value.
8. “Image read point adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -20 (small) ~ +20 (large)
1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the image read point is
within standard value.
10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
adjustment menu screen”.
1
1-58
36 MODE
8.9
Reset the adjusted set values of timing adjustment
Conduct a test while in continuous copying opera-
to the standard values (factory default data).
tion.
The following are included in the return to standard
data:
Select the [3. Running mode] in the “36 mode menu
• Recall standard data : Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjustment
will appear.
• Recall standard data : Restart timing adjustment
The following items can be selected:
• Recall standard data : Paper feed loop amount
A. Intermittent copy mode
adjustment
Running Test Mode
screen”, then the “Running test mode menu screen”
In this mode, after the set number of copy oper-
• Recall standard data : Leading edge original erasure adjustment
ations has been completed, the machine goes
into the copy ready status, waits 0.5 sec., then
starts the same operation again.
• Recall standard data : Centering adjustment
• Recall standard data : Original read point adjustment
B. Paperless intermittent copy mode
It makes copies at roughly the same timing as
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
for a normal copy, without performing paper
detection or jam detection. Also, like running
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
mode 1, after the set number of copy operations has been completed, the machine goes
3. “Timing adjustment menu screen”
Press the [7. Factory default] key.
into the copy ready status, waits 0.5 sec., then
starts the same operation again.
4. “Resetting standard data screen”
Press the arrow key until the desired item
appears in the message display area.
5. Press the [YES] key to reset the set values to
the standard values that have been selected
and to return to the “Timing adjustment menu
C. Paperless mode
It makes copies at roughly the same timing as
for a normal copy, without performing paper
detection or jam dection.
screen”. Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then
the set values are not reset and return to the
D. Paperless/endless mode
It automatically sets the copy quantity to infinity.
“Timing adjustment menu screen”.
6. To reset another adjustment item, repeat steps
Also, like running mode 3, it makes copies at
roughly the same timing as for a normal copy,
4 to 5.
7. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Timing
without performing paper detection or jam
detection.
adjustment menu screen”.
E. Running mode
Running mode consists of paperless/endless
mode plus an operation consisting of an optics
each time scan and an automatic paper feed
tray change.
1-59
I ADJUSTMENT
8.8.7 Recall standard data
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
8.9.1 Setting method
8.10 Test Pattern Output
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
Output various test patterns and use the results to
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [3. Running mode] key.
Select the [4. Test pattern] in the “36 mode menu
3. “Running test mode menu screen”
appear.
detach defective parts.
screen”, then the test pattern output screen will
Press the key according to the desired mode.
Note:
• For modes not listed specifically on the Service
(Mode 1 to Mode 5)
4. “Basic screen”
Press the START button.
5. After checking the copy operation, press the
Stop button to stop copy operation.
6. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button to
Manual, output should not be made.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
return to the “Running mode menu screen”.
7. To perform another running test mode, repeat
steps 3 to 6.
8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to “36 mode
menu screen”.
Press the [4. Test pattern] key.
3. “Test pattern output screen”
Enter a pattern number to be output from
numeric key.
4. Press the [COPY] key.
5. “Copy screen”
Select A3 or 11 x 17 and press the start button
to output a test pattern.
6. When you want to output another test pattern,
press the # button while pressing the ∗ button
and repeat the procedures 3 to 5 above.
7. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “36
mode menu screen”.
3
1-60
No.1 Overall Halftone
[Check Items]
• When the density is set to 70 (halftone)
When there are white stripes, black stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any
abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, and cleaning unit
• When the density is set to 0 (white)
When there is image gray back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact
• When the density is set at 255 (black)
When the density is thin, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended check point]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, see “7.11 Test pattern density adjustment” below.
Test Pattern
When the density is set to 70
When the density is set to 0
1-61
When the density is set to 255
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.5 Gradation Pattern
[Check Items]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously reproduced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, and LD1/LD2 offset adjustment
* For LD1/LD2 offset adjustment, see “1. Process adjustment”.
* Since a single beam is employed for 7235/7228/7222, the pattern shown as LD2 in the illustration
below is also output by LD1.
Test Pattern
LD1 LD2
3
1-62
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.11 Beam Check
[Check Items 1]
• For developement and analysis of the write unit
[Check Items 2]
• Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and sub-scanning directions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, transfer/separation corona unit, and developing unit
[Check Items 3]
• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the
test pattern in the feed direction.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
[1] Solid black pattern
[2] Gradation pattern
1-63
No.16 Linearity Evaluation Pattern
[Check Items]
Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vartical magnification, tilt image, and leading edge timing of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible
on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1]
237mm
20mm
31mm
28
0m
m
190mm
[1]
205.7mm
m
0m
28
190mm
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
190mm
[1] Edge of pager
1-64
36 MODE
8.12 Image Quality Adjustment
This function adjusts the image quality adjustment.
Density of respective patterns is adjusted in the fol-
The following are shown on the image quality
lowing procedure.
adjustment menu:
• RADF scan density adj.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
• Non-image area erase check.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
8.12.1 RADF scanning density adjustment
Press the [5. Density adj.] key.
When the slit glass is replaced, adjust the density
3. “Print density adjustment menu screen”
Press the [1. Print density adj. (1)] Key.
when reading the original with the RADF.
4. “Print density adjustment screen”
Press the key according to the desired test pat-
Note:
• The mechanical adjustment, optical adjustment
tern to be adjusted.
5. Enter a desired density by a numeric value from
the numeric keys, then press the [SET] key.
and electrical adjustment of the scanner are completed.
• Make sure that the slit glass is cleaned.
• Make sure that the white chart is not dirty or
Input range : 000 (light) to +255 (dark).
6. Press the [COPY] key.
7. “Basic screen”
Press the START button to output a test pattern.
folded.
8. Check the density of the output test pattern.
9. Press the # button while pressing the ∗ button to
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
return to the “Print density adjustment screen”.
10. To adjust another test pattern, repeat steps 4 to
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [6. Image quality adj] key.
9.
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to “Print den-
3. “Image quality adjustment screen”
Press the [1. RADF Scan density adj.] key.
sity adjustment menu screen”.
4. “RADF Scanning density adjustment screen”
Set the white chart in A4 direction on the RADF.
5. Press the [START] key.
6. Check that “Completed” appears in the message display area.
7. If “ERROR” appears in the message display
area, then repeat steps 4 and 5.
Note:
• If “ERROR” is displayed repeatedly, there is a
possibility of a defect in the adjustment of the
scanner machine, optics, or electricrelated parts.
8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Image
quality adjustment screen”.
1-65
I ADJUSTMENT
8.11 Test Pattern Density Adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
8.12.2 Non-image area erase check
(3) Warning-2
A datum with potentioal not to function non-imagea-
Carry out a survey of the installation environment
rea-erase is found.
Please confirm “adjustment” - “36 mode” columns of
after the machine is newly installed or moved to a
different location.
Preparation:
the Service Manual.
• Be sure that the RADF is fully open.
• Do not place anything on the platen glass.
(4) Remedy-2
If you use the non-original erasure function rela-
• The platen glass must not be dirty.
tively infrequently, you can use the machine in its
present installation environment.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
If, however, you copy originals that have a dark
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [6. Image quality adj] key.
a dark location and facing a direction such that
external light does not get into it, then carry out the
3. “Image quality adjustment screen”
installation survey once again. In this case, if there
Press the [2. Non-image Area Erase check] key.
4. “Non-image area erase check screen”
is a bright light source, such as a fluorescent light,
directly above the machine, reconsider the installa-
Press the [START] key.
5. Confirm that “Operation OK” appears on the
tion location and direction, or take steps to block off
the light from the light source (by using a cover, for
message display.
If “Operation NG” appears, carry out non-origi-
example), then carry out the installation survey
once again.
background fairly frequently, reinstall the machine in
nal erasure installation survey once again while
seeing to “Trouble and Remedy” below.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “Image
quality adjustment screen”.
B.
(1) Warning-1
Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many cases, the
Nonimage-area-erase function will not operate correctly.
Please confirm “adjustment” - “36 mode” columns of
the Service Manual.
(2) Remedy-1
If you use the non-original erasure function, or copy
originals that have a dark background using the
nonoriginal erasure method, relatively infrequently,
use the machine in its present installation environment.
If, however, you copy originals that have a dark
background fairly frequently, re-install the machine
in a dark location and facing a direction such that
external light does not get into it, then carry out the
installation survey once again.
1-66
8.13 List Print
F.
Log list (1)
The data from the memory is dumped in the
Select the [7. List Print] from the “36 mode menu
HEX format and the ASCII format. (for analyz-
screen” to display the list print menu screen.
ing trouble)
You can select following menu options from this
Normally not used.
screen.
G. Log list (2)
The data from the memory is dumped in the
• Test pattern
• Font pattern
• Memory dump list
HEX format and the ASCII format. (for analyz-
• Management list
ing trouble)
• Adjustment list
Normally not used.
• Log list (1)
H. Analysing list
Outputs the necessary list prints together if
• Log list (2)
• Analysing list
• E-Mail KRDS com.list
trouble occurs in the field. (for analysing trou-
Note:
ble)
Normally not used.
• Don't try to touch a mode not mentioned.
(1) Procedure
A. Test pattern
This option is used to output a grid pattern consisted of line width of 2 dots and line-to-line
space of 500 dots. From this pattern, you can
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [7. List print] key.
3. “List print menu screen”
check the write system for normal performance.
Press the key corresponding to the desired
menu option.
B. Font pattern
This option outputs the font list built in the
4. “List print screen”
When outputting the memory dump list, specify
the start and end addresses.
engine.
C. Memory dump list
This option is used to dump out data (in HEX
Note:
• The memory dump list is dump output in both the
HEX and ASCII format.
and ASCII format) after the address specified in
E-RDH memory (this list is referenced for trou-
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. “Basic screen”
bleshooting).
D. Management list
This option outputs the machine status, counter
information and history of jam and so on.
Press the [START] key to output the list.
7. Press the # button while depressing the ∗ button
to return to the list print screen.
8. When outputting another list, repeat above
E. Adjustment list
This option outputs a list of current adjusting
steps 3 to 7.
9. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the list
values in the 25/36 mode.
print menu screen.
I.
E-Mail KRDS com.list
This option outputs the result of the E-mail
KRDS communication.
1-67
3
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
8.14 Counter Clear
8.15 Adjustment of RADF
The counter must be cleared whenever the drum or
Adjustments of RADF are performed in the follow-
fixing parts/unit is replaced.
ing procedures. For the adjustment, A3 or 11 x 17
Select the [8. Counter Clear] from the 36 mode
copy paper should be used.
menu screen to display the counter clear screen.
Following menu options are available from this
screen.
A. Procedure
1. Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the “36 mode
• Drum related counter (Drum counter, Drum drive
menu screen” to display the RADF adjustment
counter).
menu.
• Fixing counter (Fixing web counter).
The following are included in the RADF adjustment:
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
“1 Vertical/horizontal magnification (Drum clock)
adjustment”
2. “36 mode menu screen”
“2 Restart timing adjustment”
Press the [8. Counter clear] key.
3. “Counter clear screen”
“3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment”
“4 Centering adjustment”
Press the key corresponding to the item to be
cleared.
“5 RADF scanning density adjustment”
2. Press the key corresponding to the desired
4. Message in the message display area will confirm if you really want to clear the item. Press
item. The screen corresponding to the selected
item will appear.
the [YES] key. When the item is cleared, the
“Counter clear screen” will be restored.
3. Press the [Preceding screen] key in each of the
RADF adjustment screens to return to the
5. When clearing another counter, repeat above
steps 3 and 4.
“RADF adjustment menu screen”.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to “36 mode
menu screen”.
8.15.1 Vertical magnification adjustment in
RADF system
Reference:
Adjust the vertical magnification of the RADF.
• The operation here is the same as [2. PM count] [3. Counter clear] on the “25 mode menu screen”.
A. Procedure
1. Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the “36 mode
menu screen” to display the “RADF adjustment
menu”.
2. Select [1. Drum clock adj.] from the “RADF
adjustment menu”
screen” will appear.
and
the
“Magnification
3. Using the arrow key will allow you to select the
following items.
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single
side, 50%)
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single
side, 100%)
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single
side, 200%)
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single
side, 400%)
1-68
36 MODE
ble side, 50%)
• Standard value: ± 0.5% max (life size)
Within ± 1.0mm with respect to 190mm
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (double side, 100%)
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (double side, 200%)
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (double side, 400%)
4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on
the screen, then press the [SET] key to validate
your entry.
[1]
5. Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the
[COPY] key, then make a test copy from the
basic screen.
6. Press the # button while depressing the ∗ button
190
[1]
Vertical magnification
to return to the “Magnification adjustment
screen”.
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
7. Press the [Preceding screen] key in the “Vertical/horizontal magnification adjustment screen”
while holding down the ∗ button.
9. “Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)
to return to the “RADF adjustment menu
screen”.
adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
B. Vertical magnification adjustment in RADF
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -20 (reduction) ~ +20 (enlarge-
system
Adjust the vertical magnification while in RADF
ment)
1 step = 0.1%
copying.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification becomes the standard value.
a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
11. To adjust another adjustment item, press the
arrow key to select the desired adjustment.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [9. RADF adj.] key.
12. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “RADF
adjustment menu screen”.
3. “RADF adjustment menu screen”
Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.
8.15.2 Adjustment of restart timing
4. “Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)
adjustment screen”
Use the following procedure to adjust the RADF
Press the arrow key to select the magnification
you want to adjust.
restart timing.
The screen changes in the following order: Single sided 50% → 100% → 200% → 400% →
A. Procedure
1. Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the “36 mode
Double sided 50% → 100% → 200% → 400%.
5. Press the [COPY] key.
6. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the
START button.
7. Use a ruler to measure the vertical magnification.
1-69
menu screen” to display the “RADF adjustment
menu”.
2. Select [2. Restart timing] from the “RADF
adjustment menu” and the “Re-start timing
adjustment screen” will appear.
I ADJUSTMENT
• Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (dou-
36 MODE
3. Using the arrow key will allow you to select the
I ADJUSTMENT
following items.
• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (single side)
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the
• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,
front)
START button.
6. Check paper feed loop volume.
• Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,
7. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appro-
back)
4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on
priate, press the # button while pressing the
button.
the screen, then press the [SET] key to validate
your entry.
∗
8. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
5. Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the
[COPY] key, then make a test copy from the
basic screen.
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -10 (decrease) ~ 00 (standard) ~
+10 (increase)
1 step = 0.5mm
6. Check the restart timing.
Standard value: -3.0mm maximum (Life size).
9. Repeat above steps 4 to 8 until an appropriate
7. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while depressing the ∗ button
paper feed loop volume is obtained.
10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “RADF
8. “Restart timing adjustment screen”
Enter the value from the numeric keys, then
press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -50 (delays the timing) ~
adjustment menu screen”.
8.15.4 Centering adjustment
+50 (advances the timing)
1 step = 0.1mm
Reference:
• The operation described here is the same as the
9. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the re-start timing
meets the standard value.
adjustment in “36 mode menu screen” -[2. Timing
adjustment].
10. Press the [RETURN] key in the “Restart timing
adjustment screen” to return to the “RADF
Adjust the centering of the image in the direction at
a right angle to the original feed direction of the
RADF. For adjustment items, the following three
adjustment menu screen”.
8.15.3 Paper feed loop adjustment
items can be selected:
• Centering adjustment : RADF (single side)
Reference:
• The operation described here is the same as the
• Centering adjustment : RADF (double side, front)
• Centering adjustment : RADF (double side,
adjustment in “36 mode menu screen” -[2. Timing
adjustment].
Adjust the paper feed loop quantity while in RADF
back)
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
copying.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [9. RADF adj.] key.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
3. “RADF adjustment menu screen”
Press the [4. Centring adj.] key.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [9. RADF adj.] key.
4. “Centering adjustment screen”
Press the arrow key until the desired item
3. “RADF adjustment menu screen”
Press the [3. Paper Loop adj.] key.
appears in the message display area.
5. Press the [COPY] key.
4. “Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen”
Press the [COPY] key.
1
5. “Basic screen”
Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
1-70
36 MODE
6. “Basic screen”
Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
START button.
indicated in the message display area.
7. If the message “ERROR” appears in the message display area, repeat above steps 4 and 5.
• When the RADF (double side, back) is selected,
make copies from double side → single side
mode, and use the second for the adjustment.
7. Check the miscentering by comparing the original with the copy.
Note:
• If “ERROR” is displayed repeatedly, there is a
possibility of a defect in the adjustment of the
scanner machine, optics, or electricrelated parts.
• Standard value: Within ± 3mm
8. If it is not within specification, press the # button
while holding down the ∗ button.
9. “Centering adjustment screen”
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “RADF
adjustment menu screen”.
8.15.6 RADF image read point adjustment
the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -74 (inward direction of the center
line) ~ +74 (rear direction of the center line)
Adjust the original read position while in RADF
copying.
1 step = 0.04mm
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is
Note:
within standard value.
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “RADF
• The RADF read position adjustment is inhibited in
the field.
adjustment menu screen”.
8.15.5 RADF scanning density adjustment
8.16 FNS Adjustment
(FS-112 only)
Whenever the slit glass is replaced, its density in
reading an original must be adjusted in the following
Adjust the alignment plate position of the finisher.
When the sheets of paper exited from the finisher
manner.
are uneven, adjust the corresponding paper size.
Note:
• Before starting this operation, every adjustment
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
must be completed for the scanner's mechanical,
optical and electric system.
• Make sure that the slit glass must be cleaned.
• Make sure that the white chart is not stained or
folded.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [10. FNS adj.] key.
3. “FNS adjustment menu screen”
Press [1. FNS alignment plate position adjustment (rear)] or [2. FNS alignment plate position
adjustment (front)].
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
4. “FNS matching
screen”
2. “36 mode menu screen”
Press the [9. RADF adj.] key.
plate
position
adjustment
Press the arrow key until the target paper size of
the adjustment is displayed.
3. “RADF adjustment menu screen”
Press the [5. RADF Scan density adj.] key.
5. Press the [Copy screen] key to display the basic
screen. Set the output setting to the group mode
4. “RADF scanner density adjustment screen”
Set the white chart in A4 direction on the RADF.
and press the [OK] key.
Conduct the test copy on the paper size in
5. Press the [START] key.
which irregularity occurs.
1-71
I ADJUSTMENT
6. Make sure that the message “Completed” is
36 MODE
6. Check the positions of the alignment plate and
I ADJUSTMENT
the paper from the paper exit side.
7. When irregularity still recurs, press the # button
while pressing the ∗ button.
8. “FNS
matching
plate
position
A
Fold
adjustment
screen”
Enter an adjusting value from the numeric keys,
then press the [SET] key.
• Setting range: -10 ~ +10
Exit direction
1 step = 0.2mm
4511D528AA
9. To adjustment of another paper size, select it
from the arrow keys, then repeat steps 4 to 7.
10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the “FNS
adjustment menu screen”.
B
Fold
8.17 FNS Adjustment
(FS-114 only)
Exit direction
Perform each finisher adjustment.
4511D527AA
8.17.1 Fold & Stitch position adjustment
(SK-114)
9. If it is not within the standard, press # button
while pressing ∗ button.
Adjust the fold & stitch position of the saddle kit.
It is adjusted when the stapling unit 1 or 2 is
10. On the “Fold & Stitch position adj. screen”,
enter a numeric value using the numeric key-
replaced, when the staple position is not correct,
and when the staple tile adjustment is performed.
pad. Then, press [SET] key.
• Setting range: -10 ~ +10
A. Procedure
1 step = 0.5mm
• In case of A: set a plus value
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
• In case of B: set a minus value
11. Repeat the steps 4 through 9 until the
Press any key to return again to “36 mode menu
screen”. Only through this operation, [10. FNS
adj.] is made effective.
Press the [10. FNS adj.] key.
12. Press [RETURN] and go back to the “FNS adj.
menu screen”.
3. On the “FNS adj. menu screen”,
select [1. Fold&Stitch posit adj.].
4. On the “Fold & Stitch posit adj. screen”,
select the paper size you want to adjust by
using the arrow keys.
5. Set five A4 originals in the ADF.
6. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a
fold&stitch sample.
7. Fold the output sample along its crease.
8. Check the distance between the fold and staple
positions.
• Standard A, B: 0 ± 1.5mm
3
fold&stitch position comes within the standard
range.
1-72
8.17.2 Fold position adjustment (SK-114)
8. If it is not within the standard, press # button
while pressing ∗ button.
Adjust the fold position of the saddle kit.
9. On the “Fold position adj. screen”,
It is adjusted when the fold unit is replaced, when
enter a numeric value using the numeric key-
the fold position is incorrect, and when the folding
tilt adjustment is performed.
pad. Then, press [SET] key.
• Setting range: -10 ~ +10
1 step = 0.5mm
A. Procedure
• In case of A: set a plus value
1. Enter the 36 mode.
• In case of B: set a minus value
2. “36 mode menu screen”
10. Repeat the steps 4 through 8 until the fold posi-
Press any key to return again to “36 mode menu
screen”. Only through this operation, [10. FNS
adj.] is made effective.
Press the [10. FNS adj.] key.
tion comes within the standard range.
11. Press [RETURN] and go back to the “FNS adj.
menu screen”.
3. On the “FNS adj. menu screen”,
8.17.3 Punch position adjustment (PK-114)
select [2. Fold position adj.].
4. On the “Fold position adj. screen”, select the
Adjust the hole positions of the punch kit.
paper size you want to adjust by using the arrow
keys.
5. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a fold
sample.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
2. “36 mode menu screen”
6. Fold the output sample along its crease.
7. Check the misalignment.
Press any key to return again to “36 mode menu
screen”. Only through this operation, [10. FNS
• Standard A, B: 0 ± 1.5mm
adj.] is made effective.
Press the [10. FNS adj.] key.
3. On the “FNS adj. menu screen”,
select [3. Punch position adj.].
A
4. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a
punched sample.
5. Check the hole positions on the sample.
• Standard A: 13 ± 3mm (2 holes)
9.5 ± 3mm (2 holes and 3 holes)
11 ± 3mm (4 holes)
Exit direction
4511D525AA
A
B
Exit direction
[1]
Exit direction
[2]
7145fs1040
4511D526AA
1-73
3
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
8.17.4 Punch loop adjustment (PK-114)
A
Adjust the loop amount of the punch kit.
It is adjusted when the punch holes are tilted, or
when paper frequently jams in punch mode.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode.
[1]
[2]
2. “36 mode menu screen”
7145fs1041
Press any key to return again to “36 mode menu
screen”. Only through this operation, [10. FNS
adj.] is made effective.
A
Press the [10. FNS adj.] key.
3. On the “FNS adj. menu screen”,
select [4. Punch loop adj.].
4. On the “Punch loop adj. screen”, select the
paper size you want to adjust by using the arrow
[1]
[2]
keys.
5. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a
7145fs1042
punched sample.
6. Check the tilt of holes on the sample.
7. If the holes are tilted, press # button while
pressing ∗ button.
A
8. On the “Punch loop adj. screen”,
enter a numeric value using the numeric keypad. Then, press [SET] key.
• Setting range: -4 ~ +4
1 step = 1.0mm
[1]
[2]
7145fs1043
6. If it is not within the standard, press # button
while pressing ∗ button.
7. On the “Punch position adj. screen”,
enter a numeric value using the numeric keypad. Then, press [SET] key.
• Setting range: -10 ~ +10
[1]
[2]
7145fs1044
[1]
[2]
7145fs1045
1 step = 0.5mm
• To shift in [1] direction: set a plus value
• To shift in [2] direction: set a minus value
8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 until the punch
positions come within the standard range.
9. Press [RETURN] and go back to the “FNS adj.
menu screen”.
3
1-74
36 MODE
• When the punch part JAM occurs frequently: set
I ADJUSTMENT
a minus value
• When inclination is in a punch hole: set a plus
value (In both the cases of [1] and [2], it sets to
plus side.)
9. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 until there is no tilt.
10. Press [RETURN] and go back to the “FNS adj.
menu screen”.
1-75
3
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
9. 47 MODE
9.1
c.
47 Mode Setting Method
Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode.
2. “47 mode menu screen”
A. 47 Mode
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/
Using the numeric keys, enter the input check
code. *1
output check function) to check and adjustment the
3. When using the multi mode, press the ∗ button.
4. Using the numeric keys, enter the multi code.*1
various signals and loads.
5. Input check result will appear in the input check
B. Operation method (to start 47 mode)
result display area.
(1) 47 Mode startup
a. Turn the SW2 (Sub power switch) OFF.
6. To check other signal input check, repeat steps
b.
Turn the SW2 ON while pressing 4 and 7 of the
copy quantity setting buttons.
*1
If security enhancement is enabled, input CE
(3) Output check method
password.
The moment “I/O check mode” is displayed in
a.
c.
2 to 5.
the message display area at the center of the
screen, check to see if the 47 mode is acti-
b.
vated.
See “[5] Input check list”.
Enter the output code (see the input/output
check code) of the operating load you want to
check with the number of sheets setting button.
When using the multi mode, press the ∗ button
and enter the multi code according to the
desired output check item (load).
“47 mode menu screen”
c.
Press the [START] key to perform the output
check.
d.
To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.
e. Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode.
2. “47 mode menu screen”
Using the numeric keys, enter the output check
[1] [2]
[3]
code.*2
[4]
[1]
[2]
Input/Output check code
Multi code
[3]
[4]
Input check
Output check
3. When using the multi mode, press the ∗ button.
4. Using the numeric keys, enter the multi code.*2
5. Press the [START] key to perform the output
check.
6. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.
7. To make another output check, repeat steps 2 to
6.
(2) Input check method
a. Using the numeric keys, enter the code input
b.
for the desired signal (sensor, etc.) to check.
When using the multi mode, press the ∗ button
and enter the multi code according to the
desired input check item (signal) with the
numeric keys.
2
1-76
*2
See “[6] Output check list”.
(4) Exiting the 47 mode
To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.
47 MODE
RADF Original Size Detection
11. Press the [START] key.
12. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.
This adjustment is done when RADF fails to cor-
13. Set a sheet of B6R paper in the Bypass tray.
rectly detect size of an original.
14. Press the button.
15. Press [3] by means of the numeric keys.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode.
Check that “028-003” appears in the message
display area.
16. Press the [START] key.
2. “47 mode menu screen”
Press “69” by means of the numeric keys.
Check that “069-000” appears in the message
display area.
3. Set the original guide plate to the minimum size
(width) position, then press the [START] key.
4. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.
5. Press the ∗ button.
6. Enter “1” from the the numeric keys.
Make sure that “069-001” is indicated in the
message display area.
7. Set the original guide plate to the maximum size
(width) position, then press the [START] key.
8. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.
9. To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.
9.3
Bypass Size Detection
Adjustment
17. Press the [STOP] key.
18. To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.
9.4
Action for Mounting When
Reinstalling the HDD
Removing the HDD for analysis of an abnormality
and then reinstalling it after turning on and off the
power may result in no recognition of the HDD. To
avoid a condition like this, conduct this setting.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode.
2. “47 mode setting screen”
Press the No. of sheets setting button to enter
“15”. Check to see if “015-000” is displayed in
the message display column.
Perform this adjustment if paper size detection at
the bypass feed tray does not function correctly.
A. Procedure
3. Press the ∗ button.
4. Press the No. of sheets setting button to enter
“97”.
Check to see if “015-097” is displayed in the
message display column.
5. Press the [START] key.
1. Enter the 47 mode.
2. “47 mode menu screen”
Press “28” by means of the numeric keys.
Check that “028-000” appears in the message
display area.
3. Set a sheet of A4R paper in the bypass tray.
6. Press the [STOP] key to terminate the setting.
7. To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.
Note:
• When the data is in nonconformity, an error may
occur. In that case, execute the format (key oper-
4. Press the ∗ button.
5. Press [1] by means of the numeric keys.
ator mode).
Check that “028-001” appears in the message
display area.
6. Press the [START] key.
7. Press the [STOP] key.
8. Set a sheet of A4 paper in the bypass tray.
9. Press the ∗ button.
10. Press “2” by means of the numeric keys.
Check that “028-002” appears in the message
display area.
1-77
1
I ADJUSTMENT
9.2
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
9.5
Input Check List
Classification Symbol
Code
Multi code
Name
Display
TSCB
00
—
Toner control sensor board
(Drum temperature)
0 to 255
TSCB
01
—
Toner control sensor board
0 to 255
TSCB
02
—
Toner control sensor board
0 to 255
TH1
03
—
Fxing temperature sensor/1
0 to 255
ON
Analog
signal
OFF
TH2
04
—
Fxing temperature sensor/2
0 to 255
TDS
05
—
Toner temperature sensor
0 to 255
HUM1
06
—
Humidity sensor
0 to 255
PS8
10
Paper feed
1
No paper sensor/U
PS11
2
No paper sensor/L
PS103
3
No paper sensor/3
Paper No paper
PS108
4
No paper sensor/4
PS13
5
Bypass tray no paper sensor
PS153
6
No paper sensor (LT-203)
1
Upper limit sensor/U
PS10
PS7
12
2
Upper limit sensor/L
PS102
3
Tray upper limit sensor/3
PS107
4
Tray upper limit sensor/4
PS152
6
Tray upper limit sensor (LT-203)
1
Tray set sensor/U
PS9
13
No paper Paper
Upper
limit
limit
Yes
PS12
2
Tray set sensor/L
PS101
3
Tray sensor/3
PS106
4
Tray sensor/4
1
Main body upper tray paper size signal
—
2
Main body lower tray paper size signal
PSDTB/3
3
Paper size detection signal board/3
PSDTB/4
4
Paper size detection signal board/4
—
16
Not at
upper
No
0 to 9*1
*1 Paper size signal (Inch)
Tray
Symbol displayed
1
1
B5
2
B4
3
A5R
4
A4
5
A4R
2,3,4
A5R
A4
A4R
A3
F4
6
F4
7
8
9
0
5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 14
5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 14
11 x 17
*1 Paper size signal (Metric)
Tray
Symbol displayed
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
B5
B4
A5R
A4
A4R
F4
2,3,4
B5
B4
A5R
A4
A4R
A3
1-78
7
8
9
0
5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 14
F4
8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 11 x 17
47 MODE
Tray
LCT(3)
Symbol displayed
1
2
A4
A4R
Classification Symbol
3
4
8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R
5
6
7
8
B5R
B5
A4
A4R
Code
Multi code
Name
20
1
Registration sensor
Conveyance PS104
2
Paper feed sensor/U (DB upper tray)
PS105
3
Paper feed sensor/L (DB lower tray)
4
Timing sensor/U (Main body upper tray)
9
0
8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R
Display
ON
Paper feed •
PS1
PS21
OFF
Paper No paper
(7145/7235/7228)
PS22
5
Timing sensor/L (Main body lower tray)
(7145/7235/7228)
PS155
SW151
Scanner
6
Paper feed sensor (LT-203)
7
Interlock switch (LT-203)
Open
PS2
22
1
Fixing exit sensor
Paper No paper
SW3
23
1
Interlock switch
Open
VR1
28
1
Bypass tray paper size sensor VR
0 to 255
—
38
1
Measured LD alarm value (LD1)
0 to 255
2
(7145)
Measured LD alarm value (LD2)
0 to 255
—
Measured LD alarm value
—
(7235/7228/7222)
—
PS14
40
1
(7145)
Scanner home position sensor
PS15
2
APS timing sensor
PS17
3
APS sensor
Close
Close
0 to 255*2
Other
than H.P.
H.P.
Open
Close
Original is
No
provided original
*2
The results can be displayed by pressing the start button
1-79
→ the stop button in this order.
3
I ADJUSTMENT
*1 Paper size signal (Common)
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
Classification Symbol
Intrinsic
—
Code
Multi code
50
1
functions
Name
Check of DB serial communications
Display
ON
OFF
0001
0000
Normal Abnormal
(7145)
or not
Check of DF serial communications
connected
(7235/7228/7222)
—
2
Check of FNS serial communications
—
3
Check of scanner serial communications
Check of Main drive board serial com4
(7235/7228/7222) munications
—
51
1
Judging of the main body type
— (7145)
0096 to 0098*3
(7235/7228/7222)
—
TLD
57
2
Judging of the DB type
1
Toner level detector sensor
0 to 6*4
Not
Provided
provided
PS5
2
Toner bottle sensor
Provided
Not
provided
RADF
*3
60
No original sensor
Paper No paper
2
Cover open/close sensor
Open
Close
PS303
3
DF open/close sensor
Open
Close
PS308
4
Original registration sensor
PS309
5
Original conveyance sensor
PS302
6
Original exit sensor
PS305
7
Original size sensor/1
PS306
8
Original size sensor/2
VR301
9
Original size VR
No paper Paper
Paper No paper
0 to 255
0096
7222
0097
7228
0098
7235
Judging code of the DB type
Display
Judging type
3
PS301
Judging code of the Main type (7235/7228/7222)
Display
Judging type
*4
1
PS304
0
Not connected
2
DB-211
3
DB-411
1-80
5
DB-211 + LT-203
6
DB-411 + LT-203
Classification Symbol
FS-112
PS701
Code
Multi code
70
1
Name
Pressure sensor (Level)
Display
ON
OFF
No
Pressure
pressure applied
PS705
2
Shutter sensor
PS701
3
Pressure sensor (HP)
PS704
4
Paper exit full sensor
ON
OFF
No
Pressure
pressure applied
Other
Full
than full
PS703
8
Exit sensor
PS702
9
FNS entrance censor
PS712
10
Stapler HP sensor
PS713
12
Staple detection sensor
Paper No paper
Other
H.P.
than H.P.
No
Staples
staples provided
provided
PS714
14
Stapler ready sensor
—
16
24V detect
PS711
17
Tray upper limit sensor
PS706
18
Tray lower limit sensor
Stapler Stapler
not ready ready
0V
24V
Upper
Not at
limit
upper
limit
Lower
limit
Other
than
lower
limit
FS-113
PS707
19
No paper sensor
PS708
20
Stapler unit HP sensor
PS709
21
Alignment HP sensor/R
PS710
22
Alignment HP sensor/F
1
1st tray exit sensor
PC3
2
Stacking sensor
PC4
3
Upper path sensor
PC2
4
Lower path sensor
PC1
70
PC6
5
1st tray full detection sensor
PC7
6
Elevate tray full detection sensor
PC9
7
Alignment HP sensor
PC14
8
Staple home sensor
PC12
9
Stacking roller home sensor
PC13
10
Paper exit roller home sensor
PC5
11
Process tray paper detection sensor
—
12
Stapler 1 home sensor
Paper No paper
H.P.
Other
than H.P.
Paper No paper
H.P.
Other
than H.P.
Paper No paper
H.P.
Other
than H.P.
1-81
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
Classification Symbol
FS-113
—
Code
70
Multi code
13
Name
Staple empty detection sensor 1
Display
ON
OFF
No
Staples
staples provided
provided
—
14
Self-priming sensor 1
Stapler
—
15
Stapler 2 home sensor
H.P.
—
16
Staple empty sensor 2
No
Stapler
ready not ready
Other
than H.P.
Staples
staples provided
provided
—
17
Self-priming sensor 2
Stapler Stapler
ready not ready
PWB-F
18
Elevate tray top face sensor
Upper
limit
Not at
upper
PC8
19
Elevate tray paper extractor sensor
ON
OFF
S2, S3
20
Elevate tray upper limit/lower limit
switch
Upper
limit
Not at
upper
limit
limit
PC10
21
Shift home sensor
H.P.
Other
than H.P.
S4
22
Punch 2-hole/3-hole detection sensor
2 holes
3 holes
PC15
23
Punch motor pulse sensor
ON
OFF
PC11
24
Shift motor pulse sensor
27
Passage sensor
Paper No paper
1
Entrance sensor
Paper No paper
(inch system only)
RU-101
PS2
FS-114
PC4-FN
70
exists
PC5-FN
2
Transport sensor
PC6-FN
3
Alignment home position sensor 1
PC7-FN
4
Alignment home position sensor 2
S3-FN
5
Elevate tray upper/lower limit SW
Upper
limit
Except
upper limit
S2-FN
6
Shutter detection SW
Close
Open
S1-FN
7
Front cover open/close detection SW
—
9
Pulse sensor
Shade Transmit
PC23-SK
10
In & out guide home position sensor
Shade Transmit
Shade Transmit
PC14-FN
11
Elevator tray lower limit sensor
PC15-FN
12
Top face detection sensor
—
13
BK-114 detection
PC3-FN
14
Elevator tray position detect sensor
Home Except home
position position
Equipped
Not
equipped
1
1-82
Shade Transmit
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Display
ON
FS-114
PC16-FN
70
PC11-FN
ADU
15
Shutter home position sensor
17
Exit paddle home position sensor
OFF
Home Except home
position
position
PC12-FN
18
Exit roller home position sensor
PC8-FN
19
Storage tray paper detect sensor
PC10-FN
20
Staple home position sensor
—
21
Self-priming sensor
—
22
Staple empty detection sensor
—
23
Staple home sensor
—
25
Punch position sensor 1
—
26
Punch position sensor 2
PC1-PK
27
Punch trash full sensor
Shade Transmit
PC22-SK
28
Crease roller home position sensor
Home Except home
position position
S4-FN
29
Transport jam detection SW
PC26-SK
30
Layable guide home sensor
PC20-SK
31
Saddle exit sensor
PC21-SK
32
Saddle tray empty sensor
—
33
Saddle staple home position sensor 1
—
34
Saddle self-priming sensor 1
—
35
Saddle staple empty detection sensor 1
—
36
Saddle staple home position sensor 2
—
37
Saddle self priming sensor 2
—
38
Saddle staple empty detection sensor 2
Paper exists No paper
Shade Transmit
Transmit Shade
Close
Open
Shade Transmit
Paper exists No paper
Shade Transmit
S4-SK
39
Saddle interlock switch
PC18-SK
40
Saddle exit roller home position sensor Except home Home
position position
—
ADU sensor
PS4
80
1-83
Open
Open
Close
Close
I ADJUSTMENT
Classification Symbol
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
9.6
Output Check List
Classification Symbol
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
changed in the field
High volt-
L1
00
—
Exposure lamp
age/image
M4
01
—
Toner supply motor 1
01
—
Developing motor
M3
(7145)
M1
01
—
Main motor
SD9
01
—
Toner solenoid
HV
02
—
Charging
X
03
04
—
—
Transfer
Separation (AC)
X
X
05
06
—
—
Transfer + Separation (AC + DC)
Separation (DC)
X
X
07
08
—
—
Grid
Dmax/γ LED
X
X
10
(7145)
—
Guide plate
X
11
—
Bias (7145)
Bias + Guide plate (7235/7228/7222)
X
15
1
Service counter clear (Clears service
related counter values from the PRMB
PRMB
(Parameter memory board))
3
2
Reuse counter clear (prohibited in the field)
10
11
EKC data block clear
Job memory data block clear
12
Arbitrary replacement parts data block
clear
13
Coded dialing data block clear (for Fax)
14
One touch data block clear (for Fax)
15
16
Group data block clear (for Fax)
Fax file format (for Fax)
17
FL related non-volatile data initialization
(for Fax)
18
19
E-Mail address list clear
FTP address list clear
20
21
Box No. list clear
E-Mail Subject list clear
22
23
E-Mail Body list clear
Initialization of scanner file name
24
25
Initialization of copier file name
Initialization of SMB data
26
90
Initialization of LDAP data
Setting of system/copier and initialization
97
of memory switch
HDD mounting measure
1-84
X
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
changed in the field
High volt-
PRMB
15
age/image
Paper feed
SD1
20
Initialize KRDS non volatile area
Initial generation of document folder
1
1st paper feed solenoid/U
SD2
2
1st paper feed solenoid/L
SD3
3
Bypass solenoid
SD101
4
Paper feed solenoid/U
SD102
5
Paper feed solenoid/L
SD151
6
LT Paper feed solenoid
1
Paper feed motor
M100
M150
2
3
DB Paper feed motor
LT Paper feed motor
M9, MC1,
MC2
4
Paper feed motor, registration clutch,
loop clutch
1
Tray motor/U
M8
M101
2
3
Tray motor/L
Tray up motor/3
M102
M151
4
5
Tray up motor/4
Tray up motor
M9
M7
Scanner
98
99
21
23
MC1
MC2
25
26
—
—
Registration clutch
Loop clutch
—
28
1
Bypass size adjustment (A4R in width)
—
2
Bypass size adjustment (A4 in width)
—
3
Bypass size adjustment (B6R in width)
SD7
29
—
Separation claw solenoid
M2
M5, FM7
31
1
Scanner motor
32
1
Polygon motor (steady rotation) *1
2
Polygon motor (Pre-rotation) *1
(7235)
M5, FM7
(7235)
Main body
M2,L1
34
—
Shading correction operation
LD
LD,M5
36
37
—
—
Laser PWM (0 to 255)
Conpel to laser ON
LD,M5
L1
38
39
—
—
LD alarm measurement
Platen still APS
M11
M1
40
41
—
1
Fixing motor
Main motor (sequential)
42
2
1
Main motor (motor alone)
Internal dehumidifying fan/1
M1
FM3
*1
FM4
2
Internal cooling fan/1
7235 only, FM7 (Polygon cooling fan) also rotates at the same time.
1-85
3
I ADJUSTMENT
Classification Symbol
47 MODE
Classification Symbol
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
I ADJUSTMENT
changed in the field
Main body
FM2
42
3
Fixing cooling fan
(7145/7235)
FM1
4
DC power supply cooling fan
FM5
5
Developing suction fan
FM6
6
Internal dehumidifying fan/2
FM3,FM6
7
Internal dehumidifying fan/1, 2
FM301
8
Cooling fan
9
Internal cooling fan/2 (low speed)
FM7
(7145)
FM7
10
Internal cooling fan/2 (high speed)
(7145)
TC
L2
43
45
L3
3
Total counter
Fixing heater lamp/1
2
Fixing heater lamp/2
Operation
panel
OB
OB
48
49
—
—
All LED ON
Operation panel check (Checking for
Intrinsic
M3
50
0
LCD, keys, and buzzer)
Developing motor (motor alone)
functions
M3
(7145)
1 to 255
RADF
*
—
1
Developing motor (sequential)
• Use the multicode “1 to 255” to set the
PCL
51
—
No. of rotations.
Pre-charging exposure lamp
TSL
SD4
52
53
—
—
Transfer synchronization lamp
Cleaning web solenoid
M4
M4, SD9
55
1
2
Toner supply motor 1
Toner supply motor 1, Toner solenoid
M10
M10
56
1
2
Toner supply motor 2 (CW)
Toner supply motor 2 (CCW)
TLD
SD9
57
58
—
—
Toner level sensor
Toner supply solenoid
—
M301
59
60
—
1
24V power source remote
Original feed motor (CW)
M301
M303
2
3
Original feed motor (CCW)
Original reversal motor (CW)
M303
M302
4
5
Original reversal motor (CCW)
M302
M302
6
7
Original conveyance motor (CCW/100%)
Original conveyance motor (CCW/400%)
SD302
SD301
8
9
Rollar pressure solenoid
Paper exit solenoid
SD303
VR301
10
0
Stamp solenoid
Original size adjustment (small size)
69*
Original conveyance motor (CCW/50%)
VR301
1
Original size adjustment (large size)
Be sure to execute the operation without fail when DF-320 is installed.
1-86
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
changed in the field
FS-112
M701
1
FNS conveyance motor
M702
70
2
Paper exit motor (forward rotation)
M702
3
Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
M707
4
Pressure motor (forward rotation)
M707
5
Pressure motor (reverse rotation)
M706
6
Tray up motor(raise)
M706
7
Tray up motor (lower)
M705
8
Stapler shift motor, (initialize) (A4/F)
M705
9
Stapler shift motor, (initialize)(A4/R)
M703,M704
10
Alignment motor/R,F (initialize)
M703,M704
11
Alignment motor/R,F (A4 size position)
M703,M704
12
13
Alignment motor/R,F (rocking)
Stapler motor
1
Exit motor
M708
FS-114
M1-FN
70
M2-FN
M3-FN
Transport motor
Entrance motor
M4-FN
M5-FN
3
Alignment motor 1
Alignment motor 2
M11-FN
M11-FN
5
6
Elevator motor (up)
Elevator motor (down)
M12-FN
M6-FN
7
11
Shutter opening motor
Exit open/close motor
M9-SK
M7-FN
12
17
Saddle exit open/close motor
Stapling unit moving motor
M10-SK
SL1-FN
23
53
Crease motor
Storage paddle solenoid
SL2-FN
—
54
78
Exit paddle solenoid
Punch motor
IT
—
SD8
75
79
1
Punch motor
IT gate solenoid
ADU
M6
80
1
Forward rotation (7145: 230mm/sec,
7235: 180mm/sec, 7228/7222: 140mm/
M6
2
M6
3
M6
SD5
83
sec)
Forward rotation (600mm/sec)
Reverse rotation (7145: 230mm/sec,
7235: 180mm/sec, 7228/7222: 140mm/
4
sec)
Reverse rotation (600mm/sec)
—
ADU gate solenoid
1-87
3
I ADJUSTMENT
Classification Symbol
47 MODE
Classification Symbol
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
I ADJUSTMENT
changed in the field
Others
—
90
—
PM counter clear
—
91
0
Process counter clear (prohibited in the field)
X
1
Drum counter clear (prohibited in the field)
X
—
PRMB (Parameter memory board) initiali-
X
—
—
92
zation
—
93
—
(Process initial set/prohibited in the field)
Initial settings
—
95
—
Automatic adjustment of L detection ref-
X
erence value
(prohibited in the field)
—
96
—
Process delivery completing setting (pro-
—
97
—
hibited in the field)
Light distribution check
—
98
—
After completion of process shipment,
X
X
temporary initialization of the PRMB
(Parameter memory board)
3
—
—
119
121
—
—
Network initialization
—
—
197
198
—
—
E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display
E-RDH (DRAM) capacity check
—
999
—
Checking of status control board (prohibited in the field)
Initialize fax-related nonvolatile memory
1-88
X
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Caution:
• Be sure the power cord has been unplugged
from the wall outlet.
10.1 RADF Height Adjustment
A. Procedure
1. Close the RADF.
2. Open the open/close cover [1], then turn the
[1]
[2]
RADF height adjustment screw [2] until the
RADF height adjust pointer [3] comes to center
of the scale divisions.
1-89
[3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.2 RADF Distortion Adjustment
Adjust the amount of distortion of a copy in the following procedures.
A. Procedure
1. Set a A3 paper on the tray of the main body.
2. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF,
then make a copy.
3. Check the amount of distortion in the copy.
Standard value: ± 0.3% less.
[1]
A
[1]
B
Paper feed direction
4. When the distortion is larger than the tolerance,
adjust it using the skew adjustment screw [1].
• A: Turn the dskew adjustment screw [1] clockwise.
• B: Turn the skew adjustment screw [1] counterclockwise.
5. Repeat above steps 2 to 4 until the standard
value for distortion is met.
1-90
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.3 RADF Original Skew Adjustment (Front Side)
When the front side of the originals are fed being
skewed, adjust the registration pully bracket.
A. Procedure
1. In the single sided → single sided copy mode,
set the adjustment chart to the RADF for copying.
2. Check the original skew pattern.
Standard value: Within ± 0.5%
[1]
[3]
[2]
A
[1]
Image
[2]
[3]
Paper
Paper feed direction
B
3. When the skew is not up to the standard, open
the open/close cover [1], loosen the screw [3]
and adjust the position of the registration pulley
bracket[2].
• A: Move the registration pully bracket [2] down
[4].
• B: Move the registration pully bracket [2] up [5].
4. Repeat above steps 1 to 3 until the standard
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
value for the skewed original is within standard
value.
[2]
1-91
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10.4 RADF Original Skew Adjustment (Back Side)
When the back side of the original is supplied on a
skew, adjust the clearance of the guide plate.
A. Procedure
1. In the double sided → single sided copy mode,
set the adjustment chart to the RADF for copying.
2. Check the original skew pattern.
Standard value: Within ± 0.5%
[1]
[3]
[2]
A
[1]
Image
[2]
[3]
Paper
Paper feed direction
B
1-92
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
3. When the skew is not up to the standards, open
I ADJUSTMENT
[5]
the open/close cover [1] and remove the 2 covers [2].
4. Loosen the hexagon nut [3], and rotate the set
screw[4] to adjust the clearance of the guide
plate.
• A: Loosen the hexagon nut [3] at the rear and
rotate the set screw [4] clockwise.
• B: Loosen the hexagon nut [3] at the front and
rotate the set screw [4] clockwise.
[2]
Note:
• Since there is the possibility of jamming, be sure
not make the clearance of the guide plate narrower than the standard value. (Be sure not to
tighten the hexagon nut [3].)
• The reference value of the clearance of the guide
plate should be determined based on the position
where the difference in level [A] of the second
stage of the clearance reference block [5]
becomes flush with the metal frame surface [B].
5. Repeat the steps 1 to 4 until the original skew
[1]
[2]
gets within the standard value.
[3]
[4]
1-93
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10.5 DB-411 Paper-Centering
Adjustment
Make a copy of the test chart, then perform necessary adjustment until the standard value for the
paper centering is fit.
A. Procedure
1. Loosen a screw [1] on the side guide situated at
[2]
bottom of the paper feed tray. And also loosen
the 2 screws [3] on the reinforcing plates (front/
[1]
back) [2] situated at top of the tray.
[3]
2. Rotate the adjusting cam [4], move the side
guide back and forth and adjust it so that the
centering of the image center [6] to the paper
center [5] becomes within the specified value
(within 3mm).
3. When the adjustment is complete, tighten the
screws provided for the side guide and reinforc-
[4]
ing plates.
Note:
• If paper miscentering occurs, move the side guide
forwards and backwards, and adjust the gap for
the paper in use to between 1.0 and 1.5mm.
(The gap must be set so that the tray meets both
the lower limit position and the upper limit position.)
1-94
[7]
[6]
[5]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.6 DB-411 Tray Tilt Adjustment
Normal paper feed can't be expected if the tray is
tilted. In such case, adjust the tray and paper feed
roller shaft so that they may be parallel in each
other. Whenever the wire is replaced, this adjustment must be implemented.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the front cover of the tray.
2. Loosen a screw [2] of the wire adjustment part
[1] situated in front side of the tray.
[1]
[2]
3. Position in front and in rear the 2 metal scales
[1]
[2] in the tray [1] as shown in the drawing.
4. Move the wire adjustment part [3] until the distance from top of the side plate to the tray [1] top
face is equal in both the front and back sides.
[3]
5. When the adjustment is complete, tighten the
screw [4] for the wire adjustment part [3].
[2]
[4]
1-95
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.7 LT Tray Tilt Adjustment
Normal paper feed can't be expected if the tray is
tilted. In such case, adjust the tray and paper feed
roller shaft so that they may be parallel in each
other. Whenever the wire is replaced, this adjustment must be implemented.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the LT from the main body.
2. Open the top cover and remove the right cover
and the front cover.
3. Loosen a screw [2] of the wire adjustment part
[1] situated in front.
[1]
[2]
1-96
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
4. Position in front and in rear the 2 metal scales
I ADJUSTMENT
[1]
[2] in the tray [1] as shown in the drawing.
5. Move the wire adjustment part [3] until the distance from top of the side plate to the tray [1] top
face is equal in both the front and back sides.
6. When the adjustment is complete, tighten the
screw [4] for the wire adjustment part [3].
[2]
[3]
[4]
1-97
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.8 FS-113 Output Check Mode
A. Switches on PWB
S1
Used to run the Test Mode opera-
S2
tion.
S3
DIP switch used to set the Test
LED1~4
Mode operation.
Turn ON or OFF, or blink to indicate a specific condition during
Test Mode operations.
S3
S2
S1
1-98
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
(1) Test Mode Setting Procedure
a. Procedure
1. Turn OFF SW2 (Sub power switch) of the
copier.
2. Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF
position as necessary. (See Table below.)
3. Turn ON SW2 (Sub power switch) of the copier.
4. This sets the Finisher into the corresponding
Test Mode operation.
b.
Resetting Procedure
• Flip all keys of the DIP switch to their respective
initial positions (OFF positions) and turn OFF,
then ON, SW2 (Sub power switch) of the copier.
(2) Test Mode Operations
Test Mode
DIP Switch (S3)
Operation
Online
1
1st Tray exit
Elevator Tray
ON
exit
Finisher Tray
exit
Shifting
operation
Aligning Plate
operation
Stapling Unit
CD movement
Exit Roller/
Rolls spacing
Storage Roller/
Rolls spacing
Elevator Tray
operation
Hole Punch
operation
Hole position
selection
Sensor test
2
1
{
2
{
3
{
4
z
z
{
{
{
ON
{
z
{
{
ON ON
z
z
{
{
ON
z
{
z
{
ON ON
{
z
z
{
ON ON ON
z
z
z
{
ON {
{
{
z
ON z
{
{
z
ON
ON {
z
{
z
ON ON
ON z
z
{
z
ON ON {
{
z
z
ON
ON
ON
3
4
LED
ON ON
Indicates sen-
sor state
z: Blinking {: OFF
1-99
I ADJUSTMENT
B. Test Mode
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
(3) Operation in Each Test Mode Operation
a.
1st Tray Exit
S1: ON
Motors and solenoids: Energized
[Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor
(M4), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1), 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2)]
S2: ON
Motors and solenoids: Deenergized
[Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor
(M4), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1), 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2)]
b.
Elevator Tray Exit
S1: ON
Motors: Energized
[Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor
(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor
(M3)]
S2: OFF
Motors: Deenergized
[Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor
(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor
(M3)]
c.
Finisher Tray Exit
S1: ON
Motors and solenoids: Energized
[Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor
(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor
(M3), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1)]
S2: OFF
Motors and solenoids: Deenergized
[Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor
(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor
(M3), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1)]
d.
Shifting Operation
S1: ON
The Elevator Tray shifts to the front.
S2: ON
The Elevator Tray shifts to the rear.
1-100
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Aligning Plate Operation
I ADJUSTMENT
e.
S1: ON
At the home position
S1: ON
At a position to align A4 paper
S1: ON
At a position to align 8.5 x 11 paper
S1: ON
At a position to align A4R paper
S1: ON
At a position to align 8.5 x 11R paper
f.
Stapling Unit CD Movement
S1: ON
At home position
S1: ON
At a position for A4 corner stapling
S1: ON
At home position
S1: ON
At a position for A4R corner stapling
g.
Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing
S1: ON
Pressed
S2: ON
Separated
h.
Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing
S1: ON
Pressed
S2: ON
Separated
1-101
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
i.
Elevator Tray Operation
S1: ON
Goes up until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit
Sensor PQ
(PWB-D) is blocked.
S2: ON
Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit
Sensor PQ
(PWB-D) is unblocked.
j.
Hole Punch Operation
S1: ON
The Punch Motor (M11) is energized.
S1: ON
The electromagnetic spring clutch is energized.
S2: ON
The Punch Motor (M11) is deenergized.
k.
Hole Position Selection U.S.A. and Canada
S1: ON
2-hole position
S2: ON
3-hole position
l.
Sensor Test
Sensor
State
LED
1 2 3 4
Elevator Tray Upper Limit
Sensor PQ (PWB-D)
Storage Sensor (PC3)
Unblocked { { { z
Blocked
{ { z {
Lower Entrance Sensor
(PC2)
Blocked
{ z { {
Upper Entrance Sensor
(PC4)
Blocked
z { { {
z: ON
{: OFF
1-102
10.9 Lengthwise Position Adjustment
of Punch Hole of FS-113
A. Procedure
1. Set the copier into the Hole Punch mode and
make a 1-sided copy from a 1-sided original.
2. Fold the copy in half and check to see if the
holes are aligned
(deviation should be within 2mm).
3. If the holes are misaligned, loosen the screw
that secure the Punch Unit and slide the Punch
Unit as necessary.
4. Make a copy again and check for correct hole
positions.
1-103
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10.10 Adjustment of FS-113 Solenoids
A. Adjustment of the Upper/Lower Entrance
Switching Solenoid (SL1)
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen one screw that secures the solenoid in
position.
2. Move the solenoid up or down and, when
dimension A measures 4.4mm, tighten the
screw.
B. Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2)
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen one screw that secures the solenoid in
position.
2. Move the solenoid to the right or left and, when
dimension B measures 3.6mm, tighten the
screw.
1-104
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.11 FS-113 Timing Belt Tension
Adjustment
A. Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor
(M4) Timing Belt
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws.
2. Use a spring balance to apply pressure at C and
tighten the 2 screws at the position where the
tension becomes 200 ± 100gf when the belt
deflects 4mm.
B. Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor
(M2) Timing Belt
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws.
[2]
2. Use a spring balance to pull the square hole [2]
given in the lower entrance motor mounting
bracket with a force of 800 ± 50gf and tighten
the 2 screws.
[1]
C. Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3) Timing
Belt
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws.
2. Tighten the 3 screws at the position [3] where
the external form of the screw [1] coincides with
[1]
that of the oblong hole in the exit motor mounting bracket [3].
[2]
1-105
[3]
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10.12 FS-113 Adjustment of the
Elevator Tray Upper Limit
Sensor
• This adjustment must be made when the Control
Board (PWB-A) or the Elevate Tray Top Face
Sensor (PWB-C, D) is replaced with a new one.
A. Procedure
1. Set up the sensor test mode.
2. Turn VR1 on PWB-A fully counterclockwise.
3. Using a sheet of paper, block the Elevator Tray
Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C).
4. Check that LED4 on PWB-A turns OFF. If it
stays ON, slowly turn VR1 clockwise and stop
turning it as soon as the LED turns OFF.
1-106
10.13 Adjustment of FS-113 Elevator Tray Overload Detection
Level
• This adjustment must be made when the Control
Board (PWB-A) or the Elevator Motor (M7) is
replaced with a new one.
A. Procedure
1. Set the “Elevator Tray operation” function of the
Test Mode.
2. Turn VR2 on PWB-A fully counterclockwise.
3. Using a sheet of paper, block the Elevator Tray
Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C). Then using
the “Elevator Tray operation” function, lower the
Elevator Tray.
4. Place 1,500 sheets of A3 (20lbs) or 3,000
sheets of A4 (20lbs) paper on the Elevator Tray.
5. Using the “Elevator Tray operation” function,
raise the Elevator Tray.
6. While the Elevator Tray is going up, turn VR2 on
PWB-A clockwise and, when LED3 on PWB-A
turns from a steady light to off, stop turning VR2.
1-107
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.14 Staple Position Adjustment
of FS-114
• It is replaced when the stapler is replaced or
when the staple position is not correct.
A. Procedure
1. Set the staple mode and make a copy.
2. Check the staple position of the paper.
• 1-Point Tilted Staple
Paper Width 279 to 297mm: 45° tilt
Measurement
Specification
Adjustment range
position
A, D
4.4 ± 3mm
—
B, C
12.1 ± 4mm
+1mm to -2mm
Measurement
position
Specification
Adjustment range
A
B
4.9 ± 3mm
16.2 ± 4mm
—
+1mm to -2mm
C
D
10.1 ± 4mm
6.5 ± 3mm
+1mm to -2mm
—
B
C
A
D
B5, B4: 30° tilt
4349D503AA
• 1-Point Parallel Staple
Paper Width 182 to 216mm
Measurement
Specification
Adjustment range
A
4.5 ± 3mm
—
B
6.0 ± 4mm
+1mm to -2mm
position
A
B
4349D504AA
1
1-108
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
• 2-Point Staple
C, F
C
Adjustment range
6.0 ± 4mm
+1mm to -2mm
D
Y ± 4mm
—
E
X ± 4mm
—
I ADJUSTMENT
Measurement Specification
position
D
E
Y = (paper width-x-11) / 2
X = A3, A4: 137
B4, B5: 114
F
4349D505AA
A4R: 190
B5R: 162
Substitute above into the equation.
3. If the staple position is misaligned, remove one
screw and the cover.
4. Loosen two adjustment screws and move the
Stapler Unit in the direction of the arrow to make
the adjustment.
5. Make another copy and check the staple position.
4349D513AA
10.15 Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter
Drive Gear of FS-114
• When the gear/1, 2 or 3 is replaced, or the gear/
1, 2 or 3 is removed.
A. Procedure
1. Set three gears.
Gear 2
Note:
• Set the gears so that the marks on Gears 1 and 3
Gear 1
Gear 3
are aligned with the rib of Gear 2 as shown on the
right.
4349D502AA
1-109
1
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.16 Punch Hole Deviance Adjustment of FS-114 (PK-114)
• When the punch kit is replaced or removed.
A. Procedure
1. Set the copier into the Hole Punch mode and
make a 1-sided copy from a 1-sided original.
2. Fold the output paper in half and check whether
the punch hole positions are aligned.
Specification: Within 2mm
4349D501AA
3. If the punch hole position is misaligned, remove
two screws and the cover.
4. Loosen one adjustment screw and move the
Punch Unit forward or backward to make the
adjustment.
5. Make another copy and check the punch hole
position.
4512U025AB
1
1-110
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.17 Fold Angle Adjustment of
SK-114
• It is performed when the fold unit is replaced or a
tilt occurs in paper folding.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the Crease mode and make a copy. (A3
Size)
2. Fold the output paper and half and check
A
Center
whether section A of the paper is aligned.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5mm
3. If the fold position is slanted as shown on the
left, make the following adjustment.
Fold
4511D529AA
4. Open the Front Door, loosen one adjustment
screw, and move the Crease Unit to the left to
*
make the adjustment.
If the fold position is slanted opposite to the
figure of step 3, move the Crease Unit to the
right to make the adjustment.
5. Make another copy and check the fold position.
4511D530AA
1-111
1
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.18 Staple Angle Adjustment of
SK-114
• It is performed when the staple unit 1 or 2 is
replaced or a tilt occurs in center staple position.
A. Procedure
1. Set five A4 originals in the ADF.
2. Set to 2-point Staple and Crease mode and
A
make a copy. Check whether the staple position
is aligned correctly.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5mm
3. If the staple position is slanted as shown on the
figure, make the following adjustment.
Exit direction
4511D531AA
4. Release the lock release lever of the Saddle
Unit.
5. Loosen one adjustment screw and move the
lock lever to the left to make the adjustment.
*
If the staple position is slanted opposite to the
figure of step 3, move the lock lever to the
right to make the adjustment.
6. Make another copy and check the staple posi4511D532AA
tion.
1
1-112
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISW
ISW
2. SETUP
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISW
A. Board used for the ISW
The following boards are available for rewriting
a program using the ISW in this machine.
The ISW (In-System Writer) is an operation by
• SCB (System control board)
which the control program, that is stored in the flash
• CB (Main body control board)
• FNSCB (FNS control board) : FS-112
ROM incorporated into a variety of control boards in
grated into the main body of the copier. Executing
• PWB-A FN (Main control board) : FS-114
• FAX control
the ISW allows you to renew the version of the con-
• For the printer controller, see the Service Manual
the digital copier, is rewritten with the board inte-
trol program without changing the board or to install
the latest program while changing the board.
As a tool to execute the ISW, you can use the [ISW
Trns (PC software)] by which rewriting is made with
a personal computer (PC) connected to the digital
copier.
of IP.
For boards other than the above, the ROM is
required to be changed.
B. Data flow
There are 2 types of data flows for the ISW as
shown below:
This tools allow direct rewriting of the control program in the flash ROM included in the copier main
• PC→SCB→CB→FNSCB/PWB-A FN
• PC→SCB→FAX
body by connecting the ISW connector of the copier
main body.
Important:
The method of carrying out the necessary setup
work on the main body for executing ISW is
described here. For the operation of the “ISW Trns,”
see the “ISW (In-System Writer) Service Manual.”
• When the overall control program has not been
written into the SCB (System control board), it is
not possible to rewrite programs for other boards.
C. Checking before transfer
Before executing the ISW, be sure to check to
see if the transfer case and the transfer mode
to be used are correct.
Note:
• When using the USB, be sure to turn on the USB
radio button in the [Setting (S)] - [Communication
(1) When the overall control program has not
setting (C)] of the ISWTrns and press the OK button.
been installed
When the overall control program has not been
• For the ISW method of this machine, only the
ISW Trns is available.
installed, the LCD screen is not displayed and
data cannot be written in the 25 mode.
Transfer case: When the SCB (System control
board) is being replaced.
Transfer mode:When the power is on. (When
the data LED indicator lamp is
on → The ISW is waiting for
transfer. When the lamp is
flashing → The ISW is receiving
data.)
2-1
3
II ISW
II
SETUP
(2) When the overall control program has been
installed
E. Preparation of the copying machine for ISW
transfer
When the overall control program has been
When the copier and the PC are USB con-
installed, it is possible to write data in the 25
nected for the first time, it is necessary to install
mode.
Transfer case: Version up, when boards other
the USB driver into the PC. (It is not required,
however, to install the USB driver on and after
the second connection.)
than the SCB (System control
board) are being replaced.
For details of the installation procedure of the
USB driver, see “3. USB ISW.”
Transfer mode:25 mode
Before operating the ISW, maintain the copier
in ISW mode.
II ISW
D. ISW connectors
The ISW connectors are provided on the right
side of the main body, and each of the connectors is covered with a cap or seal. Be sure to
(1) When the overall control program has been
installed
remove this cap or seal while in use.
a.
Procedure
The following two types of IF are available:
• USB (B type)
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
• IEEE1284 (Nibble/ECP/compatible mode)
In the case of the 7145
Press the [10.ISW] key.
3. “ISW menu screen”
Select the ROM where the ROM data to be
rewritten.
[START] key is displayed.
4. “Program rewrite screen”
Press the [START] key.
Note:
• This step is to be used only when carrying out the
ISW to make a USB connection. When a connection method other than the above is used, proceed to Step 6.
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
5. “Program rewrite screen”
After confirming that a message “Reading program data” is to be displayed, disconnect once
the USB cable that has been connected to the
copier and then reconnect it again.
Note:
• The step is to be used only when carrying out the
ISW to make a USB connection. When a connection method other than the above is used, pro-
7322fs2001
ceed to Step 6.
6. “Program rewrite screen”
Pressing [START] key, cause the machine to be
data waiting condition.
3
2-2
SETUP
Note:
• When the ISW is carried out to make a USB con-
F.
Data transfer error
When a transfer error occurs, an error mark is
displayed in the message area on the LCD dis-
nection, this step should be omitted.
play.
If an error occurs, see the section “Error han-
7. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the “ISW (In-System Writer)
dling” in the separate “ISW Service Manual”
and perform the appropriate countermeasures.
Service Manual.”
8. In about 60 seconds after the data transfer from
After the countermeasures are completed, per-
the PC has been completed, the ISW data is
form the re-write operation again from the
written from the system memory in the SCB
beginning.
(1) ISW for image control/FNS control/FAX con-
which data is stored.
trol
a.
Note:
• When Steps 4 and 5 are not carried out to make a
Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
USB connection, the USB port is not opened and
the data cannot be sent from the PC. When the
2. “25 mode menu screen”
Press the [10. ISW] key.
normal operation of the ISW is not available, start
all over again from Step 1 after turning the SW1
3. “ISW menu screen”
Select a ROM the data of which is rewritten. The
(main switch) OFF and ON.
• Be sure not turn off the power to the copying
machine while the ISW data is being written.
[START] key is displayed.
4. “Program rewrite screen”
Press the [START] key.
9. When data has been written into the flash ROM,
the system is restarted to display the “25 mode
Note:
• This step is to be used only when carrying out the
ISW to make a USB connection. When a connection method other than the above is used, pro-
menu screen.”
(2) When the overall control program is not
installed
ceed to Step 6.
1. Turn on the SW1 (Main power switch) and the
SW2 (Sub-power switch).
5. “Program rewrite screen”
After confirming that a message “Reading pro-
2. Check to see if the data LED indicator lamp is
on. In this condition, the ISW is placed in waiting
gram data” is to be displayed, connect the USB
cable.
for transfer.
Check to see if the data LED is flashing while
Note:
the ISW data is being received.
3. The procedure after this is the same as the
• The step is to be used only when carrying out the
ISW to make a USB connection. When a connec-
steps above for “(1) When the overall control
program has been installed”.
tion method other than the above is used, proceed to Step 6.
6. “Program rewrite screen”
Press the [START] key to put the ISW into the
state of waiting for transfer.
2-3
3
II ISW
(System control board) into the flash ROM in
SETUP
Note:
• When the ISW is carried out to make a USB connection, this step should be omitted.
7. Execute the operation according to the procedure given in the ISW (In-system Writer) Service
Manual.
8. In about 100 seconds after completion of the
transfer of data from the PC, the ISW data is
written into the flash ROM in the ISW-intended
II ISW
board.
Note:
• When Steps 4 and 5 are not carried out to make a
USB connection, the USB port is not opened and
the data cannot be sent from the PC. When the
normal operation of the ISW is not available, start
all over again from Step 1 after turning the SW1
(main switch) OFF and ON.
• Do not turn off the power to the copying machine
while the ISW data is being written.
9. When the data has been written into the flash
ROM, a message “Completed successfully” is
displayed.
10. Press the [RETURN] key twice to return to the
“25 mode menu screen”.
3
2-4
USB ISW
3. USB ISW
The ISW RNs tool for transfer can be installed in the PC by using the setup disk. However, the USB driver
(KCAUSB.SYS) is required to be installed by the plug-and-play of the Windows after connecting the PC and
the copier with the USB cable.
The installation of the USB driver is required only when the PC is connected to the copier for the first time.
(No installation is required on and after the second connection.)
A. Preparation for the installation of the USB driver
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. “25 mode menu screen”
II ISW
Press the [10.ISW] key.
3. “ISW menu screen”
Select the ROM where the ROM data to be rewritten.
[START] key is displayed.
4. “Program rewrite screen”
Pressing [START] key causes the machine to be data waiting condition.
5. Connect the USB connector.
• The “Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard” display is shown.
(The succeeding steps of the “B. USB driver installation procedure (Windows 2000/XP)”).
B. USB driver installation procedure (Windows 2000/XP)
When the PC and the copier are connected with the USB cable, the USB driver is automatically installed by
the plug-and-play.
However, this may cause the USB driver (USBPRINT.SYS) of the Windows to be installed. Accordingly, the
USB driver should be set by following the procedure given below:
1. Select “Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]” in the display shown below, and then click
[Next].
2. Select “Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific driver” in the
“Install Hardware Device Drivers” screen, and then click [Next].
2-5
3
USB ISW
3. Select the USB driver in the driver selection screen, and then click [Next] for installation.
• In the case of the 7145
: Konica Minolta 7145 USB Driver (ISW)
II ISW
• In the case of the 7235/7228/7222 : Konica Minolta 7222/7228/7235 USB Driver (ISW)
4. When the “Completing the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard” screen is displayed, click [Finish] to finish the
installation.
5. In the “Device Manager” screen, check to see if the installation of the USB driver is carried out correctly.
• In the case of the 7145
: Konica Minolta 7145 USB Driver (ISW)
• In the case of the 7235/7228/7222 : Konica Minolta 7222/7228/7235 USB Driver (ISW)
3
2-6
SERVICE SCHEDULE
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1
Service Schedule
1.1.1 7145
Service item
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 240,000
copies
z
Periodic check (II)
Every 360,000
copies
z
z
z
Periodic check (III)
Every 480,000
copies
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
Periodic check (I)
Every 480,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 240,000
copies
DB-211
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (II)
Every 1,200,000
copies
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 960,000
copies
DB-411
z
z
z
Periodic check (IV)
Every 720,000 copies
DF-318
z
III SERVICE
Main
body
x 10,000 copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3-1
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service item
LT-203
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 240,000
copies
FS-112
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
III SERVICE
Periodic check (I)
Every 600,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
FS-113+RU-101 Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
FS-114/PK-114 Maintenance
SK-114/BK-114 Every 120,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
1.1.2 7235
Service item
Main
body
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 200,000
copies
z
Periodic check (II)
Every 300,000
copies
z
z
z
Periodic check (III)
Every 400,000
copies
DF-320
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z
z
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
Periodic check (I)
Every 200,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 1,000,000
copies
DB-411
z
z
z
Periodic check (IV)
Every 600,000 copies
3
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3-2
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
SERVICE SCHEDULE
DB-211
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 400,000
copies
LT-203
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 400,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
FS-113+RU-101 Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
FS-114/PK-114 Maintenance
SK-114/BK-114 Every 100,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
80
III SERVICE
Service item
1.1.3 7228/7222
Service item
Main
body
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 200,000
copies
z
Periodic check (II)
Every 300,000
copies
z
z
z
Periodic check (III)
Every 400,000
copies
z
z
Periodic check (IV)
Every 600,000 copies
z
DF-320
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
DB-411
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 200,000
copies
z
z
z
3-3
3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service item
DB-211
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 400,000
copies
LT-203
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)
Every 400,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
FS-114/PK-114 Maintenance
SK-114/BK-114 Every 100,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
III SERVICE
FS-113+RU-101 Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
3
3-4
80
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2
Maintenance Items
1.2.1 7145
Every 120,000 copies/prints
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
Preparations
z
z
(1) Image check
(2) Exterior
2
Fixing unit
(1) Removal of fixing unit
3
Main body
(1) Suction filter/A
1
(2) Filter cover assembly
1
4
5
6
7
Read unit
Paper
feed unit
Bypass
feed unit
Fixing unit
Materials•Tools
used
z
z
(3) Cooling fan/1 (FM4)
Cooling fan/2 (FM7)
Inlet filter
Developing suction/F, /R
Blower brush
z
(1) Platen glass
(include the slit glass)
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) No. 1 to No. 3 mirrors
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(1) Paper feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Double feed
prevention roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(4) Paper dust removing
brush
z
Blower brush/
Cleaning pad
(1) Double feed prevention roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Paper feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(1) Fixing claw
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Fixing sensor
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Fixing thermostat
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(4) Fixing heat roller
1
(5) Fixing press roller
1
(6) Heat insulating sleeve/A
2
(7) Heat insulating sleeve/B
1
(8) Fixing idling gear/B
1
z
III SERVICE
No. Classification
z
z
z
z
Solvest 240 or
Multemp FF-RM
z
z
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(9) Install of fixing unit
3-5
3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
8
Final check
(1) Loading of toner cartridge
z
(2) Check of W.U.T
z
(3) Check of image
adjustment
z
(4) Check of copy samples
z
(5) 25 mode PM counter
resetting
z
(6) Peripheral and exterior
of the machine
z
Materials•Tools
used
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Note:
• The inlet filters for the FM4/FM7 may get soiled depending on the location in which the machine is placed.
Be sure to clean it when the filter is found clogged with dust while in inspection.
When cleaning is not made properly, toner packing may result due to a temperature rise inside the
machine.
III SERVICE
1.2.2 7235/7228/7222
Every 100,000 copies/prints
No. Classification
1
Preparations
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
z
(1) Image check
(2) Exterior
2
3
4
5
3
Main body
Read unit
Paper
feed unit
Bypass
feed unit
(1) Suction filter/A
1
(2) Filter cover assembly
1
z
z
(3) Cooling fan/1 (FM4)
Inlet filter
z
(4) Developing suction/F, /R
z
(1) Platen glass
(include the slit glass)
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) No. 1 to No. 3 mirrors
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(1) Paper feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Double feed
prevention roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(4) Paper dust removing
brush
z
Blower brush/
Cleaning pad
(1) Double feed prevention roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Paper feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3-6
z
Blower brush
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
6
Final check
(1) Loading of toner cartridge
z
(2) Check of W.U.T
z
(3) Check of image
adjustment
z
(4) Check of copy samples
z
(5) 25 mode PM counter
resetting
z
(6) Peripheral and exterior
of the machine
z
Materials•Tools
used
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.3 DF-318/320
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
1
Preparations
(1) Paper through check
2
Paper feed
section
(1) Original registration
sensor
z
Blower brush
(2) Original conveyance
sensor
z
Blower brush
(3) Original size sensor/1, /2
z
Blower brush
(4) Paper feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(5) Feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(6) Double feed prevention
roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
z
Water/
Cleaning pad
Note:
• Do not use
alcohol.
(7) Read roller
(8) Paper dust removing
brush
3
Final check
Blower brush
z
z
(1) Paper through check
(2) Exterior cleaning
z
3-7
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3
III SERVICE
Note:
• The inlet filters for the FM4 may get soiled depending on the location in which the machine is placed. Be
sure to clean it when the filter is found clogged with dust while in inspection.
When cleaning is not made properly, toner packing may result due to a temperature rise inside the
machine.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2.4 DB-211/411
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
1
Preparations
(1) Paper through check
2
Paper feed
section
(1) Paper feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Double feed
prevention roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3
Final check
z
(1) Paper through check
(2) Exterior cleaning
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
z
1.2.5 LT-203
III SERVICE
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
1
Preparations
(1) Paper through check
2
Paper feed
section
(1) Paper feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Feed roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Double feed
prevention roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3
Final check
z
(1) Paper through check
(2) Exterior cleaning
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
z
1.2.6 FS-112
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145 only)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
1
Preparations
(1) Paper through check
2
Conveyance
section
(1) Conveyance drive
roller/A
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Paper exit drive roller
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3
Final check
z
(1) Paper through check
(2) Exterior cleaning
3
Implementation classification
z
3-8
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2.7 FS-113/RU-101
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
1
Preparations
(1) Paper through check
2
FS-113
(1) Each of conveyance
rollers
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Paddle
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Punch scraps box
section
z
Cleaning pad
(1) Each of conveyance
rollers
z
(2) Exterior
z
3
4
RU-101
Final check
z
(1) Paper through check
(2) Exterior cleaning
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
z
1.2.8 FS-114
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
1
Preparations
(1) Paper through check
2
Conveyance
section
(2) Each of conveyance
rollers
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3
Alignment
section
(1) Paddle
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
4
Final check
(1) Paper through check
z
(2) Exterior cleaning
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.9 PK-114
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
Conveyance
section
(1) Each of conveyance
rollers
z
2
Punch
(2) Cleaning the punch
scraps box
z
scraps box
3-9
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3
III SERVICE
No. Classification
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2.10 SK-114
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
1
Conveyance
section
(1) Each of conveyance
rollers
2
Exterior
section
(2) Exterior cleaning
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.11 BK-114
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Tray
Quantity
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
(1) Tray stack surface
3
Implementation classification
z
III SERVICE
1
Service item
3-10
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3
Periodic Check Items
1.3.1 7145
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 240,000 copies/prints)
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
Drum unit
(1) Drum
1
(2) Cleaning blade
assembly
26TA-209∗
1
z
3
4
Charging
corona unit
(1) Charging corona wire
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(1) Discharge wire
Developing unit
(1) Developer
Developing unit
installing
z
z
z
(2) Changing control plate
Cotton swab
Cleaning pad
Cotton swab
(2 pcs.: 1 for
each of transfer
and separation)
z
1
(2) 36 mode L detection
adjustment
z
z
5
Main body
(1) Ozone filter
40LA1017∗
1
z
6
Fixing unit
(1) Fixing cleaner assembly
40LA-540∗
1
z
(2) Fixing claw
26NA5427∗
6
z
(3) Fixing bearing /U
26NA5371∗
2
z
(4) Fixing bearing /L
26NA5359∗
2
z
7
Final check
Setting powder
z
(3) 25 mode or 36 mode
Photosensitive
counter reset
2
Materials•Tools
used
III SERVICE
No. Classification
(1) 25 mode or 36 mode
Fixing counter reset
z
(2) 36 mode LD1 offset
adjustment
z
(3) 36 mode LD2 offset
adjustment
z
(4) Check of image
adjustment
z
3-11
3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 360,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
1
Bypass
feed
(Paper feed
section)
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
(1) Double feed
prevention roller
40AA-406∗
1
(2) Paper feed roller
26NA-428∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 100,000
(3) Feed roller
40AA-425∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 100,000
z
Actual durable
count : 100,000
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 480,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
III SERVICE
1
Main body
paper feed unit
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
(1) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
2
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
2
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed
prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
2
z
2
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(1) Transfer corona unit
40LA-260∗
1
3
Fixing unit
(1) Fixing sensor assembly
40LA-534∗
1
z
(2) Fuse mounting plate
SP00-0110
1
z
(3) Fixing heater lamp/1
40LA8302∗
1
z
(4) Fixing heater lamp/2
40LA8303∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
z
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 720,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
1
Developing unit
(1) Developing unit (Unit
without developer)
40LA-300∗
1
2
Drum unit
(1) Drum unit (Unit without drum)
40LA-990∗
1
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
3-12
Implementation classification
z
z
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3.2 7235/7228/7222
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints)
1
Drum unit
Service item
Quantity
(1) Drum
1
(2) Cleaning blade
assembly
26TA-209∗
1
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
z
(3) 25 mode or 36 mode
Photosensitive
counter reset
2
3
4
Charging
corona unit
(1) Charging corona wire
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(1) Discharge wire
Developing unit
(1) Developer
Developing unit
installing
Setting powder
z
z
z
(2) Changing control plate
Cotton swab
Cleaning pad
Cotton swab
(2 pcs.: 1 for
each of transfer
and separation)
z
1
z
(2) 36 mode L detection
adjustment
III SERVICE
No. Classification
z
5
Main body
(1) Ozone filter
40LA1017∗
1
z
6
Fixing unit
(1) Fixing heat roller
26NA5303∗
1
z
(2) Fixing pressure roller
27LA5304∗
1
z
(3) Fixing cleaner assembly
27LA-540*
1
z
(4) Heat insulating sleeve /A
26NA5372∗
2
(5) Heat insulating sleeve /B
26NA5373∗
1
z
(6) Fixing claw
27NA5427∗
6
z
(7) Fixing bearing /U
26NA5371∗
2
z
(8) Fixing bearing /L
26NA5359∗
2
z
(9) Fixing idling gear /B
27NA5394∗
1
z
z
z
z
Solvest 240 or
Multemp FFRM
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(10)Fixing sensor
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(11)Fixing thermostat
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3-13
3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
7
Final check
(1) 25 mode or 36 mode
Fixing counter reset
z
(2) 36 mode LD1 offset
adjustment
z
(3) Check of image
adjustment
z
Materials•Tools
used
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 300,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
1
Bypass
feed
III SERVICE
(Paper feed
section)
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
(1) Double feed
prevention roller
40AA-406∗
1
(2) Paper feed roller
26NA-428∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 100,000
(3) Feed roller
40AA-425∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 100,000
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
z
Actual durable
count : 100,000
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
3
Main body
paper feed unit
(1) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
2
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
2
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed
prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
2
z
2
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(1) Transfer corona unit
40LA-260∗
1
3
Fixing unit
(1) Fixing sensor assembly
26WA-534∗
1
z
(2) Fuse mounting plate
SP00-0110
1
z
3-14
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 600,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
1
Developing unit
(1) Developing unit (Unit
without developer)
27LA-300∗
1
2
Drum unit
(1) Drum unit
(Unit without drum)
27LA-200∗
1
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
z
1.3.3 DF-318
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 960,000 copies/prints)
1
Paper feed
section
Service item
Quantity
(1) Feed rubber
12QV4034∗
1
(2) Double feed
prevention roller
13GL-405∗
1
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
z
z
Actual durable
count : 250,000
Actual durable
count : 250,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,200,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
1
Paper feed
section
Service item
(1) Paper feed roller
13GL4011∗
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
z
Actual durable
count : 300,000
1.3.4 DF-320
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
1
Paper feed
section
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
(1) Paper feed roller
13GL4011∗
1
z
(2) Feed rubber
12QV4034∗
1
z
(3) Double feed
prevention roller
13GL-405∗
1
3-15
z
3
III SERVICE
No. Classification
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3.5 DB-211
A. Periodic check (I)
Every 480,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 400,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
Paper feed
section
Materials•Tools
used
(1) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
2
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
2
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed
prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
2
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
1.3.6 DB-411
A. Periodic check (I)
Every 240,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 200,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
III SERVICE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
Paper feed
section
Materials•Tools
used
(1) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed
prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
1.3.7 LT-203
A. Periodic check (I)
Every 240,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 400,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
3
Paper feed
section
Materials•Tools
used
(1) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
1
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed
prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
1
3-16
z
Actual durable
count : 200,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3.8 FS-112
A. Periodic check (I)
Every 600,000 copies/prints
1
Exit section
Service item
(1) Paper exit roller /A
13GQ4519∗
Quantity
Materials•Tools
used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
1
Implementation classification
z
Actual durable
count : 600,000
III SERVICE
No. Classification
3-17
3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.4
III SERVICE
No.
Replacement Parts List
Unit
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual durable
count
—
1
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
26TA-209∗
1
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
40LA-990∗
(7145)
27LA-200∗
(7235/7228/7222)
1
720,000
(7145)
600,000
(7235/7228/7222)
40LA-260∗
1
480,000
(7145)
400,000
(7235/7228/7222)
—
1
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
40LA-300∗
(7145)
27LA-300∗
(7235/7228/7222)
1
720,000
(7145)
600,000
(7235/7228/7222)
01 DC (including changing
corona unit)
Drum
02
Cleaning blade assembly
03
Drum unit
04 Transfer/separation
corona
Transfer/separation corona
unit
05 Developing unit
Developer
06
Developing unit
07 Main body
Ozone filter
40LA1017∗
1
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
41
Suction filter /A
40LA-318∗
1
120,000
(7145)
100,000
(7235/7228/7222)
42
Filter cover assembly
40LA-314∗
1
120,000
(7145)
100,000
(7235/7228/7222)
08 Main body paper feed
09 unit
(Tray 1) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
1
200,000
(Tray 1) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
1
200,000
10
(Tray 1) Double feed preven-
26NA4012∗
1
200,000
tion rubber
3
11
(Tray 2) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
1
200,000
12
(Tray 2) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
1
200,000
13
(Tray 2) Double feed prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
1
200,000
3-18
No.
Unit
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual durable
count
14 DB-211/411
(Tray 3) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
1
200,000
15
(Tray 3) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
1
200,000
16
(Tray 3) Double feed prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
1
200,000
17 DB-211
(Tray 4) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
1
200,000
18
(Tray 4) Feed rubber
26NA4011∗
1
200,000
19
(Tray 4) Double feed prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
1
200,000
20 By-pass feed unit
Double feed prevention roller
40AA-406∗
1
100,000
21
Paper feed roller
26NA-428∗
1
100,000
22
Feed roller
40AA-425∗
1
100,000
23 Fixing unit
Fixing heat roller
40LA5303∗
(7145)
26NA5303∗
(7235/7228/7222)
1
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
24
Fixing pressure roller
40LA5304∗
(7145)
27LA5304∗
(7235/7228/7222)
1
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
25
Fixing cleaner assembly
40LA-540∗
(7145)
27LA-540∗
(7235/7228/7222)
1
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
26
Heat insulating sleeve/A
26NA5372∗
2
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
27
Heat insulating sleeve/B
26NA5373∗
1
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
28
Fixing idling gear/B
40LA5394∗
(7145)
27LA5394∗
(7235/7228/7222)
1
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
30
Fixing claw
26NA5427∗
(7145)
27LA5427∗
(7235/7228/7222)
6
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
31
Fixing bearing/U
26NA5371∗
2
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
3-19
3
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
III SERVICE
No.
Unit
Parts name
Quantity
Actual durable
count
26NA5359∗
2
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
40LA-534∗
(7145)
26WA-534∗
(7235/7228/7222)
1
480,000
(7145)
400,000
(7235/7228/7222)
32 Fixing unit
Fixing bearing/L
33
Fixing sensor assembly
34
Fuse holder
SP00-0110
1
480,000
(7145)
400,000
(7235/7228/7222)
35
Fixing heater lamp/1 (7145)
40LA8302∗
1
480,000
36
Fixing heater lamp/2 (7145)
40LA8303∗
1
480,000
37 DF-318/320
Paper feed roller
13GL4011∗
1
300,000
38
Feed rubber
12QV4034∗
1
250,000
39
Double feed prevention roller
13GL-405∗
1
250,000
40 FS-112
Paper exit roller/A (7145)
13GQ4519∗
1
600,000
43 LT-203
Paper feed rubber
40LA4009∗
1
200,000
44
Feed rubber
40LA4011∗
1
200,000
45
Double feed prevention rubber
26NA4012∗
1
200,000
1.5
Important Maintenance Parts
• The important parts specified by Konica Minolta
in order to maintain safety of the products are
referred to as “important maintenance parts”.
The important maintenance parts for this
machine are as described below:
No.
Unit
Parts name
1
Fixing unit
Fuse mounting
plate assembly
Parts No. Quantity
SP00-0110
1
Note:
• “SP” is indicated in front of the parts number of
the important maintenance part. Exercise care
when installing the parts according to “III. Directions for disassembly and assembly” in this manual.
3
Parts No.
3-20
1 PM PARTS KIT
2. 1 PM PARTS KIT
7145
Name
Parts No.
Quantity
Fixing heat roller
40LA5303∗
1
Fixing press roller
40LA5304∗
1
Heat insulating sleeve/A
26NA5372∗
2
Heat insulating sleeve/B
26NA5373∗
1
Fixing idling gear/B
40LA5394∗
1
Suction filter/A
40LA-318∗
1
Filter cover assembly
40LA-314∗
1
Dust bag
—
1
Cleaning pad (10 pcs.)
—
1
Cotton swabs (4 pcs.)
—
1
Parts No.
Quantity
Cleaning blade assembly
26TA-209∗
1
Ozone filter
40LA1017∗
1
Fixing heat roller
26NA5303∗
1
Fixing pressure roller
27LA5304∗
1
Fixing cleaner assembly
27LA-540∗
1
Heat insulating sleeve/A
26NA5372∗
2
Heat insulating sleeve/B
26NA5373∗
1
Fixing claw
27LA5427∗
6
Fixing bearing/U
26NA5371∗
2
Fixing bearing/L
26NA5359∗
2
Fixing idling gear /B
27LA5394∗
1
Suction filter/A
40LA-318∗
2
Filter cover assembly
40LA-314∗
2
Dust bag
—
2
Cleaning pad (10 pcs.)
—
2
Cotton swabs (4 pcs.)
—
2
III SERVICE
120,000 copies/kit
7235/7228/7222
200,000 copies/kit
Name
3-21
3
SERVICE MATERIALS LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIALS LIST
III SERVICE
Material No.
Name
00V-16-0
Drum cleaner
000V-19-0
Setting powder
000V-18-1
Cleaning pad
00GR00260
Multemp FF-RM
00GR00210
Solvest 240
Shape
Remark
200ml
25g
10pcs/1pack
25g
Multemp FF-RM
recommended
3
3-22
CE TOOLS LIST
4. CE TOOLS LIST
Tool No.
26NA21340
Name
Shape
Drum rotation material
Quantity
1
Remark
Mounted on the drum
unit.
26NAJG011
Mirror positioning jig
2
00VD-5000
New pyramid chart
1
120A9711∗
Adjustment chart
1
For DF adjustment
DF-320 is contained in
120A9712∗
White chart
1
III SERVICE
the same package.
For DF adjustment
DF-320 is contained in
the same package.
00VC-2-00
Drum cover
1
00VD-1000
Blower brush
1
00VE-1003
Tester
1
14GS46310
Stapler unit position-
1
ing jig
For SK-114 staple adjustment
3-23
3
III SERVICE
CE TOOLS LIST
Blank page
3-24
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
IV DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1
Main Body Parts Layout Drawing
A. Switches and sensors
(1) Main body rear side
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
TLD (Toner level sensor)
[3]
PS12 (Tray set sensor/L)
[2]
PS9 (Tray set sensor/U)
[4]
SW1 (Main power switch)
4-1
IV DIAGRAMS
7322fs4011
3
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(2) Bypass tray/Developing unit
[4]
[3]
[2]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[1]
TDS (Toner density sensor)
[3]
PS13 (Bypass tray no paper sensor)
[2]
VR1 (Bypass tray paper size sensor VR)
[4]
PS20 (Bypass tray paper size sensor)
(3) Fixing unit
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/2)
[3]
TS (Thermostat)
[2]
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/1)
[4]
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
4-2
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(4) Scanner section/Operation section
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
SW2 (Sub power switch)
[3]
PS17 (APS sensor)
PS14 (Scanner home position sensor)
[4]
PS15 (APS timing sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
4-3
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(5) Main body right side (Paper feed section/ADU)
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
PS4 (ADU sensor)
[5]
PS22 (Timing sensor/L) (7145/7235/7228 only)
[2]
[3]
PS8 (No paper sensor/U)
PS11 (No paper sensor/L)
[6]
[7]
PS10 (Upper limit sensor/L)
PS21 (Timing sensor/U) (7145/7235/7228 only)
[4]
PS1 (Registration sensor)
[8]
PS7 (Upper limit sensor/U)
IV DIAGRAMS
3
[2]
4-4
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(6) Main body front side/Main body left side
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
SW3 (Interlock switch)
[3]
HUM1 (Humidity sensor)
[2]
SW1 (Main power switch)
[4]
PS5 (Toner bottle sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-5
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
B. Loads
(1) Main body rear side
[18]
[17]
[16]
[1]
[15]
[2]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
IV DIAGRAMS
[8]
3
[7]
[1]
M4 (Toner supply motor 1)
[10]
SD2 (1st paper feed solenoid/L)
[2]
[3]
M10 (Toner supply motor 2)
SD9 (Toner solenoid)
[11]
[12]
M9 (Paper feed motor)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[4]
[5]
FM7 (Internal cooling fan/2) (7145 only)
M3 (Developing motor) (7145 only)
[13]
[14]
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid/U)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
[6]
[7]
FM1 (DC power supply cooling fan)
M7 (Tray motor/U)
[15]
[16]
M1 (Main motor)
SD5 (ADU gate solenoid)
[8]
[9]
M8 (Tray motor/L)
M6 (ADU motor)
[17]
[18]
M11 (Fixing motor)
M2 (Scanner motor)
4-6
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(2) Main body right side (Paper feed section/ADU)
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan/1)
SD4 (Cleaning web solenoid)
[3]
SD3 (Bypass feed solenoid)
[4]
[5]
TSL (Transfer synchronization lamp)
FM6 (Internal dehumidifying fan/2)
IV DIAGRAMS
(3) Write unit
[1]
[1]
M5 (Polygon motor)
4-7
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(4) Drum unit/Fixing unit
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1)
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
[3]
[4]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
4-8
PCL (Pre-charging exposure lamp)
SD7 (Separation claw solenoid)
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(5) Operation section/Scanner section
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
7322fs4001
PTC (Heater) : Option of the service parts
[3]
FM5 (Developing suction fan)
[2]
setting
FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1)
[4]
[5]
FM7 (Polygon cooling fan) (7235 only)
FM2 (Fixing cooling fan) (7145/7235 only)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-9
3
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
C. PCBs and others
(1) Main body rear side
In the case of the 7145
[8]
[9]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
IV DIAGRAMS
[5]
3
[1]
[2]
CB (Main body control board)
FCB (Fixing control board) : only 220V system
[6]
[7]
SCB (System control board)
PRMB (Parameter memory board)
[3]
[4]
CBR2 (Circuit breaker/2)
CBR1 (Circuit breaker/1)
[8]
[9]
INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter)
SCDB (Scanner drive board)
[5]
DCPS (DC power supply)
4-10
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
[9]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
7322fs4002e
CB (Main body control board)
[6]
ADUDB (ADU drive board)
[2]
[3]
FCB (Fixing control board)
CBR1 (Circuit breaker/1)
[7]
[8]
SCB (System control board)
PRMB (Parameter memory board)
[4]
[5]
CBR2 (Circuit breaker/2)
DCPS (DC power supply)
[9]
INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-11
3
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(2) Operation section/Scanner section
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
TC (Total counter)
(7145 is provided as standard equipment)
[5]
[6]
LCDB (Display board)
PAKB (Panel key board)
[2]
[3]
KC (Key counter)
OB (Operation board)
[7]
[8]
PSW2B (Power SW2 board)
L1INVB (Exposure lamp power supply board)
[4]
INV2 (Display inverter)
IV DIAGRAMS
(3) Main body front side
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
3
PFDB/U (Paper feed detection board/U)
PFDB/L (Paper feed detection board/L)
[3]
4-12
HV (High voltage power)
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
(4) Write unit/Drum unit
[3]
[2]
[1]
TCSB (Toner control sensor board)
[2]
INDEX (Index sensor board)
[3]
LDB (LD drive board)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-13
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.2
DF-318/320 Parts Layout Drawing
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
PS301 (Original no paper sensor)
[4]
SD302 (Roller pressure solenoid)
[2]
[3]
SD301 (Paper exit solenoid)
PS303 (DF open/close sensor)
[5]
PS304 (Cover open/close sensor)
[5]
[6]
IV DIAGRAMS
[4]
[7]
[1]
[3]
[2]
3
[1]
[2]
PS308 (Original registration sensor)
SD303 (Stamp solenoid)
[5]
[6]
VR301 (Original size VR)
PS305 (Original size sensor/1)
[3]
[4]
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor)
PS302 (Original exit sensor)
[7]
PS306 (Original size sensor/2)
4-14
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
M301 (Original feed motor)
[4]
FM301 (Cooling fan)
[2]
[3]
M303 (Original reverse motor)
M302 (Original conveyance motor)
[5]
DFDB (DF drive board)
1.3
DB-211 Parts Layout Drawing
[9]
[8]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
PS103 (No paper senso /3)
PS108 (No paper sensor/4)
[6]
[7]
PSDTB/3 (Paper size detection board/3)
HTR100 (Heater) : Option of the service
[3]
[4]
PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L)
PS107 (Tray upper limit sensor/4)
[8]
parts setting
PS102 (Tray upper limit sensor/3)
[5]
PSDTB/4 (Paper size detection board/4)
[9]
PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U)
4-15
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
PS106 (Tray sensor/4)
DBDB (DB drive board)
[5]
[6]
M101 (Tray up drive motor/3)
M100 (DB feed motor)
[3]
[4]
SD102 (Paper feed solenoid/L)
M102 (Tray up drive motor/4)
[7]
[8]
SD101 (Paper feed solenoid/U)
PS101 (Tray sensor/3)
1.4
DB-411 Parts Layout Drawing
[6]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
PS103 (No paper sensor/3)
PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U)
[3]
PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L)
4-16
[4]
[5]
PSDTB/3 (Paper size detection board/3)
HTR100 (Heater) : Option of the service
[6]
parts setting
PS102 (Tray upper limit sensor/3)
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
PS109 (Remaining paper sensor)
PS101 (Tray sensor/3)
[4]
[5]
M101 (Tray up drive motor/3)
SD101 (Paper feed solenoid/U)
[3]
M100 (DB feed motor)
[6]
DBDB (DB drive board)
1.5
LT-203 Parts Layout Drawing
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
LTDB (LT drive board)
[6]
SD151 (LT paper feed solenoid)
[2]
[3]
SW151 (Interlock switch)
PS154 (Remaining paper sensor/1)
[7]
[8]
PS153 (No paper sensor)
PS155 (Paper feed sensor)
[4]
[5]
PS151 (Remaining paper sensor/2)
HTR150 (Heater) : Option of the service
[9]
[10]
PS152 (Tray upper limit sensor)
M151 (Tray up drive motor)
parts setting
[11]
M150 (LT paper feed motor)
4-17
IV DIAGRAMS
[7]
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.6
FS-112 Parts Layout Drawing
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
M706 (Tray up/down motor)
PS706 (Tray lower limit sensor)
[4]
[5]
PS703 (Paper exit sensor)
PS704 (Paper exit full sensor)
[3]
PS716 (Tray count sensor)
[6]
PS711 (Tray upper limit sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
PS710 (Alignment HP sensor /F)
M704 (Alignment motor /F)
[3]
M703 (Alignment motor /R)
[4]
[5]
4-18
PS709 (Alignment HP sensor /R)
PS707 (No paper sensor)
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[1]
[2]
[1]
PS708 (Stapler unit HP sensor)
[2]
M705 (Stapler movement motor)
[2]
[1]
MS701 (Front door switch)
[2]
FNSCS (FNS control board)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-19
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[6]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[3]
[9]
[2]
[1]
M707 (Paper pressure motor)
MS702 (Shutter switch)
[6]
[7]
M702 (Paper exit motor)
M701 (FNS conveyance motor)
[3]
[4]
PS705 (Shutter sensor)
PS701 (Paper pressure sensor)
[8]
[9]
FM701 (Cooling fan)
SD701 (Roller release solenoid)
[5]
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
M708 (Stapler motor)
[3]
PS712 (Stapler HP sensor)
[2]
PS713 (Staple detection sensor )
[4]
PS714 (Stapler ready sensor)
4-20
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.7
RU-101 Parts Layout Drawing
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
PS1 (Front door sensor)
[2]
PS2 (Paper exit sensor)
1.8
[3]
FUB (Fuse board)
IT-101 Parts Layout Drawing
[4]
IV DIAGRAMS
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
PS25 (IT door sensor)
[3]
PS24 (IT paper exit sensor /L)
[2]
SD8 (Gate solenoid)
[4]
PS23 (IT paper exit sensor /U)
4-21
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2.1
Main Body Connector Layout Drawing
A. Main body control board
In the case of the 7145
28 (W: 22 pin)
17 (W: 36 pin)
29 (W: 32 pin)
23 (GY: 22 pin)
16 (W: 15 pin)
18 (W: 14 pin)
38 (W: 9 pin)
41 (W: 11 pin) 36 (W: 10 pin)
35 (W: 5 pin)
37 (W: 8 pin)
1 (W: 8 pin)
27 (W: 8 pin)
2 (BK: 68 pin)
20 (W: 4 pin)
42 (W: 8 pin)
21 (W: 6 pin)
24 (W: 40 pin)
22 (W: 5 pin)
19 (W: 9 pin)
40 (W: 4 pin)
26 (W: 34 pin)
25 (W: 36 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
39 (W: 4 pin)
3
4-22
15 (W: 24 pin)
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
28 (W: 22 pin)
29 (W: 30 pin)
23 (GY: 22 pin)
17 (W: 36 pin)
32 (W: 3 pin)
38 (W: 9 pin)
19 (W: 3 pin)
16 (W: 9 pin)
33 (W: 4 pin)
35 (W: 5 pin)
31 (W: 11 pin) 36 (W: 10 pin)
18 (W: 14 pin)
27 (W: 8 pin)
37 (W: 8 pin)
15 (W: 30 pin)
90 (W: 8 pin)
20 (W: 4 pin)
21 (W: 6 pin)
24 (W: 38 pin)
22 (W: 5 pin)
42 (W: 8 pin)
26 (W: 36 pin)
25 (W: 34 pin)
15 (W: 30 pin)
7322fs4003
14 (W: 4 pin)
B. System control board
In the case of the 7145
46 (W: 50 pin)
431 (W: 5 pin)
45 (W: 4 pin)
39 (W: 9 pin)
44 (W: 22 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
34 (W: 24 pin)
432 (W: 24 pin)
47 (W: 2 pin)
32 (BK: 20 pin) 33 (BK: 24 pin)
35 (W: 144 pin)
41 (W: 8 pin)
42 (W: 9 pin)
501 (BK: 44 pin)
40 (W: 36 pin)
502 (W: 3 pin)
38 (BK: 100 pin)
37 (BK: 120 pin)
4-23
500 (W: 4 pin)
31 (W: 7 pin)
7145fs4033
3
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
46 (W: 50 pin)
52 (W: 28 pin)
57 (W: 9 pin)
59 (GY: 24 pin)
58 (W: 20 pin)
431 (W: 5 pin)
44 (W: 22 pin)
53 (W: 144 pin)
502
(W: 3 pin)
40 (W: 36 pin)
432 (W: 12 pin)
42 (W: 9 pin)
501 (BK: 44 pin)
41 (W: 8 pin)
48 (W: 4 pin)
56 (BK: 100 pin)
55 (BK: 120 pin)
500 (W: 4 pin)
43 (W: 6 pin)
7322fs4004
C. High voltage power
70 (W: 9 pin)
71 (W: 12 pin)
72 (W: 3 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
D. DC power supply
1 (W: 5 pin)
3 (W: 5 pin)
2 (W: 7 pin) (7145)
2 (W: 6 pin) (7235/7228/7222)
7 (W: 26 pin)
6 (W: 20 pin)
8 (W: 4 pin)
10 (W: 3 pin)
5 (W: 4 pin)
7322fs4005e
E. A/D conversion board
60 (W: 50 pin)
3
4-24
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
F.
Scanner drive board (7145 only)
61 (W: 15 pin)
64 (W: 9 pin)
60 (W: 5 pin)
62 (W: 3 pin) 63 (W: 4 pin)
G. Operation board
84 (W: 13 pin)
80 (W: 24 pin) (7145)
80 (W: 28 pin) (7235/7228/7222)
83 (W: 4 pin)
86 (W: 14 pin)
89 (W: 8 pin)
7322fs4006e
50 (W: 24 pin) (7145)
50 (W: 12 pin) (7235/7228/7222)
I.
IV DIAGRAMS
H. LD drive board
7322fs4007e
Index sensor board
51 (W: 5 pin)
J.
Toner control sensor board
1 (W: 7 pin)
4-25
3
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
K. Power SW2 board
1 (W: 8 pin)
L.
Paper size detection board /U, /L
1 (W: 5 pin)
M. Parameter memory board
2 (BK: 24 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
1 (BK: 20 pin)
N. Exposure lamp power supply board
96 (W: 2 pin)
97 (W: 2 pin)
O. Display inverter
77 (W: 4 pin)
71 (W: 3 pin)
4-26
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
P.
Exposure lamp inverter
931 (W: 4 pin)
930 (W: 3 pin)
Q. ADU drive board (Except the 7145)
71 (W: 6 pin)
70 (W: 9 pin)
7322fs4008
R. Fixing control board (Metric size only)
IV DIAGRAMS
99 (W: 4 pin)
4-27
3
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2.2
DF-318/320 Connector Layout Drawing
A. DF drive board
216 (W: 6 pin)
215 (W: 18 pin) 212 (W: 7 pin)
213 (W: 3 pin)
214 (W: 28 pin)
211 (W: 36 pin)
2.3
DB-211 Connector Layout Drawing
A. DB drive board
101 (9 pin)
100 (6 pin)
106 (19 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
102 (11 pin)
103 (24 pin)
104 (18 pin)
B. Paper size detection board /3
1 (5 pin)
C. Paper size detection board /4
1 (5 pin)
3
4-28
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2.4
DB-411 Connector Layout Drawing
A. DB drive board
101 (9 pin)
100 (6 pin)
106 (19 pin)
102 (11 pin)
105 (3 pin)
103 (24 pin)
B. Paper size detection board /3
1 (5 pin)
2.5
LT-203 Connector Layout Drawing
112 (11 pin)
114 (3 pin)
113 (17 pin)
110 (19 pin)
4-29
IV DIAGRAMS
A. LT drive board
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2.6
FS-112 Connector Layout Drawing
A. FNS control board
701 (10 pin)
715 (30 pin)
712(2 pin)
706 (2 pin)
711 (2 pin)
714 (15 pin)
709 (12 pin)
716 (36 pin)
FNS CB
703 (12 pin)
2.7
707 (30 pin)
717 (2 pin)
RU-101 Connector Layout Drawing
A. Fuse board
IV DIAGRAMS
F1
3 (W: 6 pin)
4 (W: 2 pin)
4-30
702 (11 pin)
713 (3 pin)
710 (2 pin)
708 (8 pin)
705 (W: 6 pin)
704 (12 pin)
JAM CODE LIST
3. JAM CODE LIST
Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
Bypass
Upper
J10
J11
tray
Lower
J12
tray
DB tray
J13
J14
LT-203
DB tray
J15
J16-1
During operation
Code
Correction
PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON
operation
If copying is in
Take out the paper
within a predetermined time after SD3
progress at
from the bypass
(Bypass solenoid) ON.
time of jam, the
tray, and remove
copier com-
any jammed paper.
PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON
pletes ejection
Open the ADU door,
within a predetermined time after SD1 (First
and then stops. remove any jammed
paper feed solenoid/U) ON.
paper. Pull out the
PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON
tray, and remove
within a predetermined time after SD2 (First
paper feed solenoid/L) ON.
any jammed paper.
PS104 (First paper feed sensor/U) failed to
turn ON within a predetermined time after
Open the DB conveyance door,
SD101 (Paper feed solenoid/U) ON.
PS105 (First paper feed sensor/L) failed to
remove any jammed
paperr. Pull out the
turn ON within a predetermined time after
SD102 (Paper feed solenoid/L) ON.
tray, and remove
any jammed paper.
PS155 (Paper feed sensor) failed to turn ON
within a predetermined time after SD151 (LT
Open the LT top
cover, remove any
paper feed solenoid) ON.
jammed paper.
The PS1 (Registration sensor) is not turned
Open the ADU door,
ON in the specified period of time after either
of the PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U), the
remove any jammed
paper.
LT-203
Others
Others
FS-112
Others
J16-2
J20-2
J20-3
J20-3
FS-113
Others
FS-114
turned OFF.
PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U) or PS105
Open the LT top
(Paper feed sensor/L) failed to turn ON
within a predetermined time after SD151 (LT
cover, remove any
jammed paper.
paper feed solenoid) ON.
ADU door open jam
Printer section
Remove jammed
SW3 (Interlock switch) went OFF during
copying/printing.
stops immediately.
paper according to
message.
IV DIAGRAMS
PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L) and the PS155
(Paper feed sensor) is turned ON and then
FNS front door open jam
MS701 (Front door) went OFF during copying/printing or, came off from the main body.
FNS upper front cover open jam
PC17 (Front door detection sensor) went
OFF during copying/printing or, came off
J20-3
from the main body.
FNS front door open jam
The S1-FN (Front cover open/close detection SW) turned OFF while in copying/printing.
4-31
3
JAM CODE LIST
Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
Others
Others
J20-4
J20-5
RU-101
Others
J20-6
FS-112
Correction
operation
During operation
Code
When an emergency stop instruction is
Printer section
Remove jammed
received from the system while in the system
stops immedi-
paper according to
emergency stop jam print job.
ately.
message.
RU-101 front door open jam
PS1 (Front door sensor) went OFF during
copying/printing.
FNS shutter switch operation jam
MS702 (Shutter) went ON during copying/
printing.
Others
J20-6
FS-114
Intermediate transport guide open jam
The S4-FN (Intermediate jam guide detection SW) turned OFF while in copying/printing.
Shutter open jam
The S2-FN (Shutter detection SW) turned
OFF while in copying/printing.
Others
FS-113
J20-7
Others
J20-7
SK-114
Others
FS-113
Top cover open jam
PC18 (Top cover detection sensor) went
OFF during copying/printing.
SK-114 open jam
The S4-SK (Saddle safety switch) turned
OFF while in copying/printing.
J20-8
Connecting connector coming off jam
The FS-113 connecting connector comes off
from the main body during copying/printing.
IV DIAGRAMS
Conveyance
J30
J31
Fixing/
J32
Exit
Others
PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON
Open the ADU door,
within a predetermined time after MC1 (Registration clutch) ON.
remove any jammed
paper.
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) failed to turn ON
within a predetermined time after MC1 (Registration clutch) ON.
The PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) is not turned
OFF in the specified period of time (by paper
sizes) after it is turned ON.
J50-1
Failed to receive print request from system
within a predetermined time after PS1 (Reg-
The main body
stop immediately.
J50-2
istration sensor) ON.
“Valid” signal failed to turn ON within a pre-
J50-3
determined time after start of printing.
MC1 (Registration clutch) failed to turn ON
within a predetermined time after start of
printing.
3
4-32
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Causes
Resulting
J61-1
320
J61-2
J62-1
J62-2
J62-3
The PS304 (Cover open/close sensor) is
The RADF
Open the open/
turned OFF while in operation.
The PS303 (DF open/close sensor) is turned
stops immedi-
close cover, remove
ately.
any jammed paper.
OFF while in operation.
Remove any
Original did not feed.
jammed paper from
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) failed
to turn ON within a predetermined time after
the main body’s
start of refeed for single sided original.
tion.
conveyance sec-
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) failed
to turn ON within a predetermined time after
start of reverse refeed for double sided original.
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) did not
J62-4
go OFF within the specified period after it
went ON, during original exit.
J62-5
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) did not
go OFF within the specified period after it
J63-1
went ON, during original reversal.
PS302 (Original exit sensor) did not go ON
J63-2
during original exit.
PS302 (Original exit sensor) did not go OFF
within the specified period after it went ON,
during original exit.
J63-3
PS308 (Original registration sensor) failed to
turn OFF within a predetermined time after
start of refeed for single sided original.
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) failed
J63-4
to turn OFF within a predetermined time after
start of reverse refeed for double sided original.
J65-1
When idling
DF-318/
Correction
operation
During operation
Code
IV DIAGRAMS
Classification
PS308 (Original registration sensor) ON dur-
—
Open the open/
ing idling state.
close cover, remove
any jammed paper.
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) ON
during idling state.
Open the open/
close cover and the
PS308 (Original registration sensor), PS309
(Original conveyance sensor) ON during
reverse guide and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
J65-8
idling state.
PS302 (Original exit sensor) ON during idling
J65-9
state.
PS308 (Original registration sensor), PS302
J65-2
J65-3
(Original exit sensor) ON during idling state.
J65-10
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor), PS302
(Original exit sensor) ON during idling state.
4-33
3
JAM CODE LIST
Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
DF-318/
J65-11
320
Correction
operation
When idling
Code
PS308 (Original registration sensor), PS309
—
Open the open/
(Original conveyance sensor), PS302 (Origi-
close cover and the
nal exit sensor) ON during idling state.
reverse guide and
remove jammed
paper, if any.
FS-112
J72-1
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) ON during
Remove jammed
idling state.
paper, if any, from
The PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 is
Remove jammed
turned ON while in idling.
paper, if any, from
the FNS/main body.
FS-113
J72-1
RU-101
the FNS/RU/main
body.
FS-114
J72-1
PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) is ON during
idling.
Remove jammed
paper, if any, from
FS-112
J72-2
PS707 (No paper sensor) ON during idling
state.
the FNS/main body.
FS-113
J72-2
While in idling, either of the PC4 (Upper path
sensor), the PC2 (Lower path sensor), PC3
Remove jammed
paper, if any, from
(Storage sensor), PC5 (Process tray paper
exit sensor) and the PC1 (1st tray exit sen-
the FNS/main body.
FS-114
J72-2
sor) is ON.
PC5-FN (Transport sensor) is ON during
J72-3
idling.
PC8-FN (Storage tray detecting sensor) is
FS-112
J72-16
FS-113 J72-16
RU-101
FS-114
FS-112
3
J72-16
J72-17
During operation
IV DIAGRAMS
SK-114 J72-4
ON during idling.
PC20-SK (Saddle exit sensor) is ON during
Remove jam paper
idling.
from SK/FNS if any.
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) failed to turn
The FNS/main
Remove jammed
ON within a predetermined time after PS2
(Fixing exit sensor) ON.
body stop
immediately.
paper, if any, from
the FNS/main body.
After the PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) is turned
ON, the PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 is
Remove jammed
paper, if any, from
not turned ON.
the FNS/RU/main
body.
PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) does not ON
after specified time from PS2 (fixing exit sen-
Open front door and
remove jammed
sor) ON.
PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn ON
paper if any.
Remove jammed
within a predetermined time after PS702
(FNS entrance sensor) ON. (Straight, sort/
paper, if any, from
the FNS/the main
group mode for other than small size)
body.
4-34
JAM CODE LIST
Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
FS-113
J72-17
During operation
Code
•
The PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 is
not turned OFF.
•
•
After the PS2 of RU-101 is turned ON,
Correction
operation
The FNS/main
Pull out the FNS
body stop
immediately.
from the main body,
and remove
the PC1 (1st tray exit sensor) is not
jammed paper, if
turned ON. (Sort/Group)
any, from the FNS/
main body.
After the PS2 of RU-101 is turned ON,
the PC4 (Upper path sensor) is not
turned ON. (Staple)
•
After the PS2 of RU-101 is turned ON,
the PC2 (Lower path sensor) is not
•
turned ON. (Staple/Sort/Group)
The PC4 is not turned OFF after it is
•
turned ON. (Staple)
The PC2 is not turned OFF after it is
•
turned ON. (Staple/Sort/Group)
After the PC4 is turned ON, the PC3
(Storage sensor) is not turned ON. (Staple)
•
FS-114
J72-17
After the PC2 is turned ON, the PC3 is
not turned OFF. (Staple/Sort/Group)
PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) does not OFF
after specified time from ON.
Open front door and
remove jammed
PC5-FN (Transport sensor) does not ON
after specified time from PC4-FN (Entrance
paper if any.
FS-113
J72-18
•
After the PC1 (1st tray exit sensor) is
Pull out the FNS
•
turned ON, it is not turned OFF.
After the PC3 (Storage sensor) is turned
from the main body,
and remove
ON, it is not turned OFF.
jammed paper, if
any, from the FNS/
main body.
FS-114
FS-112
J72-18
J72-19
J72-21
PC5-FN (Transport sensor) does not OFF
Open front door and
after specified time from ON.
remove jammed
paper if any.
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) failed to turn
OFF within a predetermined time after turn-
Remove jammed
paper, if any, from
ing ON. (Staple, sort/group)
the FNS/main body.
PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn OFF
within a predetermined time after PS703
(Paper exit sensor) turning ON. (Small size
staple, sort/group)
4-35
1
IV DIAGRAMS
sensor) ON.
JAM CODE LIST
Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
While exiting paper after completion of sta-
operation
The FNS/main
Pull out the FNS
pling, the PC5 (Process tray paper detection
body stop
from the main body,
sensor) is not turned OFF after it is turned
immediately.
and remove
FS-113
FS-114
J72-21
J72-21
SK-114
During operation
Code
Correction
jammed paper, if
ON.
any, from the FNS/
main body.
After specified time from stapling, PC8-FN
Remove jammed
(Strorage tray paper detect sensor) or
paper, if any, from
PC20-SK (Saddle exit sensor) of SK-114
the FNS/main body.
does not ON.
FS-112
J72-23
FS-114
J72-25
PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn OFF
within a predetermined time after PS703
(Paper exit sensor) turning ON. (Straight)
SK-114
FS-114
J72-43
PK-114
FS-112
PC22-SK (Crease roller home position sen-
Open front door and
sor) does not ON within specified time.
remove jammed
paper if any.
M1-PK (Punch motor) does not OFF after
specified time from ON.
J72-81
Staple jam M708 (Stapler motor) failed to
Remove the
turn OFF within a predetermined time after
turning ON. (Forward operation not com-
jammed staple.
pleted.)
FS-113
J72-81
After the staple motor 1 starts forward rota-
The FNS/main
Pull out the FNS
tion, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is not
turned ON in the specified period of time.
body stop
immediately.
from the main body,
and remove
IV DIAGRAMS
Then, the staple motor 1 starts backward
rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in the
jammed staples, if
any.
specified period of time.
FS-114
FS-113
J72-81
J72-82
J72-83
Staple home position sensor does not ON
Remove jammed
after specified time from staple motor forward rotation.
staple, if any.
After the staple motor 2 starts forward rotation, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is not
Pull out the FNS
from the main body,
turned ON in the specified period of time.
Then, the staple motor 2 starts backward
and remove
jammed staples, if
rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in the
specified period of time.
any.
After the staple motors 1 and 2 start forward
rotation, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is
not turned ON in the specified period of time.
Then, the staple motors 1 and 2 start backward rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in
the specified period of time.
3
4-36
JAM CODE LIST
Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
J72-84
J72-85
IT-101
J75-1
J75-10
J75-11
During operation
SK-114
Correction
operation
Saddle staple home position sensor 1 does
During operation When idling
Code
PS23 (IT exit sensor/U) or PS24 (IT exit sen-
J75-12
The FNS/main
not ON within specified time from saddle sta- body stop
ple motor 1 forward rotation.
Remove jammed
staple, if any.
immediately.
Saddle staple home position sensor 2 does
not ON within specified time from saddle staple motor 2.
—
sor /L) went ON during idling.
Open the IT cover,
remove any jammed
paper.
PS23 (IT exit sensor/U) failed to turn ON
Printer section
within a predetermined time after PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) turning ON.
stops immediately.
PS24 (IT exit sensor/L) failed to turn ON
within a predetermined time after PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) turning ON.
PS2 (Fixing exit) failed to turn OFF within a
predetermined time after PS23 (IT exit sensor /U) or PS24 (IT exit sensor/L) turning
ON.
J75-13
The IT door open jam
J81
J82
PS1 (Registration sensor) ON during idling
state.
—
Open the ADU door,
remove any jammed
paper.
PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L) ON during
Open the DB con-
idling state.
veyance door,
remove jammed
IV DIAGRAMS
Paper
feed
When idling
PS25 (IT door sensor) went OFF during
copying/printing.
paper. If paper is
jammed in the main
body: open the ADU
door, remove the
J83
Paper
exit
J90
PS155 (Paper feed sensor) ON during idling
jammed paper.
Open the LT top
state.
cover, remove any
jammed paper.
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) ON during idling
state.
Open the ADU door,
remove any jammed
paper.
4-37
1
JAM CODE LIST
Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
ADU
J92
conveyance
J97-1
Correction
operation
During operation
Code
PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON
Printer section
Open the ADU door,
within a predetermined time after start of
stops immedi-
remove any jammed
ADU reversal.
ately.
paper.
PS4 (ADU sensor) failed to turn ON within a
predetermined time after PS2 (Fixing exit
sensor) ON.
J97-2
PS4 (ADU sensor) failed to turn OFF within a
J100
PS4 (ADU sensor) ON during idling state.
IV DIAGRAMS
When idling
predetermined time after turning ON.
4-38
—
ERROR CODE LIST
4. ERROR CODE LIST
4.1
Error Code List
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Communication
F10-1
abnormalities
F10-2
Estimated abnormal parts
Communication error at CB (Main
operation
The main
CB (Main body control board)
body control board)
body stops
SCB (System control board)
Failure in serial communication
immediately,
between the SCB (System control
and the RL1
board) and CB (Main body control
(Main) turn
board).
Communication error at CB (Main
OFF.
CB (Main body control board)
body control board)
Serial communication error to the
sub CPU in the CB, receiving
command error, and platen operF10-3
F10-4
ation sequence error.
Communication error between
CB (Main body control board)
the CB (Main body control board)
and DBDB (DB drive board).
DBDB (DB drive board)
Sub-CPU A/D conversion error
Two consecutive failures to
CB (Main body control board)
Paper feed
tray abnor-
F18-1
malities
F18-2
Main body
F18-3
Paper feed
tray abnor-
F18-4
malities
F18-5
Error in main body upper tray up
PS10 (Upper limit sensor/L) failed
CB (Main body control board)
M7 (Tray motor/U)
to turn ON within a predetermined
time after M7 (Tray motor /U) ON.
PS7 (Upper limit sensor/U)
Error in main body lower tray up
PS10 (Upper limit sensor/L) failed
CB (Main body control board)
M8 (Tray motor/L)
to turn ON within a predetermined
time after M8 (Tray motor/L) ON.
PS10 (Upper limit sensor/L)
Error in DB upper tray up
PS102 (Tray upper limit sensor/3)
DBDB (DB drive board)
M101 (Tray up drive motor/3)
failed to turn ON within a prede-
PS102 (Tray upper limit sen-
termined time after M101 (Tray
up drive motor/3) ON.
sor/3)
Error in DB lower tray/LCT tray up The main
PS107 (Tray upper limit sensor/4) body stops
DBDB (DB drive board)
M102 (Tray up drive motor/4)
failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after M102 (Tray
immediately,
and the RL1
PS107 (Tray upper limit sensor/4)
up drive motor/4) ON.
Error in LT tray up
(Main) turn
OFF.
LTDB (LT drive board)
PS152 (Tray upper limit sensor)
failed to turn ON within a prede-
M151 (Tray up drive motor)
PS152 (Tray upper limit sen-
termined time after M151 (Tray
up drive motor) ON.
sor)
4-39
IV DIAGRAMS
respond to CB (Main body control
board) A/D conversion request.
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
code
Drum-area
F22-1
abnormalities
F23-1
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
Internal overheating
TCSB (Toner control sensor board)
The temperature at the outside of
FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1)
the drum reached or exceeded
FM7 (Internal cooling fan/2)
136°F.
(7145 only)
PCL connector detached
PCL (Pre-charging exposure
When the PCL was being turned
lamp) connector
ON prior to the start of initial
CB (Main body control board)
charging, a PCL abnormality was
detected 15 times in a row at the
specified intervals after the specified period of time.
High
F26-1
voltage
power
error
F26-2
L detection data error
TDS (Toner density sensor)
When the L detection output is
greater than 3.0V.
CB (Main body control board)
Abnormal output from TDS (Toner
density sensor)
Maximum TDS output voltage
failed to exceed 1.0V.
F26-3
Abnormal output from TDS (Toner
density sensor)
TDS output ripple voltage failed
to reach 0.5V
IV DIAGRAMS
F26-4
Toner density abnormality
If L detection power exceeds
TLD (Toner level sensor)
Toner supply unit
2.6V prior to toner out detection
by the TLD (Toner level sensor),
Load the toner bottle again
the automatic toner supply feature should restore the toner den-
Main body
sity. This error occurs if this
feature fails to restore the density.
High
voltage
F28-1
power
error
Charging abnormality
When the EM signal (charge_em
If any copying
operation is
1) is detected 5 times at the spec- being made,
ified intervals.
stop the main
Charging corona
HV (High voltage power)
CB (Main body control board)
body after
completion of
paper exit.
Turn the RL1
F28-2
Transfer lightning abnormality
(Main) off.
The main
Transfer corona section
When the EM signal (trans_em) is
detected 3 times at the specified
body stops
immediately,
HV (High voltage power)
CB (Main body control board)
intervals, this phenomenon
occurs 5 times in 1 job.
and the RL1
(Main) turn
OFF.
3
4-40
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
code
F28-3
Estimated abnormal parts
Separation lightning abnormality
operation
The main
Separation corona
When the EM signal
body stops
HV (High voltage power)
(separate_em) is detected 3
immediately,
CB (Main body control board)
times at the specified intervals,
and the RL1
this phenomenon occurs 5 times
(Main) turn
in 1 job.
OFF.
High fixing temperature abnor-
The main
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/1)
temperature
mality (TH1)
body stops
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/2)
abnormalities
The TH1 (Fixing temperature
immediately,
L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1)
sensor/1) detects a temperature
and the RL1
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
over 457°F continuously for a
specified period of time.
(Main) turn
OFF. Accep-
CB (Main body control board)
DCPS (DC power supply)
High fixing temperature abnormality (TH2)
tance of all
keys is dis-
WARNING
• When F34-∗∗, F35-∗∗ or
The TH2 (Fixing temperature
sensor/2) detects a temperature
abled.
F34-1
F34-2
Low fixing
temperature
abnormalities
F35-1
F36-∗∗
(fixing temperature related abnormality)
over 457°F continuously for a
specified period of time.
occurs, be sure to repair a
defective part before set-
Low fixing temperature abnormality (L2 burnt out)
ting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set
When turning on electricity to the
L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1) for
to 0 without repairing a
defective part, this may
more than the specified period of
time while in idling.
cause a fire.
IV DIAGRAMS
High fixing
4-41
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Low fixing temperature abnormal-
tempera-
ity (L2 burnt out)
body stops
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/2)
ture abnor-
In other than warming-up, the
immediately,
L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1)
malities
TH1 (Fixing temperature sensor/
and the RL1
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
1) elapses for more than the
(Main) turn
CB (Main body control board)
specified period of time in a tem-
OFF. Accep-
DCPS (DC power supply)
perature below 329°F (7145)/
tance of all
320°F (except the 7145).
keys is dis-
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/
1) low temperature abnormality
abled.
Low fixing
F35-2
F35-3
•
IV DIAGRAMS
• When F34-∗∗, F35-∗∗ or
F36-∗∗
(fixing
tempera-
ture related abnormality)
at the start of turning on electricity to the L2 (Fixing heater
ting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set
lamp/1) is below 320°F
(7145)/302°F (except the
to 0 without repairing a
defective part, this may
7145), the difference between
the TH1 temperature at the
cause a fire.
not reach the specified value.
When the temperature
detected by the TH1 at the
start of turning on electricity to
the L2 is above 320°F (7145)/
302°F (except the 7145), the
TH1 temperature does not
reach the warming-up completion temperature in the
specified period of time after
the start of turning on electricity to the L2.
F35-4
WARNING
occurs, be sure to repair a
defective part before set-
ture after the elapse of the
specified period of time does
•
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/1)
In warming up, when the temperature detected by the TH1
time of turning on electricity to
the L2 and the TH1 tempera-
Low fixing temperature abnormality (L3 burnt out)
When turning on electricity to the
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2) for a
specified period of time during in
idling.
3
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
The main
4-42
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Estimated abnormal parts
Low fixing temperature abnormal-
operation
The main
temperature
ity (L3 burnt out)
body stops
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/2)
abnormalities
In other than warming up, the
immediately,
L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1)
TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor/
and the RL1
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
2) elapses for more than the
(Main) turn
CB (Main body control board)
specified period of time in a tem-
OFF. Accep-
DCPS (DC power supply)
perature below 329°F (7145)/
tance of all
320°F (except the 7145).
keys is dis-
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/
2) low temperature abnormality
abled.
Low fixing
F35-5
F35-6
•
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/1)
WARNING
• When F34-∗∗, F35-∗∗ or
F36-∗∗
(fixing
tempera-
ture related abnormality)
In warming up, when the temperature detected by the TH2
occurs, be sure to repair a
defective part before set-
at the start of turning on electricity to the L3 (Fixing heater
ting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set
lamp /2) is below 320°F
(7145)/302°F (except the
to 0 without repairing a
defective part, this may
7145), the difference between
the TH2 temperature at the
cause a fire.
start of turning on electricity to
the L3 and the TH2 temperature after the elapse of the
specified period of time does
•
not reach the specified value.
When the temperature
detected by the TH2 at the
start of turning on electricity to
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
the L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
is above 320°F (7145)/302°F
(except the 7145), the TH2
temperature does not reach
the warming-up completion
temperature in the specified
period of time after the start of
turning on electricity to the L3.
F35-7
Fixing heat roller wrapping jam
failure (TH1)
While in copying, the TH1 (Fixing
temperature sensor/1) detects a
condition in which the temperature is lower than the specified
one as compared with the temperature taken the specified
period of time previously.
4-43
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Fixing heat roller wrapping jam
temperature
failure (TH2)
body stops
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/2)
abnormalities
While in copying, the TH2 (Fixing
immediately,
L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1)
temperature sensor/2) detects a
and the RL1
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
condition in which the tempera-
(Main) turn
CB (Main body control board)
ture is lower than the specified
OFF. Accep-
DCPS (DC power supply)
one as compared with the tem-
tance of all
perature taken the specified
keys is dis-
period of time previously.
abled.
Low fixing
F35-8
F35-9
IV DIAGRAMS
(fixing
tempera-
ature detected by the TH2 (Fixing
temperature sensor/2) reaches
ting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set
the Ready temperature earlier
than the temperature detected by
to 0 without repairing a
defective part, this may
the TH1, the temperature
detected by the TH1 does not
cause a fire.
ture.
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/
the Ready temperature earlier
than the temperature detected by
the TH2, the temperature
detected by the TH2 does not
reach the Ready temperature in
the specified period of time after
the temperature detected by the
TH1 reaches the Ready temperature.
F36-1
F36-∗∗
occurs, be sure to repair a
defective part before set-
ature detected by the TH1 (Fixing
temperature sensor/1) reaches
ing sensor
abnormalities
• When F34-∗∗, F35-∗∗ or
ture related abnormality)
2) contact failure
In warming up, when the temper-
Sub CPU fix-
WARNING
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/
the temperature detected by the
TH2 reaches the Ready temperaF35-10
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/1)
1) contact failure
In warming up, when the temper-
reach the Ready temperature in
the specified period of time after
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/
1) high temperature abnormality
(Sub CPU detection)
In the sub CPU, the TH1 detects
a temperature above 457°F for
the specified period of time.
3
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
The main
4-44
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Estimated abnormal parts
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/
operation
The main
ing sensor
1)open abnormality
body stops
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/2)
abnormalities
(Sub CPU detection)
immediately,
L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1)
In the sub CPU, the TH1 detects
and the RL1
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
a temperature from 18°F to -4°F
(Main) turn
CB (Main body control board)
continuously for the specified
OFF. Accep-
DCPS (DC power supply)
period of time.
tance of all
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/
keys is dis-
2) high temperature abnormality
abled.
Sub CPU fix-
F36-2
F36-3
F36-4
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/1)
WARNING
• When F34-∗∗, F35-∗∗ or
F36-∗∗
(fixing
tempera-
(Sub CPU detection)
ture related abnormality)
In the sub CPU, the TH2 detects
a temperature above 457°F for
occurs, be sure to repair a
defective part before set-
the specified period of time.
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/
ting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set
2) open abnormality
(Sub CPU detection)
to 0 without repairing a
defective part, this may
In the sub CPU, the TH2 detects
a temperature from 18°F to -4°F
cause a fire.
continuously for the specified
period of time.
Scanner
F41-1
abnormalities
M2 (Scanner motor) drive abnormality
Scanner stops
immediately.
M2 (Scanner motor)
SCDB (Scanner drive board)
(7145 only)
CB (Main body control board)
Occurs at exposure unit initial
search or at return scan if PS14
(Scanner home position sensor)
fails to turn ON within a predeterF43-1
mined time.
L1 (Exposure lamp) abnormality
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
L1 (Exposure lamp)
After the L1 is turned ON, an L1
abnormality signal is detected
continuously after the elapse of
the specified period of time.
Image
F46-1
control abnor-
Laser driver abnormality
Caused by overcurrent in laser
The main
body stops
Laser diode
LDB (LD drive board)
malities
output.
Laser index abnormality
immediately,
and the RL1
INDEX (Index sensor board)
Occurs if index period is different
from expected value.
(Main) turn
OFF.
M5 (Polygon motor)
SCB (System control board)
Laser route
ADB (A/D conversion board)
F46-8
F46-10
AOC abnormality
Scanner stops
immediately.
F46-11
AOC counter overflow
AGC abnormality
AGC counter overflow
L1 (Exposure lamp)
INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter)
SCB (System control board)
Exposure unit stop position
4-45
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Image
F49-4
control abnor-
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
INDEX (Index sensor board) con-
The main
INDEX (Index sensor board)
nection abnormality
body stops
SCB (System control board)
malities
immediately,
and the RL1
(Main) turn
OFF.
F49-6
ADB (A/D conversion board) con-
Scanner stops
CCD on ADB (A/D conversion
nection abnormality
immediately.
board)
SCB (System control board)
Flex wiring harness
Motor speed F51-2
abnormalities
F51-4
(7145)
M11 (Fixing motor) speed abnormality
The main
body stops
Motor lock detection (LOCK) signal has been detected 5 times at
immediately,
and the RL1
the specified intervals.
M3 (Developing motor) speed
(Main) turn
OFF.
abnormality
Motor lock detection (LD) signal
M11 (Fixing motor)
CB (Main body control board)
M3 (Developing motor)
CB (Main body control board)
has been detected 5 times at the
specified intervals.
F51-5
(7145)
M1 (Main motor) speed abnormality
M1 (Main motor)
CB (Main body control board)
Motor lock detection (LOCK) signal has been detected 5 times at
IV DIAGRAMS
F51-6
the specified intervals.
M5 (Polygon motor) speed abnormality
M5 was not locked 7 sec. after
M5 (Polygon motor)
CB (Main body control board)
starting to run.
Fan lock
abnormalities
F52-1
FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan)
FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan/1)
abnormality
When the motor lock signal (EM)
CB (Main body control board)
was detected at the specified
cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged
abnormal in the succeeding two
retries.
3
4-46
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Fan lock
F52-2
abnormalities (7145/
7235)
Estimated abnormal parts
FM2 (Fixing cooling fan/1) abnor-
operation
The main
FM2 (Fixing cooling fan)
mality
body stops
CB (Main body control board)
When the motor lock signal
immediately,
(LOCK) was detected at the
and the RL1
specified cycle with [H] detected
(Main) turn
continuously, the cooler has been
OFF.
judged abnormal at the succeeding two retries.
F52-3
FM4 (Internal cooling) abnormality
FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1)
CB (Main body control board)
When the motor lock signal (EM)
was detected at the specified
cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged
abnormal at the succeeding two
retries.
F52-4
FM5 (Developing suction fan)
abnormality
FM5 (Developing suction fan)
CB (Main body control board)
When the motor lock signal (EM)
was detected at the specified
cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged
abnormal at the succeeding two
retries.
F52-5
FM6 (Internal dehumidifying fan/
2) abnormality
FM6 (Internal dehumidifying fan/2)
CB (Main body control board)
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
When the motor lock signal (EM)
was detected at the specified
cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged
abnormal at the succeeding two
retries.
F52-6
Printer controller cooling fan
abnormality
Printer controller
When an error status signal was
sent from the printer controller.
F52-7
FM301 (Cooling fan) abnormality
When the motor lock signal (EM)
FM301 (Cooling fan)
CB (Main body control board)
was detected at the specified
cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged
abnormal at the succeeding two
retries.
4-47
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Estimated abnormal parts
FM7 (Internal cooling fan/2)
operation
The main
FM7 (Internal cooling fan/2)
abnormality
body stops
CB (Main body control board)
When the motor lock signal (EM)
immediately,
was detected at the specified
and the RL1
cycle with [H] detected continu-
(Main) turn
ously, the fan has been judged
OFF.
Main body
code
Fan lock
F52-8
abnormalities (7145)
abnormal at the two succeeding
retries.
F52-9
HD-103 cooling fan abnormality
When a lock signal was detected
HD-103 Cooling fan
SCB (System control board)
while in the HDD operation.
F52-10
FM7 Polygon cooling fan abnormality
FM7 (Polygon cooling fan)
(7235)
When motor lock signal (EM) was
detected at the specified cycle
CB (Main body control board)
with [H] also detected continuously, the fan was judged to be
abnormal after being twice
retried.
Image control
communication
E56-1
abnormalities
Communication abnormality
between system-control of the
SCB (System control board) and
engine-control of the CB (Main
body control board).
Occurs if SCB fails to responds
IV DIAGRAMS
when SW2 (Sub power switch)
turns ON.
E56-2
Communication abnormality
between system-control of the
SCB (System control board) and
engine-control of the CB (Main
body control board).
While on standby, the process
Ready signal has not been
detected for the specified period
E56-3
of time.
Communication abnormality
between system-control of the
SCB (System control board) and
engine-control of the CB (Main
body control board).
While on standby, the scanner
Ready signal has not been
detected for the specified period
of time.
3
4-48
Engine power
supply OFF
SCB (System control board)
CB (Main body control board)
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Communication abnormality
operation
Engine power
communication
between system-control of the
supply OFF
abnormalities
SCB (System control board) and
Image control
E56-4
Estimated abnormal parts
SCB (System control board)
FNSCB (FNS control board)
CB (Main body control board)
engine-control of the CB (Main
body control board).
While on standby, the FNS
Ready signal has not been
detected for the specified period
of time.
E56-5
Communication abnormality
SCB (System control board)
between system-control of the
SCB (System control board) and
CB (Main body control board)
engine-control of the CB (Main
body control board).
Platen-original size notification
timeout.
Operations
unit control
E56-6
abnormalities
Operation status error
Memory access error at copy
E56-7
insertion.
Operation management error
E56-8
Control error at panel manager
Operation drawing error 1
E56-9
Screen-data drawing mismatch
Operation drawing error 2
E56-10
Drawing-component data error
Operation panel communication
abnormality
Communication error with the
SCB (System control board)
SCB (System control board)
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
OB (Operation board)
operating section CPU
Image control
E56-11
Machine type judgement abnormality
communication
abnormalities
(Except
the 7145)
The type information of the SCB
(System control board) is different
SCB program
from the type information of the
CB (Main body control board).
E56-12
Communication abnormality
between system-control of the
SCB (System control board)
CB (Main body control board)
SCB (System control board) and
engine-control of the CB (Main
body control board). There is no
response from the engine after a
signal is sent for periodic communication.
4-49
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Estimated abnormal parts
Communication abnormality
operation
Engine power
communication
between system-control of the
supply OFF
CB (Main body control board)
abnormalities
SCB (System control board) and
Image control
E56-13
SCB (System control board)
engine-control of the CB (Main
body control board). The destination value RAM area on the
FNS
engine side is unjustly rewritten.
FNS communication abnormality
The main
CB (Main body control board)
communication
Failure in serial communication
body stops
FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormalities
between the CB (Main body con-
immediately,
(FS-112/113/
114)
trol board) and FNSCB (FNS con- and the RL1
(Main) turn
trol board).
FNS
F70-1
FS-112
F70-11
FS-113
F77-1
FS-112 flash-ROM abnormality
Detected checksum error in FNS
OFF.
FNSCB (FNS control board)
flash ROM.
M8 (Shift motor) drive abnormal-
M8 (Shift motor)
ity
• When starting to return to the
PC11 (Shift motor pulse sensor)
home position, the PC10
(Shift home sensor) is not
PC10 (Shift home sensor)
PWB-A (Control board)
turned ON in the specified
period of time after the M8 is
•
turned ON.
When starting to move to the
IV DIAGRAMS
shift position, the PC10 is not
turned OFF in the specified
period of time after the M8 is
turned ON.
FS-112
F77-2
•
•
The PS711 (Tray upper limit
sensor) is not turned ON in
M706 (Tray up drive motor)
FNSCB (FNS control board)
the specified period of time
after the paper extractor
PS711 (Tray upper limit sensor)
PS706 (Tray lower limit sensor)
starts to go up.
While in copying, the PS711
is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the
•
M706 starts to go up.
Paper is not detected even
after the paper detection
operation is made 3 times.
3
4-50
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
FS-113
F77-2
Estimated abnormal parts
M7 (Elevator motor) drive abnor-
operation
The main
mality
body stops
•
While the elevate tray is going
immediately,
PWB-A (Control board)
PWB-F (Elevate tray top face
up, the PWB-F (Elevate tray
and the RL1
sensor)
top face sensor) is not turned
(Main) turn
OFF in the specified period of
OFF.
S2 (Elevate tray upper limit switch)
S3 (Elevate tray lower limit switch)
M7 (Elevator motor)
time after the M7 is turned
ON.
•
While the elevate tray is going
•
The S2 (Elevate tray upper
limit switch) or the S3 (Ele-
down, the M7 is locked.
vate tray lower limit switch) is
turned ON in the specified
period of time after the elevate tray starts to drive.
FS-114
F77-2
M11-FN (Elevator motor) drive
failure
M11-FN (Elevator motor)
PWB-A FN (Control board)
•
PC15-FN (Top face detection
sensor)
During tray ascending, PC14FN (Top face detection sensor) does not ON after specified time from M11-FN ON.
•
•
FS-112
F77-3
During tray descending, it
does not reach the target
position within specified time.
During tray descending, M11-
FN is locked.
M704 (Alignment motor /F) drive
M704 (Alignment motor/F)
abnormality
• The PS710 (Alignment HP
PS710 (Alignment plate HP
sensor/F)
•
sensor/F) cannot be attained
in the specified period of time
FNSCB (FNS control board)
Sensor wiring harness/2
after the start of the alignment
plate HP search.
Motor wiring harness/2
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS
code
The PS710 cannot be passed
through in the specified
period of time after the alignment plate starts to move to
the size position.
4-51
1
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
FNS
code
FS-113
F77-3
M5 (Alignment motor ) drive
operation
The main
abnormality
body stops
•
While in search of the home
immediately,
position, the PC9 (Alignment
and the RL1
home sensor) is not turned
(Main) turn
ON in the specified period of
OFF.
Estimated abnormal parts
M5 (Alignment motor)
PWB-A (Control board)
PC9 (Alignment home sensor)
time after the M5 is turned
ON.
•
When the alignment operation
starts, the PC9 is not turned
OFF in the specified period of
time after the M5 is turned
FS-114
F77-3
ON.
M4-FN (Alignment motor 1) driv-
M4-FN (Alignment motor 1)
ing failure
• PC6-FN (Alignment home
PWB-A FN (Control board)
PC6-FN (Alignment home
position sensor 1) does not
ON within specified time from
position sensor 1)
start of alignment plate HP
searching.
•
PC6-FN does not OFF within
specified time from start of
alignment plate home position
search.
IV DIAGRAMS
FS-113
F77-4
M13 (Paper exit roller separation
motor) drive abnormality
M13 (Paper exit roller separation motor)
•
PWB-A (Control board)
When the pressure position
drive starts, the PC13 (Paper
exit roller home sensor) is not
turned ON in the specified
period of time after the M13 is
turned ON.
•
When the separation position
drive starts, the PC13 is not
turned OFF in the specified
period of time after the M13 is
turned ON.
1
4-52
PC13 (Paper exit roller home sensor)
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
FS-114
F77-4
Estimated abnormal parts
M6-FN (Exit open/close motor)
operation
The main
PWB-A FN (Control board)
drive failure
body stops
M6-FN (Exit open/close motor)
•
After starting pressing posi-
immediately,
PC12-FN (Exit roller home
tion driving, PC12-FN (Exit
and the RL1
position sensor)
roller home position sensor)
(Main) turn
does not ON within specified
OFF.
time from M6-FN ON.
•
After starting separation position driving, PC12-FN does
not OFF within specified time
FS-112
F77-5
from M6-FN ON.
M707 (Paper pressure motor)
M707 (Paper pressure motor)
drive abnormality
The M707 does not make a turn
FNSCB (FNS control board)
Sensor wiring harness/1
in the specified period of time
after it starts to operate.
FS-113
F77-5
M12 (Storage roller separation
motor) drive abnormality
M12 (Storage roller separation motor)
•
PC12 (Storage roller home sensor)
When the pressure position
drive starts, the PC12 (Stor-
PWB-A (Control board)
age roller home sensor) is not
truned on in the specified
period of time after the M12 is
turned ON.
•
When the separation position
drive starts, the PC12 is not
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS
code
turned ON in the specified
period of time after the M12 is
turned ON.
FS-112
F77-6
M705 (Stapler movement motor)
FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality
• The PS708 (Stapler unit HP
M705 (Stapler movement motor)
PS708 (Stapler unit HP sensor)
sensor) is not turned ON in
the specified period of time
Sensor wiring harness/2
Motor wiring harness/1
after the start of the home
position search.
•
The PS708 is not turned OFF
in the specified period of time
after the start of the movement to the 2-staple standby
position.
4-53
1
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
FNS
code
FS-113
F77-6
Estimated abnormal parts
M6 (Staple movement motor)
operation
The main
PWB-A (Control board)
drive abnormality
body stops
M6 (Staple movement motor)
•
The PC14 (Staple home sen-
immediately,
PC14 (Staple home sensor)
sor) is not turned ON in the
and the RL1
specified period of time after
(Main) turn
the M13 is turned ON.
OFF.
•
The home position cannot be
passed through in the specified period of time after the
start of the movement to the
FS-114
F77-6
1-staple position.
M7-FN (Stapling unit moving
M7-FN (Stapling unit moving
motor) driving failure
• PC10-FN (Staple home posi-
motor)
PWB-A FN (Control board)
tion sensor) does not ON
within specified time from
•
PC10-FN (Staple home position sensor)
starting of HP search.
PC10-FN does not OFF when
starting to move to 1-position
stapling position.
FS-112
F77-11
Stapler reversal abnormality
The PS712 (Stapler HP sensor)
FNSCB (FNS control board)
M708 (Staple motor)
cannot be attained in the specified period of time after the start
PS712 (Stapler HP sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
of the reverse rotation of the
M708 (Staple motor).
FS-113
F77-11
Stapler /F drive abnormality
• The home position cannot be
passed through in the specified period of time after the
•
start of the staple 2/F drive.
While in the staple 2/F drive,
the home position cannot be
attained in the specified
period of time after the home
position is turned OFF.
•
The home position cannot be
attained in the specified
period of time after the start of
the reverse drive of the staple
2/F.
1
4-54
PWB-A (Control board)
Staple motor 2
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
FS-113
F77-12
Estimated abnormal parts
Stapler /R drive abnormality
operation
The main
PWB-A (Control board)
•
The home position cannot be
body stops
Staple motor 1
passed through in the speci-
immediately,
fied period of time after the
and the RL1
start of the staple1/R drive.
(Main) turn
While in the staple1/F drive,
OFF.
•
the home position cannot be
attained in the specified
period of time after the home
position is turned OFF.
•
The home position cannot be
attained in the specified
period of time after the start of
the reverse drive of the
FS-114
F77-12
staple1/F.
Stapler drive failure
PWB-A FN (Control board)
•
Staple motor
Staple motor does not move
from home position within
specified time from start of
staple driving.
•
Staple motor does not reach
the home position within
specified time from start of
staple reverse driving.
F77-13
Saddle staple 1 drive failure
• During driving of saddle sta-
PWB-C SK (Control board)
Saddle staple motor 1
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS
code
ple motor 1, saddle staple
does not move from home
position within specified time.
•
During reverse driving of saddle staple motor 1, it does not
reach the home position
F77-14
within specified time.
Saddle staple 2 drive failure
PWB-C SK (Control board)
•
Saddle staple motor 2
•
During saddle staple motor 2
driving, it does not move from
home position.
During reverse driving of saddle staple motor 2, it does not
reach the home position
within specified time.
4-55
1
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
FNS
code
FS-112
F77-16
Estimated abnormal parts
M703 (Alignment motor/R) abnor-
operation
The main
M703 (Alignment motor/R)
mality
body stops
PS709 (Alignment HP sensor/R)
•
The PS709 (Alignment HP
immediately,
FNSCB (FNS control board)
sensor/R) cannot be attained
and the RL1
Sensor wiring harness/2
in the specified period of time
(Main) turn
Motor wiring harness/1
after the start of the alignment
OFF.
plate HP search.
•
The PS709 cannot be passed
through in the specified
period of time after the alignment plate starts to move to
the size position.
F77-18
FM701 (Cooling fan) drive abnormality
FM701 (Cooling fan)
FNSCB (FNS control board)
The 701 detects lock for more
than the specified period of time
Motor wiring harness/2
from the start of operation to the
close of operation.
FS-114
F77-22
M13-SK (In & out guide motor)
failure
PWB-C SK (Control board)
M13-SK (In & out guide motor)
•
PC23-SK (In & out guide
home position sensor)
During M13-SK driving (protrudes), PC23-SK (In & out
guide home position sensor)
does not OFF within specified
IV DIAGRAMS
•
time.
During M13-SK driving (moving aside), PC23-SK does not
ON within specified time.ve to
F77-23
the size position.
M14-SK (Layable guide motor)
PWB-C SK (Control board)
failure
• After M14-SK (Layable guide
M14-SK (Layable guide motor)
PC26-SK (Layable guide
motor) starts moving to the
home position, PC26-SK
(Layable guide home position
sensor) does not ON within
specified time from M14-SK
ON.
•
After starting of movable
guide, PC26-SK (Layable
guide home sensor) does not
OFF within specified time
from M14-SK ON.
1
4-56
home position sensor)
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
FS-114
F77-24
Estimated abnormal parts
Saddle exit roller drive failure
operation
The main
PWB-C SK (Control board)
•
PC18-SK (Saddle exit open/
body stops
M9-SK (Saddle exit open/
close motor) does not ON
immediately,
close motor)
within specified time from
and the RL1
PC18-SK (Saddle exit roller
press-operation starting of
(Main) turn
home position sensor)
M9-SK (Saddle exit open/
OFF.
close motor) .
•
PC18-SK does not OFF
within specified time from M9SK separation operation start-
F77-25
F77-26
ing.
M10-SK (Crease motor ) drive
PWB-C SK (Control board)
failure
During M10-SK driving, PC22-SK
M10-SK (Crease motor)
PC22-SK (Crease roller home
(Crease roller home position sensor) does not ON within specified
position sensor)
time.
M8-SK (Saddle exit motor) drive
failure
• Lock signal ON is continu-
PWB-C SK (Control board)
M8-SK (Saddle exit motor)
ously detected for the specified period within specified
•
time from M8-SK drive start.
Lock signal OFF is continuously detected for the specified period within specified
time from stopping of M8-SK
drive signal.
F77-27
Shutter drive failure
• During M6-FN (Exit open/
close motor) driving (closing
shutter), PC16-FN (Shutter
6-FN (Exit open/close motor)
PWB-A FN (Control board)
PC16-FN (Shutter home position sensor)
home position sensor) does
not ON within specified time.
•
During M6-FN driving (opening shutter) PC16-FN does
not OFF within specified time.
4-57
1
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS
code
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
FNS
code
FS-114
F77-28
Estimated abnormal parts
M5-FN (Alignment motor 2) driv-
operation
The main
M5-FN (Alignment motor 2)
ing failure
body stops
PWB-A FN (Control board)
•
PC7-FN (Alignment home
immediately,
PC7-FN (Alignment home
position sensor 2) does not
and the RL1
position sensor 2)
ON within specified time from
(Main) turn
starting of alignment plate
OFF.
home position search.
•
PC7-FN does not OFF within
specified time from starting of
alignment plate HP search.
F77-29
SL2-FN (Exit paddle solenoid)
driving failure
L2-FN (Exit paddle solenoid)
PWB-A FN (Control board)
•
PC11-FN (Exit paddle home
position sensor)
PC11-FN (Exit paddle home
position sensor) does not ON
within specified time from
SL2-FN ON (paddle move
•
aside).
PC11-FN does not OFF within
specified time from SL2-FN
ON (during pressing paper).
FS-113
F77-53
M11 (Punch motor) drive abnormality
M11 (Punch motor)
The PC15 (Punch motor pulse
PC15 (Punch motor pulse sensor)
sensor) does not turn OFF the
specified period of time after the
M11 turns on.
IV DIAGRAMS
F77-54
M14 (Punch movement motor)
PWB-A FN (Control board)
drive abnormality (inch system
only)
Punch motor
Punch position sensor 1
•
Punch position sensor 2
When starting the punch 2hole position switch drive, the
S4 (punch hole position
switch) is not turned ON in the
specified period of time after
the M14 is turned ON.
•
When starting the punch 3hole position switch drive, the
S4 is not turned OFF in the
specified period of time after
FS-114
F77-55
the M14 is turned ON.
Punch motor drive failure
PWB-A (Control board)
During driving punch motor,
punch position sensor 1,2 do not
OFF within specified time.
3
4-58
M14 (Punch movement motor)
S4 (Punch hole position switch)
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Nonvolatile
F80-1
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
Nonvolatile memory abnormality
Stop immedi-
memory
*1
ately
abnormalities F80-2
Nonvolatile memory abnormality
PRMB (Parameter memory board)
SCB (System control board)
*1
F80-3
Nonvolatile memory abnormality
*1
PRMB (Parameter memory board)
F80-4
Nonvolatile memory abnormality
PRMB (Parameter memory board)
F80-5
Nonvolatile memory abnormality
*1
Flash ROM F81-1
abnormalities
Flash ROM abnormality
Detected checksum error in SCB
SCB (System control board)
*1
SCB (System control board)
Engine power
supply OFF
SCB program
(System control board)’s
FlashROM.
F81-2
Software abnormality
CB (Main body control board) and
CB program
SCB program
SCB (System control board) have
non-matching software device
F81-4
types.
An OS error occurs in the image
error
control unit in the SCB (System
control board).
HDD initiali- F82-1
zation abnor-
A physical abnormality occurs in
the HDD and a checksum abnor-
mality
mality in the DRAM occur.
HDD abnor-
Document manager initialization
HDD (Hard disk)
F82-3
abnormality
I-FAX report initializing error
Reformatting of the HDD
HDD (Hard disk)
error
Main body
SCB (System control board)
HDD (Hard disk)
F82-2
malities
HDD
SCB (System control board)
IV DIAGRAMS
HDD
OS
HDD reformat
CB (Main control board)
Access
E82-10
abnormalities
Document manager access
abnormality (overall)
SCB (System control board)
The count of E82-11 to E82-17 is
an overall count for E82-10.
E82-11
E82-12
Document manager access
abnormality
VxWorks error
Document manager access
abnormality
Job control access error
E82-13
Document manager access
abnormality
Image conversion job access
error
4-59
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Access
E82-14
abnormalities
Document manager access
operation
Engine power
abnormality
supply OFF
Estimated abnormal parts
SCB (System control board)
Fax communication job access
error
E82-15
Document manager access
abnormality
Net communication job access
error
E82-16
Document manager access
abnormality
E82-17
File storage job access error
Document manager access
abnormality
Print job access error
E82-18
Document manager access error
FaxFile document conversion job
HDD
E82-50
access error
I-FAX report initializing error
error
Access
E82-51
I-FAX report access error (overall)
error
Job control access error 1.
* In the count, E82-52 count is
E82-52
also included.
I-FAX report access error
IV DIAGRAMS
Network
Job control access error 2
Network
F85-1
abnormalities
Network device abnormality
Stop the Net-
SCB (System control board)
NetworkDriver has not been registered for some reason (includ-
work I/O
NetWork section
Stop the
IEEE1284
SCB (System control board)
IEEE1284 (Parallel) section
ing hardware factors).
Copier/Fax can be used.
F85-2
IEEE1284 device abnormality
IEEE1284 (Parallel) Driver has
not been registered for some rea- (Parallel) I/O
sons (including hardware factors).
F85-3
Copier/Fax can be used.
USB device abnormality
USBDriver has not been registered for some reasons (including
Stop the
SCB (System control board)
USBI/O
USB section
Stop the Network function
SCB (System control board)
NetWork section
hardware factors).
Copier/Fax can be used.
E85-11
Network protocol stack initialization abnormality
The resetting of the Network protocol stack has been failed.
1
4-60
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Network
code
Network
E85-12
abnormalities
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
Network reset abnormality
Stop the Net-
SCB (System control board)
The resetting of the Network pro-
work function
NetWork section
Network print operation abnormality
Stop the Net-
SCB (System control board)
Software abnormality in the Net-
work print
JOB, NetWork section
work print JOB sequence.
function
tocol stack has been failed.
E85-13
E85-14
Network print operation abnormality
Software abnormality when
E85-15
receiving a Network print signal.
Network print operation abnormality
Software abnormality when
receiving a Network print (Apple-
E85-18
Talk) signal.
Network scan operation abnormality
Stop the Net-
Software abnormality in the Network scan JOB sequence.
work scan
function
Network scan operation abnormality
SCB (System control board)
NetWork section
Software abnormality when sendE85-20
ing a Network scan signal.
MIB module abnormality
Stop the MIB
E85-21
MIB software abnormality
IPP module abnormality
function
Stop the IPP
E85-22
IPP software abnormality
FTP server module abnormality
function
Stop the FTP
server function
E85-23
FTP server software abnormality
WebTool module abnormality
WebTool software abnormality
function
Network
E85-24
E85-25
E85-30
eKRDS transmission operation
Stop the WebTool
abnormality
Software abnormality while in
eKRDS Send-
transmission operation
eKRDS reception operation
stop
Network
abnormality
Software abnormality while in
eKRDS
Receiving
reception operation
LDAP module abnormality
function stop
•
•
stop
IV DIAGRAMS
E85-17
ing function
LDAP function
No memory obtainable.
Improper operation on MIO
HDD
LDAP.
HDD abnor-
E86-6
mality
(7145)
FAX file initialization abnormality
4-61
Stop the HDD
HDD (Hard disk)
function
Reformatting of the HDD
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
IP
code
Printer board
F87-1
abnormalities
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
Printer controller not identified.
Printer cannot
Printer controller did not respond.
be used.
Printer controller
Copier/Fax can be used.
F87-2
Printer controller abnormality
Engine power
Error F87-1 occurred 3 times in
supply OFF
succession.
F87-3
Printer controller HDD abnormality
Main body
HDD cannot be accessed.
System control
E88-1
Image abnormality
If any copying
communication
Abnormality detected in image
operation is
abnormalities
processing at system control
side.
being made,
stop the main
SCB (System control board)
body after
completion of
paper exit.
Turn the RL1
E89-1
Copy sequence abnormality
Abnormality in job object pointer.
(Could not get page-control
E89-2
(Main) off.
Engine power
SCB (System control board)
supply OFF
Engine section
Engine power
SCB (System control board)
object for some reason.)
Copy sequence abnormality
Abnormality in memory copy
sequence. (Cause unknown)
IV DIAGRAMS
E89-3
Copy sequence abnormality
Abnormality in through copy
sequence (FCOT). (Cause
unknown)
E89-4
Copy sequence abnormality
Memory scanner did not complete stop. (Notification of stop
completion not received from
E89-5
engine.)
Copy sequence abnormality
Memory printer did not complete
stop. (Notification of stop comple-
E89-6
tion not received from engine.)
SW2 (Sub power switch) OFF
processing wait timeout
supply OFF
All indicators
on the operation panel
light.
4-62
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
System control
E89-11
communication
abnormalities
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
Carriage return not possible error
Engine power
Abnormality when setting a timer
supply OFF
SCB (System control board)
(Count is made at E89-6.)
E89-12
Carriage return not possible error
Abnormality when canceling a
timer
(Count is made at E89-6.)
E89-21
Carriage return not possible error
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt.
(Printer user job)
(Count is made at E89-6.)
E89-22
Carriage return not possible error
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt.
(Printer job 0)
E89-23
(Count is made at E89-6.)
Carriage return not possible error
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt.
(Printer job 1)
(Count is made at E89-6.)
E89-24
Carriage return not possible error
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt.
(FCOT printer user job)
E89-25
(Count is made at E89-6.)
Carriage return not possible error
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt.
(FCOT user job)
(Count is made at E89-6.)
E89-26
Carriage return not possible error
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt.
(Copy print job)
E89-27
(Count is made at E89-6.)
Carriage return not possible error
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt.
(Copy print job 0)
(Count is made at E89-6.)
4-63
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Carriage return not possible error
operation
Engine power
communication
Operation abnormality when
supply OFF
abnormalities
copying interrupt.
System control
E89-28
(Copy print job 1)
(Count is made at E89-6.)
E89-31
Abnormality when deleting task 0
due to the generation of queue 1
not possible.
E89-32
Abnormality when deleting queue
0 due to the generation of queue
E89-33
1 not possible.
Abnormality when deleting queue
n due to the generation of task n
not possible.
E89-34
E89-35
Abnormality when deleting task 0
due to the generation of task 1
not possible.
Abnormality when deleting queue
0 due to the generation of task 1
not possible.
E89-36
E89-37
Abnormality when starting task n
Abnormality when deleting task n
E89-38
Abnormality when deleting queue n
IV DIAGRAMS
E89-41
Scheduling abnormality (queue
operation abnormality) when FAX
print cannot be started due to
E89-42
memory shortage.
Scheduling abnormality (message transmission error) when
FAX print cannot be started due
E89-43
to memory shortage.
Printer scheduling abnormality
(message transmission error) due
to memory being full.
E89-51
E89-52
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt (scanner scan
user job)
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt (scanner mixed
scan job 0)
E89-53
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt (scanner Z-folding scan job 0)
4-64
Estimated abnormal parts
SCB (System control board)
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
System control
E89-54
communication
abnormalities
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
Operation abnormality when
Engine power
copying interrupt (scanner normal
supply OFF
SCB (System control board)
scan job 0)
E89-55
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt (scanner scan
job 1)
E89-56
Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt (FAX scan user
job)
E89-57
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX mixed scan job
0)
E89-58
E89-59
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX Z-folding scan
job 0)
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX normal scan job
0)
E89-60
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX scan job 1)
E89-61
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FCOT scan user job)
E89-62
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FCOT scan job)
E89-63
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (copy scan user job)
E89-64
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (copy mixed scan job
E89-65
0)
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (copy Z-folding scan
job 0)
E89-66
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (copy normal scan job
E89-67
0)
Operation abnormality when copy-
E89-80
ing interrupt (copy scan job 1)
Suspend occurence
E89-81
CPU hang up due to software bug
Exception occurence
CPU hang up due to software bug
4-65
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
*1
Parameter memory board abnormality display priority. For these error codes, the priority for display has
been specified. When two or more errors occur at the same time, they are displayed in the following
order:
1.F80-4
2.F80-5
3.F80-3
4.F80-1
5.F80-2
IV DIAGRAMS
Note:
• For FAX related error codes, see “FK/FL Service Manual”.
3
4-66
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Network
N14
abnormalities
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
I-FAX reception abnormality
•
An attached file other than
Stop the I-FAX
function
JOB
TIFF has been received.
•
SCB (System control board)
Network section
An attached file has been
received in a wrong format. Or,
an attached file in a coding format that is not supported has
been received.
•
The number of attached files
has been in excess of the
•
upper limit of 10 files.
The number of pages of the
mails received has been in
excess of the upper limit of
1000 pages.
N14-00 eKRDS reception abnormality
Do not stop the
When an time-out condition occurs functions
while an E-Mail is being received.
(In this case, the mail is deleted
from the mail box.)
N14-02 eKRDS reception abnormality
When the format of an E-Mail
received is found illegal due to the
cause other than the number of
attached files being in excess of its
upper limit.
IV DIAGRAMS
Network
code
N14-04 eKRDS reception abnormality
When the number of attached files
in the E-Mail received is in excess
of the upper limit of 255.
(Since a wrong mail has been
received, the mail is deleted from
the mail box.)
N24
N25
DNS error
The LDAP server address was
Stop the LDAP SCB (System control board)
function
Network section
specified incorrectly.
Connection error
The connection from the LDAP
server was rejected.
N26
Connection error
The LDAP server is corresponding to any version other than 3.0.
4-67
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Network
code
Network
N27
abnormalities
Connection error
Stop the LDAP SCB (System control board)
The LDAP server does not support function
the SASL authorization system.
N28
LDAP connection error
The MIO does not support the
SASL authorization system which
has been supported by the server.
N29
N30
LDAP connection error
Stop the Net-
The log-in name or password is
work scan
incorrect.
(SMB) function
Network scan operation abnormality
The protocol is not initialized.
N31
Network scan operation abnormality
The connection has been cut off
N32
while in authorization.
Network scan operation abnormality
N33
The host name is incorrect.
Network scan operation abnormality
The user name or user password
is incorrect.
N34
Network scan operation abnormality
The folder name is incorrect.
N35
Network scan operation abnormality
The log-in failed due to the SMB
IV DIAGRAMS
protocol error other than N30 to
N34.
N36
Network scan operation abnormality
The file name is incorrect.
N37
Network scan operation abnormality
The file or folder attribute is erro-
N38
neous.
Network scan operation abnormality
The medium of the transfer
address is erroneous.
N39
Network scan operation abnormality
Resetting was made while in trans-
N40
fer.
Network scan operation abnormality
N41
Shortage of the buffer.
Network scan operation abnormality
N42
The MIO is busy.
Network scan operation abnormality
The server has no free space.
3
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
4-68
Network section
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Network
N43
abnormalities
Network scan operation abnormality
Stop the Net-
The connection was cut off while in work scan
transfer.
N44
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
SCB (System control board)
Network section
(SMB) function
Network scan operation abnormality
The server has run out of free
space while in transfer.
N45
Network scan operation abnormality
An error occurred with the file sys-
N50
tem of the server while in transfer.
Network scan operation abnormality
Stop the NetThe SMTP server address is not
set.
N52
work scan function (E-Mail)
Network scan operation abnormality
The protocol has not been initial-
N53
N54
ized.
Network scan operation abnormality
SCB (System control board)
The Network connection route is
abnormal.
Network cable
Network scan operation abnormality
SCB (System control board)
Network section
•
The server is not started.
•
•
The port number is wrong.
An erroneous POP server
authentication has been made
for “POP before SMTP.”
N55
•
The SMTP server connection
is abnormal.
•
There is not sufficient free
space left in the SMTP server.
Network scan operation abnormality
The connection is abnormal.
N56
IV DIAGRAMS
Network
code
SCB (System control board)
Network cable
Network scan operation abnormality
The communication time has run
N57
N58
out.
Network scan operation abnormality
•
The POP reception is being
made in the same account.
•
There is not sufficient free
space left in the SMTP server.
Network scan operation abnormality
The network connection route is
SCB (System control board)
Network section
JOB
SCB (System control board)
Network cable
abnormal.
TCP/IP setting is disable.
N59
Network scan operation abnormality
The SMTP server connection is
SCB (System control board)
Network section
abnormal.
4-69
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Network
code
Network
N60
abnormalities
Estimated abnormal parts
Network scan operation abnormality
operation
Stop the Net-
•
The SMTP server connection
work scan func- Network section
is abnormal.
tion (E-Mail)
•
The length of time set for “POP
SCB (System control board)
before SMTP” is longer than
the retention time approved for
the POP server.
N61
Network scan operation abnormality
•
An attached file in excess of
the maximum size for the
•
SMTP server has been sent.
The SMTP server was down
while an attached file was
being sent.
N62
Network scan operation abnormality
•
JOB
A reset operation has been
made while in the network
scan operation.
N63
SCB (System control board)
Network section
Network scan operation abnormality
•
The size of an attached file is
in excess of the maximum size
for the SMTP server.
•
N64
There is not sufficient free
space left in the SMTP server.
Network scan operation abnormality
IV DIAGRAMS
Shortage of the buffer.
N65
Network scan operation abnormality
The EPNET Mail has been in contention with other mails for sending.
N66
Network scan operation abnormality
The “From” address has been
specified in the domain that is not
allowed for the SMTP server.
N70
N71
LDAP connection error
The MIO has not completed the
preceding transaction.
LDAP connection/search error
A request for cancel has been
issued by the client.
N72
LDAP search error
The route of retrieval has been
incorrectly specified.
3
4-70
Stop the LDAP
function
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Network
N73
abnormalities
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
LDAP search error
Stop the LDAP SCB (System control board)
The results of retrieval are in
function
Network section
excess of the maximum number.
N74
LDAP search error
The LDAP server has been set the
Referral setting and cannot access
to the reference data.
N75
LDAP connection/search error
A time-out occurred due to the
LDAP server being not found.
N76
N77
LDAP connection error
Cannot connect to the LDAP
server. (At serch operation)
LDAP parameter abnormality
No bind can be made successfully
due to parameter abnormality.
N80
Network scan operation abnormality
Stop the Network scan func-
•
The IP address of the FTP
•
tion (FTP)
parameter is abnormal.
The length of the file name is in
excess of the upper limit of 32
bytes.
•
N81
The descriptor is illegal.
Network scan operation abnormality
SCB (System control board)
•
•
The server is not started.
The port number is wrong.
Network section
Network cable
•
•
The IP address is wrong.
The proxy server connection is
IV DIAGRAMS
Network
code
abnormal.
N82
N83
Network scan operation abnormality
SCB (System control board)
•
Network section
The FTP server was down
while data was being sent.
Network scan operation abnormality
SCB (System control board)
Network section
The network connection route is
N84
N86
abnormal.
Network scan operation abnormality
Network cable
The log-in name and the password
are illegal.
Network section
Network scan operation abnormality
•
The network connection route
•
is abnormal.
The server supporting the
SCB (System control board)
Stop the NetSCB (System control board)
work scan func- Network section
tion (FTP)
Network cable
“Passive” mode has not been
set to “Passive.”
4-71
3
ERROR CODE LIST
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Network
code
Network
N87
abnormalities
Network scan operation abnormality
•
The FTP server directory is
work scan func- Network section
abnormal.
tion (FTP)
•
The same file as the sending
file has been open on the FTP
server.
N88
Network scan operation abnormality
The reset operation was made
while in the network scan operation.
N89
Network scan operation abnormality
There is not sufficient free space
N91
left in the FTP server.
Network scan operation abnormality
N92
Shortage of the buffer.
Network scan operation abnormality
IV DIAGRAMS
The network is in the busy condition.
3
Estimated abnormal parts
operation
Stop the Net-
4-72
SCB (System control board)
ERROR CODE LIST
4.2
About Abnormal Units Isolation
As for the abnormalities listed below, the device can be used temporarily by separating the defective unit.
Pressing the auto reset key while an error code appears and turning ON/OFF the SW2 (Sub power switch)
allows you to detach the defective unit as a software and use other functions. However, when the SW2 is
turned ON or OFF without removing the cause of trouble, the abnormality will be detected again with an
error code displayed. (Function effective for once only)
Error code
18-1
Error
Error in main body upper
Unit to be cut off
Main body upper tray
Remarks
Tray can not be selected.
Main body lower tray
Tray can not be selected.
tray up
18-2
Error in main body lower
18-3
Error in DB upper tray up
DB upper tray
Tray can not be selected.
18-4
Error in DB lower tray/LCT
tray up
DB lower tray/LCT tray
Tray can not be selected.
18-5
70-1, 70-9
Error in LT tray up
FNS abnormality
LT tray
FNS
Tray can not be selected.
FNS can not be used; FNS
70-11
FNS abnormality
FNS
must be removed.
FNS can not be used; FNS
FNS
must be removed. (FS-112)
FNS can not be used; FNS
FNS
must be removed. (FS-112)
FNS can not be used; FNS
FNS
must be removed. (FS-112)
FNS can not be used; FNS
77-2
Tray up/down drive abnor-
77-5
mality
Pressure motor drive
77-17
abnormality
Fan motor drive abnormal-
77-3, 77-16
ity
Error in FNS alignment
FNS stack section
must be removed.
Only straight exit remains avail-
77-6, 77-11
plate
FNS stapler error
FNS stack section
able. (FS-112)
Only straight exit remains avail-
77-3, 77-6,
Staple drive abnormality
FNS
able. (FS-112)
The selection of the staple, sort
77-12, 77-28
77-13, 77-14,
77-22, 77-23,
or saddle mode (stitch-and-fold)
is not available. (FS-114)
Saddle drive abnormality
77-26
82-2
Document manager initial-
82-3
ization abnormality
I-FAX report initialization
85-1
abnormality
Network device abnormal-
85-2
ity
IEEE1284 device abnor-
85-3
mality
USB device abnormality
SK
The selection of the saddle
mode (stitch-and-fold) is not
HDD
available. (SK-114)
Copying, printing (except a per-
HDD
sonal letter) remain enabled.
Copying, printing (except a per-
Network
sonal letter) remain enabled.
Copying and faxing remain
IEEE1284
enabled.
Copying and faxing remain
USB
enabled.
Copying and faxing remain
enabled.
4-73
3
IV DIAGRAMS
tray up
ERROR CODE LIST
Error code
Error
Unit to be cut off
Remarks
86-2, 86-3
FAX board error
FAX
Copying and printing remain
86-6
FAX file initialization
abnormality
HDD
Copying, printing (except a personal letter) remain enabled.
86-7, 86-8
FL-102/FL-103 board
FL-102/FL-103
Copy, FAX (1 line) and printer
enabled.
error
87-2, 87-3
can be used.
Printer board abnormali-
Printer
Copying and faxing remain
ties
4.3
enabled.
L Detection Error Code List
Code
0003
Cause
The TDS (Toner density sensor) output
Clearance method
SW2 (Sub power
ripple at the end of L detection was 0.5V
or less.
switch)
OFF/ON
Suspected defective part
• Developing unit connector
• TDS
• CB (Main body control board)
0004
The TDS output ripple while the developer is being agitated during L detection
SW2
OFF/ON
adjustment was 0.02V or less (there is
almost no change in output).
• M1 (Main motor)
• Developing agitator
screw
• Developing unit connector
• TDS
IV DIAGRAMS
0005
0006
4.4
• CB
• Developer
TDS control voltage cannot be adjusted
SW2
to within the range 5.76~7.46V.
OFF/ON2
• TDS
• CB
TCSB (Toner control sensor board) output signal D/A conversion error
SW2
OFF/ON
• CB
• TSCB
Network Section Status Indication
For the SCB (System control board), there are two orange and green status indicator LED’s. The table
below shows the status indicated by these two LED’s.
3
ON/OFF of LED
Green LED flashin
Status of network section
Data being sent and received
Orange LED on
Orange LED off
Network speed at 100 Mb/s
Network speed at 10 Mb/s
4-74
4-75
HV (Charging corona)
HV (Developing bias)
HV (Transfer corona section)
HV (Separation corona)
PCL (Pre-charging exposure lamp)
TSL (Transfer synchronization lamp)
HV (Paper entrance guide plate)
M11 (Fixing motor)
M1 (Main motor)
M3 (Developing motor)
SD7 (Separation claw solenoid)
SD4 (Cleaning web solenoid)
M9 (Paper feed motor)
0
2
3
4
IV DIAGRAMS
START button ON
: Does not come ON for some copy counts.
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.1
Time (sec)
Item
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid /U)
PS1 (Registration sensor)
V-Valid
PS21 (Timing sensor /U)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
PS23 (IT exit sensor /U)
TIMING CHART
5. TIMING CHART
7145 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, life size, 2 copies, feed from tray 1
Time (sec)
3
4-76
TSL (Transfer synchronization lamp)
HV (Paper entrance guide plate)
HV (Separation corona)
PCL (Pre-charging exposure lamp)
SD7 (Separation claw solenoid)
SD4 (Cleaning web solenoid)
HV (Charging corona)
HV (Developing bias)
HV (Transfer corona section)
M11 (Fixing motor)
M1 (Main motor)
M9 (Paper feed motor)
0
2
3
START button ON
: Does not come ON for some copy counts.
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5.2
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid /U)
PS1 (Registration sensor)
V-Valid
PS21 (Timing sensor /U)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
PS23 (IT exit sensor /U)
Item
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
7235/7228/7222 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, life size, 2 copies, feed from tray 1
Note:
• This timing chart shows the case of 7235.
7322fs4009
4-77
R
R 230mm/s
230mm/s
230mm/s
230mm/s
M1 (Main motor)
M6 (ADU motor)
FF 600mm/s
600mm/s
PS24 (IT exit sensor /L)
PS4 (ADU sensor)
SD5 (ADU gate solenoid)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
PS21 (Timing sensor /U)
V-Valid
PS1 (Registration sensor)
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid /U)
Time (sec)
0
2
START button ON
1
3
5
IV DIAGRAMS
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5.3
Item
TIMING CHART
7145 ADU Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, life size, 3 copies, feed from tray 1
Time (sec)
3
4-78
R 165mm/s*
165mm/s*
140mm/s (7228/7222)
* 165mm/s (7235)
M1 (Main motor)
M6
(ADU motor)
F 600mm/s
PS24 (IT exit sensor /L)
PS4 (ADU sensor)
SD5
(ADU gate solenoid)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
PS21
(Timing sensor /U)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
V-Valid
PS1 (Registration sensor)
0
2
3
START button ON
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5.4
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid /U)
Item
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
7235/7228/7222 ADU Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, life size, 3 copies, feed from tray 1
Note:
• This timing chart shows the case of 7235.
7322fs4010
4-79
230mm/s
R 460mm/s
460mm/s
F 230mm/s
PS302 (Original exit sensor)
SD301 (Paper exit solenoid)
SD302 (Roller pressure solenoid)
(Original reversal motor)
M303
M302 (Original con- F 460mm/s
veyance motor)
230mm/s
230mm/s
R 460mm/s
F 100mm/s
M301
(Original feed motor)
250mm/s
Valid (Scan)
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor)
PS308 (Original registration sensor)
PS301 (No original sensor)
Time (sec)
0
IV DIAGRAMS
START button ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
5.5
Item
TIMING CHART
DF-318/DF-320 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, life size, single side original, 3 sheets
3
Time (sec)
230mm/s
460mm/s
4-80
230mm/s
R 460mm/s
460mm/s
F 230mm/s
PS302 (Original exit sensor)
SD301 (Paper exit solenoid)
SD302 (Roller pressure solenoid)
(Original reversal motor)
M303
M302 (Original con- F 460mm/s
veyance motor)
230mm/s
R
F 100mm/s
M301
(Original feed motor)
250mm/s
Valid (Scan)
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor)
PS308 (Original registration sensor)
PS301 (No original sensor)
Item
0
2
START button ON
1
IV DIAGRAMS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
TIMING CHART
B. 8.5x11, life size, double side originals, 3 sheets
4-81
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
PS104 (Paper feed sensor /U)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
V-Valid
PS1 (Registration sensor)
SD101 (Paper feed solenoid/U)
M100 (DB Paper feed motor)
M9 (Paper feed motor)
Time (sec)
0
START button ON
1
IV DIAGRAMS
2
3
4
5
6
7
5.6
Item
TIMING CHART
DB-211/DB-411 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, single side, 3 copies, feed from tray 3
Note:
• This timing chart shows the case of 7145.
3
Time (sec)
3
4-82
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
PS104 (Paper feed sensor /U)
PS155 (Paper feed sensor)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
MC1 (Registration clutch)
V-Valid
PS1 (Registration sensor)
SD151 (LT paper feed solenoid)
M150 (LT paper feed motor)
M100 (DB Paper feed motor)
0
START button ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5.7
M9 (Paper feed motor)
Item
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
LT-203 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x1, single side, 3 copies
Note:
• This timing chart shows the case of 7145.
Time (sec)
230mm/s
600mm/s
4-83
R
F
Shift/Open
Alignment
M706
(Tray up/down motor)
Lower
Raise
Pressure
M707
(Paper pressure motor)
Release
M708 (Stapler motor)
M705
(Stapler movement motor)
(Alignment motor /F)
M704
M703
Alignment/Shift
(Alignment motor /R)
Open
R
F 600mm/s
M702
(Paper exit motor)
230mm/s
SD701 (Roller release solenoid)
(FNS conveyance motor)
M701
PS703 (Paper exit sensor)
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor)
0
1
IV DIAGRAMS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5.8
PS2(Main body fixing exit sensor)
Item
TIMING CHART
FS-112 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, sort mode, 2 originals, 2 sets setting
Time (sec)
230mm/s
600mm/s
4-84
R
F
M706
(Tray up/down motor)
Lower
Raise
Pressure
M707
(Paper pressure motor)
Release
M708 (Stapler motor)
M705
(Stapler movement motor)
M704
Alignment
(Alignment motor /F)
Shift/Open
M703
Alignment/Shift
(Alignment motor /R)
Open
R
F 600mm/s
M702
(Paper exit motor)
230mm/s
SD701 (Roller release solenoid)
M701
(FNS conveyance motor)
PS703 (Paper exit sensor)
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor)
PS2(Main body fixing exit sensor)
Item
0
1
2
IV DIAGRAMS
3
4
5
6
7
8
TIMING CHART
B. 8.5x11, staple mode, 2 originals, 1 position, 2 sets setting
4-85
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
M4 (Upper entrance motor)
SL1 (Upper/lower entrance
switching solenoid)
SL2 (1st tray entrance
selecting solenoid)
L
H
ON
OFF
M1 (Entrance motor)
PC1 (1st tray exit sensor)
L
H
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS movement starting signal ON
5.9
Item
TIMING CHART
FS-113 Timing Chart
A. Non-sort, 1 original, 1 copy setting
M1 (Entrance motor)
4-86
M3 (Exit motor)
PC10 (Shift home position sensor)
M8 (Shift motor)
Forward
rotation
Stop
Backward
rotation
H
L
ON
OFF
L
H
ON
OFF
PC3 (Storage sensor)
L
H
1
1
FNS movement starting signal ON
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
Item
2
IV DIAGRAMS
2
1
1
Shift position
2
2
TIMING CHART
B. Sort, 2 originals, 2 sets setting
L
H
PC3 (Storage sensor)
4-87
ON
OFF
M9 (Lower paddle motor)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
M13 (Exit roller/rolls spacing motor)
M12 (Storage roller/
rolls spacing motor)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Stapling motor1
M8 (Shift motor)
ON
OFF
M6 (Stapling unit moving motor)
M3 (Exit motor)
ON
OFF
SL3 (Upper paddle solenoid)
Forward
rotation
Stop
Backward
rotation
ON
OFF
M15 (Upper paddle motor)
M5 (CD aligning motor)
H
L
PC2 (Lower entrance sensor)
Forward
rotation
Stop
Backward
rotation
L
H
ON
OFF
Forward
rotation
Stop
Backward
rotation
ON
OFF
L
H
Spacing
1
1
2
IV DIAGRAMS
1
FNS movement starting signal ON
PC4 (Upper entrance sensor)
M2 (Lower entrance motor)
M4 (Upper entrance motor)
M1 (Entrance motor)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
Item
2
2
1
1
Stapling
Transport to finisher tray
Aligning
1
Switchback
1
2
Spacing
2
Shift
Aligning
Shift
Pressure
Stapling
Transport to finisher tray
Pressure Spacing
2
TIMING CHART
C. Rear corner stapling, 8.5x11R, 2 originals, 2 sets setting
4-88
L
H
ON
OFF
Punch clutch
PC1 (1st tray exit sensor)
ON
OFF
M11 (Punch motor)
ON
OFF
SL2 (1st tray entrance
selecting solenoid)
ON
OFF
M4 (Upper entrance motor)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
M1 (Entrance motor)
SL1 (Upper/lower entrance
switching solenoid)
L
H
FNS movement starting signal ON
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
Item
IV DIAGRAMS
Punching movement
TIMING CHART
D. Non-sort, hole punch, 1 original, 1 copy setting
4-89
Exit motor
(M1-FN)
IV DIAGRAMS
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
High
Low
Stop
Entrance motor
(M3-FN)
Transport motor
(M2-FN)
ON
OFF
Transport sensor
(PC5-FN)
TIMING CHART
5.10 FS-114 Timing Chart
A. Non-sort, 8.5x11, 1 copy setting
4349T506BA
1
1
High
Low
Stop
Transport motor
(M2-FN)
4-90
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Stapler motor
Backward
Forward
Stop
Backward
Forward
Stop
ON
OFF
Stapling unit moving motor
(M7-FN)
Alignment motor 2
(M5-FN)
Alignment motor 1
(M4-FN)
(SL1-FN)
Storage paddle solenoid
(M6-FN)
Forward (Retraction)
Stop
Backward (Pressure)
Forward
Stop
Punch drive motor
Exit open/close motor
ON
OFF
Backward
Registration clutch
(CL1-FN)
Exit motor
(M1-FN)
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Entrance motor
(M3-FN)
(PC8-FN)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Storage tray detecting sensor
Punch sensor
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
B. 1 staple, 2 holes, 8.5x11, 2 originals, 2 sets setting
4349T505BA
Forward
Stop
ON
OFF
Forward
Stop
Backward
High
Low
Stop
4-91
Saddle exit motor
(M8-SK)
Stapler motor 2
Stapler motor 1
Alignment motor 1
(M4-FN)
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Backward
Forward
Alignment motor 2
Stop
(M4-FN)
Backward
Saddle exit open/close motor Forward
Stop
(M9-SK)
Backward
Exit open/close motor Forward
Stop
(M6-FN)
Backward
Storage paddle solenoid ON
OFF
(SL1-FN)
Exit motor
(M1-FN)
Registration clutch
(CL1-FN)
Crease motor
(M10-SK)
Transport motor
(M2-FN)
ON
Punch sensor
OFF
Storage tray detecting sensor ON
OFF
(PC8-FN)
High
Entrance motor
Low
(M3-FN)
Stop
IV DIAGRAMS
1st Document
2nd Document
TIMING CHART
5.11 SK-114 Timing Chart
A. Booklet-binding, 2-point stapling, 8.5x11R, 2 originals, 1 set setting
4511T504BA
1
TIMING CHART
IV DIAGRAMS
Blank page
4-92
G
H
I
1
2
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 24V
2 24V
3 PGND
4 PGND
5 5V
6 SGND
3
4
5
6
CN213- 1 5V
CN213- 2 VR
CN213- 3 SGND
CN216- 3 5V
CN216- 2 PS
CN216- 1 SGND
CN202-1
CN202-2
CN202-3
CN253-1
CN253-2
CN253-3
CN245-1
CN245-2
CN245-3
CN246-1
CN246-2
CN246-3
CN249-3
CN249-2
CN249-1
CN248-1
CN248-2
CN248-3
CN244-1
CN244-2
CN244-3
CN243-1
CN243-2
CN243-3
CN242-1
CN242-2
CN242-3
CN241-1
CN241-2
CN241-3
Cover open/close
sensor
Original registration
sensor
Original conveyance
sensor
Original size
sensor/1
Original size
sensor/2
PS304
PS308
PS309
PS306
PS305
VR301 Original size VR
DF open/close
sensor
PS303
PS302 Original exit sensor
PS301 No original sensor
FM301 Cooling fan
Original reverse motor
M303
5
CN216- 6 5V
CN216- 5 PS
CN216- 4 SGND
CN202-3
CN202-2
CN202-1
C
CN215- 16 5V
CN215- 17 PS
CN215- 18 SGND
CN215- 15 5V
CN215- 14 PS
CN215- 13 SGND
CN224-3
CN224-2
CN224-1
CN223-2
CN223-5
CN223-1
CN223-3
CN223-6
CN223-4
Original conveyance
motor
M302
4
CN215- 12 5V
CN215- 11 PS
CN215- 10 SGND
CN215- 9 5V
CN215- 8 PS
CN215- 7 SGND
CN215- 6 5V
CN215- 5 PS
CN215- 4 SGND
CN215- 3 5V
CN215- 2 PS
CN215- 1 SGND
N.C
CN214-B12 DRIVE
CN214-B13 LOCK
CN214-B14 PGND
CN214-B 9 24V
CN214-B10 24V
CN214-A 7 B
CN214-A 8 B
CN214-A 9 A
CN214-A10 A
Original feed motor
Stamp solenoid
Exit solenoid
Roller pressure
solenoid
M301
SD303
SD301
SD302
3
CN212- 7 FG ND
CN212CN212CN212CN212CN212CN212-
CN222-2
CN222-5
CN222-1
CN222-3
CN222-6
CN222-4
CN221-2
CN221-5
CN221-1
CN221-3
CN221-6
CN221-4
CN233-2
CN233-1
CN231-1
CN231-2
CN232-1
CN232-2
B
CN214-B 7 24V
CN214-B 8 24V
CN214-A11 B
CN214-A12 B
CN214-A13 A
CN214-A14 A
CN214-B 5 24V
CN214-B 6 24V
CN214-B 1 B
CN214-B 2 B
CN214-B 3 A
CN214-B 4 A
CN214-A 1 24V
CN214-A 4 DRIVE
CN214-A 3 24V
CN214-A 6 DRIVE
CN214-A 2 24V
CN214-A 5 DRIVE
2
CN200CN200CN200CN200CN200CN200-
E
CN211-A 1 5V
CN211-A 2 FM301 LOCK
CN211-A 3 FM301 ON
CN211-A 4 SD303
CN211-A 5 VR301
CN211-A 6 PS305
CN211-A 7 PS304
CN211-A 8 PS303
CN211-A 9 PS302
CN211-A10 PS301
CN211-A11 SD301 CONT
CN211-A12 SGND
CN211-A13 M301 RTN
CN211-A14 M301 RST
CN211-A15 M301 LOCK
CN211-A16 M301 F/R
CN211-A17 SGND
CN211-A18 M301 CLOCK
CN211-B 1 SGND
CN211-B 2 M302 CLOCK
CN211-B 3 SGND
CN211-B 4 M302 LOCK
CN211-B 5 M303 LOCK
CN211-B 6 M303 F/R
CN211-B 7 SGND
CN211-B 8 M303 CLOCK
CN211-B 9 SGND
CN211-B10 SD302 DRIVE
CN211-B11 PS309
CN211-B12 PS308
CN211-B13 PS306
CN211-B14 M303 V1
CN211-B15 M303 V0
CN211-B16 M302 V1
CN211-B17 M302 V0
CN211-B18 M301 V0
A
CN201-A18
CN201-A17
CN201-A16
CN201-A15
CN201-A14
CN201-A13
CN201-A12
CN201-A11
CN201-A10
CN201-A 9
CN201-A 8
CN201-A 7
CN201-A 6
CN201-A 5
CN201-A 4
CN201-A 3
CN201-A 2
CN201-A 1
CN201-B18
CN201-B17
CN201-B16
CN201-B15
CN201-B14
CN201-B13
CN201-B12
CN201-B11
CN201-B10
CN201-B 9
CN201-B 8
CN201-B 7
CN201-B 6
CN201-B 5
CN201-B 4
CN201-B 3
CN201-B 2
CN201-B 1
1
CN65- 6 24V
CN65- 5 24V
CN65- 4 PGND
CN65- 3 PGND
CN65- 2 5V
CN65- 1 SGND
CN201-A 1
CN201-A 2
CN201-A 3
CN201-A 4
CN201-A 5
CN201-A 6
CN201-A 7
CN201-A 8
CN201-A 9
CN201-A10
CN201-A11
CN201-A12
CN201-A13
CN201-A14
CN201-A15
CN201-A16
CN201-A17
CN201-A18
CN201-B 1
CN201-B 2
CN201-B 3
CN201-B 4
CN201-B 5
CN201-B 6
CN201-B 7
CN201-B 8
CN201-B 9
CN201-B10
CN201-B11
CN201-B12
CN201-B13
CN201-B14
CN201-B15
CN201-B16
CN201-B17
CN201-B18
6.1
CN17-A18 5V
CN17-A17 FM301
CN17-A16 FM301
CN17-A15 SD303
CN17-A14 VR301
CN17-A13 PS305
CN17-A12 PS304
CN17-A11 PS303
CN17-A10 PS302
CN17-A 9 PS301
CN17-A 8 SD301 CONT
CN17-A 7 SGND
CN17-A 6 M301 RTN
CN17-A 5 M301 RST
CN17-A 4 M301 LOCK
CN17-A 3 M301 F/R
CN17-A 2 SGND
CN17-A 1 M301 CLOCK
CN17-B18 SGND
CN17-B17 M302 CLOCK
CN17-B16 SGND
CN17-B15 M302 LOCK
CN17-B14 M303 LOCK
CN17-B13 M303 F/R
CN17-B12 SGND
CN17-B11 M303 CLOCK
CN17-B10 SGND
CN17-B 9 SD302 DRIVE
CN17-B 8 PS309
CN17-B 7 PS308
CN17-B 6 PS306
CN17-B 5 M303 V1
CN17-B 4 M303 V0
CN17-B 3 M302 V1
CN17-B 2 M302 V0
CN17-B 1 M301 V0
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
6. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
DF-318/320 Overall Wiring Diagram
6
7
D
8
Symbol
CB(MAIN BODY)
7
8
4-93
9
Part name
Location
DFDB
DF drive board
1-D
M301
Original feed motor
2-B
M302
Original conveyance motor
3-B
M303
Original reverse motor
3-B
FM301
Cooling fan
4-B
SD301
Exit solenoid
1-A
SD302
Roller pressure solenoid
1-A
SD303
Stamp solenoid
2-A
PS301
No original sensor
4-B
PS302
Original exit sensor
5-B
PS303
DF open/close sensor
5-B
PS304
Cover open/close sensor
5-B
PS305
Original size sensor/1
6-B
PS306
Original size sensor/2
6-B
PS308
Original registration sensor
5-B
PS309
Original conveyance sensor 6-B
VR301
Original size VR
7-B
F
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
A
B
C
D
E
DFDB
F
G
H
I
9
3
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
DB-211/411 Overall Wiring Diagram
4
103-B4 SGND
103-B5 PS
103-B6 5V
103-B7 SGND
103-B8 PS
103-B9 5V
MAIN BODY
24V2 7-5
24V2 7-6
PGND 7-7
PGND 7-8
5V2 7-10
SGND 7-14
RL PW 7-25
RL PG 7-26
E
19- 1
19- 2
19- 3
19- 4
19- 5
19- 6
19- 7
19- 8
19- 9
F
24V1 7-1
PGND 7-3
3
4
7
8
9
10
5
6
J61: 9 J61: 8 J61: 7 J61: 6 J61: 5 J61: 4 J61: 3 J61: 2 J61: 1 -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J60:1 -
1
J60:2 -
100-1
100-2
100-3
100-4
100-5
100-6
103-B10 SGND
103-B11 PS
103-B12 5V
24V2
24V2
PGND
PGND
5V
SGND
101- 9
101- 8
101- 7
101- 6
101- 5
101- 4
101- 3
101- 2
101- 1
4
5
6
J69: 3J69: 2J69: 1-
J68: 3J68: 2J68: 1J66: 3J66: 2J66: 1-
1
2
3
114- 3
-2
-1
4
5
6
115- 3
-2
-1
1
2
3
116- 3
-2
-1
1
2
3
112- 3
-2
-1
1
2
121- 2
121- 1
104-10 SGND
104-11 PS
104-12 5V
103-13 SGND
104-14 PS
104-15 5V
SD
101
M101
Paper size detection
Paper size detection board
DB paper feed motor
5-A
M101
Tray up drive motor /3
5-B
M102
Tray up drive motor /4
5-E
SD101
Paper feed solenoid /U
5-B
SD102
Paper feed solenoid /L
5-E
5-E
Paper feed sensor/L
Tray upper limit sensor/3
No paper sensor/3
Paper feed sensor/U
Tray sensor/3
PS107
Tray upper limit sensor /4 5-F
Paper feed solenoid/L
PS108
No paper sensor /4
5-G
Tray up drive motor/4
PS109
Remaining paper sensor
3-H
HTR100
Internal heater
3-I
1
2
3
4
5
J65: 6J65: 5J65: 4-
6
7
8
J70: 6J70: 5J70: 4-
1
2
3
124- 3
-2
-1
Tray upper limit sensor/4
J65: 3J65: 2J65: 1-
9
10
11
J70: 3J70: 2J70: 1-
4
5
6
125- 3
-2
-1
No paper sensor/4
J67: 3J67: 2J67: 1-
1
2
3
122- 3
-2
-1
Tray sensor/4
PSDTB/4
PS101
Tray sensor /3
PS102
Tray upper limit sensor /3 5-D
PS103
No paper sensor /3
5-D
PS104
Paper feed sensor /U
5-D
PS105
Paper feed sensor /L
5-C
PS106
Tray sensor /4
5-G
D
E
F
G
DB-211
only
H
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
PTC
3
C
Symbol
HTR 100
J120-2
4
A
B
Paper size detection board
Internal heater
J120-1
5-F
M100
PS
109
J80:1- 1
J80:2- 2
104-16 SGND
104-17 PS
104-18 5V
Tray up drive motor/3
J65:11J65:10J65: 9J65: 8J65: 7-
126- 5
-4
-3
-2
-1
5-C
board /4
TRAY3
J63: 3J63: 2J63: 1-
Paper size detection
119-3
-2
-1
Remaining
paper sensor
2
J69: 6J69: 5J69: 4-
123: 2 123: 1 -
104-5 SIZE.D
104-6 SIZE.C
104-7 SIZE.B
104-8 SIZE.A
104-9 SELECT
DB.RTS
GND
DB.RXD
DB.CTS
GND
DB.TXD
DB.EXIT
LCT.EXIT
DB.RST
2
H
1
1
2
3
104-3 DRIVE
104-4 24V2
DB-411
Only
I
J63: 6J63: 5J63: 4-
Paper feed solenoid/U
PSDTB/3
117- 3
-2
-1
104-1 24V2
104-2 DRIVE
105-1 SGND
105-2 SET
105-3 5V
G
J60:3 J60:4 J60:7 J60:8 J60:9 J60:10J60:5 J60:6 -
6
7
8
PSDTB/3
TRAY4
D
J64: 3J64: 2J64: 1-
118- 5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1-B
PS
105
103-B1 SGND
103-B2 PS
103-B3 5V
1
2
3
4
5
LT-203
PS
102
103-A10 SGND
103-A11 PS
103-A12 5V
J64: 8J64: 7J64: 6J64: 5J64: 4-
Location
LT-203
PSDTB/4
111- 2
111- 1
103-A5 SIZE.D
103-A6 SIZE.C
103-A7 SIZE.B
103-A8 SIZE.A
103-A9 SELECT
Part name
board /3
1
2
103-A3 DRIVE
103-A4 24V2
9
PS
103
106- 1 24V2
106- 2 24V2
106- 3 24V2
106- 4 PGND
106- 5 PGND
106- 6 M151 DRIVE
106- 7 LT CLOSE
106- 8 M150 F/R
106- 9 M150 CLOCK
106-10 M150 CONT
106-11 SD151 DRIVE
106-12 PS155
106-13 PS152
106-14 PS153
106-15 PS154
106-16 PS151
106-17 LCT_TYPE
106-18 5V
106-19 SGND
DB paper feed motor
PS
107
C
24V2 110-19
24V2 110-18
24V2 110-17
PGND 110-16
PGND 110-15
M151 DRIVE 110-14
LT CLOSE 110-13
M150 F/R 110-12
M150 CLOCK 110-11
M150 CONT 110-10
SD151 DRIVE 110- 9
PS155 110- 8
PS152 110- 7
PS153 110- 6
PS154 110- 5
PS151 110- 4
LCT_TYPE 110- 3
106-18 5V 110- 2
SGND 110- 1
113: 2 113: 1 -
103-A1 24V2
103-A2 DRIVE
8
Symbol
PS
108
LT-203
7
PS
104
DBDB
B
110-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
102-1 24V2
102-2 24V2
102-3 PGND
102-4 PGND
102-5 NC
102-6 NC
102-7 F/R
102-8 CLOCK
102-9 ON2
102-10 SGND
102-11 5V
6
PS
101
A
5
SD
102
3
M102
2
PS
106
1
M100
6.2
5
6
7
8
4-94
9
I
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
6.3
LT-203 Overall Wiring Diagram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Symbol
NC (2pin)
FT102(4pin)
FT101(1pin)
114-2 PGND
114-3 24V2
114-1 24V
MS151
A
Interlock switch
113- 9 SGND
113-10 PS
113-11 5V
113-12 SGND
113-13 PS
113-14 5V
F
113-15 SGND
113-16 PS
113-17 5V
M150
LT paper feed motor 6-C
M151
Tray up drive motor
6-B
SD151
LT paper feed sole-
6-D
1
2
LT paper feed solenoid
J82: 3J82: 2J82: 1-
3
4
5
127- 3
-2
-1
Paper feed sensor
J83: 6J83: 5J83: 4-
1
2
3
125- 3
-2
-1
Tray upper limit sensor
J83: 3J83: 2J83: 1-
4
5
6
124- 3
-2
-1
No paper sensor
126- 3
-2
-1
Remaining paper sensor/1
122- 3
-2
-1
Remaining paper sensor/2
J84: 2 J84: 1 -
1
2
B
noid
Remaining paper
6-F
Tray upper limit
6-E
PS153
No paper sensor
6-E
PS154
Remaining paper
6-F
C
D
sensor /1
J82: 5J82: 4-
SD
151
113- 6 SGND
113- 7 PS
113- 8 5V
1-B
A
sensor
PS
155
113- 3 SGND
113- 4 PS
113- 5 5V
DB-411
LT paper feed motor
PS
152
113- 1 24V2
113- 2 DRIVE
DB-411
PS152
PS
153
(CN113:miniCT)
1-B
sensor /2
PS
154
E
110-19 24V2
110-18 24V2
110-17 24V2
110-16 PGND
110-15 PGND
110-14 M151 DRIVE
110-13 LT CLOSE
110-12 M150 F/R
110-11 M150 CLOCK
110-10 M150 CONT
110- 9 SD151 DRIVE
110- 8 PS155
110- 7 PS152
110- 6 PS153
110- 5 PS154
110- 4 PS151
110- 3 SGND
110- 2 5V
110- 1 SGND
106- 1 24V2
106- 2 24V2
106- 3 24V2
106- 4 PGND
106- 5 PGND
106- 6 M151 DRIVE
106- 7 LT CLOSE
106- 8 M150 F/R
106- 9 M150 CLOCK
106-10 M150 CONT
106-11 SD151 DRIVE
106-12 PS155
106-13 PS152
106-14 PS153
106-15 PS154
106-16 PS151
106-17 SGND
106-18 5V
106-19 SGND
Location
DB-211
Tray up drive motor
PS
151
LTDB
Part name
DB-211
PS151
120-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
112-4 24V2
112-5 24V2
112-6 PGND
112-7 PGND
(H/L)
(LD)
112-8 F/R
112-9 CLOCK
112-10 CONT
112-11 SGND
112-12 5V
M150
C
DBDB
121- 1
121- 2
112-1 24V
112-2 DRIVE
112-3 PGND
DB-211
DB-411
M151
B
D
9
PS155
Paper feed sensor
6-D
MS151
Interlock switch
6-A
HTR150 Internal heater
4-G
E
F
G
G
Internal heater
MAIN BODY
DCPS
H
DB
PTC HEATER
J120 :1 -
1
J120 :2 -
2
J80 :1 -
1
J80 :2 -
2
PTC
J121-1
HTR 150
J121-2
H
Symbol
Connetcor
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4-95
9
I
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
Blank page
4-96
I
1
2
3
M705
M706
Tray up/down
motor
1
2
G
CN300-A10 24V
CN300-A9 24V
CN300-A8 24V
CN300-A11 NC
CN300-A4 5V
CN300-A3 5V
4
5
MAIN BODY
165
164
166
CN708-1 DRIVE1
6
CN754-1
CN754-2
CN752-1
CN752-2
CN752-3
CN753-1
CN753-2
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
D
2
1
CN708-2 DRIVE2
CN708-4 5V
CN708-5
PS712 PS
CN702-11 SGND
CN708-6 PS713 PS
CN702-10 SGND
CN702-9 MACK/FSCTS CN708-7 PS714 PS
CN708-8 SGND
CN702-8 SGND
CN708-3 NC
CN702-7 SREQ/NC
CN702-6 MRXD/FSSIN
CN702-5 SGND
CN702-4 SACK/FSRTS
CN702-3 MREQ/NC
CN702-2 SGND
CN702-1 MTXD/FSOUT
CN701-8 PGND
CN701-9 PGND
CN701-10 PGND
CN701-6 SGND
CN701-7 SGND
CN701-4 5V
CN701-5 5V
CN707-B3 5V
CN707-B2 PS
CN707-B1 SGND
CN751-1
CN751-2
CN761-1
CN761-2
CN761-3
CN761-4
CN745-5
CN745-4
CN745-2
CN745-3
CN745-1
VCC
HD
LS
READY
GND
MTR+
MTR+
MTRMTR-
CN756-13
CN756-14
CN756-15
CN756-10
CN756-11
CN756-12
CN756-7
CN756-8
CN756-9
CN756-4
CN756-5
CN756-6
CN756-1
CN756-2
CN756-3
Paper exit full sensor
Tray count sensor
Tray lower limit sensor
PS704
PS716
PS706
Alignment HP sensor/F
PS710
Stapler HP sensor
Stapler detection sensor
Stapler ready sensor
PS713
PS714
5V
PS
SGND
5V
PS
SGND
Stapler motor
Alignment HP sensor/R
No paper sensor
PS709
PS707
Stapler unit HP sensor
Paper exit sensor
PS703
PS708
Tray upper limit sensor
PS711
PS712
M708
CN741-1
CN741-2
CN741-3
CN740-1
CN740-2
CN740-3
CN738-1
CN738-2
CN738-3
CN739-1
CN739-2
CN739-3
CN737-1
CN737-2
CN737-3
CN744-1
CN744-2
CN744-3
CN735-1
CN735-2
CN735-3
CN734-1
CN734-2
CN734-3
CN736-1
CN736-2
CN736-3
Pressure motor
FNS entrance sensor
PS702
M707
Pressure sensor
PS701
5V
PS
SGND
CN730-1
CN730-2
Shutter sensor
PS705
5
CN300-B1 SGND
CN300-B2 SGND
CN300-B3 MACK/FSCTS
CN300-B4 SGND
CN300-B5 SREQ/NC
CN300-B6 MRXD/FSSIN
CN300-B7 SGND
CN300-B8 SACK/FSRTS
CN300-B9 MREQ/NC
CN300-B10 SGND
CN300-B11 MTXD/FSOUT
FNSCB
CN701-1 24V
CN701-2 24V
CN701-3 24V
CN707-B6 5V
CN707-B5 PS
CN707-B4 SGND
CN707-B9 5V
CN707-B8 PS
CN707-B7 SGND
CN707-B12 5V
CN707-B11 PS
CN707-B10 SGND
CN707-B15 NC
CN707-B14 NC
CN707-B13 NC
CN707-A3 5V
CN707-A2 PS
CN707-A1 SGND
CN707-A6 5V
CN707-A5 PS
CN707-A4 SGND
CN707-A9 5V
CN707-A8 PS
CN707-A7 SGND
CN707-A12 5V
CN707-A11 PS
CN707-A10 SGND
CN707-A15 5V
CN707-A14 PS
CN707-A13 SGND
CN706-1 DRIVE1
CN706-2 DRIVE2
CN709-3 NC
CN709-2 PSNC
CN709-1 NC
CN733-1
CN733-2
CN733-3
CN732-1
CN732-2
CN732-3
CN734-1
CN734-2
CN734-3
4
CN300-A7 PGND
CN300-A6 PGND
CN300-A5 PGND
A
24V4
A
B
24V4
B
CN710-1 DRIVE1
CN710-2 DRIVE2
CN705-3
CN705-2
CN705-4
CN705-5
CN705-1
CN705-6
CN703-9 A
CN703-4 24V4
CN703-10 A
CN703-11 B
CN703-3 24V4
CN703-12 B
A
24V3
A
B
24V3
B
CN709-6 5V
CN709-5 PS
CN709-4 SGND
CN709-9 5V
CN709-8 PS
CN709-7 SGND
CN709-12 5V
CN709-11 PS
CN709-10 SGND
Front door switch
MS701
3
CN300-A2 SGND
CN300-A1 SGND
CN726-1
CN726-2
CN725-1
CN725-5
CN725-3
CN725-2
CN725-6
CN725-4
CN724-1
CN724-5
CN724-3
CN724-2
CN724-6
CN724-4
CN703-5
CN703-2
CN703-6
CN703-7
CN703-1
CN703-8
CN716-1 DRIVE
CN716-2 PGND
CN713-1 LOCK
CN713-2 24V
CN713-3 PGND
Shutter switch
MS702
2
Stapler
movement
motor
M704
M703
CN723-1
CN723-5
CN723-3
CN723-2
CN723-6
CN723-4
CN762-1
CN762-2
CN746-3
CN746-2
CN746-1
CN712-1 24V IN
CN712-2 24V OUT
C
Alignment
motor/F
Alignment
motor/R
SD701
FM701
CN711-1 24V IN2
CN711-2 24V OUT2
1
Roller
release
solenoid
Cooling motor
M702
H
CN704-9 A
CN704-3 24V2
CN704-10 A
CN704-11 B
CN704-4 24V2
CN704-12 B
A
24V1
A
B
24V1
B
E
CN722-1
CN722-3
CN722-5
CN722-7
CN722-9
CN722-11
CN704-5
CN704-1
CN704-6
CN704-7
CN704-2
CN704-8
B
Paper exit
motor
M701
A
CN721-1
CN721-3
CN721-5
CN721-7
CN721-9
CN721-11
6.4
FNS
conveyance
motor
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
FS-112 Overall Wiring Diagram
6
7
8
7
8
4-97
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
F
G
Symbol
H
Connetcor
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
9
I
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
Symbol
Part name
Location
FNSCB
FNS control board
1-D
M701
FNS conveyance motor
1-H
M702
Paper exit motor
1-H
M703
Alignment motor /R
2-I
M704
Alignment motor /F
3-I
M705
Stapler movement motor
3-I
M706
Tray up/down motor
4-I
M707
Pressure motor
3-B
M708
Stapler motor
6-C
FM701
Cooling motor
2-I
SD701
Roller release solenoid
2-H
MS701
Front door switch
1-B
MS702
Shutter switch
1-B
PS701
Pressure sensor
2-B
PS702
FNS entrance sensor
2-B
PS703
Paper exit sensor
3-B
PS704
Paper exit full sensor
4-B
PS705
Shutter sensor
2-B
PS706
Tray lower limit sensor
4-B
PS707
No paper sensor
5-B
PS708
Stapler unit HP sensor
5-B
PS709
Alighnment HP sensor /R
5-B
PS710
Alighnment HP sensor /F
5-B
PS711
Tray upper limit sensor
3-B
PS712
Stapler HP sensor
6-B
PS713
Staple detection sensor
6-B
PS714
Stapler ready sensor
7-B
PS716
Tray count sensor
4-B
4-98
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
6.5
RU-101 Overall Wiring Diagram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
A
B
CN300-B3
CN200B-5
CN300-B4
CN200B-3
CN300-B6
CN200B-4
CN300-B8
CN200B-2
CN300-B10
CN200B-6
CN300-B11
CN200B-7
MRTS
GND
MRXD
B
MRTS
GND
MTXD
C
C
GND
D
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
E
DC24V
CN300-A5
CN3-6
CN4-1
CN200C-3
CN300-A6
CN3-5
CN4-2
CN200C-2
CN300-A7
CN3-4
CN300-A8
CN3-3
CN300-A9
CN3-2
CN300-A10
CN3-1
DC24V
D
GND
FUB
E
MAIN BODY
F
Passage sensor
PS2
CN1-1
CN200A-7
CN1-2
CN200A-6
CN1-3
CN200A-5
G
Front door sensor
PS1
H
Symbol
I
Part name
CN200A-4
CN2-2
CN200A-3
CN2-3
CN200A-2
DC5V
PS2 ON
GND
G
DC5V
PS1 ON
GND
H
Symbol
Location
FUB
Fuse board
PS1
Front door sensor 4-F
PS2
Passage sensor
1
CN2-1
F
4-C
CN200C-1
Connetcor
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
FS-113
4-G
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4-99
9
I
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
Blank page
4-100
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
6.6
FS-113 Overall Wiring Diagram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
W
W
W
W
9
Hole Punch Position Switch
Hole Punch
Selector Motor
B
B
A
8
Only for inch
destination
A
B
B
PS2
Passage Sensor (RU-101)
PS1
Front Door Sensor (RU-101)
C
C
D
D
E
E
PWB-E_GL
PWB-E_GL
F
PWB-C
F
CN200C
RU-101
CN201B
G
PWD-F
PWD-F_GL
G
H
Exit Roll Home
Position Sensor
PWD-F
Connetcor
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
PWB-D
PWD-F_GL
I
1
2
3
4
5
H
Symbol
6
7
8
4-101
9
I
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
Symbol
Part name
Location
RU-101
RU-101
1-F
M1
Transport motor
3-B
M2
Lower entrance motor
3-A
M3
Exit motor
2-A
M4
Upper entrance motor
3-B
M5
CD aligning motor
5-B
M6
Stapling unit moving sensor
3-A
M7
Elevator motor
1-D
M8
Shift motor
1-C
M9
Lower paddle motor
5-A
M11
Punch motor
1-C
M12
Storage roller/rolls spacing motor
2-A
M13
Exit roller/rolls spacing motor
7-D
M14
Hole punch selector motor
7-A
M15
Upper paddle motor
7-D
CL
Punch clutch
6-A
SL1
Upper/Lower entrance switching solenoid
7-E
SL2
1st entrance switching solenoid
7-E
SL3
Upper paddle solenoid
7-D
S1
Set switch
1-E
S2
Elevator tray upper limit switch
1-E
S3
Elevator tray lower limit switch
1-D
S4
Hole punch position switch
7-A
PC1
1st tray exit sensor
7-G
PC2
Lower entrance sensor
7-G
PC3
Storage sensor
5-H
PC4
Upper entrance sensor
5-H
PC5
Finisher tray paper detecting sensor
2-I
PC6
1st tray full detecting sensor
7-F
PC7
Elevator tray full detecting sensor
7-H
PC8
Elevator tray paper detecting sensor
2-H
PC9
CD aligning home position sensor
2-I
PC10
Shift home position sensor
2-H
PC11
Shift motor pulse sensor
2-H
PC12
Storage roller home position sensor
5-H
PC13
Exit roll home position sensor
7-H
PC14
Staple home position sensor
6-I
PC15
Punch motor pulse sensor
6-B
PC17
Front door detecting sensor
7-F
PC18
Upper cover detecting sensor
7-F
PS1
Front door sensor (RU-101)
7-B
PS2
Passage sensor (RU-101)
7-B
PWB-C
Elevator tray upper limit sensor LED
7-E
PWB-D
Elevator tray upper limit sensor PQ
5-I
4-102
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
6.7
SK-114 Overall Wiring Diagram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
A
Staple Home Position Sensor 2
B
B
Staple Home Position Sensor 1
C
C
D
D
Saddle Stapler 1 Needle Empty Detect Sensor
Saddle Stapler 1 Self Priming Detect Sensor
Saddle Stapler 2 Needle Empty Detect Sensor
E
E
Saddle Stapler 2 Self Priming Detect Sensor
FS-114
FS-114
F
F
G
Symbol
G
H
Connector Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
H
FS-114
FS-114
I
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4-103
9
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
Symbol
Part name
Location
FS-114
FS-114
4-H, 7-E
M8-SK
Saddle exit motor
3-I
M9-SK
Saddle exit open/close motor
3-H
M10-SK
Crease motor
7-G
M13-SK
In & out guide motor
3-H
M14-SK
Layable guide motor
3-G
PC18-SK
Saddle exit roller home position sensor
7-A
PC20-SK
Saddle exit sensor
7-B
PC21-SK
Saddle tray empty sensor
7-A
PC22-SK
Crease roller home position sensor
7-H
PC23-SK
In & out guide home position sensor
7-B
PC25-SK
Transport pulse sensor
7-C
PC26-SK
Layable guide home sensor
7-C
S4-SK
Saddle interlock switch
2-D
PWB-C SK
Main control board
3-A
4-104
APPENDIX
7. APPENDIX
7.1
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TS
AC(H)
FT20
J13-2
CN9-1
Noise filter
FT5
FT7
BT3
BT1
MAIN RL
Circuit breaker/1
PLUG
CN9-2
AC DRIVE
NF
FT2
CN9-3
CN9-3
AC(N)
Main power switch
N.C
5V
24V
NMI
12V
SGND
-12V
11
12
8-1 24V
8-3 PGND
6-1 24V
6-3 24V
6-5 24V
6-7 PGND
6-9 PGND
6-11 PGND
6-13 5V
6-15 5V
6-17 SGND
6-19 SGND
1-1
1-2
1-3
25 1-4
26 1-5
23
24
5V
5V
N.C
SGND
SGND
5V
5V
SGND
SGND
12V
SGND
-12V
SGND
7-9
7-11
7-13
7-15
7-17
7-21
7-23
7-24
12V
7-19
5-1
24V
5-2
24V
J60: 1 - 1
J60: 2 - 2
J60: 3 - 3
J60: 4 - 4
J60: 7 - 7
J60: 8 - 8
J60: 9 - 9
J60:10 - 10
- 5
- 6
1
77
78
79
80
81
83
84
2
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
3
J23-3
J24-2B #250
J23-4
SWD24V
31
PTC heater
PTC
935-2
83- 1 X2
- 2 Y2
- 3 X1
- 4 Y1
86-14 VLCD
-13 VEE
-12 D3
-11 D2
-10 D1
- 9 D0
- 8 VEE(24V)
- 7 VSS(GND)
- 6 VDD(5V)
- 5 XSCL
- 4 LP
- 3 DIN
- 2 N.C
- 1 DISPOFF
LCDB
84-3 5V
84-4 SGND
84-5 INV ON(PWM)
for CB
BL
106- 1 24V2
106- 2 24V2
106- 3 24V2
106- 4 PGND
106- 5 PGND
106- 6 M151 DRIVE
106- 7 LT CLOSE
106- 8 M150 F/R
106- 9 M150 CLOCK
106-10 M150 CONT
106-11 SD151 DRIVE
106-12 PS155
106-13 PS152
106-14 PS153
106-15 PS154
106-16 PS151
106-17 LCT_TYPE
106-18 5V
106-19 SGND
73
82
J24-1B #250
J24-2A #250
8-2
OB
80-A12
80-A11
80-A10
80- A9
80- A8
80- A7
80- A6
80- A5
80- A4
80- A3
80- A2
80- A1
J38-A1 -A12
J38-A2 -A11
J38-A3 -A10
J38-A4 -A9
J38-A5 -A8
J38-A6 -A7
J38-A7 -A6
J38-A8 -A5
J38-A9 -A4
J38-A10 -A3
J38-A11 -A2
J38-A12 -A1
34-A1 UD3
34-A2 SGND
34-A3 UD1
34-A4 XSCL
34-A5 SGND
34-A6 YD
34-A7 OPTXD
34-A8 SGND
34-A9 OPRTS
34-A10 OPRXD
34-A11 SGND
34-A12 OPCTS
80-B12
80-B11
80-B10
80- B9
80- B8
80- B7
80- B6
80- B5
80- B4
80- B3
80- B2
80- B1
J38-B1 -B12
J38-B2 -B11
J38-B3 -B10
J38-B4 -B9
J38-B5 -B8
J38-B6 -B7
J38-B7 -B6
J38-B8 -B5
J38-B9 -B4
J38-B10 -B3
J38-B11 -B2
J38-B12 -B1
34-B1 UD2
34-B2 SGND
34-B3 UD0
34-B4 LP
34-B5 SGND
34-B6 LCDENB
34-B7 OPRST
34-B8 SGND
34-B9 OPINT
34-B10 MONIT
34-B11 5V
34-B12 5V
INV2
88- 3
-2
-1
SCB 1/3
G
H
Symbol
Speaker
PSW2B
/SW2
102
4
5
6
E
F
89-1 FL HOT
-4 FL GND
I
76
J24-1A #250
J23-2
30
PGND 8-4
DCPS cooling fan
H
J23-1
Interlock switch
FM1
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
26 25 24 23
SWD24V
935-1
F
DB-211
DB-411
D
for DCPS
SW3
24V
PAKB
G
C
500- 4
500- 3
500- 2
500- 1
for
BIAS
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
for OPTION
EUROPE Only
2-7
2-6
2-5
2-4
2-3
2-2
2-1
SGND
SGND
5V
5V
E
for FNS
10-1 DRIVE
10-2 EM
10-3 PGND
DF-318
6-2 24V
6-4 24V
6-6 24V
6-8 PGND
6-10 PGND
6-12 PGND
6-14 5V
6-16 5V
6-18 SGND
6-20 SGND
DCPS
7-1 24V
7-3 PGND
7-5 24V
7-6 24V
7-7 PGND
7-8 PGND
7-10 5V
7-14 SGND
7-25 RL PWR
7-26 RL PGND
for SCDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J24: 1 - 1
31- 7
31- 6
31- 5
31- 4
31- 3
31- 2
31- 1
BT7
BT6
D
J24: 2 - 2
BT1
FCB
DC PSY
24V
5V
+12V
-12V
5-3 PGND
5-4 PGND
RL CONT
L2 CONT
L3 CONT
24V EM
FM1 EM
BT2
-12V
SGND
12V
NMI
24V
5VV
N.C
FT10
SW1
SGND
SGND
L3 CONT
5V
42- 9
42- 8
42- 7
42- 6
42- 5
42- 4
42- 3
42- 2
42- 1
FT9
AC(H)
CN99-4
CN99-3
CN99-2
CN99-1
50
51
52
53
AC(N)
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
J21-03
BT5
7-2 24V
7-4 PGND
7-12 5V
7-16 SGND
7-20 SGND
7-18 12V
7-22 SGND
C
Fixing heater
lamp/2
12V
SGND
-12V
SGND
12V
SGND
SGND
5V
5V
CBR 2
L3
FT27
BT2
B
FT28
J13-4
J21-03
L3 DRIVE
84-1 SGND
84-2 MONIT
FT4
L2
FT25
BT4
CR002
FT6
FT26
J13-3
L2 DRIVE
CR001
Circuit breaker/2
J21-02
84-6 VR L
84-7 VR SIG
84-8 VR H
84-9 SCAN6
84-10 RTN3
84-11 5V
84-12 SGND
84-13 SW2
INLET
B
72
Fixing heater
lamp/1
FT1
EUROPE 200-240V 50Hz
USA 120V 60Hz
A
AC(H)
CBR 1
71
RT3
RT4
FT8
FT23
J13-1
FT3
75
FT22
Thermostat
JAPAN AC100V 50/60Hz
74
FT21
FT24
RL1 POWER
RL1 CNT
85 - 8
85 - 7
85 - 6
85 - 5
85 - 4
85 - 3
85 - 2
85 - 1
A
J21-01
24V(C)
PLUG
J:40LA8861
Connector
Faston
Relay connector
Crimp
514: 1 - 2
514: 2 - 1
7
8
Appendix-1
9
I
Battery
CN47
103
1
2
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
3
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
400-A 1 SGND
-A 2 BCLOCK12
-A 3 SGND
-A 4 DRAM_D31
-A 5 DRAM_D30
-A 6 DRAM_D29
-A 7 DRAM_D28
-A 8 DRAM_D27
-A 9 DRAM_D26
-A10 DRAM_D25
-A11 DRAM_D24
-A12 DRAM_D23
-A13 DRAM_D22
-A14 DRAM_D21
-A15 DRAM_D20
-A16 DRAM_D19
-A17 DRAM_D18
-A18 DRAM_D17
-A19 DRAM_D16
-A20 5V
-A21 DRAM_D15
-A22 DRAM_D14
-A23 DRAM_D13
-A24 DRAM_D12
-A25 DRAM_D11
-A26 DRAM_D10
-A27 DRAM_D9
-A28 DRAM_D8
-A29 DRAM_D7
-A30 DRAM_D6
-A31 DRAM_D5
-A32 DRAM_D4
-A33 DRAM_D3
-A34 DRAM_D2
-A35 DRAM_D1
-A36 DRAM_D0
-A37 5V
-A38 SGND
-A39 VBAT
-A40 XWAIT
-A41 5V
-A42 5V
-A43 DR_CKE
-A44 XFAX_RST
-A45 XIRST
-A46 XICS5
-A47 XICS7
-A48 XIRD
-A49 XMWR
-A50 XIOSEL2
-A51 L_A20
-A52 L_A19
-A53 L_A18
-A54 L_A17
-A55 L_A16
-A56 L_A15
-A57 L_A14
-A58 L_A13
-A59 L_A12
-A60 L_A11
-B 1 SGND
-B 2 BCLOCK5
-B 3 SGND
-B 4 XFAX_CIACK
-B 5 XFAX_COACK
-B 6 XFAX_DIACK
-B 7 XFAX_DOACK
-B 8 XAHA1_INT
-B 9 XEXIN_ACK
-B10 XEXOUT_ACK
-B11 -12V
-B12 EXOUT_D7
-B13 EXOUT_D6
-B14 EXOUT_D5
-B15 EXOUT_D4
-B16 EXOUT_D3
-B17 EXOUT_D2
-B18 EXOUT_D1
-B19 EXOUT_D0
-B20 5V
-B21 EXIN_D0
-B22 EXIN_D1
-B23 EXIN_D2
-B24 EXIN_D3
-B25 EXIN_D4
-B26 EXIN_D5
-B27 EXIN_D6
-B28 EXIN_D7
-B29 XFAX_DRIVE
-B30 XEXOUT_REQ
-B31 XEXIN_REQ
-B32 XICS6
-B33 XFAX_DOREQ
-B34 XFAX_DIREQ
-B35 XFAX_COREQ
-B36 XFAX_CIREQ
-B37 5V
-B38 SGND
-B39 MONITOR
-B40 XRC_INT
-B41 12V
-B42 PDA7
-B43 PDA6
-B44 PDA5
-B45 PDA4
-B46 PDA3
-B47 PDA2
-B48 PDA1
-B49 PDA0
-B50 L_A0
-B51 L_A1
-B52 L_A2
-B53 L_A3
-B54 L_A4
-B55 L_A5
-B56 L_A6
-B57 L_A7
-B58 L_A8
-B59 L_A9
-B60 L_A10
4
CN501
126
127
4
128
129
130
40- 1 STROBE
- 2 DATA0
- 3 DATA1
- 4 DATA2
- 5 DATA3
- 6 DATA4
- 7 DATA5
- 8 DATA6
- 9 DATA7
-10 ACK
-11 BUSY
-12 PE
-13 SLCT
-14 AUTOFD
-15 N.C
-16 SGND
-17 SGND
-18 N.C
-19 SGND
-20 SGND
-19 SGND
-22 SGND
-23 SGND
-24 SGND
-25 SGND
-26 SGND
-27 SGND
-28 SGND
-29 SGND
-30 HLOGIC
-31 INT
-32 FAULT
-33 SGND
-34 N.C
-35 N.C
-36 SELECTIN
HD-103 Type A
5V
SGND
/INDEX
SGND
/INDPR
G
3
431- 5
431- 4
431- 3
431- 2
431- 1
E
432-B1 LOAD
432-B2 DACLK
432-B3 DI
432-B4 SGND
432-B5 /ALM2
432-B6 /S/H2
432-B7 /ALM_RST
432-B8 SGND
432-B9 SGND
432-B10 -VIDEO1
432-B11 +VIDEO1
432-B12 SGND
D
2
J52: 5 - 1
J52: 4 - 2
J52: 3 - 3
J52: 2 - 4
J52: 1 - 5
H
432-A1 /ENB1
432-A2 /ALM1
432-A3 /BIAS
432-A4 /S/H1
432-A5 SGND
432-A6 LD+5V
432-A7 LD+5V
432-A8 +5VRN
432-A9 SGND
432-A10 -VIDEO2
432-A11 +VIDEO2
432-A12 SGND
1
J53: B1 - B12
J53: B2 - B11
J53: B3 - B10
J53: B4 - B9
J53: B5 - B8
J53: B6 - B7
J53: B7 - B6
J53: B8 - B5
J53: B9 - B4
J53:B10 - B3
J53:B11 - B2
J53:B12 - B1
J53: A1 - A12
J53: A2 - A11
J53: A3 - A10
J53: A4 - A9
J53: A5 - A8
J53: A6 - A7
J53: A7 - A6
J53: A8 - A5
J53: A9 - A4
J53:A10 - A3
J53:A11 - A2
J53:A12 - A1
ADB
60- 1 SGND
- 2 TG
- 3 CLAMP
- 4 ACLAMP
- 5 BCLAMP
- 6 SGND
- 7 SGND
- 8 +TCK
- 9 -TCK
-10 SGND
-11 SGND
-12 +RCK
-13 -RCK
-14 SGND
-15 SGND
-16 +IN_CLOCK
-17 -IN_CLOCK
-18 SGND
-19 SCLOCK
-20 SCLOCK
-21 *SEN
-22 SDI
-23 SDO
-24 SGND
-25 SGND
-26 -AD_D0
-27 +AD_D0
-28 SGND
-29 SGND
-30 -AD_D1
-31 +AD_D1
-32 SGND
-33 SGND
-34 -OUT_CLOCK
-35 +OUT_CLOCK
-36 SGND
-37 SGND
-38 ADRST
-39 APR
-40 SGND
-41 5V
-42 5V
-43 5V
-44 5V
-45 SGND
-46 12V
-47 12V
-48 12V
-49 12V
-50 SGND
7.2
46- 1
46- 2
46- 3
46- 4
46- 5
46- 6
46- 7
46- 8
46- 9
46-10
46-11
46-12
46-13
46-14
46-15
46-16
46-17
46-18
46-19
46-20
46-21
46-22
46-23
46-24
46-25
46-26
46-27
46-28
46-29
46-30
46-31
46-32
46-33
46-34
46-35
46-36
46-37
46-38
46-39
46-40
46-41
46-42
46-43
46-44
46-45
46-46
46-47
46-48
46-49
46-50
APPENDIX
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/4)
5
5
6
DIMM
CN35
6
7
8
I
7
8
Appendix-2
9
A
A
B
B
FK-102/FL-102
C
C
D
CN37 Board to Board Connector
E
F
F
PRMB
CN32,33
FAN
G
CN502
SCB 2/3
Symbol
H
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
131
9
I
1
I
COPY VENDER
2
-6
S.G -2
H/L -7
3
-6
H/L -7
M1
M9
M11
Main motor
Paper feed motor
Fixing motor
P.G -9
24V -10
SD9
Toner
solenoid
4
TLD
FM2
Toner level
sensor
PS 5
5
TC
Toner bottle
sensor
Total counter
M4
Toner supply
motor/1
SD5
ADU gate
solenoid
M10
Toner supply
motor/2
Fixing cooling fan
6
Registration clutch
SD4
MC1 Cleaning web
solenoid
FM6
Internal
dehumidifying
fan/2
FM3
Internal
dehumidifying
fan/1
Tray
motor/L
M8
M7
Tray
motor/U
7
Appendix-3
5V
-1
S.G -2
CLK -4
8
-6
H/L -7
LD
Developing motor
913: 3 - 1
913: 2 - 2
913: 1 - 3
910: 3 - 1
910: 2 - 2
910: 1 - 3
24V -11
24V -10
P.G -9
P.G -8
Developing
suction fan
26-A3 PGND
26-A2 EM
26-A1 DRIVE
26-A6 PGND
26-A5 EM
26-A4 DRIVE
SGND 17-B18
M302 CLOCK 17-B17
SGND 17-B16
M302 EM 17-B15
M303 EM 17-B14
M303 F/R 17-B13
SGND 17-B12
M303 CLOCK 17-B11
SGND 17-B10
SD302 DRIVE 17-B9
PS309 17-B8
PS308 17-B7
PS306 17-B6
M303 V1 17-B5
M303 V0 17-B4
M302 V1 17-B3
M302 V0 17-B2
M301 V0 17-B1
201:B1 - B18
201:B2 - B17
201:B3 - B16
201:B4 - B15
201:B5 - B14
201:B6 - B13
201:B7 - B12
201:B8 - B11
201:B9 - B10
201:B10- B9
201:B11- B8
201:B12- B7
201:B13- B6
201:B14- B5
201:B15- B4
201:B16- B3
201:B17- B2
201:B18- B1
68-B1
68-B2
68-B3
68-B4
68-B5
68-B6
68-B7
68-B8
68-B9
68-B10
68-B11
68-B12
68-B13
68-B14
68-B15
68-B16
68-B17
68-B18
68-A1
68-A2
68-A3
68-A4
68-A5
68-A6
68-A7
68-A8
68-A9
68-A10
68-A11
68-A12
68-A13
68-A14
68-A15
68-A16
68-A17
68-A18
24V
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
PGND
5V
5V
SGND
SGND
CW/CCW-5
26-A17 5V
26-A16 SGND
26-A15 CONT
26-A14 CLOCK
26-A13 N.C
26-A12 LD
26-A11 N.C
26-A10 PGND
26-A9 PGND
26-A8 24V
26-A7 24V
201:A1 - A18
201:A2 - A17
201:A3 - A16
201:A4 - A15
201:A5 - A14
201:A6 - A13
201:A7 - A12
201:A8 - A11
201:A9 - A10
201:A10- A9
201:A11- A8
201:A12- A7
201:A13- A6
201:A14- A5
201:A15- A4
201:A16- A3
201:A17- A2
201:A18- A1
904-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
7
CONT -3
26-B2 24V
26-B1 DRIVE
J51:1 - 5
J51:2 - 4
J51:3 - 3
J51:4 - 2
J51:5 - 1
PreSeparation charging
claw
lamp
solenoid
906-1
-2
J54:1 - 5
J54:2 - 4
J54:3 - 3
J54:4 - 2
J54:5 - 1
Polygon motor
5V 17-A18
FM301 EM 17-A17
FM301 CONT 17-A16
SD303 CONT 17-A15
VR301 17-A14
PS305 17-A13
PS304 17-A12
PS303 17-A11
PS302 17-A10
PS301 17-A9
SD301 DRIVE 17-A8
SGND 17-A7
M301 RTN 17-A6
M301 RST 17-A5
M301 EM 17-A4
M301 F/R 17-A3
SGND 17-A2
M301 CLOCK 17-A1
22-5
22-4
22-3
22-2
22-1
932:2 - 1
932:1 - 2
J16-12
J16-18
Humidity sensor
26-B4 24V
26-B3 DRIVE
CLOCK
LOCK
DRIVE
PGND
24V
J15: 2 - 12
J15: 1 - 13
HUM1
29-A3 PGND
29-A2 EM
29-A1 DRIVE
24V 26-B16
DRIVE 26-B17
6
907-1
-2
J38: 3 - 4
J38: 2 - 5
J38: 1 - 6
912: 3 - 1
912: 2 - 2
912: 1 - 3
29-A6 PGND
29-A5 EM
29-A4 DRIVE
SD7
J38: 6 - 1
J38: 5 - 2
J38: 4 - 3
928:2 - 1
928:1 - 2
J16-15
J16-16
TCSB
914: 3 - 1
914: 2 - 2
914: 1 - 3
J15: 4 - 10
J15: 3 - 11
Toner control
sensor board
DRIVE 26-B14
24V 26-B15
Toner density sensor
29-A8 24V
29-A7 DRIVE
DEV UNIT
925:2J29:2
-1 -1
925:1J29:1
-2 -2
92-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
FS SOUT
SGND
N.C
FS RTS
SGND
FS SIN
N.C
SGND
FS CTS
SGND
SGND
29-A10 DRIVE
29-A9 24V
J11: 7 - 1
J11: 6 - 2
J11: 5 - 3
J11: 4 - 4
J11: 3 - 5
J11: 2 - 6
J11: 1 - 7
102
J16-4
J16-5
J16-6
J16-7
J16-8
TDS
J16-2
J16-3
TH2
J15:11 - 3
J15:10 - 4
J15: 9 - 5
J15: 8 - 6
J15: 7 - 7
J15: 6 - 8
J15: 5 - 9
J16-13
J16-14
983-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
5
5V 26-B7
DRUM.TH 26-B8
12V 26-B9
TNRIF 26-B10
TNOUT1 26-B11
TNOUT2 26-B12
SGND 26-B13
J15:13 - 1
J15:12 - 2
J17-2
J17-3
J17-9
J17-5
PS 2
N.C 26-B5
N.C 26-B6
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
29-A16 24V
29-A15 24V
29-A14 B
29-A13 B
29-A12 A
29-A11 A
J14: 6 J14: 5 J14: 4 J14: 3 J14: 2
J14: 1
Fixing exit sensor
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
915:6 - 1
915:5 - 2
915:4 - 3
915:3 - 4
915:2 - 5
915:1 - 6
25-A1
25-A2
25-A3
25-A4
25-A5
25-A6
CONT
12V
TDS ANG
SGND
N.C
N.C
951-1
-2
-3
FUSING UNIT
Fixing
Fixing
temperature temperature
sensor/1
sensor/2
24V
24V
B
B
A
A
J18: 3 - 1
J18: 2 - 2
J18: 1 - 3
300:A10- A10
300:A9 - A9
300:A8 - A8
300:A7 - A7
300:A6 - A6
300:A5 - A5
300:A4 - A4
300:A3 - A3
300:A2 - A2
300:A1 - A1
300:A11- A11
29-B6
29-B5
29-B4
29-B3
29-B2
29-B1
J13:B4 - B1
J13:B3 - B2
J13:B2 - B3
980:3 - 3
980:4 - 4
J13:A2 - A3
J13:A1 - A4
73- 3
73- 2
73- 1
300:B11- B11
300:B10- B10
300:B9 - B9
300:B8 - B8
300:B7 - B7
300:B6 - B6
300:B5 - B5
300:B4 - B4
300:B3 - B3
300:B2 - B2
300:B1 - B1
903:6 - 1
903:5 - 2
903:4 - 3
903:3 - 4
903:2 - 5
903:1 - 6
29-B8 24V
29-B7 DRIVE
J12: 5 - 5
J12: 4 - 6
J12: 3 - 7
J12: 2 - 8
J12: 1 - 9
980:1 - 1
980:2 - 2
J13:A4 - A1
J13:A3 - A2
HV
18-10
18-11
18-12
18-13
18-14
J12: 7 - 3
J12: 6 - 4
J12: 9 - 1
J12: 8 - 2
70- 3
70- 2
70- 1
FT37
FT39
FS-112
FS-113
FS-114
SGND
PS
5V
N.C
N.C
TH2 ANG 18- 8
SGND 18- 9
TH1 ANG 18- 6
SGND 18- 7
J09-7
J09-8
J09-9
J17-12
J25-5
FT36
TH1
29-B10 DRIVE
29-B9 24V
29-B13 5V
29-B12 PS
29-B11 SGND
J17-7
70- 5
70- 4
FT38
A
920: 2 - 1
920: 1 - 2
J06:3 - 1
J06:2 - 2
J06:1 - 3
954-1
-2
-3
29-B16 5V
29-B15 TLD ANG
29-B14 SGND
27- 5
27- 6
27- 7
27- 8
J25-1
J09-5
J09-6
70- 9
70- 8
70- 7
70- 6
FT30
4
926:2 - 1
1-2
J05:3 - 1
J05:2 - 2
J05:1 - 3
CB 1/2
N.C
SGND
HUM1 ANG
5V
PGND 27- 3
24V 27- 4
B.CONT 27- 1
B.SIG 27- 2
J17-11
18- 2 24V
18- 1 DRIVE
18- 5 PGND
18- 4 LOCK
18- 3 DRIVE
J09-1
J09-2
J09-3
J09-4
J16-11
LT-203
984-1
-2
-3
J28: 3 - 1
J28: 2 - 2
J28: 1 - 3
J25-4
72- 1
FT33
3
929:2 - 1
929:1 - 2
911: 3 - 1
911: 2 - 2
911: 1 - 3
H
986-1
986-2
24V -11
J17-8
P.G -8
24V J25-2
11
PGND
12
LD
CW/CCW-5
CLK -4
for
DCPS
41-11 5V
41-10 SGND
41-9 CONT
41-8 CLOCK
41-7 N.C
41-6 LOCK
41-5 N.C
41-4 PGND
41-3 PGND
41-2 24V
41-1 24V
F
-1
FT32
CHARGER
5V
FT31
to BIAS
100
S.G -2
J16-20
99
CONT -3
72- 5
98
101
24V -11
23-B8 PGND
23-B9 PGND
23-B10 24V
23-B11 24V
97
24V -10
2
P.G -9
95
96
P.G -8
FT40
C
94
-6
93
LD
FT35
92
CW/CCW-5
D
GRID
90
CLK -4
FT34
89
CONT -3
5V
SGND
CONT
CLOCK
F/R
SGND
23-B1
23-B2
23-B3
23-B4
23-B5
23-B6
71-12
71-11
71-10
71- 9
71- 8
71- 7
71- 6
71- 5
71- 4
71- 3
71- 2
71- 1
110-19
110-18
110-17
110-16
110-15
110-14
110-13
110-12
110-11
110-10
110- 9
110- 8
110- 7
110- 6
110- 5
110- 4
110- 3
110- 2
110- 1
88
91
-1
J10:12 - 1
J10:11 - 2
J10:10 - 3
J10: 9 - 4
J10: 8 - 5
J10: 7 - 6
J10: 6 - 7
J10: 5 - 8
J10: 4 - 9
J10: 3 - 10
J10: 2 - 11
J10: 1 - 12
50 51 52 53
87
5V
S.FB 15-A1
SDC.SIG 15-A2
SAC.SIG 15-A3
S.CONT 15-A4
T.FB 15-A5
T.SIG 15-A6
T.CONT 15-A7
G.CONT 15-A8
C.FB 15-A9
GRID.SIG 15-A10
CHG.SIG 15-A11
C.CONT 15-A12
E
P.G -9
B
24V -10
30 31
86
24V -11
EUROPE only
for FCB
PGND
PGND
24V
24V
for SW3
85
23-A4
23-A3
23-A2
23-A1
40- 1
40- 2
40- 3
40- 4
83
P.G -8
SGND
SGND
L3 CONT
5V
84
H/L -7
LD
CW/CCW-5
CLK -4
81
23-A11 5V
23-A10 SGND
23-A9 CONT
23-A8 CLOCK
23-A7 SGND
23-A6 LOCK
80
-1
79
82
5V
G
78
S.G -2
74
77
RL CONT 25-A11
L2 CONT 25-A10
L3 CONT 25-A9
24V EM 25-A8
FM1 EM 25-A7
73
PGND 20- 3
PGND 20- 4
72
76
CONT -3
21- 6
21- 5
21- 4
21- 3
21- 2
21- 1
71
75
24V 20- 1
24V 20- 2
24V
PGND
5V
SGND
SGND
12V
1
-2
-3
37-1 VEN.TXD
-2 PGND
-3 VEN.CTS
-4 VEN.RXD
-5 N.C
-6 VEN.RTS
-7 PGND
-8 5V
36-1 /M1
-2 /PF
-3 /PS0
-4 /PS1
-5 /PS2
-6 /PS3
-7 /SIDE
-8 /CPF0
-9 /CPF1
-10 PGND
7.3
982-1
35-1
35-2
35-3
35-4
35-5
APPENDIX
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/4)
8
9
Symbol
for ENGINE
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
5V
SGND
for DCPS
DRUM CARTRIGE
M3
FM5
FM4
Internal cooling
fan/1
9
132
133
134
135
136
137
A
B
DF-318
to GUIDE
PLATE
C
Separation Transfer
D
M5
PCL
E
F
G
H
I
I
PS 9
Tray set
sensor/U
PS 12
Tray set
sensor/L
1
PS 1
Registration
sensor
PS 8
PS 7
No paper Upper limit
sensor
sensor
PS21
Timing
sensor/U
2
SD2
PS22
1st paper 1st paper
feed
Timing feed
sensor/L solenoid/L solenoid/U
3
PS20
VR1
PS13
PS 4
BYPASS TRAY
4
SD1
M6
ADU motor
TSL
Transfer
synchronization
lamp
5
PS 10
Upper limit
sensor/L
PFDB/U
PS 11
No paper
sensor/U
PFDB/L
6
IT door
sensor
(CE1)
(CE1)
PS25
PS23
PS24
IT exit
sensor/U
IT exit
sensor/L
IT-101
Loop clutch
Gate solenoid
7
8
Appendix-4
SGND
H/L
EM
DRIVE
70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
39-4
39-3
39-2
39-1
For Finisher
8
(CE1)
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
910: 4 - 1
910: 3 - 2
910: 2 - 3
910: 1 - 4
CN985A
DB_RTS
SGND
DB_RXD
DB_CTS
SGND
DB_TXD
DB_EXIT
LCT_EXIT
DB_RST
7
19- 1
19- 2
19- 3
19- 4
19- 5
19- 6
19- 7
19- 8
19- 9
KRDS I/F
131
J61 : 1 - 9
J61 : 2 - 8
J61 : 3 - 7
J61 : 4 - 6
J61 : 5 - 5
J61 : 6 - 4
J61 : 7 - 3
J61 : 8 - 2
J61 : 9 - 1
CN985B
38- 6 24V
38- 7 DRIVE
SCB 3/3
38-A 1 XFAN_LK
-A 2 SGND
-A 3 NC
-A 4 SGND
-A 5 /RST
-A 6 SGND
-A 7 SGND
-A 8 SGND
-A 9 /GNT2
-A10 NC
-A11 PCI_AD30
-A12 PCI_AD28
-A13 SGND
-A14 26/ISEL6
-A15 PCI_AD24
-A16 PCI_AD23
-A17 PCI_AD21
-A18 SGND
-A19 PCI_AD19
-A20 PCI_AD17
-A21 PCI_C_BE2
-A22 PCI_IRDY
-A23 SGND
-A24 XPCI_DEVSEL
-A25 PAR
-A26 PCI_AD15
-A27 SGND
-A28 PCI_AD13
-A29 PCI_AD11
-A30 PCI_AD9
-A31 PCI_AD7
-A32 SGND
-A33 PCI_AD6
-A34 PCI_AD4
-A35 PCI_AD2
-A36 PCI_AD0
-A37 SGND
-A38 SGND
-A39 5V
-A40 5V
-A41 5V
-A42 5V
-A43 5V
-A44 SGND
-A45 -12V
-A46 SGND
-A47 12V
-A48 SGND
-A49 SGND
-A50 12V
38-B 1 XFAN
-B 2 FANHI
-B 3 N.C
-B 4 SGND
-B 5 SGND
-B 6 SGND
-B 7 BCLOCK3
-B 8 SGND
-B 9 XPCI_REQ0
-B10 N.C
-B11 PCI_AD31
-B12 PCI_AD29
-B13 SGND
-B14 PCI_AD27
-B15 PCI_AD25
-B16 PCI_C_BE3
-B17 PCI_AD22
-B18 SGND
-B19 PCI_AD20
-B20 PCI_AD18
-B21 PCI_AD16
-B22 XPCI_FRAME
-B23 SGND
-B24 XPCI_TRDY
-B25 XPCI_STOP
-B26 PCI_C_BE1
-B27 SGND
-B28 PCI_AD14
-B29 PCI_AD12
-B30 PCI_AD10
-B31 PCI_AD8
-B32 SGND
-B33 PCI_C_BE0
-B34 PCI_AD5
-B35 PCI_AD3
-B36 PCI_AD1
-B37 SGND
-B38 SGND
-B39 5V
-B40 5V
-B41 5V
-B42 5V
-B43 5V
-B44 SGND
-B45 -12V
-B46 SGND
-B47 12V
-B48 SGND
-B49 SGND
-B50 12V
J42:8 - 8
J42:9 - 9
44-B1
44-B2
44-B3
44-B4
44-B5
44-B6
44-B7
44-B8
44-B9
44-B10
44-B11
DDF VV 28-B11
N.C 28-B10
FIX OK 28-B9
SGND 28-B8
APS TIM 28-B7
PS301 28-B6
EG INT 28-B5
EG RST 28-B4
SGND 28-B3
5V SYS 28-B2
SGND 28-B1
SCDB
38- 1 PS
38- 2 SGND
38- 3 5V
38- 4 PS
38- 5 SGND
38- 8 SGND
38- 9 IT.SET
USB
INDEX
J42:2 - 2
J42:3 - 3
J42:4 - 4
J42:5 - 5
J42:6 - 6
J42:10- 10
J42:11- 11
24-A2 DRIVE
24-A1 24V
LAN
6
939: 1 - 2
939: 2 - 1
973-1
-2
-3
MC2
972-1
-2
-3
921: 2 - 1
921: 1 - 2
44-A1
44-A2
44-A3
44-A4
44-A5
44-A6
44-A7
44-A8
44-A9
44-A10
44-A11
CB 2/2
SGND 28-A11
EG RXD 28-A10
EG CTS 28-A9
EG TXD 28-A8
EG TRS 28-A7
SGND 28-A6
EE VV 28-A5
S VV 28-A4
P VV 28-A3
TONYY 28-A2
B VV 28-A1
L1
SGND
SIZE.LOW.A
SIZE.LOW.B
SIZE.LOW.C
SIZE.LOW.D
41-1 TX+
41-2 TX41-3 RX+
41-4 N.C
41-5 N.C
41-6 RX41-7 N.C
41-8 N.C
41-9 FG
41-10 FG
41-11 VDD1
41-11 LED1
41-11 VDD2
41-11 LED2
24-A7
24-A6
24-A5
24-A4
24-A3
VDD
-Data
+Data
SGND
J03: 5 - 7
J03: 4 - 8
J03: 3 - 9
J03: 2 - 10
J03: 1 - 11
39- 1 DCD
- 2 RXD
- 3 TXD
- 4 DTR
- 5 GND
- 6 DSR
- 7 RTS
- 8 CTS
- 9 RI
91-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
24-A10 5V
24-A9 PS
24-A8 SGND
Key counter
KC
(Option)
J03: 8 - 4
J03: 7 - 5
J03: 6 - 6
24-A13 5V
24-A12 PS
24-A11 SGND
45-1
45-2
45-3
45-4
-2
-3
J03:11 - 1
J03:10 - 2
J03: 9 - 3
1
4
960-1
-2
-3
for KC
959-1
24-A15 SGND
24-A15 DRIVE
APS sensor APS timing Scanner home
sensor
position sensor
(J03:CT)
5
974-1
-2
-3
By-pass
By-pass
By-pass ADU sensor
By-pass
paper feed tray paper tray paper no paper
size sensor size VR
sensor
solenoid
7
9
J02: 2 - 6
J02: 1 - 7
J20: 4 - 7
J20: 2 - 9
24-A20 SGND
24-A19 SIZE.UP.A
24-A18 SIZE.UP.B
24-A17 SIZE.UP.C
24-A16 SIZE.UP.D
4
933:2 - 1
1-2
J02: 7 - 1
J02: 6 - 2
J02: 5 - 3
J02: 4 - 4
J02: 3 - 5
J20:10 - 1
J20: 7 - 4
90-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
N.C 15-B12
SGND 15-B11
SGND 15-B10
FS CTS 15-B9
SGND 15-B8
N.C 15-B7
FS RXD 15-B6
SGND 15-B5
FS RTS 15-B4
N.C 15-B3
SGND 15-B2
FS TXD 15-B1
60- 1
60- 2
60- 3
60- 4
60- 5
24V
24V
B
B
A
A
INV1
985B-1
985B-2
24V
PGND
N.C
5V
SGND
24-B6
24-B5
24-B4
24-B3
24-B2
24-B1
-4
-2
-1
985A-3
129
24-B9 5V
24-B8 PS
24-B7 SGND
1
3
4
2
128
J30:3 - 1
J30:2 - 2
J30:1 - 3
Exposure lamp
J26: 4 J26: 2 J26: 1 J26: 3 -
3
905: 6 - 1
905: 5 - 2
905: 4 - 3
905: 3 - 4
905: 2 - 5
905: 1 - 6
953-1
-2
-3
35- 1
35- 2
35- 3
35- 4
35- 5
127
130
24-B12 5V
24-B11 PS
24-B10 SGND
24V
SIG
SGND
DRIVE
SGND
PS14
51-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
126
J04: 3 - 9
J04: 2 - 10
J04: 1 - 11
PS15
24-B15 SGND
24-B14 VR
24-B13 5V
PS17
J04: 6 - 6
J04: 5 - 7
J04: 4 - 8
LDB
J08: 3 - 4
J08: 2 - 5
J08: 1 - 6
962-1
-2
-3
SD3
98 -3
-2
-1
124
(CN51
123
64-7 SGND
64-8 PS
64-9 5V
122
125
24-B18 5V
24-B17 PS
24-B16 SGND
963-3
-2
-1
Scanner motor
119
121
J04: 9 - 3
J04: 8 - 4
J04: 7 - 5
M2
118
120
24-B20 24V
24-B19 DRIVE
J50: B1 - B12
J50: B2 - B11
J50: B3 - B10
J50: B4 - B9
J50: B5 - B8
J50: B6 - B7
J50: B7 - B6
J50: B8 - B5
J50: B9 - B4
J50:B10 - B3
J50:B11 - B2
J50:B12 - B1
2
969-1 J08: 6 - 1
-2
J08: 5 - 2
-3
J08: 4 - 3
J04:11 - 1
J04:10 - 2
50-B12
-B11
-B10
- B9
- B8
- B7
- B6
- B5
- B4
- B3
- B2
- B1
117
924: 2 - 1
924: 1 - 2
L1INVB
116
64-4 SGND
64-5 PS
64-6 5V
64-1 5V
64-2 PS
64-3 SGND
63-1 24V
63-2 L1 CONT
63-3 L1 EM
63-4 PGND
RT3
964-3
-2
-1
931-4
-3
-2
-1
112
115
25-A13 24V
25-A12 DRIVE
F
111
114
966-3
-2
-1
930-1 L.V.
-3 H.V.
C
110
113
25-A15 DRIVE
25-A14 24V
96-1
96-3
107
109
922: 2 - 1
922: 1 - 2
923: 2 - 1
923: 1 - 2
97-3
97-1
J50: A1 - A12
J50: A2 - A11
J50: A3 - A10
J50: A4 - A9
J50: A5 - A8
J50: A6 - A7
J50: A7 - A6
J50: A8 - A5
J50: A9 - A4
J50:A10 - A3
J50:A11 - A2
J50:A12 - A1
106
25-A16 5V
25-A17 PS
25-A18 SGND
50-A12
-A11
-A10
- A9
- A8
- A7
- A6
- A5
- A4
- A3
- A2
- A1
105
108
J41:1 - 3
J41:2 - 2
J41:3 - 1
25-B1 5V
25-B2 PS
25-B3 SGND
62-1 U
-2 V
-3 W
104
971-1
-2
-3
J40:1 - 3
J40:2 - 2
J40:3 - 1
25-B6 5V
25-B5 PS
25-B4 SGND
E
970-1
-2
-3
J01: 3 - 7
J01: 2 - 8
J01: 1 - 9
25-B9 5V
25-B8 PS
25-B7 SGND
25-B12 5V
25-B11 PS
25-B10 SGND
2
3
5
6
8
10
956-1
-2
-3
J01: 6 - 4
J01: 5 - 5
J01: 4 - 6
J01:9 - 1
J01:8 - 2
J01:7 - 3
20: 9 - 2
20: 8 - 3
20: 6 - 5
20: 5 - 6
20: 3 - 8
20: 1 - 10
957-1
-2
-3
J33:3 - 1
J33:2 - 2
J33:1 - 3
61- 1
61- 2
61- 3
61- 4
61- 5
61- 6
61- 7
61- 8
61- 9
61-10
61-11
61-12
61-13
61-14
61-15
200: 6 - 6
200: 5 - 5
200: 4 - 4
200: 3 - 3
200: 2 - 2
200: 1 - 1
950-1
-2
-3
G
5V 16-15
PS14 16-14
PS15 16-13
PS17 16-12
5V 16-11
SGND 16-10
L1 EM 16- 9
L1 CONT 16- 8
M2 V1 16- 7
M2 V0 16- 6
M2 DRIVE 16- 5
M2 EM2 16- 4
M2 EM1 16- 3
SGND 16- 2
M2 CLOCK 16- 1
D
25-B15 5V
25-B14 PS
25-B13 SGND
103
CN38 Board to Board Connector(100pin)
H
RT3
J32:3 - 1
J32:2 - 2
J32:1 - 3
B
132
133
134
135
136
137
961-1
-2
-3
1
for DCPS
25-B18 5V
25-B17 PS
25-B16 SGND
A
J31:3 - 1
J31:2 - 2
J31:1 - 3
7.4
for DCPS
958-1
-2
-3
APPENDIX
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/4)
9
Symbol
A
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
B
C
IP-432
D
E
F
G
H
SD8
FM7
for DB UNIT
Internal cooling fan/2
9
I
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
COPY VENDER
COPY VENDER
Appendix-3 1-I
M2
Scanner motor
Appendix-4 2-E
PS24
IT exit sensor /L
DB-211
DB-211
Appendix-1 2-G
M3
Developing motor
Appendix-3 8-I
PS25
IT door sensor
Appendix-4 7-I
Appendix-4 7-I
DB-411
DB-411
Appendix-1 2-G
M4
Toner supply motor /1
Appendix-3 5-I
TH1
Fixing temperature sensor /1
Appendix-3 5-E
DIMM
DIMM
Appendix-2 3-F
M5
Polygon motor
Appendix-3 7-D
TH2
Fixing temperature sensor /2
Appendix-3 5-E
FK-102/FL-102
FK-102/FL-102
Appendix-2 4-A
M6
ADU motor
Appendix-4 4-I
HUM1
Humidity sensor
Appendix-3 4-D
FS-112
FS-112
Appendix-3 4-A
M7
Tray motor /U
Appendix-3 8-I
TDS
Toner density sensor
Appendix-3 5-E
FS-113
FS-113
Appendix-3 4-A
M8
Tray motor /L
Appendix-3 7-I
TLD
Toner level sensor
Appendix-3 5-I
HD-103 Type A
HD-105
Appendix-2 2-F
M9
Paper feed motor
Appendix-3 3-I
TS
Thermostat
Appendix-1 8-A
IP-432
IP-432
Appendix-4 7-A
M10
Toner supply motor /2
Appendix-3 6-I
SW1
Main power switch
Appendix-1 4-C
IT-101
IT-101
Appendix-4 6-H
M11
Fixing motor
Appendix-3 3-I
SW2
Sub power switch
Appendix-1 6-I
KC
Key counter
Appendix-4 3-E
FM1
DCPS cooling fan
Appendix-1 4-F
SW3
Interlock switch
Appendix-1 5-E
LT-203
LT-203
Appendix-3 2-A
FM2
Fixing cooling fan
Appendix-3 4-I
VR1
By-pass tray paper size VR
Appendix-4 3-I
TC
Total counter
Appendix-3 5-I
FM3
Internal dehumidifying fan /1
Appendix-3 7-I
PTC
PTC heater
Appendix-1 6-E
DF-318
DF-318
Appendix-3 7-A
FM4
Internal cooling fan /1
Appendix-3 9-I
BATTERY
Battery
Appendix-2 2-G
ADB
A/D conversion board
Appendix-2 1-C
FM5
Developing suction fan
Appendix-3 9-I
CB
Main control board
Appendix-3 1-F
FM6
Internal dehumidifying fan /2
Appendix-3 7-I
FCB
Fixing control board
Appendix-1 6-B
FM7
Internal cooling fan /2
Appendix-4 9-I
INDEX
Index sensor board
Appendix-4 3-B
MC1
Registration clutch
Appendix-3 6-I
L1INVB
Exposure lamp power supply board
Appendix-4 2-E
MC2
Loop clutch
Appendix-4 6-I
LCDB
Display board
Appendix-1 4-F
SD1
1st paper feed solenoid /U
Appendix-4 3-I
LDB
LD drive board
Appendix-4 2-B
SD2
1st paper feed solenoid /L
Appendix-4 2-I
OB
Operation board
Appendix-1 5-F
SD3
By-pass paper feed solenoid
Appendix-4 3-I
PAKB
Panel key board
Appendix-1 4-F
SD4
Cleaning web solenoid
Appendix-3 6-I
PFDB/L
Paper feed detection board /L
Appendix-4 5-I
SD5
ADU gate solenoid
Appendix-3 5-I
PFDB/U
Paper feed detection board /U
Appendix-4 4-I
SD7
Separation claw solenoid
Appendix-3 6-E
PRMB
Parameter memory board
Appendix-2 5-F
SD8
Gate solenoid
Appendix-4 7-I
PSW2B
Power SW2 board
Appendix-1 6-I
SD9
Toner solenoid
Appendix-3 4-I
SCB
System control board
Appendix-1 8-E
PS1
Registration sensor
Appendix-4 1-I
SCDB
Scanner drive board
Appendix-4 1-B
PS2
Fixing exit sensor
Appendix-3 5-E
TCSB
Toner control sensor board
Appendix-3 6-D
PS4
ADU sensor
Appendix-4 4-I
DCPS
DC power supply unit
Appendix-1 1-A
PS5
Toner bottle sensor
Appendix-3 5-I
HV
High voltage unit
Appendix-3 2-E
PS7
Upper limit sensor /U
Appendix-4 2-I
INV1
Exposure lamp inverter
Appendix-4 2-D
PS8
No paper sensor /U
Appendix-4 1-I
INV2
Display inverter
Appendix-1 4-H
PS9
Tray set sensor /U
Appendix-4 1-I
CBR1
Circuit breaker /1
Appendix-1 2-A
PS10
Upper limit sensor /L
Appendix-4 5-I
CBR2
Circuit breaker /2
Appendix-1 2-B
PS11
No paper sensor /L
Appendix-4 5-I
NF
Noise filter
Appendix-1 3-A
PS12
Tray set sensor /L
Appendix-4 1-I
L1
Exposure lamp
Appendix-4 2-F
PS13
By-pass no paper sensor
Appendix-4 4-I
L2
Fixing heater lamp /1
Appendix-1 8-B
PS14
Scanner home position sensor
Appendix-4 3-E
L3
Fixing heater lamp /2
Appendix-1 8-B
PS15
APS timing sensor
Appendix-4 3-E
PCL
Pre-charging lamp
Appendix-3 7-D
PS17
APS sensor
Appendix-4 3-E
TSL
Transfer synchronization lamp
Appendix-4 5-I
PS20
By-pass tray paper size sensor
Appendix-4 3-I
LCD
LCD
Appendix-1 4-F
PS21
Timing sensor /U
Appendix-4 2-I
BL
Back light
Appendix-1 4-H
PS22
Timing sensor /L
Appendix-4 2-I
M1
Main motor
Appendix-3 2-I
PS23
IT exit sensor /U
Appendix-4 7-I
Appendix-5
APPENDIX
7.5
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN9-1
JAPAN AC100V 50/60Hz
J13-1
Noise filter
FT7
BT3
BT1
RT4
Ø4
FT8
MAIN RL
RT3
Ø4
Fixing heater
lamp/1
PLUG
FT1
CR001
FT2
Circuit breaker/2
CN9-3
CR002
FT6
CN11-2
AC(N)
N.C
5V EM
24V EM
NMI
12V
SGND
6-14 N.C
6-18 N.C
6-4 24V
6-6 24V
6-10 PGND
6-12 PGND
6-16 5V
6-20 SGND
11
12
8-1 24V
8-3 PGND
25
26
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
5V
5V
N.C
SGND
SGND
for FNS
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
J24: 2 - 2
BT1
J24: 1 - 1
EUROPE Only
2-6
2-5
2-4
2-3
2-2
2-1
C
N.C 7-9
5V 7-11
SGND 7-13
SGND 7-15
12V 7-17
SGND 7-21
N.C 7-23
SGND 7-24
12V 7-19
6-1 24V
6-3 24V
6-5 24V
6-7 PGND
6-9 PGND
6-11 PGND
6-13 5V
6-15 5V
6-17 SGND
6-19 SGND
D
for DCPS
SW3
26 25 24 23
24V 5-1
J23-1
J24-1A
J24-1B
J23-3
J23-2
J24-2A
J24-2B
J23-4
24V 5-2
SWD24V
30
SWD24V
31
Interlock switch
OPTIONAL
PTC heater
PTC
24V 8-2
10-1 DRIVE
10-2 EM
10-3 PGND
for
BIAS
2
3
5
6
8
10
for OPTION
23
24
BT2
FCB
DCPS
RL CONT
L2 CONT
L3 CONT
24V EM
FM1 EM
SGND
SGND
L3 CONT
5V
DC PSY
24V
5V
+12V
-12V
CN11-3
7-1 24V
7-3 PGND
7-5 24V
7-6 24V
7-7 PGND
7-8 PGND
7-10 5V
7-14 SGND
7-25 RL PWR
7-26 RL PGND
E
CN11-1
BT8
for
DF320
FT10
SW1
BT7
BT6
D
FT9
AC(H)
5-3 PGND
5-4 PGND
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
Fixing heater
lamp/2
J21-03
CN99-4
CN99-3
CN99-2
CN99-1
50
51
52
53
Main power switch
935-1
935-2
- 5
- 6
J60: 1 - 1
J60: 2 - 2
J60: 3 - 3
J60: 4 - 4
J60: 7 - 7
J60: 8 - 8
J60: 9 - 9
J60:10 - 10
PAKB
FM1
80-A14
80-A13
80-A12
80-A11
80-A10
80- A9
80- A8
80- A7
80- A6
80- A5
80- A4
80- A3
80- A2
80- A1
83- 1 X2
- 2 Y2
- 3 X1
- 4 Y1
DCPS cooling fan
86-14 VLCD
-13 VEE
-12 D3
-11 D2
-10 D1
- 9 D0
- 8 VEE(24V)
- 7 VSS(GND)
- 6 VDD(5V)
- 5 XSCL
- 4 LP
- 3 DIN
- 2 N.C
- 1 DISPOFF
BL
89-1 FL HOT
-4 FL GND
I
71
72
73
74
75
INV2
76
77
1
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
2
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
3
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
OB
5
80-B14
80-B13
80-B12
80-B11
80-B10
80- B9
80- B8
80- B7
80- B6
80- B5
80- B4
80- B3
80- B2
80- B1
J38-A1 -A14
J38-A2 -A13
J38-A3 -A12
J38-A4 -A11
J38-A5 -A10
J38-A6 -A9
J38-A7 -A8
J38-A8 -A7
J38-A9 -A6
J38-A10 -A5
J38-A11 -A4
J38-A12 -A3
J38-A13 -A2
J38-A14 -A1
J38-B1 -B14
J38-B2 -B13
J38-B3 -B12
J38-B4 -B11
J38-B5 -B10
J38-B6 -B9
J38-B7 -B8
J38-B8 -B7
J38-B9 -B6
J38-B10 -B5
J38-B11 -B4
J38-B12 -B3
J38-B13 -B2
J38-B14 -B1
F
52-A1 UD3
52-A2 SGND
52-A3 UD1
52-A4 XSCL
52-A5 SGND
52-A6 YD
52-A7 OPTXD
52-A8 SGND
52-A9 OPRTS
52-A10 OPRXD
52-A11 SGND
52-A12 OPCTS
52-A13 DF INT
52-A14 APS INT
G
SCB 1/3
52-B1 UD2
52-B2 SGND
52-B3 UD0
52-B4 LP
52-B5 SGND
52-B6 LCDENB
52-B7 POWER DOWN
52-B8 SGND
52-B9 OPINT
52-B10 MONIT
52-B11 5V
52-B12 5V
52-B13 SYS STOP
52-B14 MODE
H
I
88- 3
-2
-1
105
4
84-1 SGND
84-2 MONIT
LCDB
for CB
84-6 VR L
84-7 VR SIG
84-8 VR H
84-9 SCAN6
84-10 RTN3
84-11 5V
84-12 SGND
84-13 SW2
106- 1 24V
106- 2 24V
106- 3 24V
106- 4 PGND
106- 5 PGND
106- 6 M151 DRIVE
106- 7 LT CLOSE
106- 8 M150 F/R
106- 9 M150 CLOCK
106-10 M150 CONT
106-11 SD151 DRIVE
106-12 PS155
106-13 PS152
106-14 PS153
106-15 PS154
106-16 PS151
106-17 LCT TYPE
106-18 5V
106-19 SGND
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
84-3 5V
84-4 SGND
84-5 INV ON(PWM)
G
H
E
PGND 8-4
F
DB-211
DB-411
B
L3
FT27
BT5
7-2 24V
7-4 PGND
7-12 5V
7-16 SGND
7-20 SGND
7-18 12V
7-22 SGND
6-2 24V
6-8 PGND
FT28
J13-4
CN9-3
AC(N)
C
J21-03
L3 DRIVE
BT2
CBR 2
L2
FT25
BT4
FT4
FT26
J13-3
J21-02
L2 DRIVE
12V 42- 9
SGND 42- 8
N.C 42- 7
SGND 42- 6
12V 42- 5
SGND 42- 4
SGND 42- 3
5V 42- 2
5V 42- 1
INLET
CN9-2
AC DRIVE
NF
B
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
AC(H)
CBR 1
Circuit breaker/1
EUROPE 200-240V 50Hz
USA 120V 60Hz
A
SGND 500- 1
SGND 500- 2
5V 500- 3
5V 500- 4
FT5
FT3
Symbol
FT22
FT21
Thermostat
FT23
A
RL1 POWER
AC(H)
FT20
J13-2
J21-01
RL1 CNT
SGND 43- 6
12V 43- 5
NMI 43- 4
24V EM 43- 3
5V EM 43- 2
N.C 43- 1
PLUG
FT24
24V(C)
TS
6
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
7
8
Appendix-6
9
HD-103 Type A
CN501
CN47
LDB
2
3
4
DIMM
CN53
FAN
CN502
57- 1 DCD
- 2 RXD
- 3 TXD
- 4 DTR
- 5 GND
- 6 DSR
- 7 RTS
- 8 CTS
- 9 RI
INDEX
48-1
48-2
48-3
48-4
4
VDD
-Data
+Data
GND
KRDS I/F
Battery
3
400-A 1 SGND
-A 2 BCLK12
-A 3 SGND
-A 4 DRAM_D31
-A 5 DRAM_D30
-A 6 DRAM_D29
-A 7 DRAM_D28
-A 8 DRAM_D27
-A 9 DRAM_D26
-A10 DRAM_D25
-A11 DRAM_D24
-A12 DRAM_D23
-A13 DRAM_D22
-A14 DRAM_D21
-A15 DRAM_D20
-A16 DRAM_D19
-A17 DRAM_D18
-A18 DRAM_D17
-A19 DRAM_D16
-A20 5V
-A21 DRAM_D15
-A22 DRAM_D14
-A23 DRAM_D13
-A24 DRAM_D12
-A25 DRAM_D11
-A26 DRAM_D10
-A27 DRAM_D9
-A28 DRAM_D8
-A29 DRAM_D7
-A30 DRAM_D6
-A31 DRAM_D5
-A32 DRAM_D4
-A33 DRAM_D3
-A34 DRAM_D2
-A35 DRAM_D1
-A36 DRAM_D0
-A37 5V
-A38 SGND
-A39 VBAT
-A40 XWAIT
-A41 5V
-A42 5V
-A43 DR_CKE
-A44 XFAX_RST
-A45 XIRST
-A46 XICS5
-A47 XICS7
-A48 XIRD
-A49 XMWR
-A50 XIOSEL2
-A51 L_A20
-A52 L_A19
-A53 L_A18
-A54 L_A17
-A55 L_A16
-A56 L_A15
-A57 L_A14
-A58 L_A13
-A59 L_A12
-A60 L_A11
-B 1 SGND
-B 2 BCLK5
-B 3 GND
-B 4 XFAX_CIACK
-B 5 XFAX_COACK
-B 6 XFAX_DIACK
-B 7 XFAX_DOACK
-B 8 XAHA1_INT
-B 9 XEXIN_ACK
-B10 XEXOUT_ACK
-B11 -12V
-B12 EXOUT_D7
-B13 EXOUT_D6
-B14 EXOUT_D5
-B15 EXOUT_D4
-B16 EXOUT_D3
-B17 EXOUT_D2
-B18 EXOUT_D1
-B19 EXOUT_D0
-B20 5V
-B21 EXIN_D0
-B22 EXIN_D1
-B23 EXIN_D2
-B24 EXIN_D3
-B25 EXIN_D4
-B26 EXIN_D5
-B27 EXIN_D6
-B28 EXIN_D7
-B29 XFAX_DRIVE
-B30 XEXOUT_REQ
-B31 XEXIN_REQ
-B32 XICS6
-B33 XFAX_DOREQ
-B34 XFAX_DIREQ
-B35 XFAX_COREQ
-B36 XFAX_CIREQ
-B37 5V
-B38 SGND
-B39 MONITOR
-B40 XRC_INT
-B41 12V
-B42 PDA7
-B43 PDA6
-B44 PDA5
-B45 PDA4
-B46 PDA3
-B47 PDA2
-B48 PDA1
-B49 PDA0
-B50 L_A0
-B51 L_A1
-B52 L_A2
-B53 L_A3
-B54 L_A4
-B55 L_A5
-B56 L_A6
-B57 L_A7
-B58 L_A8
-B59 L_A9
-B60 L_A10
60- 1 SGND
- 2 TG
- 3 CLAMP
- 4 ACLAMP
- 5 BCLAMP
- 6 SGND
- 7 SGMD
- 8 +TCK
- 9 -TCK
-10 SGND
-11 SGND
-12 +RCK
-13 -RCK
-14 SGND
-15 SGND
-16 +IN CLOCK
-17 -IN CLOCK
-18 SGND
-19 SCLOCK
-20 SCLOCK
-21 *SEN
-22 SDI
-23 SDO
-24 SGND
-25 SGND
-26 -AD_D0
-27 +AD_D0
-28 SGND
-29 SGND
-30 -AD_D1
-31 +AD_D1
-32 SGND
-33 SGND
-34 -OUT_CLOCK
-35 +OUT_CLOCK
-36 SGND
-37 SGND
-38 ADRST
-39 APR
-40 SGND
-41 5V
-42 5V
-43 5V
-44 5V
-45 SGND
-46 12V
-47 12V
-48 12V
-49 12V
-50 SGND
A
40- 1 STROBE
- 2 DATA0
- 3 DATA1
- 4 DATA2
- 5 DATA3
- 6 DATA4
- 7 DATA5
- 8 DATA6
- 9 DATA7
-10 ACK
-11 BUSY
-12 PE
-13 SLCT
-14 AUTOFD
-15 N.C
-16 SGND
-17 SGND
-18 N.C
-19 SGND
-20 SGND
-19 SGND
-22 SGND
-23 SGND
-24 SGND
-25 SGND
-26 SGND
-27 SGND
-28 SGND
-29 SGND
-30 HLOGIC
-31 INT
-32 FAULT
-33 SGND
-34 N.C
-35 N.C
-36 SELECTIN
5V
SGND
/INDEX
SGND
/INDPR
431- 5
431- 4
431- 3
431- 2
431- 1
46- 1
46- 2
46- 3
46- 4
46- 5
46- 6
46- 7
46- 8
46- 9
46-10
46-11
46-12
46-13
46-14
46-15
46-16
46-17
46-18
46-19
46-20
46-21
46-22
46-23
46-24
46-25
46-26
46-27
46-28
46-29
46-30
46-31
46-32
46-33
46-34
46-35
46-36
46-37
46-38
46-39
46-40
46-41
46-42
46-43
46-44
46-45
46-46
46-47
46-48
46-49
46-50
2
5
C
5
6
D
PRMB
CN58,59
E
SCB 2/3
F
56-A 1 XFAN_LK
-A 2 SGND
-A 3 N.C
-A 4 SGND
-A 5 /RST
-A 6 SGND
-A 7 SGND
-A 8 SGND
-A 9 /GNT2
-A10 N.C
-A11 PCI_AD30
-A12 PCI_AD28
-A13 SGND
-A14 26/ISEL6
-A15 PCI_AD24
-A16 PCI_AD23
-A17 PCI_AD21
-A18 SGND
-A19 PCI_AD19
-A20 PCI_AD17
-A21 PCI_C_BE2
-A22 PCI_IRDY
-A23 SGND
-A24 XPCI_DEVSEL
-A25 PAR
-A26 PCI_AD15
-A27 SGND
-A28 PCI_AD13
-A29 PCI_AD11
-A30 PCI_AD9
-A31 PCI_AD7
-A32 SGND
-A33 PCI_AD6
-A34 PCI_AD4
-A35 PCI_AD2
-A36 PCI_AD0
-A37 SGND
-A38 SGND
-A39 5V
-A40 5V
-A41 5V
-A42 5V
-A43 5V
-A44 SGND
-A45 -12V
-A46 SGND
-A47 12V
-A48 SGND
-A49 SGND
-A50 12V
56-B 1 XFAN
-B 2 FANHI
-B 3 N.C
-B 4 SGND
-B 5 SGND
-B 6 SGND
-B 7 BCLK3
-B 8 SGND
-B 9 XPCI_REQ0
-B10 N.C
-B11 PCI_AD31
-B12 PCI_AD29
-B13 SGND
-B14 PCI_AD27
-B15 PCI_AD25
-B16 PCI_C_BE3
-B17 PCI_AD22
-B18 SGND
-B19 PCI_AD20
-B20 PCI_AD18
-B21 PCI_AD16
-B22 XPCI_FRAME
-B23 SGND
-B24 XPCI_TRDY
-B25 XPCI_STOP
-B26 PCI_C_BE1
-B27 SGND
-B28 PCI_AD14
-B29 PCI_AD12
-B30 PCI_AD10
-B31 PCI_AD8
-B32 SGND
-B33 PCI_C_BE0
-B34 PCI_AD5
-B35 PCI_AD3
-B36 PCI_AD1
-B37 SGND
-B38 SGND
-B39 5V
-B40 5V
-B41 5V
-B42 5V
-B43 5V
-B44 SGND
-B45 -12V
-B46 SGND
-B47 12V
-B48 SGND
-B49 SGND
-B50 12V
6
7
Appendix-7
CN56 Board to Board Connector(100pin)
1
LD 5V
SGND
/S/H
/ENB
VIDEO+
VIDEO/ALM
/RESET
DACLK
DI
LOAD
LPR 5V
G
432-12
432-11
432-10
432- 9
432- 8
432- 7
432- 6
432- 5
432- 4
432- 3
432- 2
432- 1
B
J52: 5 - 1
J52: 4 - 2
J52: 3 - 3
J52: 2 - 4
J52: 1 - 5
J53: 1 - 12
J53: 2 - 11
J53: 3 - 10
J53: 4 - 9
J53: 5 - 8
J53: 6 - 7
J53: 7 - 6
J53: 8 - 5
J53: 9 - 4
J53:10 - 3
J53:11 - 2
J53:12 - 1
1
USB
H
J50: 1 - 12
J50: 2 - 11
J50: 3 - 10
J50: 4 - 9
J50: 5 - 8
J50: 6 - 7
J50: 7 - 6
J50: 8 - 5
J50: 9 - 4
J50:10 - 3
J50:11 - 2
J50:12 - 1
7.6
51-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
50-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
APPENDIX
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/4)
7
8
FK-103/FL-103
8
9
Symbol
ADB
A
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
B
CN55 Board to Board Connector
C
D
E
F
IP-424
G
H
I
I
9
H
1
2
M1
Main motor
P.G -9
M9
Paper feed motor
3
5V
-1
H/L -7
COPY VENDER
4
M11
M4
PS 5
TC
Fixing motor
Toner level Toner bottle Total counter
sensor
sensor
5
Toner supply
motor/1
I
6
M10
SD4
Cleaning
Toner supply
web
motor/2
Registration solenoid
clutch
Internal
dehumidifying
fan/2
Internal
dehumidifying
fan/1
FM3
FM2
Toner
solenoid
Fixing
cooling
fan
7235 only
7
8
Appendix-8
J42:8 - 8
J42:9 - 9
38- 6 24V
38- 7 DRIVE
PS17
PS15
PS14
-1
-2
966-3
-1
-2
964-3
-1
-2
963-3
97-3
97-1
APS sensor
PS25
PS23
PS24
IT door
sensor
IT exit
sensor/U
IT exit
sensor/L
5V 16-3
PS 16-2
SGND 16-1
5V 16-6
PS 16-5
SGND 16-4
SGND 16-9
PS 16-8
5V 16-7
L1INVB
939: 1 - 2
939: 2 - 1
973-1
-2
-3
FM6
38- 1 PS
38- 2 SGND
96-3
96-1
Scanner motor
J42:2 - 2
J42:3 - 3
-3 H.V.
930-1 L.V.
PCL
972-1
-2
-3
INV1
-1
-2
-3
931-4
DRUM CARTRIGE
PGND 33-4
L1 EM 33-3
L1 CONT 33-2
24V 33-1
Speaker
38- 3 5V
38- 4 PS
38- 5 SGND
114
J42:4 - 4
J42:5 - 5
J42:6 - 6
7
974-1
-2
-3
PSW2B
/SW2
38- 8 SGND
38- 9 IT.SET
SD7
113
J42:10- 10
J42:11- 11
TCSB
112
W 32-3
V 32-2
U 32-1
110
111
18-2 24V
18-1 DRIVE
932:2 - 1
932:1 - 2
107
18-5 PGND
18-4 LOCK
18-3 DRIVE
J16-14
J16-18
109
J15: 2 - 12
J15: 1 - 13
6
24V 26-B16
DRIVE 26-B17
N.C 26-B18
928:2 - 1
928:1 - 2
108
29-A3 PGND
29-A2 EM
29-A1 DRIVE
J16-15
J16-16
Toner control
sensor board
J15: 4 - 10
J15: 3 - 11
105
106
DRIVE 26-B14
24V 26-B15
for ENGINE
FS SOUT
SGND
N.C
FS RTS
SGND
FS SIN
N.C
SGND
FS CTS
SGND
SGND
for DCPS
24V
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
PGND
5V
5V
SGND
SGND
85 - 8
85 - 7
85 - 6
85 - 5
85 - 4
85 - 3
85 - 2
85 - 1
104
927:2 - 1
927:1 - 2
J28: 3 - 1
J28: 2 - 2
J28: 1 - 3
911: 3 - 1
911: 2 - 2
911: 1 - 3
SD9
J38: 3 - 4
J38: 2 - 5
J38: 1 - 6
MC1
912: 3 - 1
912: 2 - 2
912: 1 - 3
92-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
TDS
29-A6 PGND
29-A5 EM
29-A4 DRIVE
J11: 7 - 1
J11: 6 - 2
J11: 5 - 3
J11: 4 - 4
J11: 3 - 5
J11: 2 - 6
J11: 1 - 7
Toner density sensor
J16-4
J16-5
J16-6
J16-7
J16-8
J16-12
J16-14
J16-2
J16-3
DEV UNIT
J38: 6 - 1
J38: 5 - 2
J38: 4 - 3
J15:13 - 1
J15:12 - 2
J15:11 - 3
J15:10 - 4
J15: 9 - 5
J15: 8 - 6
J15: 7 - 7
J15: 6 - 8
J15: 5 - 9
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
N.C 26-B5
N.C 26-B6
5V 26-B7
DRUM.TH 26-B8
12V 26-B9
TNRIF 26-B10
TNOUT1 26-B11
TNOUT2 26-B12
SGND 26-B13
300:A10- A10
300:A9 - A9
300:A8 - A8
300:A7 - A7
300:A6 - A6
300:A5 - A5
300:A4 - A4
300:A3 - A3
300:A2 - A2
300:A1 - A1
300:A11- A11
29-A8 24V
29-A7 DRIVE
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
914: 3 - 1
914: 2 - 2
914: 1 - 3
J29:2 - 1
J29:1 - 2
300:B11- B11
300:B10- B10
300:B9 - B9
300:B8 - B8
300:B7 - B7
300:B6 - B6
300:B5 - B5
300:B4 - B4
300:B3 - B3
300:B2 - B2
300:B1 - B1
925:2 - 1
925:1 - 2
PS 2
983-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
Fixing exit sensor
J17-2
J17-3
J17-9
J17-5
951-1
-2
-3
FUSING UNIT
Fixing
Fixing
temperature temperature
sensor/1
sensor/2
29-A10 DRIVE
29-A9 24V
1
2
3
4
J18: 3 - 1
J18: 2 - 2
J18: 1 - 3
Humidity sensor
J14: 6 J14: 5 J14: 4 J14: 3 J14: 2
J14: 1
J13:B4 - B1
J13:B3 - B2
J13:B2 - B3
Separation Transfer
CONT 25-A1
12V 25-A2
TDS ANG 25-A3
SGND 25-A4
N.C 25-A5
N.C 25-A6
J12: 5 - 5
J12: 4 - 6
J12: 3 - 7
J12: 2 - 8
J12: 1 - 9
TH2
SGND 18-10
PS 18-11
5V 18-12
N.C 18-13
N.C 18-14
to GUIDE
PLATE
29-A16 24V
29-A15 24V
29-A14 B
29-A13 B
29-A12 A
29-A11 A
24V
24V
B
B
A
A
FS-113
FS-114
915:6 - 1
915:5 - 2
915:4 - 3
915:3 - 4
915:2 - 5
915:1 - 6
29-B6
29-B5
29-B4
29-B3
29-B2
29-B1
5
920: 2 - 1
920: 1 - 2
TLD
980:3 - 3
980:4 - 4
980:1 - 1
980:2 - 2
TH1
J13:A2 - A3
J13:A1 - A4
J13:A4 - A1
J13:A3 - A2
73- 3
73- 2
73- 1
FT37
FT33
B
J12: 7 - 3
J12: 6 - 4
J12: 9 - 1
J12: 8 - 2
70- 3
70- 2
70- 1
FT36
FT39
FT30
FT32
LT-203
TH2 ANG 18- 8
SGND 18- 9
TH1 ANG 18- 6
SGND 18- 7
J09-7
J09-8
J09-9
J25-5
70- 5
70- 4
FT38
J16-11
FT31
4
29-B10 DRIVE
29-B9 24V
Perdita/Pongo:
Discovery:
J25-1
J17-11
N.C 27- 5
SGND 27- 6
HUM1 ANG 27- 7
5V 27- 8
J17-8
29-B13 5V
29-B12 PS
29-B11 SGND
29-B16 5V
29-B15 TLD ANG
29-B14 SGND
24V J25-2
11
PGND
12
J09-5
J09-6
70- 9
70- 8
70- 7
70- 6
HV
J06:3 - 1
J06:2 - 2
J06:1 - 3
J05:3 - 1
J05:2 - 2
J05:1 - 3
J17-12
50 51 52 53
J17-7
EUROPE only
for FCB
J09-1
J09-2
J09-3
J09-4
D
PGND 27- 3
24V 27- 4
B.CONT 27- 1
B.SIG 27- 2
J25-4
72- 1
J16-20
3
903:6 - 1
903:5 - 2
903:4 - 3
903:3 - 4
903:2 - 5
903:1 - 6
24V -11
for
DCPS
24V -10
P.G -9
P.G -8
72- 5
to BIAS
-6
102
103
LD
FT40
101
CLK -4
FT35
99
CW/CCW-5
31-11 5V
31-10 SGND
31-9 CONT
31-8 CLOCK
31-7 N.C
31-6 SGND
31-5 N.C
31-4 PGND
31-3 PGND
31-2 24V
31-1 24V
GRID
CHARGER
100
S.G -2
FT34
97
98
CONT -3
71-12
71-11
71-10
71- 9
71- 8
71- 7
71- 6
71- 5
71- 4
71- 3
71- 2
71- 1
96
24V -11
J10:12 - 1
J10:11 - 2
J10:10 - 3
J10: 9 - 4
J10: 8 - 5
J10: 7 - 6
J10: 6 - 7
J10: 5 - 8
J10: 4 - 9
J10: 3 - 10
J10: 2 - 11
J10: 1 - 12
95
24V -10
S.FB 15-A1
SDC.SIG 15-A2
SAC.SIG 15-A3
S.CONT 15-A4
T.FB 15-A5
T.SIG 15-A6
T.CONT 15-A7
G.CONT 15-A8
C.FB 15-A9
GRID.SIG 15-A10
CHG.SIG 15-A11
C.CONT 15-A12
C
23-B8 PGND
23-B9 PGND
23-B10 24V
23-B11 24V
92
94
986-1
986-2
-6
91
H/L -7
E
LD
90
93
P.G -8
110-19
110-18
110-17
110-16
110-15
110-14
110-13
110-12
110-11
110-10
110- 9
110- 8
110- 7
110- 6
110- 5
110- 4
110- 3
110- 2
110- 1
89
954-1
-2
-3
CLK -4
CONT -3
5V
SGND
CONT
CLOCK
F/R
SGND
87
88
CW/CCW-5
23-B1
23-B2
23-B3
23-B4
23-B5
23-B6
A
-1
86
5V
SGND 14- 1
SGND 14- 2
L3 CONT 14- 3
5V 14- 4
85
S.G -2
PGND
PGND
24V
24V
2
984-1
-2
-3
P.G -9
24V -10
24V -11
23-A4
23-A3
23-A2
23-A1
30 31
-6
for SW3
H/L -7
83
LD
82
P.G -8
81
84
CW/CCW-5
80
CLK -4
1
CONT -3
RL CONT 25-A11
L2 CONT 25-A10
L3 CONT 25-A9
24V EM 25-A8
FM1 EM 25-A7
79
23-A11 5V
23-A10 SGND
23-A9 CONT
23-A8 CLOCK
23-A7 SGND
23-A6 LOCK
78
S.G -2
-1
74
77
PGND 20- 3
PGND 20- 4
73
76
24V 20- 1
24V 20- 2
72
75
24V 19- 1
PGND 19- 2
PGND 19- 3
71
5V
G
24V 21- 6
PGND 21- 5
5V 21- 4
SGND 21- 3
SGND 21- 2
12V 21- 1
F
37-1 VEN.TXD
-2 PGND
-3 VEN.CTS
-4 VEN.RXD
-5 N.C
-6 VEN.RTS
-7 PGND
-8 5V
36-1 /M1
-2 /PF
-3 /PS0
-4 /PS1
-5 /PS2
-6 /PS3
-7 /SIDE
-8 /CPF0
-9 /CPF1
-10 PGND
7.7
982-1
-2
-3
35-1
35-2
35-3
35-4
35-5
APPENDIX
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/4)
8
9
Symbol
A
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
514: 1 - 2
514: 2 - 1
B
HUM1
Exposure lamp
C
PreSeparation charging
claw
lamp
solenoid
L1
APS timing Scanner home
sensor
position sensor
IT-101
9
D
M2
E
F
CB 1/2
G
H
SD8
Gate
solenoid
I
I
Tray set
sensor/U
PS 9
Tray set
sensor/L
1
Registration
sensor
PS 1
PS 8
PS 7
SD2
2
SD1
PS22
No paper Upper limit 1st paper 1st paper Timming
feed
feed
sensor/L
sensor
sensor
solenoid/L solenoid/U
7235/7228 only
962-1
-2
-3
3
PS20
VR1
PS13
By-pass
By-pass
By-pass
By-pass
paper feed tray paper tray paper no paper
size sensor size VR
sensor
solenoid
FM5
Developing
suction fan
BYPASS TRAY
4
FM4
Internal cooling
fan/1
MC2
Loop clutch
PFDB/U
TSL
5
PS 10
Transfer Upper limit
synchro- sensor/L
nization
lamp
No paper
sensor/U
PS 11
PFDB/L
6
For Finisher
PS21
Timming
sensor/U
907-1
-2
J61 : 9 - 1
J61 : 8 - 2
J61 : 7 - 3
J61 : 6 - 4
J61 : 5 - 5
J61 : 4 - 6
J61 : 3 - 7
J61 : 2 - 8
J61 : 1 - 9
M7
M8
Tray
motor/U
Tray
motor/L
7
Appendix-9
DB_RST
LCT_EXIT
DB_EXIT
DB_TXD
SGND
DB_CTS
DB_RXD
SGND
DB_RTS
8
44-B1
44-B2
44-B3
44-B4
44-B5
44-B6
44-B7
44-B8
44-B9
44-B10
44-B11
44-A1
44-A2
44-A3
44-A4
44-A5
44-A6
44-A7
44-A8
44-A9
44-A10
44-A11
8
DDF VV 28-B11
N.C 28-B10
FIX OK 28-B9
SGND 28-B8
APS TIM 28-B7
PS301 28-B6
EG INT 28-B5
EG RST 28-B4
SGND 28-B3
5V SYS 28-B2
SGND 28-B1
SGND 28-A11
EG RXD 28-A10
EG CTS 28-A9
EG TXD 28-A8
EG RTS 28-A7
SGND 28-A6
EE VV 28-A5
S VV 28-A4
P VV 28-A3
TONYY 28-A2
B VV 28-A1
7
26-A9
26-A8
26-A7
26-A6
26-A5
26-A4
26-A3
26-A2
26-A1
26-B2 24V
26-B1 DRIVE
26-B4 24V
26-B3 DRIVE
24V
24V
B
B
A
A
906-1
-2
PS 4
70-1
70-2
70-3
70-4
70-5
70-6
70-7
70-8
70-9
71-6
71-5
71-4
71-3
71-2
71-1
LAN
41-1 TX+
41-2 TX41-3 RX+
41-4 N.C
41-5 N.C
41-6 RX41-7 N.C
41-8 N.C
41-9 FG
41-10 FG
41-11 VDD1
41-11 LED1
41-11 VDD2
41-11 LED2
15-B3 SGND
15-B2 PS
15-B1 5V
953-1
-2
-3
905: 6 - 1
905: 5 - 2
905: 4 - 3
905: 3 - 4
905: 2 - 5
905: 1 - 6
J40:3 - 1
J40:2 - 2
J40:1 - 3
J30:3 - 1
J30:2 - 2
J30:1 - 3
6
970-3
-2
-1
24V 26-A18
24V 26-A17
M6 CONT 26-A16
M6 F/R 26-A15
M6 CLOCK 26-A14
5V 26-A13
SGND 26-A12
SGND 26-A11
SGND 26-A10
5V 15-A15
PS 15-A14
SGND 15-A13
904-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
5
15-B15 N.C
15-B14 SGND
15-B13 SGND
15-B12 FS CTS
15-B11 SGND
15-B10 N.C
15-B9 FS RXD
15-B8 SGND
15-B7 FS RTS
15-B6 N.C
15-B5 SGND
15-B4 FS TXD
SGND
SIZE.LOW.A
SIZE.LOW.B
SIZE.LOW.C
SIZE.LOW.D
SD5
24-A5
24-A4
24-A3
24-A2
24-A1
926:2 - 1
1-2
ADU gate
solenoid
J03: 5 - 7
J03: 4 - 8
J03: 3 - 9
J03: 2 - 10
J03: 1 - 11
24-A8 5V
24-A7 PS
24-A6 SGND
24V 29-B8
DRIVE 29-B7
M6
91-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J03: 8 - 4
J03: 7 - 5
J03: 6 - 6
ADU motor
960-1
-2
-3
FM7
24-A11 5V
24-A10 PS
24-A9 SGND
CN985B
J03:11 - 1
J03:10 - 2
J03: 9 - 3
Polygon cooling fan
959-1
-2
-3
24-A13 SGND
24-A12 DRIVE
RT3
Ø3
J02: 2 - 6
J02: 1 - 7
CB 2/2
24-A19 N.C
24-A18 SGND
24-A17 SIZE.UP.A
24-A16 SIZE.UP.B
24-A15 SIZE.UP.C
24-A14 SIZE.UP.D
J51:1 - 5
J51:2 - 4
J51:3 - 3
J51:4 - 2
J51:5 - 1
4
933:2 - 1
1-2
J02: 7 - 1
J02: 6 - 2
J02: 5 - 3
J02: 4 - 4
J02: 3 - 5
CN985A
J54:1 - 5
J54:2 - 4
J54:3 - 3
J54:4 - 2
J54:5 - 1
7235 only
90-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
Key counter
KC
(Option)
2
3
5
6
8
10
CLOCK 22-5
LCCK 22-4
DRIVE 22-3
PGND 22-2
24V 22-1
B
24-B2 DRIVE
24-B1 24V
J54:1 - 4
J54:2 - 3
J54:3 - 2
J54:4 - 1
200: 6 - 6
200: 5 - 5
200: 4 - 4
200: 3 - 3
200: 2 - 2
200: 1 - 1
24-B5 PGND
24-B4 EM
24-B3 DRIVE
SGND 39-4
N.C 39-3
EM 39-2
DRIVE 39-1
68-B1
68-B2
68-B3
68-B4
68-B5
68-B6
68-B7
68-B8
68-B9
68-B10
68-B11
68-B12
68-B13
68-B14
68-B15
68-B16
68-B17
68-B18
RT3
Ø3
24-B8 PGND
24-B7 EM
24-B6 DRIVE
24-B11 5V
24-B10 PS
24-B9 SGND
24-B14 SGND
24-B13 VR
24-B12 5V
201:B1 - B18
201:B2 - B17
201:B3 - B16
201:B4 - B15
201:B5 - B14
201:B6 - B13
201:B7 - B12
201:B8 - B11
201:B9 - B10
201:B10- B9
201:B11- B8
201:B12- B7
201:B13- B6
201:B14- B5
201:B15- B4
201:B16- B3
201:B17- B2
201:B18- B1
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
5V
SGND
910: 3 - 1
910: 2 - 2
910: 1 - 3
913: 3 - 1
913: 2 - 2
913: 1 - 3
J04: 6 - 6
J04: 5 - 7
J04: 4 - 8
J08: 3 - 4
J08: 2 - 5
J08: 1 - 6
24-B17 5V
24-B16 PS
24-B15 SGND
SGND 17-B18
M302 CLOCK 17-B17
SGND 17-B16
M302 EM 17-B15
M303 EM 17-B14
M303 F/R 17-B13
SGND 17-B12
M303 CLOCK 17-B11
SGND 17-B10
SD302 DRIVE 17-B9
PS309 17-B8
PS308 17-B7
PS306 17-B6
M303 V1 17-B5
M303 V0 17-B4
M302 V1 17-B3
M302 V0 17-B2
M301 V0 17-B1
DF-320
J04: 3 - 9
J04: 2 - 10
J04: 1 - 11
J04: 9 - 3
J04: 8 - 4
J04: 7 - 5
24-B19 24V
24-B18 DRIVE
25-A14 SGND
25-A13 PS
25-A12 5V
3
921: 2 - 1
921: 1 - 2
98 -3
-2
-1
SD3
J08: 6 - 1
J08: 5 - 2
J08: 4 - 3
J04:11 - 1
J04:10 - 2
J41:3 - 1
J41:2 - 2
J41:1 - 3
68-A1
68-A2
68-A3
68-A4
68-A5
68-A6
68-A7
68-A8
68-A9
68-A10
68-A11
68-A12
68-A13
68-A14
68-A15
68-A16
68-A17
68-A18
2
969-1
-2
-3
924: 2 - 1
924: 1 - 2
971-3
-2
-1
25-A17 N.C
25-A16 24V
25-A15 DRIVE
25-B2 DRIVE
25-B1 24V
25-B5 5V
25-B4 PS
25-B3 SGND
201:A1 - A18
201:A2 - A17
201:A3 - A16
201:A4 - A15
201:A5 - A14
201:A6 - A13
201:A7 - A12
201:A8 - A11
201:A9 - A10
201:A10- A9
201:A11- A8
201:A12- A7
201:A13- A6
201:A14- A5
201:A15- A4
201:A16- A3
201:A17- A2
201:A18- A1
985B-1
985B-2
C
922: 2 - 1
922: 1 - 2
J01: 3 - 7
J01: 2 - 8
J01: 1 - 9
5V 17-A18
FM301 EM 17-A17
FM301 CONT 17-A16
SD303 CONT 17-A15
VR301 17-A14
PS305 17-A13
PS304 17-A12
PS303 17-A11
PS302 17-A10
PS301 17-A9
SD301 DRIVE 17-A8
SGND 17-A7
M301 RTN 17-A6
M301 RST 17-A5
M301 EM 17-A4
M301 F/R 17-A3
SGND 17-A2
M301 CLOCK 17-A1
for KC
25-B8 5V
25-B7 PS
25-B6 SGND
25-B11 5V
25-B10 PS
25-B9 SGND
E
J01: 6 - 4
J01: 5 - 5
J01: 4 - 6
J01:9 - 1
J01:8 - 2
J01:7 - 3
25-B14 5V
25-B13 PS
25-B12 SGND
-4
-2
-1
985A-3
1
923: 2 - 1
923: 1 - 2
956-1
-2
-3
PS 12
957-1
-2
-3
J33:3 - 1
J33:2 - 2
J33:1 - 3
H
950-1
-2
-3
J32:3 - 1
J32:2 - 2
J32:1 - 3
G
24V 35- 1
SIG 35- 2
SGND 35- 3
DRIVE 35- 4
N.C 35- 5
F
25-B17 5V
25-B16 PS
25-B15 SGND
D
961-1
-2
-3
J31:3 - 1
J31:2 - 2
J31:1 - 3
7.8
for DCPS
958-1
-2
-3
APPENDIX
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/4)
Polygon motor
9
A
M5
A
SCB 3/3
B
ADU is standard equipment for 7235/7228/7222
(JAPAN ONLY)
AD-307
C
ADUDB
ADU sensor
D
E
for DB UNIT
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
7235/7228 only
9
F
G
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
H
I
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
COPY VENDER
COPY VENDER
Appendix-3 1-I
M1
Main motor
Appendix-3 2-H
PS24
IT exit sensor /L
Appendix-3 9-H
AD-307
AD-307
Appendix-4 5-C
M2
Scanner motor
Appendix-3 8-D
PS25
IT door sensor
Appendix-3 8-H
DB-211
DB-211
Appendix-1 2-G
M4
Toner supply motor /1
Appendix-3 5-H
TH1
Fixing temperature sensor /1
Appendix-3 5-D
DB-411
DB-411
Appendix-1 2-G
M5
Polygon motor
Appendix-4 4-A
TH2
Fixing temperature sensor /2
Appendix-3 5-D
DF-320
DF-320
Appendix-4 1-B
M6
ADU motor
Appendix-4 5-D
HUM1
Humidity sensor
Appendix-3 5-C
DIMM
DIMM
Appendix-2 3-D
M7
Tray motor /U
Appendix-4 7-I
TDS
Toner density sensor
Appendix-3 6-D
FK-103/FL-103
FK-103/FL-103
Appendix-2 4-A
M8
Tray motor /L
Appendix-4 8-I
TLD
Toner level sensor
Appendix-3 5-H
FS-113
FS-113
Appendix-3 5-A
M9
Paper feed motor
Appendix-3 3-H
TS
Thermostat
Appendix-1 7-A
FS-114
FS-114
Appendix-3 5-A
M10
Toner supply motor /2
Appendix-3 6-H
SW1
Main power switch
Appendix-1 4-C
HD-103 Type A
HD-103
Appendix-2 1-D
M11
Fixing motor
Appendix-4 7-I
SW2
Sub power switch
Appendix-3 7-A
IP-424
IP-424
Appendix-2 8-D
FM1
DCPS cooling fan
Appendix-1 4-F
SW3
Interlock switch
Appendix-1 5-E
IT-101
IT-101
Appendix-3 8-G
FM2
Fixing cooling fan
Appendix-3 7-H
VR1
By-pass tray paper size VR
Appendix-4 3-I
KC
Key counter
Appendix-4 1-D
FM3
Internal dehumidifying fan /1
Appendix-3 7-H
PTC
PTC heater
Appendix-1 6-E
BATTERY
Battery
Appendix-2 1-E
LT-203
LT-203
Appendix-3 2-A
FM4
Internal cooling fan /1
Appendix-4 4-I
TC
Total counter
Appendix-3 5-H
FM5
Developing suction fan
Appendix-4 4-I
ADB
A/D conversion board
Appendix-2 1-A
FM6
Internal dehumidifying fan /2
Appendix-3 7-H
ADUDB
ADU drive board
Appendix-4 6-C
FM7
Polygon cooling fan
Appendix-4 4-D
CB
Main control board
Appendix-3 1-F
MC1
Registration clutch
Appendix-3 6-H
FCB
Fixing control board
Appendix-1 5-B
MC2
Loop clutch
Appendix-4 4-I
INDEX
Index sensor board
Appendix-2 2-H
SD1
1st paper feed solenoid /U
Appendix-4 2-I
L1INVB
Exposure lamp power supply board
Appendix-3 8-D
SD2
1st paper feed solenoid /L
Appendix-4 2-I
LCDB
Display board
Appendix-1 5-G
SD3
By-pass paper feed solenoid
Appendix-4 3-I
LDB
LD drive board
Appendix-2 1-H
SD4
Cleaning web solenoid
Appendix-3 6-H
OB
Operation board
Appendix-1 6-F
SD5
ADU gate solenoid
Appendix-4 5-D
PAKB
Panel key board
Appendix-1 4-F
SD7
Separation claw solenoid
Appendix-3 7-D
PFDB/L
Paper feed detection board /L
Appendix-4 6-H
SD8
Gate solenoid
Appendix-3 9-H
PFDB/U
Paper feed detection board /U
Appendix-4 5-H
SD9
Toner solenoid
Appendix-3 8-H
PRMB
Parameter memory board
Appendix-2 4-D
PS1
Registration sensor
Appendix-4 1-I
PSW2B
Power SW2 board
Appendix-3 7-A
PS2
Fixing exit sensor
Appendix-3 6-D
SCB
System control board
Appendix-1 8-E
PS4
ADU sensor
Appendix-4 6-D
TCSB
Toner control sensor board
Appendix-3 6-D
PS5
Toner bottle sensor
Appendix-3 5-H
DCPS
DC power supply unit
Appendix-1 1-A
PS7
Upper limit sensor /U
Appendix-4 2-I
HV
High voltage unit
Appendix-3 3-D
PS8
No paper sensor /L
Appendix-4 2-I
INV1
Exposure lamp inverter
Appendix-3 8-E
PS9
Tray set sensor /U
Appendix-4 1-I
INV2
Display inverter
Appendix-1 4-I
PS10
Upper limit sensor /L
Appendix-4 5-I
CBR1
Circuit breaker /1
Appendix-1 2-A
PS11
No paper sensor /U
Appendix-4 5-I
CBR2
Circuit breaker /2
Appendix-1 2-B
PS12
Tray set sensor /L
Appendix-4 1-I
NF
Noise filter
Appendix-1 3-A
PS13
By-pass no paper sensor
Appendix-4 3-I
L1
Exposure lamp
Appendix-3 8-C
PS14
Scanner home position sensor
Appendix-3 9-D
L2
Fixing heater lamp /1
Appendix-1 7-B
PS15
APS timing sensor
Appendix-3 9-D
L3
Fixing heater lamp /2
Appendix-1 7-B
PS17
APS sensor
Appendix-3 8-D
PCL
Pre-charging lamp
Appendix-3 7-D
PS20
By-pass tray paper size sensor
Appendix-4 3-I
TSL
Transfer synchronization lamp
Appendix-4 5-I
PS21
Timing sensor /U
Appendix-4 7-I
LCD
LCD
Appendix-1 5-G
PS22
Timing sensor /L
Appendix-4 2-I
BL
Back light
Appendix-1 4-H
PS23
IT exit sensor /U
Appendix-3 8-H
Appendix-10
APPENDIX
7.9
FS-114 Overall Wiring Diagram
1
2
3
A
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
SK-114
B
C
C
Punch Unit Setting 1st Detection
GND
Punch Unit Setting 2nd Detection
GND
Punch Unit Setting 3rd Detection
GND
B
D
SK-114
SK-114
D
Staple Needle Empty Detect Sensor
Staple Selfpriming Detect Sensor
Staple Home Detect Sensor
Chopper Unit Setting Detection
GND
E
E
PK-114
F
F
G
G
Symbol
H
H
Connector Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Appendix-11
9
I
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
PK-114
PK-114
1-E
SK-114
SK-114
1-A, 1-D
CL1-FN
Registration clutch
7-B
M1-FN
Exit motor
7-E
M2-FN
Transport motor
7-C
M3-FN
Entrance motor
7-C
M4-FN
Allignment motor 1
7-G
M5-FN
Allignment motor 2
7-F
M6-FN
Exit open/close motor
7-B
M7-FN
Stapling unit moving motor
7-E
M11-FN
Elevator motor
7-G
M12-FN
Shutter opening motor
7-G
PC3-FN
Elevator tray home position sensor
7-I
PC4-FN
Entrance sensor
7-B
PC5-FN
Transport sensor
7-A
PC6-FN
Alignment home position sensor 1
7-F
PC7-FN
Alignment home position sensor 2
7-F
PC8-FN
Storage tray detecting sensor
7-E
PC10-FN
Staple home position sensor
7-D
PC11-FN
Exit paddle home position sensor
7-D
PC12-FN
Exit roller home position sensor
7-A
PC14-FN
Elevator tray lower limit sensor
7-H
PC15-FN
Top face detection sensor
7-I
PC16-FN
Shutter home position sensor
7-H
S1-FN
Front cover open/close detection SW
2-C
S2-FN
Shutter detection SW
7-H
S3-FN
Elevate tray upper/lower limit SW
7-G
S4-FN
Transport jam detection SW
7-A
SL1-FN
Storage paddle solenoid
7-B
SL2-FN
Exit paddle solenoid
7-C
M1-PK
Punch motor
2-G
PC1-PK
Punch trash full sensor
2-E
PC2-PK
Punch motor pulse sensor
2-F
PC3-PK
Punch positioning sensor 1
2-F
PC4-PK
Punch positioning sensor 2
2-F
PWB-A FN
Main control board
3-B
PWB-B FN
Elevator board
5-H
Appendix-12
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : Yes Modify Date : 2004:04:26 11:12:35-03:00 Create Date : 2004:03:25 09:54:18-05:00 Title : safety.fm Author : c426pms Creator : ADOBEPS4.DRV Version 4.50 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows) Page Count : 448 Mod Date : 2004:04:26 11:12:35-03:00 Creation Date : 2004:03:25 09:54:18-05:00 Metadata Date : 2004:04:26 11:12:35-03:00 Has XFA : No Page Mode : UseOutlinesEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools